867GB

1 Getting Started
Vision Sensor
Installation and
2
IV2 Series Connection

3 Basic Operation

4
User’s Manual
Settings Navigator

(Control Panel) 5 Running

Read this manual before use.

After you read this manual, 6 Adjusting
keep it in a safe place for future reference.

7 Various Functions

8 External Media

Connecting
9 to the Network

Controlling with
10 Input/Output Line

11 Specifications

Status Table,
A Troubleshooting
Introduction
Read this manual before using the product in order to achieve maximum performance.
Keep this manual in a safe place after reading it so that it can be used at any time.

Symbols
The following symbols alert you to important messages.
Be sure to read these messages carefully.

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in product damage as well as property damage.

Indicates cautions and limitations that must be followed during operation.

Indicates additional information on proper operation.

Indicates tips for better understanding or useful information.

Indicates the reference pages in this manual or the reference pages in separate manuals.

Cautions
(1) Unauthorized reproduction of this manual in whole or part is prohibited.
(2) The contents of this manual may be changed for improvements without prior notice.
(3) An utmost effort has been made to ensure the contents of this manual are as complete as possible. If there are any
mistakes or questions, please contact a KEYENCE office listed in the back of the manual.
(4) Regardless of item (3), KEYENCE will not be liable for any effect resulting from the use of this unit.
(5) Any manuals with missing pages or other paging faults will be replaced.

The company names and product names used in this manual are registered trademarks or the trademarks of their
respective companies.
“SD memory card” is a trademark of SD Association.
Ethernet/IP is a trademark of ODVA, inc.
 Safety Information for IV2 Series

Safety Information for IV2 Series

General Precautions

yyThis product is only intended to detect object(s). Do not use this product for the purpose to protect a
human body or a part of human body.
yyThis product is not intended for use as explosion-proof product. Do not use this product in a hazardous
location and/or potentially explosive atmosphere.
yyDo not use this product in an application which requires functional safety. It should not be used in
situations where death or serious property damage is possible, such as nuclear power plants, on aircraft,
trains, ships, or vehicles, used within medical equipment, playground equipment, roller coasters and other
rides, etc.

yyIf the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the
equipment may be impaired.
yyYou must perform a sufficient risk assessment for the machine where this product is to be installed prior
to installing this product. Provide appropriate protective fail-safe measures on the machine independent
from this product in case a failure with this product should occur.

You must verify that the IV2 Series are operating correctly in terms of functionality and performance before
the start and the operation of the IV2 Series.

yyKEYENCE never warrants the function or performance of the IV2 Series if it is used in manner that differs
from the IV2 Series specifications contained in this instruction manual or if the IV2 Series are modified by
yourself.
yyWhen the IV2 Series is used in combination with other instruments, functions and performance may be
degraded, depending on operating conditions and the surrounding environment.
yyDo not place the instruments, including peripherals, under the rapid temperature change. It may cause
condensation and may damage instruments or peripherals.
yyRemove the power cable from the power supply if you do not use this product for a long time.

867GB 1
Important Instructions

Important Instructions

Observe the following precautions to prevent malfunction of the IV2 series and to ensure that it is
used properly.

Precautions on use

yyThe power of this product and instruments connected to this product must be turned off when the cable is
to be installed or removed. Failure to do so may cause an electric shock or product damage.
yyUse this product with the correct supply voltage. Failure to do so may cause product damage.

yyFor instructions
yyDo not turn OFF the power while setting the items or saving the settings. Otherwise, all or part of the
setting data may be lost.
yyDo not let water, dust or oil stick to the camera/light of the sensor head. Failure to do so may cause a
malfunction.
yyThe enclosure rating of the control panel (IV2-CP50) is IP40. This product is not designed to be waterproof,
so use care when operating around water.
yyWhen this product becomes dirty, do not rub it with a wet cloth, benzene, thinner, or alcohol. Doing so
may change the color or shape of the unit.
yyIf the unit is heavily contaminated, disconnect all the cables including the power supply cable, wipe off
the dirt with a cloth soaked with mild detergent, and then wipe with a soft dry cloth.
yyFor the LCD panel
yyDo not press the touch panel with the tip of your nail or anything that has a sharp tip such as a pen or a
screwdriver. Doing so may cause damage.
yyDo not apply shock to the touch panel or press it with excessive force. Doing so may cause damage.
yyThe LCD panel may have some dots that are always lit (bright dots) or ones that are always unlit (black
dots). This phenomenon is not a problem.
yyDue to the unique characteristics of the LCD, displaying the same image for a long time may cause an
afterimage.
yyFor USB memory
yyUse the KEYENCE recommended product.
yyA USB memory device with a security function cannot be used.
yyUnplug the USB memory when turning on or off the power of the IV2 Series.
yyDo not remove the USB memory while the USB is being written on. Otherwise, all or part of the setting
data may be lost or there may be damage to the memory.
yyFor external master image registration
If the external master image registration is to be performed frequently, set [Write ROM when using “Ext.
Master Save”?] of the input option to [No] to protect the nonvolatile memory of the internal sensor. When
the option is set to [Yes], the nonvolatile memory is guaranteed to write for 100,000 times.
yyFor automatic focus function
yyAutomatic focus function is used for adjusting the focusing position at the time of installation. Disabled
during the operation.
yyFocusing position can be registered in each program. The program configurations are guaranteed to
switch for 100,000 times. If the focusing position does not need to change for each program, set [Auto
Focus Adj Pos] to [Common] to extend the life-span.
yyDo not apply shock or vibration to the sensor head during the focusing position adjustment. Failure to
do so may cause product damage.
yyAbout SD Card
yyUse the KEYENCE recommended product.
yyClose the cover of the SD card slot while in use.
yyWhen removing the SD card, be sure to perform [SD card removal] before removing.
yyDo not remove the SD card while accessing the SD card. Also, do not turn off the power while accessing
the SD card. Otherwise, all or part of the setting data may be lost or there may be damage to the memory.
yyTo prevent data loss, periodically backing up to another storage device is recommended.

2 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Important Instructions

Measures to be taken when an abnormality occurs

In the following cases, turn the power OFF immediately. Using the IV2 Series in an abnormal condition could
cause fire, electric shock, or malfunction.
Contact our office for repair.
yyIf water or debris enters the IV2 Series.
yyIf the IV2 Series is dropped or the case is damaged.
yyIf abnormal smoke or odor emanates from the IV2 Series.

Precautions on installation

To use this product correctly and safely, avoid installing it in the following locations. Failure to do so may
cause fire, electric shock, or malfunction.
yyOutdoors
yyAltitude above 2000 m
yyLocations that are humid, dusty or poorly ventilated
yyLocations where the temperature is high such as those exposed to direct sunlight
yyLocations where there are flammable or corrosive gases
yyLocations where the unit may be directly subjected to vibration or impact
yyLocations where water, oil, or chemicals may splash onto the unit

yyTo improve the anti-noise feature, install the unit following the precautions below. Otherwise, a
malfunction may occur.
yyGround the FG cable of the sensor amplifier.
yyDo not mount the unit in a cabinet where high-voltage equipment is already installed.
yyMount the unit as far from power lines as possible.
yySeparate the unit as far as possible from the devices that emit strong electric or magnetic field (such as
solenoid or chopper).
yySeparate the I/O signal line from the power line or high-voltage line.
yyFor power supply
yyNoise superimposed on the power supply could cause malfunction. Use a stabilized DC power supply
configured with an isolation transformer.
yyWhen using a commercially available switching regulator, be sure to ground the frame ground terminal.
yyDevices including this unit are precision components. Do not apply shock or vibration.
yyWhen connecting to a network, let engineers who are knowledgeable about networks handle it.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 3

Safety Precautions on LED Product

Safety Precautions on LED Product

The degree of risk of this product is shown below.

Model Amplifier type Risk Group*

IV2-G150MA

IV2-G500MA
White LED Risk Group 1
IV2-G500CA

IV2-G300CA

IV2-G600MA Infrared LED Exempt Group

* LED product is classified as shown below according to IEC 62471.

yyExempt Group Does not pose any photobiological hazard.
yyRisk Group 1 (Low-Risk) Does not pose a hazard due to normal behavioral limitations on exposure.
Does not pose a hazard due to the aversion response to very bright light sources or
yyRisk Group 2 (Moderate-Risk)
due to thermal discomfort.
yyRisk Group 3 (High-Risk) May pose a hazard even for momentary or brief exposure.

4 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Precautions on Regulations and Standards

Precautions on Regulations and Standards

CE Marking
Keyence Corporation has confirmed that this product complies with the essential requirements of the applicable EU
Directive, based on the following specifications. Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product in
the Member State of European Union.
zz
EMC Directive
yyApplicable Standard EN61326-1, Class A
yyMake sure the length of the power cable, I/O cable and Ethernet cable are less than 30 meters long.
These specifications do not give any guarantee that the end-product with this product incorporated complies with the
essential requirements of EMC Directive. The manufacturer of the end-product is solely responsible for the compliance
on the end-product itself according to EMC Directive.

CSA Certificate
This product complies with the following CSA and UL standards and has been certified by CSA.
yyApplicable Standard CAN/CSA C22.2 No.61010-1
UL61010-1
Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product as a product certified by CSA.
yyUse the following power supply.
CSA/UL certified power supply that provides Class 2 output as defined in the CEC (Canadian Electrical Code) and
NEC (National Electrical Code)
yyConnect the sensor amplifier power supply and I/O connector to the same power supply that has Class 2 output.
yyOvervoltage category I
yyUse under pollution level 3.
yyUse this product at the altitude of 2000 m or lower.
yyIndoor use only.

KC mark (Republic of Korea)

Class A device, Equipment name : Vision Sensor, Control Panel
This product is an industrial electromagnetic wave generating device (Class A) and is intended for use in all establishments
other than domestic.
A 급 기기 (업무용 방송통신기자재), 기자재 명칭: Vision Sensor, Control Panel
이 기기는 업무용(A 급) 전자파적합기기로서 판매자또는 사용자는 이 점을 주의하시기 바라며,
가정외의지역에서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 합니다.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 5

Version of the IV2 series

Version of the IV2 series

You can download the most recent operation software for the sensor (IV2-G150MA, IV2-G500MA, IV2-G500CA, IV2-
G300CA, IV2-G600MA) and control panel (IV2‑CP50) from the KEYENCE web site.
Please refer to the description on the homepage for the introduction method.
URL : http://www.keyence.com/

Operation Software for the Sensor

Version Description
R1.30.** This is the version of this document.

Operation Software for the Control Panel

Version Description
R1.30.** This is the version of this document.

Revision history of Software Version

Version Description
R1.00.** The initial version.
yyThe following functions are added.
yyColor/Brightness Average tool, Color/Brightness Prohibition Tool
yyBrightness correction
yyPROFINET, TCP/IP non-procedural communications, Communication Unit (DL Series)
yyWeb Monitor
R1.10.** yyAdd a supported languages (German / Chinese (Simplified) / Korean).
yyChange the setting range of Trigger Delay from 1000 ms to 10000 ms.
yyChange the maximum number of characters for the [Folder] in [Data transfer (FTP)] from 16 to 128.
yyChange the maximum number of characters for the [File Name] in [Data transfer (FTP)] from 16 to 128
yyAdd the following functions to the Simulator of IV2-Navigator;
Read the extended programs, add a image file, delete a image, additional Learning
yyAdd supported languages (Italian / French / Spanish / Portuguese / Czech / Hungarian / Polish / Chinese
R1.20.**
(Traditional))
yyAdd a supported language (Thai)
R1.30.**
yyInitialize the IP address of the sensor amplifier and add a function for assigning a fixed IP address.

6 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Structure of This Manual

Structure of This Manual

1 Getting Started
This chapter explains the system configuration and overview of IV2 series,
package contents, and names and functions of each part. 1
2 Installation and
Connection
This chapter explains how to mount the sensor and control panel, and explains
connection procedures.
2
3 Basic Operation This chapter explains the basic operation and operation flow of the IV2 series.
3
4
4 Settings Navigator This chapter explains how to set the sensors using the Settings Navigator.

5
5 Running This chapter explains how to operate the IV2 series.

6
6 Adjusting This chapter explains how to adjust the IV2 series.
7
7 Various Functions This chapter explains the detailed features of the IV2 Series.
8
8 External Media
This chapter explains how to set and use the external medias (USB memory and
SD card). 9
9 Connecting to the
Network
This chapter explains how to connect and use the network. 10
10 Controlling with Input/
Output Line
This chapter explains how the input and output terminals control each
operation.
11
A
11 Specifications This chapter explains specifications and dimensions.

A Appendices This chapter explains error messages and troubleshooting, etc.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 7

Contents

Contents

Introduction........................................................................H2 Sensor Amplifier.......................................................... 1-13

Symbols.........................................................................H2 Name and function of each part of the sensor
Cautions.........................................................................H2 amplifier............................................................... 1-13
Safety Information for IV2 Series........................................ 1 Operation of the sensor amplifier
General Precautions........................................................ 1 indicator light....................................................... 1-14
Important Instructions.......................................................... 2 Control panel............................................................... 1-15
Precautions on use.......................................................... 2
Measures to be taken when an abnormality occurs......... 3 2 Installation and Connection
Precautions on installation............................................... 3
Mounting the Sensor........................................................ 2-2
Safety Precautions on LED Product.................................... 4
About Sensor................................................................ 2-2
Precautions on Regulations and Standards........................ 5
Mounting the sensor head......................................... 2-2
CE Marking...................................................................... 5
Checking the Field of View and installed distance.... 2-2
CSA Certificate................................................................ 5
Mounting the sensor head............................................ 2-3
KC mark (Republic of Korea)........................................... 5
Mounting the sensor head......................................... 2-3
Version of the IV2 series..................................................... 6
When screws are secured
Operation Software for the Sensor.................................. 6
from the sensor head............................................ 2-3
Operation Software for the Control Panel........................ 6
When screws are secured from the wall............... 2-3
Revision history of Software Version............................... 6
Attaching the optional mounting bracket................... 2-3
Structure of This Manual..................................................... 7
When using the vertical mounting bracket for
Contents.............................................................................. 8
IV2 series (OP-87908).......................................... 2-3
When using the transverse mounting bracket
1 Getting Started for IV2 series (OP-87909)..................................... 2-3
System Configuration....................................................... 1-2 When using the adjustable bracket for IV2
Basic Configurations of IV2 Series............................... 1-2 series (OP-87910)................................................. 2-3
Connecting the Control Panel with Multiple Sensors.1-3 Mounting the Sensor Amplifier...................................... 2-4
Configuration of IV2 series network function................ 1-4 Mounting the attachment.............................................. 2-4
IV2 Series Overview......................................................... 1-5 Using the Dome Attachment (IV2‑GD05/
IV2 Series..................................................................... 1-5 IV2‑GD10) for IV2 series........................................... 2-4
Using the control panel.............................................. 1-5 Mounting the dome attachment for IV2 series...... 2-4
Using the PC software “IV2-Navigator”..................... 1-6 Mounting examples............................................... 2-5
Judgment processing flow............................................ 1-7 Dismounting the dome attachment for the IV2
Checking the Package Contents...................................... 1-8 series..................................................................... 2-6
Sensor Head................................................................. 1-8 Using the polarizing filter attachment (OP‑87899/
Sensor Amplifier............................................................ 1-8 OP-87900/OP-87901) or
Optional parts for the sensor......................................... 1-9 spread lens attachment (OP-87902)......................... 2-6
Dome attachment for IV2 series................................ 1-9 Mounting the polarizing filter attachment for
Polarizing filter attachment........................................ 1-9 the IV2 series (OP-87899),
Spread lens attachment............................................. 1-9 polarizing filter attachment for IV2-G300CA
Sensor head/amplifier cable for IV2 series................ 1-9 (OP-87900),
I/O cable for IV2 series.............................................. 1-9 or polarizing filter attachment for IV2-G600MA
Vertical mounting bracket for IV2 series.................... 1-9 (OP-87901).............................................................2-6
Transverse mounting bracket for IV2 series.............. 1-9 Mounting the spread lens attachment
Adjustable bracket for IV2 series............................... 1-9 for IV2-G150MA (OP-87902)................................ 2-7
SD Card..................................................................... 1-9 Mounting the control panel............................................... 2-8
Control panel for IV2 series........................................ 1-10 Mounting to a wall......................................................... 2-8
Option of control panel for IV2 series.......................... 1-10 Hanging on a hook.................................................... 2-8
Panel/monitor power cable (M8 4pin - strand wire).1-10 Mounting with the wall mounting adapter.................. 2-8
Protection sheet....................................................... 1-10 Unmounting from the wall mounting adapter............. 2-9
Stylus....................................................................... 1-10 Mounting on the Panel Surface of the Control Board... 2-9
Wall mounting adapter............................................. 1-10 Panel hole dimension.............................................. 2-10
Control board mounting adapter.............................. 1-10 Cables............................................................................ 2-11
USB memory (1GB)................................................. 1-10 Sensor wiring.............................................................. 2-11
Communication cables................................................ 1-11 Connecting the sensor head/amplifier cable for
Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45).......................... 1-11 the IV2 series and sensor head............................... 2-11
L type Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45)................ 1-11 Connecting the sensor head/amplifier cable for
LAN cable (RJ-45 - RJ-45)...................................... 1-11 the IV2 series and sensor amplifier......................... 2-11
Name and Function of Each Part................................... 1-12 Connecting the cable to the sensor amplifier.......... 2-12
Sensor Head............................................................... 1-12 Connecting the Ethernet cable or LAN cable...... 2-12
Name and function of each part of the sensor Connecting the I/O Cable for IV2 Series............. 2-12
head.................................................................... 1-12 Supplying power to the sensor amplifier............. 2-14
Operation of the sensor head indicator light....... 1-12 Connection diagram............................................ 2-14

8 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Contents

Specification of Sensor I/O Circuit and Current ......... 2-15 Settings Navigator screen and operation flow.............. 4-6
Input circuit.............................................................. 2-15 Finishing the Settings Navigator................................... 4-7
No-voltage input (When NPN output is Finishing by completing all steps............................... 4-7
selected).............................................................. 2-15 Finishing without completing the step........................ 4-7
Voltage input (When PNP output is selected)..... 2-15 1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target).............. 4-8
Output circuit........................................................... 2-15 Setting the Image Optimization..................................... 4-8
When NPN output is selected............................. 2-15 Main screen for Image Optimization............................. 4-8
When PNP output is selected............................. 2-15 Setting the Trigger Options........................................... 4-9
Connecting the power cable of the control panel........ 2-16 Settings for the Trigger Options................................. 4-9
Connecting the Sensor with the Control Panel........... 2-17 Setting the Trigger Options...................................... 4-11
Connecting directly (1 unit)...................................... 2-17 Auto Brightness Adjustment........................................ 4-12
Connecting via Network (Direct Connection Focus Adjustment....................................................... 4-12
(2 units or more)/Network Connection).................... 2-18 Advanced Settings for Image Optimization................. 4-14
Advanced Settings for Image Optimization............. 4-14
3 Basic Operation Advanced Brightness Adjustment............................ 4-15
Imaging Area (Standard Mode Only)....................... 4-15
Overview of Screen and Operation.................................. 3-2
Digital Zoom............................................................ 4-16
Basic Operation Flow....................................................... 3-4
Lighting.................................................................... 4-17
Operation when the Power is Turned on.......................... 3-5
Color Filters (color type only)................................... 4-17
Operation flow when the power is turned on................. 3-5
2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as a
Operation for Initial Startup of the Control Panel
Reference)...................................................................... 4-18
(Direct Connection (1 unit))........................................... 3-6
Main screen for Master Registration........................... 4-18
Operation for Initial Startup of the Control Panel
Register Live Image as Master................................... 4-18
(Direct Connection (2 units or more))............................ 3-7
Register From a Running Image History..................... 4-19
Operation for Initial Startup of the Control Panel
Register From a File Image........................................ 4-20
(Network Connection)................................................... 3-8
Advanced Settings for Master Registration................. 4-22
Setting the network address of the control panel...... 3-8
Advanced Settings for Master Registration............. 4-22
Searching for a sensor to be connected.................. 3-10
Brightness correction............................................... 4-22
Specifying sensor to be connected by IP address... 3-12
3. Learning Settings (Setting the Judgment Method
Operation for initial startup of the sensor.................... 3-12
of the Target in Learning Mode)..................................... 4-24
Operation when changing the sensor......................... 3-13
Flow of Learning Settings Operation........................... 4-24
Switching and Terminating the Sensor to be
Main Screen for the Learning Settings........................ 4-25
Connected...................................................................... 3-14
Detection Window Settings......................................... 4-26
Switching the Sensor to be Connected....................... 3-14
Setting items for the detection window settings....... 4-26
Connection and Disconnection with the Sensor......... 3-15
Detection window settings screen........................... 4-28
Disconnecting in the [Sensor Connection
Procedure for Detection Window Settings............... 4-28
Settings] screen....................................................... 3-15
Mask.................................................................... 4-29
Disconnecting from the [Menu] button..................... 3-15
Edit Window Name.............................................. 4-30
Setting to the Factory Default......................................... 3-16
Procedure to Add the Position
Initializing the sensor.................................................. 3-16
Adjustment Window................................................. 4-31
Initialization of the Control Panel................................ 3-17
Search Range Settings....................................... 4-32
Basic operation of the control panel............................... 3-18
Settings for disabling outlines............................. 4-33
Operation of the Image Tool Bar................................. 3-18
Setting the sensitivity.......................................... 4-33
Operation when Displaying Enlarged Images......... 3-18
Advanced settings of the position adjustment
Operation with Full Screen Display of Image.......... 3-18
window..................................................................... 4-34
Editing the Window..................................................... 3-19
Rotation Range................................................... 4-34
Editing Numbers......................................................... 3-20
Search Algorithm................................................. 4-34
Setting by the slider................................................. 3-20
Learning OK/NG Targets............................................ 4-35
Setting by the [-] / [+] button.................................... 3-20
Setting items for Learning OK/NG Targets.............. 4-35
Setting by inputting a value..................................... 3-20
Learning OK/NG Targets......................................... 4-36
Inputting characters.................................................... 3-21
Procedure for OK/NG target learning...................... 4-37
Selecting the File/Folder in the USB Memory............. 3-22
Registration of Taken Image............................... 4-38
Registration of Image from the Image History..... 4-39
4 Settings Navigator Registration of Image Saved in a File................. 4-39
Settings Navigator............................................................ 4-2 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method
Flow of the Settings Navigator: Learning Mode of the Target of Standard Mode).................................... 4-41
(IV2-G30F only)............................................................ 4-2 Types of tools.............................................................. 4-41
Flow of the Settings Navigator: Standard Mode........... 4-3 Basic Tools.......................................................... 4-41
Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator....................... 4-4 Advanced Tools.................................................. 4-44
Starting the Settings Navigator..................................... 4-4 Main screen for the Tool Settings............................... 4-48
Image Types of the Settings Navigator......................... 4-5 Adding/Editing/Copying/Deleting a Tool..................... 4-48

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 9

Contents

Adding a tool............................................................ 4-48 Advanced settings for the width tool........................ 4-94
Editing a tool............................................................ 4-49 Edge Sensitivity Manual Adjustment................... 4-95
Copying a Tool........................................................ 4-49 Width Extraction Method..................................... 4-96
Deleting a tool.......................................................... 4-50 Scaling................................................................ 4-96
Outline tool.................................................................. 4-51 Tool Name........................................................... 4-97
Setting items for the Outline tool............................. 4-51 Diameter tool............................................................... 4-98
Setting the Outline tool............................................ 4-52 Setting items for the Diameter tool.......................... 4-98
Search Range Settings....................................... 4-53 Setting the Diameter tool......................................... 4-99
Settings for disabling outlines............................. 4-53 Mask.................................................................. 4-100
Setting the sensitivity.......................................... 4-54 Diameter Extraction........................................... 4-100
Advanced Settings for the Outline Tool................... 4-55 Upper Limit Settings.......................................... 4-101
Rotation Range................................................... 4-56 Advanced settings for the Diameter tool................ 4-102
Search Algorithm................................................. 4-56 Advanced Diameter Extraction.......................... 4-103
Tool Name........................................................... 4-57 Scaling.............................................................. 4-104
EdgePixels tool........................................................... 4-58 Tool Name......................................................... 4-105
Setting items for the EdgePixels tool....................... 4-58 Edge tool................................................................... 4-106
Setting the EdgePixels tool...................................... 4-59 Setting items for Edge tool.................................... 4-106
Mask.................................................................... 4-60 Setting the Edge tool............................................. 4-107
Edge Sensitivity Adjustment................................ 4-61 Mask.................................................................. 4-108
Upper Limit Settings............................................ 4-61 Edge Sensitivity Auto Adjustment..................... 4-109
Advanced settings for the EdgePixels tool.............. 4-62 Upper Limit Settings.......................................... 4-110
Fixed Reference Area......................................... 4-62 Advanced settings of the Edge tool....................... 4-111
Tool Name........................................................... 4-62 Edge Sensitivity Manual Adjustment................. 4-112
Color Area/Area tool................................................... 4-63 Edge Detection.................................................. 4-113
Setting items for the Color Area/Area tool............... 4-63 Tool Name......................................................... 4-113
Setting the Color Area/Area tool.............................. 4-65 Pitch tool................................................................... 4-114
Mask.................................................................... 4-67 Setting items for the Pitch tool............................... 4-114
Adjusting in the LIVE Screen Setting the Pitch tool.............................................. 4-115
(Color Area Tool Only)........................................ 4-68 Mask.................................................................. 4-116
Upper Limit Settings............................................ 4-70 Edge Sensitivity Auto Adjustment..................... 4-117
Advanced Settings of the Color Area/Area Tool...... 4-71 Upper Limit Settings.......................................... 4-117
Advanced Color Extraction/Advanced Advanced settings of the Pitch tool....................... 4-118
Brightness Extraction.......................................... 4-72 Edge Sensitivity Manual Adjustment................. 4-119
Fixed Reference Area......................................... 4-73 Pitch Extraction Method.................................... 4-120
Tool Name........................................................... 4-73 Scaling.............................................................. 4-121
Color/Brightness Average Tool................................... 4-74 Tool Name......................................................... 4-122
Setting Items for the Color/Brightness Average Hi-Sp.Adj tool............................................................ 4-123
tool........................................................................... 4-74 Setting items for the Hi-Sp.Adj tool........................ 4-123
Setting the Color/Brightness Average Tool............. 4-75 1-Ax. Adj............................................................ 4-123
Mask.................................................................... 4-76 2-Ax. Adj............................................................ 4-124
Advanced settings of the Color/Brightness Setting the Hi-Sp.Adj tool...................................... 4-125
Average tool............................................................ 4-78 1-Ax. Adj............................................................ 4-125
Color Range/Brightness Range.......................... 4-79 2-Ax. Adj............................................................ 4-126
Specify Master Color/Master Brightness............. 4-83 Edge Sensitivity Auto Adjustment..................... 4-127
Tool Name........................................................... 4-83 Advanced settings for the Hi-Sp.Adj tool............... 4-128
Position Adjustment tool............................................. 4-84 Edge Sensitivity Manual Adjustment................. 4-128
Setting items for the Position Adjustment tool......... 4-84 Edge Detection.................................................. 4-129
Setting of the Position Adjustment Tool................... 4-85 OCR Tool.................................................................. 4-130
Search Range Settings....................................... 4-86 Setting items for the OCR tool............................... 4-130
Settings for disabling outlines............................. 4-86 Setting the OCR tool.............................................. 4-132
Setting the sensitivity.......................................... 4-87 Mask.................................................................. 4-133
Advanced Settings for the Position Adjustment Reading Settings............................................... 4-134
Tool.......................................................................... 4-88 Setting the status conditions............................. 4-135
Rotation Range................................................... 4-88 Advanced settings for the OCR tool...................... 4-138
Search Algorithm................................................. 4-89 Shade Contrast................................................. 4-138
Width tool.................................................................... 4-90 OCR Algorithm.................................................. 4-139
Setting items for the Width tool................................ 4-90 Dot Matrix Print................................................. 4-140
Setting the Width tool.............................................. 4-91 Tool Name......................................................... 4-140
Mask.................................................................... 4-92 Color Prohibition/Brightness Prohibition Tool........... 4-141
Edge Sensitivity Auto Adjustment....................... 4-92 Setting items for the Color Prohibition/
Upper Limit Settings............................................ 4-93 Brightness Prohibition Tool.................................... 4-141

10 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Contents

Setting the Color Prohibition/

6 Adjusting
Brightness Prohibition Tool.................................... 4-143
Mask.................................................................. 4-146 Auto Adjustment by the Additional Learning (Learning
Advanced Settings for the Color Prohibition/ Mode Only)....................................................................... 6-2
Brightness Prohibition Tool.................................... 4-147 Additional Learning Settings......................................... 6-2
Advanced Color Extraction/Advanced Method for the additional learning............................. 6-2
Brightness Extraction........................................ 4-147 Flow of Additional Learning Operation.......................... 6-2
Tool Name......................................................... 4-148 What should be done in the following case................... 6-3
4. Output Assignment Additional Learning by Taken Image............................ 6-4
(Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)............... 4-149 Additional Learning from the Running Image History... 6-5
Main screen for the Output Assignment.................... 4-149 Displaying the [Learned Hist.] screen........................... 6-7
Setting range of the Output Assignment................... 4-149 Displaying from the run screen.................................. 6-7
Default value..................................................... 4-150 Displaying from the [Sensor Setup Menu] screen..... 6-7
Setting the Output Assignment................................. 4-150 Confirming Learning Image History........................... 6-8
Advanced Settings for the Output Assignment......... 4-151 Image Detail Screen of
Advanced settings items for the output the Learning Image History....................................... 6-9
assignment............................................................ 4-151 Edit screen of the learning image history.................. 6-9
Total Status Conditions..................................... 4-152 Additional Learning
Logic Settings.................................................... 4-153 from the Learning Image History................................. 6-10
Editing the Status Result of a Detection Window
5 Running to be Learned.......................................................... 6-10
Deleting the Learned Images.................................. 6-12
Starting an Operation....................................................... 5-2 Additional Learning from USB Memory....................... 6-13
Turning on the power and starting operation................ 5-2 Operation When the Registered Number Reaches
Exiting the sensor settings and starting operation........ 5-2 the Upper Limit............................................................ 6-15
Overview of the Operation Screen................................... 5-3 Confirming the Similar Images and Additional
Names and Functions of the Operation Screen............... 5-4 Learning...................................................................... 6-15
Run screen.................................................................... 5-4 Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment................................ 6-16
Displaying the Operation Information............................ 5-6 Stabilizing the Judgment................................................ 6-17
Histogram.................................................................. 5-7 Stabilizing the judgment process by taking a clear
Processing time......................................................... 5-7 image of the target...................................................... 6-17
Count......................................................................... 5-8 Make the target large in the field of view................. 6-17
Output Monitor........................................................... 5-8 Adjusting the installed distance (WD)................. 6-17
Display Method............................................................. 5-8 Using the digital zoom function........................... 6-17
Status Gauge Display................................................ 5-9 Using the spread lens attachment....................... 6-17
Simple display........................................................... 5-9 Achieving adequate image brightness..................... 6-18
List display................................................................. 5-9 If the brightness cannot be properly adjusted
All screen display....................................................... 5-9 in Auto Brightness Adjustment............................ 6-18
Selecting the detection window/tool window............... 5-10 If the brightness cannot be properly adjusted
Selecting the Display Method of the Detection due to uneven brightness.................................... 6-18
Window/Tool Window................................................. 5-10 Achieving good focus.............................................. 6-18
Display Methods for Detection Windows If good focus cannot be achieved by the Auto
(Learning Mode)...................................................... 5-11 Focus Adjustment............................................... 6-18
Display Methods of Tools (Standard Mode)............ 5-12 Reducing the image blur.......................................... 6-19
Confirming the NG Occurrence Status of the Sensor Reducing the shininess of a glossy or metal
Connected (List of NG Sensor Occurrences Function) .5-13 surface..................................................................... 6-19
Overview of the List of NG Sensor Occurrences Using the Auto Brightness Adjustment................ 6-19
function....................................................................... 5-13 Using the dome attachment................................ 6-19
Setting [List of NG Sensor Occurrences].................... 5-14 Using the polarizing filter attachment.................. 6-19
Holding the Image of the Sensor on which NG Installing the sensor at an angle......................... 6-20
Occurred (NG Hold Function)......................................... 5-17 Adjusting the color tint (for color type only)............. 6-20
Overview of the NG Hold function............................... 5-17 Reducing the affect of illumination variation............ 6-20
Setting the NG Hold function...................................... 5-17 Stabilizing Learning Mode........................................... 6-20
Confirming the Images Whose Judgment are NG Optimizing the Size of the Detection Window.......... 6-20
(Image History)............................................................... 5-18 Setting according to the image target
Displaying the [Running Image Hist.] screen.............. 5-18 difference to be judged........................................ 6-20
Displaying from the run screen................................ 5-18 Setting by dividing into multiple detection
Displaying from the [Sensor Setup Menu] screen... 5-19 windows.............................................................. 6-21
Loading and confirming saved images....................... 5-20 Settings the position adjustment window............ 6-21
Clearing the saved images......................................... 5-21 Learning Multiple Images for Stability...................... 6-21
Changing the logging conditions of
the image history......................................................... 5-22

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 11

Contents

Stabilizing by correcting for misaligned target Shortening the processing time

position........................................................................ 6-22 of the Outline tool.................................................... 6-30
Tool settings........................................................ 6-22 Shortening the processing time
Processing during an operation.......................... 6-22 of the Color Area/Area/Edge Pixels/Color
Stabilizing the position adjustment.............................. 6-22 Average/Brightness Average/Width/Diameter/
If the target tilts and the position adjustment Edge/Pitch/Color Prohibition/Brightness
becomes unstable............................................... 6-22 Prohibition tool......................................................... 6-30
If the position adjustment becomes unstable Shortening the processing time of the OCR tool..... 6-31
due to the effect of the unwanted outlines.......... 6-22 Shortening the processing time of the position
If the outline of the reference target cannot be adjustment............................................................... 6-31
detected.............................................................. 6-22
When the window position after position 7 Various Functions
correction is misaligned and not stable............... 6-22
Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen...................... 7-2
Stabilizing the High-Speed Position Adjustment......... 6-23
Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)................ 7-3
If the detection becomes unstable due to the
Overview of the program functions............................... 7-3
effect of unwanted edges other than the target... 6-23
Operations that can be performed with the program
If the edge of a target cannot be detected.......... 6-23
functions........................................................................ 7-3
Stabilizing the Outline tool.......................................... 6-23
Preparing the program functions................................... 7-4
If the outline cannot be detected when the
Preparation flow......................................................... 7-4
target goes out of position................................... 6-23
Preparing the SD card............................................... 7-4
If the detection becomes unstable due to the
Preparation procedures............................................. 7-4
effect of unwanted outlines other than the
Using the program functions (changing over)............... 7-5
target................................................................... 6-23
When [Program Switching Method] is set to
If the target tilts and the outline cannot be
[Panel/PC/Networks]................................................. 7-6
detected.............................................................. 6-23
When [Program Switching Method] is set to
If the matching rate difference between an “OK”
[External Input].......................................................... 7-6
and “NG” image is small...................................... 6-23
Displaying the [Program Details] screen....................... 7-8
If the outline of the target cannot be detected..... 6-24
Editing a program name................................................ 7-8
Stabilizing the Color Area/Area/Color Average/
Importing a program...................................................... 7-9
Brightness Average/Color Prohibition/Brightness
Copying a program..................................................... 7-10
Prohibition Tool........................................................... 6-24
Initializing a program................................................... 7-10
If the color you wish to judge cannot be
Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor............... 7-11
extracted............................................................. 6-24
Sensor advanced settings........................................... 7-11
If the area search becomes unstable due to
[I/O Settings] tab...................................................... 7-11
unwanted colors being extracted........................ 6-24
[Device Settings] tab................................................ 7-12
Stabilizing the EdgePixels tool.................................... 6-25
[Utility] tab................................................................ 7-12
If the target edge pixels cannot be extracted...... 6-25
[Initialize/Update] tab............................................... 7-13
If it becomes unstable due to unwanted edge
[Sensor Information] button..................................... 7-13
pixels being extracted......................................... 6-25
Input Settings.............................................................. 7-14
Stabilizing the Width/Edge/Pitch tool.......................... 6-25
Output Settings........................................................... 7-16
If detection becomes unstable due to the effect
Trigger Control Settings.............................................. 7-17
of unwanted edges other than the target............ 6-25
Polarity........................................................................ 7-18
If the edge of a target cannot be detected.......... 6-25
I/O Monitor.................................................................. 7-18
Stabilizing the Diameter tool....................................... 6-26
Device name............................................................... 7-19
If the detection becomes unstable due to the
Security....................................................................... 7-19
effect of unwanted circles other
Network Settings (Sensor).......................................... 7-21
than the target..................................................... 6-26
Sensor Date Settings.................................................. 7-22
If the target circle cannot be detected................. 6-26
Rotate image 180°...................................................... 7-23
Stabilizing the OCR tool.............................................. 6-26
Auto Focus Adj Pos.................................................... 7-24
When the text or date on the object cannot be
White Balance (for color type only)............................. 7-25
read..................................................................... 6-26
Setting Advanced Control Panel Information................. 7-26
When unwanted text or date are read................. 6-26
Control panel settings................................................. 7-26
When reading dot characters from an IJP (ink
[Sensor Connection Settings] tab............................ 7-26
jet printer) is not stable........................................ 6-26
[Adv. Panel Settings] tab......................................... 7-27
Shortening the Processing Time.................................... 6-27
[Initialize/Update] tab............................................... 7-27
For the processing time.............................................. 6-27
[Panel Information] button....................................... 7-27
Flow of the internal process................................ 6-27
Connection method..................................................... 7-28
About the Pre-capture Function.................................. 6-28
When directly connecting with a sensor (1 unit)...... 7-28
Shortening the imaging processing time..................... 6-29
When directly connecting with multiple sensors
Selecting the detection mode/tool............................... 6-29
(2 units or more)...................................................... 7-29
Shortening the processing time of each tool............... 6-30

12 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Contents

When connecting to the sensor via network

9 Connecting to a Network
connection............................................................... 7-30
Panel Network Settings............................................... 7-32 Saving Judgment Results and Judged Images to an
Display Settings.......................................................... 7-32 FTP Server....................................................................... 9-2
Language.................................................................... 7-33 Overview of the FTP data transfer function.................. 9-2
Backlight..................................................................... 7-33 Required environment............................................... 9-2
Panel Date/Time......................................................... 7-34 Setting up the FTP data transfer function..................... 9-2
Touch Screen Lock..................................................... 7-34 Setting the connection destination............................. 9-3
Touch Panel Calibration.............................................. 7-35 Setting the transfer conditions................................... 9-3
Judgment Notation Settings........................................ 7-36 Setting the transfer destination folder and file
names........................................................................ 9-5
8 External Media Testing data transfer via FTP.................................... 9-8
Connecting to the SNTP Server to Set the Time.............. 9-9
Overview of External Media............................................. 8-2 Overview of the SNTP time synchronization function... 9-9
Functions that can use external media......................... 8-2 Required environment............................................... 9-9
USB memory............................................................. 8-2 Configuring the SNTP time sync settings..................... 9-9
SD Card..................................................................... 8-2 Sync Destination (SNTP server) Settings................ 9-10
Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a USB Sync settings........................................................... 9-11
Memory............................................................................. 8-3 Time zone Settings (Time offset)............................. 9-12
Inserting/Removing the USB memory........................... 8-3 Connecting to a Field Network....................................... 9-13
Inserting the USB memory........................................ 8-3 Field network............................................................... 9-13
Removing the USB memory...................................... 8-3 Web Monitor................................................................... 9-15
Displaying the USB Memory screen............................. 8-3 Overview of the Web monitor function........................ 9-15
Displaying from the RUN screen............................... 8-3 Required environment............................................. 9-15
Displaying the external media screen from the Connection method..................................................... 9-15
[Sensor Setup Menu] screen..................................... 8-3 Monitoring screen....................................................... 9-16
Saving the sensor settings or the image history........... 8-4
Backing up in a batch................................................ 8-4
10 Controlling with the Input/Output Line
Saving the program individually................................. 8-5
Saving images from the running image history Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers................ 10-2
individually................................................................. 8-6 External triggers.......................................................... 10-2
Saving images from the learning image history Controlling timing using BUSY output..................... 10-2
individually................................................................. 8-6 Controlling timing using ready output...................... 10-3
Transferring the settings backed up in the USB Internal trigger............................................................. 10-4
memory to the sensor................................................... 8-7 Controlling timing using BUSY output..................... 10-4
Capturing the control panel screen and saving it to Controlling timing using ready output...................... 10-5
USB memory................................................................. 8-8 Operating in the shortest cycle................................ 10-5
Enabling the screen capture function........................ 8-8 Importing the Status Output........................................... 10-6
Capturing the screen................................................. 8-8 Importing the total status OK/total status NG output... 10-6
USB memory folder composition and Importing the individual status output of each
file naming rules............................................................ 8-9 detection window/tool/logic......................................... 10-7
Setting Up the SD Card.................................................. 8-10 Changing the timing of status outputs......................... 10-8
Inserting/Removing the SD card................................. 8-10 Cancelling One-Shot output.................................... 10-8
Inserting the SD card............................................... 8-10 Changing Over............................................................... 10-9
Removing an SD card............................................. 8-11 Registering the Master Image...................................... 10-10
Displaying the SD card screen.................................... 8-12 Clearing Errors............................................................. 10-12
SD Card Access.......................................................... 8-13 Behavior When the Sensor Power
SD card format............................................................ 8-14 is Turned On or Off....................................................... 10-13
Slot cover open/close detection.................................. 8-14 Program switch error when the power is turned
Transferring Judgment Results or Judged Images to on........................................................................... 10-14
an SD Card..................................................................... 8-15 Input Response Time................................................... 10-15
Overview of the SD card data transfer function.......... 8-15 Response time for the switch program input......... 10-15
Setting up the SD card data transfer function............. 8-15 Response time for the external master
Setting the transfer conditions................................. 8-16 registration input.................................................... 10-15
Setting the transfer destination folder and file Response time for the error clear input................. 10-15
names...................................................................... 8-17 Description for symbols......................................... 10-15

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 13

Contents

Remedy when direct connection

11 Specifications
(2 units or more) is unavailable...................................A-18
Specifications................................................................. 11-2 Remedy when connection via a network is
Sensor Head............................................................... 11-2 unavailable..................................................................A-20
Sensor Amplifier.......................................................... 11-2 Confirming the status by observing the indicator
Control panel............................................................... 11-4 light of the sensor........................................................A-22
Dimensions..................................................................... 11-5 LINK/ACT (link/activity) indicator light.....................A-22
Sensor Head............................................................... 11-5 STATUS indicator light............................................A-23
Sensor Amplifier.......................................................... 11-8 Confirming the status by observing the SENSOR
Option......................................................................... 11-9 indicator light of the control panel...............................A-24
Dome attachment for IV2 series.............................. 11-9 Other methods of confirming a network connection....A-25
With polarizing filter attachment for IV2 series Confirming the existence of the sensor from the
(OP-87899)/ control panel............................................................A-25
polarizing filter attachment for IV2-G300CA If the displayed confirmation result is “NG”.........A-25
(OP-87900)/ Confirming/Setting the IP address of the control
polarizing filter attachment for IV2-G600MA panel........................................................................A-26
(OP‑87901).............................................................. 11-9 Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor.....A-27
Spread lens attachment for IV2-G150MA Confirming the router settings.................................A-28
(OP-87902).............................................................. 11-9 Remedy when data transfer via FTP is unavailable....A-29
Sensor head/amplifier cable for IV2 series.............. 11-9 Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch).........A-30
I/O cable for IV2 series.......................................... 11-10 Settings after initialization...........................................A-30
Vertical mounting bracket for IV2 series................ 11-10 Initializing the network settings...................................A-30
Transverse mounting bracket for IV2 series.......... 11-10 Maintenance...................................................................A-31
Adjustable bracket for IV2 series........................... 11-10 Attaching the protection sheet....................................A-31
Control panel for IV2 series...................................... 11-11 Index...............................................................................A-32
IV2-CP50............................................................... 11-11 Copyright notice.............................................................A-38
Using the wall mounting adapter (OP-88349)....... 11-11 STLport...........................................................................A-39
Using the control board mounting adapter
(OP-88350)............................................................ 11-12
Control panel options for IV2 series.......................... 11-12
Panel/monitor power cable.................................... 11-12
Touch panel protection sheet (OP-88351)............ 11-12
Stylus (OP-88352)................................................. 11-12
Wall mounting adapter (OP-88349)....................... 11-12
Control board mounting adapter (OP-88350)........ 11-13
Communication cables.............................................. 11-13
Ethernet cable....................................................... 11-13
L type Ethernet cable............................................. 11-13
LAN cable.............................................................. 11-13

Appendices
Status Table.....................................................................A-2
Status Table..................................................................A-2
Displaying and outputting the status result...................A-4
Displaying and outputting the status result at the
time of position adjustment...........................................A-5
Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position
Adjustment Tool...............................................................A-6
Matching rate at the time of protrusion.........................A-6
Cut-off process of the matching rate.............................A-6
Troubleshooting................................................................A-7
Error Messages................................................................A-9
Checking errors by observing the PWR/ERR
indicator light.................................................................A-9
Checking error message on the control panel............A-11
Remedy when data transfer to the SD card is
unavailable.....................................................................A-16
Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected with
the Sensor......................................................................A-17
Remedy when direct connection (1 unit) is
unavailable..................................................................A-17

14 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 1 This chapter explains the system configurations and overview
of the IV2 series. How to check package contents, and the

1
name and function of each part.

Getting Started

Getting Started
System Configuration.............................................................1-2
IV2 Series Overview...............................................................1-5
Checking the Package Contents............................................1-8
Name and Function of Each Part.........................................1-12

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 1-1

 System Configuration

System Configuration

Basic Configurations of IV2 Series

1 Control panel for IV2 series

IV2-CP50
IV2-Navigator
Getting Started

USB memory
OP-87502 (1 GB)

Ethernet cable
OP-87907 (1 m)
OP-87457 (2 m)
OP-87458 (5 m)
OP-87459 (10 m)
OP-88042 (1 m: L type)
OP-88043 (2 m: L type)
OP-88044 (5 m: L type)
OP-88045 (10 m: L type)

Panel/Monitor
power cable
OP-87443 (2 m) SD Card
Sensor head OP-87444 (5 m) CA-SD16G (16GB)
/amplifier cable OP-87445 (10 m) CA-SD4G (4GB)
OP-87903 (2 m)
OP-87904 (5 m)
OP-87905 (10 m) Sensor Amplifier
IV2-G30F/IV2-G30

Sensor Head 24 V DC power

IV2-G150MA
IV2-G500MA
I/O cable
IV2-G500CA
OP-87906 (3 m)
IV2-G300CA
IV2-G600MA

Communication Unit DL Series

This unit supports communication
units. Status results can be
obtained and control of trigger
input can be performed.

Photoelectric/proximity Indicator light/buzzer etc. PLC

sensor etc. Alarm can be output by the PLC can control the trigger input and
Sends the signal to the trigger status output function. timing input, and the status output
input and timing input when function, and can switch the program
the target is detected. number.

The control panel (IV2-CP50) can be connected to the IV series.

yyFor details on connecting with the sensor of IV-HG/IV-H series, refer to ”IV-HG/IV-H Series User’s Manual
(Monitor)”.
yyFor details on connecting with the sensor of IV-G/IV series, refer to ”IV-G/IV Series User’s Manual (Monitor)”.

1-2 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 System Configuration

Connecting the Control Panel with Multiple Sensors

When Direct Connection (2 units or more) or Network Connection is selected, the control panel for IV2 series can select a

1
single sensor from among multiple sensors and connect with the selected sensor.
* The IV2-CP50 requires a power cable.

Control panel for IV2 series

Getting Started
IV2-CP50
Ethernet switch
(Example) NE-Q05

Ethernet cable
OP-87907 (1 m)
OP-87457 (2 m)
OP-87458 (5 m)
OP-87459 (10 m)
OP-88042 (1 m: L type)
OP-88043 (2 m: L type)
OP-88044 (5 m: L type)
OP-88045 (10 m: L type)
LAN cable
OP-87950 (1 m)
Sensor Amplifier OP-87951 (3 m)
IV2-G30F/IV2-G30 OP-87952 (5 m)
OP-87953 (10 m)

Sensor head
/amplifier cable
OP-87903 (2 m)
OP-87904 (5 m)
OP-87905 (10 m)

Sensor Head
IV2-G150MA PLC
IV2-G500MA (Communication network)
IV2-G500CA FTP server
IV2-G300CA (Network connection only)
IV2-G600MA

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 1-3

 System Configuration

Configuration of IV2 series network function

The following functions can be used by configuring the IV2 series over a network.

1
yyConnecting to FTP server to transfer image files and judgment results
yyConnecting to SNTP server to automatically adjust the sensor amplifier time
yyTrigger input, judgment result acquisition, program number switch (changeover) by connection with PLC on the field
Network.
Getting Started

yyWeb monitor function

Communication network
yyEtherNet/IP™
yyPROFINET
yyTCP/IP non-procedural IV2 Series
communications Control panel

IV2 Series
Sensor Amplifier

FTP server
SNTP server

IV2 Series PLC

Web monitor Sensor Head

Ethernet

zz
When using a field network (DL unit)

IV2 Series
Control panel

IV2 Series
Sensor Amplifier

Communication Unit
Ethernet
DL Series

PLC
IV2 Series
Sensor Head

yyRS-232C
yyEtherCAT
yyCC-Link
yyDeviceNet
yyPROFIBUS

1-4 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 IV2 Series Overview

IV2 Series Overview

IV2 Series
The IV2 series is a “Vision Sensor”.
This sensor can be connected easily so complicated detection operations such as detecting the shapes of parts with a
photoelectric switch can be easily achieved.
Setting the operating conditions requires the use of the control panel (IV2-CP50) or the PC software IV2‑Navigator (IV2-H1)
1
for the IV2 series.

Getting Started
Sensors connected to the control panel or the PC are connected via an Ethernet connection so that connection with
multiple sensors beyond a direct single connection can be performed as well.

Using the control panel

zz
Direct Connection (2 units or more)/
zz
Direct Connection (1 unit) Network Connection

Function of the control

panel
yySetting the sensor Ethernet switch
yyMonitoring the operation
screen
yyMonitoring the operation
information
yyReading the image history

Functions of sensor PLC

yyCamera (Communication network)
yyLighting FTP server
yyImage detection (Network connection only)
yyI/O
yySaving the image
history

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 1-5

 IV2 Series Overview

Using the PC software “IV2-Navigator”

The PC software “IV2-Navigator” has the same functions as the control panel for the IV2 series.

1
For details of operations using the PC software, refer to “IV2 Series User’s Manual (PC Software)”.

zz
Direct Connection (2 units or more)/
zz
Direct Connection (1 unit) Network Connection
Getting Started

Functions of IV2-Navigator
yySetting the sensor
yyMonitoring the operation
screen Ethernet switch
yyMonitoring the operation
information
yyReading the image history

Functions of sensor
yyCamera PLC
yyLighting (Communication network)
yyImage detection FTP server
yyI/O (Network connection only)
yySaving the image
history

1-6 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 IV2 Series Overview

Judgment processing flow

This section describes the basic judgment processing flow of this device.

Getting Started
Trigger input

BUSY output
Total status
output

Inputs the imaging startup signal by synchronizing to the target position

from a photoelectric switch or PLC.
Trigger input
Also, the trigger can be input at a regular interval with the internal trigger
function.

Use the built-in light to obtain an image of the target with the CMOS
Imaging
image sensor. BUSY output function turns ON.

According to the learning settings (learning mode) or settings of a detection

tool (standard mode), the image of the target is scanned for detecting whether
a target is OK or No Good.
Tool processing Up to 16 detection windows (learning mode) or detection tools (standard mode)
can be set. In addition, misaligned positions of the target can be corrected by
using the position adjustment window/tool.
After the detection process is completed, the BUSY output function turns OFF.

Outputs the status result.

Status output When the total status result is OK, the total status OK output is ON.
When the total status result is NG, the total status NG output is ON.

Saves the image (up to 1,000 images) to the image history memory
in the sensor.
Save images
Conditions for saving the image can be selected from “NG only”, “OK
close to NG and threshold”, or “All”.

yyBy using the ready output, the trigger interval can be shortened.
yyBy using the data transfer function, images and judgment results can be transfer to SD cards and FTP servers.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 1-7

 Checking the Package Contents

Checking the Package Contents

The IV2 Series consists of the models below. Check that all of the bundled items below are included with each model
before use.

1 Sensor Head
yyIV2-G500CA yyIV2-G500MA yyIV2-G150MA
Sensor Amplifier
yyIV2-G30F
Instruction Manual x 1
yyIV2-G300CA yyIV2-G600MA
Getting Started

LAN port cap x 1

Power terminal block x 1

(mounted in the amplifier)
Sensor head x 1
“Name and Function of Each Part” (Page 1-12)
“Mounting the Sensor” (Page 2-2)
“Cables” (Page 2-11) Sensor amplifier
(Learning/standard type) x
1

yyIV2-G30
Instruction Manual x 1

LAN port cap x 1

Power terminal block x 1

(mounted in the amplifier)

Sensor amplifier
(Standard type) x 1

“Name and Function of Each Part” (Page 1-12)

“Mounting the Sensor” (Page 2-2)
“Cables” (Page 2-11)

1-8 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Checking the Package Contents

Optional parts for the sensor

Dome attachment for IV2 series

yyIV2-GD05 1

Getting Started
Mounting screw (M4 x L8) x 2
Mounting screw (M4 x L10) x 2
* Double-washer sems screw

Dome attachment Instruction Manual x 1

for IV2 series (Small)

yyIV2-GD10

Mounting screw (M4 x L8) x 2

Mounting screw (M4 x L10) x 2
* Double-washer sems screw

Instruction Manual x 1

Dome attachment
for IV2 series (Large)
“Using the Dome Attachment (IV2‑GD05/IV2‑GD10) for
IV2 series” (Page 2-4)

Polarizing filter attachment

yyOP-87899 (Polarizing filter attachment for IV2 series)
yyOP-87900 (Polarizing filter attachment for IV2-G300CA)
yyOP-87901 (Polarizing filter attachment for IV2-G600MA)

Mounting screw
M3 x L5 x 1
* Double-washer sems
screw

Instruction Manual x 1
Polarizing filter attachment x 1

“Using the polarizing filter attachment (OP‑87899/OP-

87900/OP-87901) or spread lens attachment (OP-
87902)” (Page 2-6)

Spread lens attachment

yyOP-87902 (Spread lens attachment for IV2-G150MA)

Mounting screw
(M3 x L5) x 2
* Double-washer sems
screw
Spread lens attachment x 1
Instruction Manual x 1

“Using the polarizing filter attachment (OP‑87899/OP-

87900/OP-87901) or spread lens attachment (OP-
87902)” (Page 2-6)

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 1-9

 Checking the Package Contents

Control panel for IV2 series

yyIV2-CP50

1
Getting Started

Stylus x 1 Wall mounting adapter x 1

String for hanging the stylus x 1 Screw for the adapter (M3 x L10) x 4
Hexagon nut (M3) x 4
Control panel x 1
Instruction Manual x 1
Starting Guide x 1

The wall mounting adapter is shipped attached to the control panel.

Option of control panel for IV2 series

Panel/monitor power cable (M8 4pin - strand Wall mounting adapter

wire) yyOP-88349
yyOP-87443 (2 m) yyOP-87444 (5 m) yyOP-87445 (10 m)

Screw for the adapter

(M3 x L10) x 4
Hexagon nut (M3) x 4

Wall mounting adapter x 1

Panel/monitor power cable (M8 4pin - strand wire) x 1
Same as accessories for the control panel.
Optional parts in case of loss/damage.
Protection sheet
yyOP-88351
Control board mounting adapter
yyOP-88350

Mounting screw
(M3 x L8) x 8
Protection sheet x 2

Stylus
yyOP-88352
Control board mounting adapter
x1

String for hanging the stylus x 1

USB memory (1GB)
yyOP-87502

Stylus x 1
USB memory x 1
Same as accessories for the control panel.
Optional parts in case of loss/damage.

1-10 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Checking the Package Contents

Communication cables

Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45)

yyOP-87907 (1 m) yyOP-87457 (2 m)
1
yyOP-87458 (5 m) yyOP-87459 (10 m)

Getting Started
Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45) x 1

L type Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45)

yyOP-88042 (1 m) yyOP-88043 (2 m)
yyOP-88044 (5 m) yyOP-88045 (10 m)

L type Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45) x 1

LAN cable (RJ-45 - RJ-45)

yyOP-87950 (1 m) yyOP-87951 (3 m)
yyOP-87952 (5 m) yyOP-87953 (10 m)

LAN cable (RJ-45 - RJ-45) x 1

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 1-11

 Name and Function of Each Part

Name and Function of Each Part

Sensor Head „„
Operation of the sensor head indicator light

yyIV2-G500CA yyIV2-G500MA yyIV2-G150MA

1 yyIV2-G300CA yyIV2-G600MA

„„
Name and function of each part of the
Getting Started

sensor head Indicator light

8 yyGreen (ON).......The total status result is “OK”.
yyGreen (Blink).....Under startup or setting in progress.
Operation stopped.
Blinks once a second.
yyRed (ON)...........The total status result is “NG”.
yyRed (Blink)........An error occurred.
yy(OFF)................- Standby status until the first
judgment finishes after starting the
1 2 2 3 4 5 6 8 7 operation or after switching the
program number.
1 Indicator light - The versions of the sensor head and
Indicates the operating status of the sensor head. sensor amplifier do not match.
“ Operation of the sensor head indicator light” (Page - An incompatible sensor head is
1-12) connected.
2 Mounting holes yyGreen and red....“LED Blinking” is requested.
Used for mounting the sensor head.  are blinking Flash LED is requested from the
Also used for mounting to the dome attachment for IV2 alternately PROFINET communications I/O
series. controller.
“ Mounting the sensor head” (Page 2-3)
3 Connector for sensor head/amplifier cable for IV2
series
The connector can rotate.

Example of rotating

4 Camera and built-in light

5 Mounting location for the spread lens attachment
for IV2-G150MA
6 Mounting location for polarizing filter attachment
for IV2 series,
polarizing filter attachment for IV2-G300CA,
polarizing filter attachment for IV2-G600MA
7 Connector for sensor head/amplifier cable for IV2
series
“Cables” (Page 2-11)
8 Dome attachment mounting location

1-12 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Name and Function of Each Part

Sensor Amplifier 1 SD card indicator

Indicates the operating status of the SD card.
yy(OFF)................The SD card is not mounted, or not
yyIV2-G30F yyIV2-G30

1
recognized.
yyGreen (ON).......The SD card is recognized. If the
„„
Name and function of each part of the cover is open, access is stopped.
sensor amplifier yyGreen (Blink).....The SD card is accessed.

Getting Started
Turned off when performing the following
operations:
1
8 yy[Remove SD card]
yyInput of stop saving the SD card
2
2 Indicator light
3 Indicates the operating status of the sensor amplifier.
4 “ Operation of the sensor amplifier indicator light”
(Page 1-14)
5 3 SD card slot
9
6 Mount the SD card.
7 “ Setting Up the SD Card” (Page 8-10)
4 Connector for sensor head/amplifier cable for IV2
series
“ Cables” (Page 2-11)
5 Ethernet connector
Used when connecting this unit with the control panel
(IV2-CP50), PC, or field network PLC.
When this is not used, attach the included LAN port
cap.
6 IP reset switch
Used for resetting the IP address assigned to this
sensor amplifier.
“Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)” (Page
A-30)
7 I/O connector
Used for connecting the I/O cable for IV2 series (OP-
87906).
“ Connecting the I/O Cable for IV2 Series” (Page
2-12)
8 Communication unit connector
Used for connecting the communication unit (DL
Series).
The protection cover is attached during shipment.
9 Power terminal block
Supplies power to this unit.
“ Supplying power to the sensor amplifier” (Page
2-14)

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 1-13

 Name and Function of Each Part

„„
Operation of the sensor amplifier indicator 1 PWR/ERR
yyGreen (ON).......Operation is in progress.
light
yyGreen (Blink).....Under startup or setting in progress.

1
Operation stopped. Blinks once a
second.
yyRed (ON)...........Unrecoverable error has occurred.
1 yyRed (Blink)........Recoverable error or field network
Getting Started

warning has occurred.

2
yyOrange (Blink)...Flash LED is requested from the
3 PROFINET communications I/O controller.
Alternatively, “LED Blinking” is
4 requested. Blinks four times a second.
5 yy(OFF)................Power is not supplied.
2 OUT
Indicates the comprehensive result.
yyGreen................The total status result is “OK”.
yyRed...................The total status result is “NG”.
yyOrange (Blink)...Flash LED is requested from the
PROFINET communications I/O controller.
Alternatively, “LED Blinking” is
requested. Blinks four times a second.
yy(OFF)................Setting in progress.
Standby status until the first judgment
finishes after starting the operation or
after switching the program number.
3 TRIG
Green light lights up (one-shot) according to input of the
internal or external trigger.
yyOrange (Blink)...Flash LED is requested from the
PROFINET communications I/O controller.
Alternatively, “LED Blinking” is
requested. Blinks four times a second.
4 STATUS
Indicates the Ethernet connection status.
yyGreen (ON).......Connected normally to the sensor.
yyGreen (Blink).....IP address has been retrieved but the
sensor is not connected to the control
panel.
yyRed (ON)...........The IP address coincides with other
device or a network loop is detected.
yyRed (Blink)........Communication timeout has occurred
with the Ethernet/IP scanner.
yy(OFF)................IP address is not assigned. No correct
connection with the monitor.
5 LINK/ACT
Indicates the link status to the Ethernet.
yyGreen (ON).......Normally linked.
yyGreen (Blink).....Normally linked, and the data is
sending/receiving.
yy(OFF)................Sensor is not normally linked.

1-14 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Name and Function of Each Part

Control panel 7 USB connecting connector

Port for connecting the USB memory. Port is protected
by the cover.

1
3 “Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a USB
Memory” (Page 8-3)
8 Stylus
4 Used to operate the touch-screen.

Getting Started
8
5 9 Stylus holder
Stores the stylus.
6 10 Strap holder
7
Mounts the strap. Or, hangs the stylus.

10

1 2
1 Connector for Ethernet cable
Port for connecting the Ethernet cable. Used when
connecting with the sensor amplifier or Ethernet switch.
“Cables” (Page 2-11)
2 Power connector
Connects the panel/monitor power cable.
“Cables” (Page 2-11)
3 Unlock button
Push this button when dismounting the control panel
from the wall mounting adapter.
“Unmounting from the wall mounting adapter” (Page
2-9)
4 Indicator light (POWER)
Indicates the operating status of the control panel.
yyGreen (ON).......The power is turned ON.
yyRed (ON)...........Unrecoverable error has occurred on
the sensor or control panel.
yyRed (Blink)........Recoverable error has occurred on
the sensor or control panel.
yy(OFF)................The power is turned OFF.
For countermeasures when an error occurred, refer to
“Error Messages” (Page A-9).
5 Indicator light (SENSOR)
Indicates the connecting status to the sensor.
yyGreen (ON).......Connected normally to the sensor.
yyGreen ....Linked normally but it is not properly
(Slowly blinks) connected to the sensor.
yy(OFF)................It is not properly connected because it
did not link normally.
When the connection with the sensor is unavailable,
refer to “Remedy when the Monitor cannot be
Connected with the Sensor” (Page A-17).
6 LCD monitor/Stylus
Displays the operation screen and setup screen.
Operates by touching the screen with the stylus.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 1-15

 Name and Function of Each Part

MEMO

1
Getting Started

1-16 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 2 This chapter explains how to mount the sensor and control
panel, and also explains connection procedures.

Installation and
Connection 2

Installation and Connection

Mounting the Sensor..............................................................2-2
Mounting the control panel.....................................................2-8
Cables..................................................................................2-11

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 2-1

 Mounting the Sensor

Mounting the Sensor

About Sensor zz
IV2-G150MA
Installed distance WD Field of View Field of View
yyIV2-G500CA yyIV2-G500MA yyIV2-G150MA (mm) H (mm) V (mm)
yyIV2-G300CA yyIV2-G600MA 40 8 6

50 11 8

2
Mounting the sensor head
100 22 16
Do not place the sensor in an environment
150 34 24
that exceeds the limit of the sensor’s
Installation and Connection

environmental resistance, or an environment

that propagates vibration directly to the zz
IV2-G500CA/IV2-G500MA
sensor. Those may cause a damage or
malfunction. Installed distance WD Field of View Field of View
(mm) H (mm) V (mm)
yyField of View and optical axis have individual 20 10 7.5
differences. Adjust the sensor position by
checking the actual image at the time of 50 20 15
installation.
yyPlace the sensor in a location where ambient 100 40 30
light will not affect the image. Ambient light
200 80 60
includes solar light, lights of other devices,
and photoelectric sensors. Also, be careful 300 120 90
when the light intensity of the ambient light
changes. Use a shield to protect when the 400 160 120
location cannot be changed.
yyPlace the sensor where no object can block 500 200 150
out the internal light or the Field of View of the
sensor.
yyDetection may become unstable if multiple
zz
IV2-G300CA
sensors are placed nearby each other, due to Installed distance WD Field of View Field of View
the lighting of each sensor. To prevent this, (mm) H (mm) V (mm)
take the measures described below: Take
measures as described below. 40 42 31
yyDelay the timing of external trigger inputs.
yyUse a shield to avoid interference. 100 95 71

150 140 105

Checking the Field of View and installed 200 185 139

distance 250 230 172
For the IV2 series, the installed distance and the field of
300 275 206
view of the camera is different depending on the type of
sensor head used. Check the type of the sensor head
to be used and its field of view and place it at the proper zz
IV2-G600MA
distance.
Installed distance WD Field of View Field of View
Field of View H (mm) H (mm) V (mm)

40 42 31

100 95 72
Indicator light
Field of View V 200 185 140

300 275 208

400 365 276

Installed distance WD
500 455 344
Field of View V = Field of View H x 0.75
(H : V = 4 : 3) 600 550 412

2-2 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Mounting the Sensor

Mounting the sensor head Attaching the optional mounting bracket

yyIV2-G500CA yyIV2-G500MA yyIV2-G150MA „„
When using the vertical mounting bracket
yyIV2-G300CA yyIV2-G600MA
for IV2 series (OP-87908)
Attach the bracket using the screws attached to OP-
87908.

2
Mounting the sensor head yyTightening torque : 0.7 to 1.5 N·m
Mounting
„„
When screws are secured from the sensor examples
head

Installation and Connection

yyScrew : M3 x 2
yyTightening torque : 0.3 to 0.6 N·m

„„
When using the transverse mounting
bracket for IV2 series (OP-87909)
Attach the bracket using the screws attached to OP-
87909.
yyTightening torque : 0.7 to 1.5 N·m
„„
When screws are secured from the wall
yyScrew : M4 x 2 Mounting
yyTightening torque : 0.7 to 1.5 N·m examples
yyScrew hole on the sensor head: M4 female (whose
length of screw engagement should be 2.5 to 3.5 mm)

„„
When using the adjustable bracket for IV2
series (OP-87910)

1 Attach the bracket using the screws attached to

OP-87910.
yyTightening torque : 0.7 to 1.5 N·m
Mounting
examples

When using the adjustable bracket for IV2

series (OP-87910), connect the convex part to
the sensor head.

Convex part

2 Mount the bracket on the support side to fix.

yyTightening torque : 5 N·m
Mounting
examples

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 2-3

 Mounting the Sensor

Mounting the Sensor Amplifier Mounting the attachment

Mount the sensor amplifier as follows for heat

release. Using the Dome Attachment (IV2‑GD05/
yyFor mounting direction, place the indicator IV2‑GD10) for IV2 series
light toward the front, and the power

2
terminal block toward the bottom. yyUse the dome attachment at a correct
yySecure the surrounding space with 30 mm installation distance. Failure to do so may
or more. reduce or negate the effect of the dome
yySet it on DIN rail mounted on sheet metal. attachment for the IV2 series.
Installation and Connection

DIN rail yyWhen using the dome attachment, adjust the

A brightness with the dome attachment for the
IV2 series attached.
“Auto Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-12)
A A yyFor the color type, adjust the white balance
with the dome attachment for the IV2 series
mounted.
“White Balance (for color type only)” (Page
A 7-25)
Power terminal block
A : 30 mm or more
„„
Mounting the dome attachment for IV2
series
1 Fit the stopper on the back of the sensor
amplifier (center side) to the DIN rail (1), and then 1 Hook the groove on the sensor head onto the
push the sensor amplifier in on the arrow mark hook of the dome attachment for the IV2 series,
direction (2) until you hear the clicking sound. and push it in until you hear the clicking sound.

Stopper Hook the groove on the

sensor head onto the hook
of the attachment.
(1)

(2)
Push until you hear the
When dismounting, push down the upper part to the clicking sound.
front, while push the sensor amplifier on the reverse
direction of the (1) arrow mark (upper side).

yyAttach the sensor head so that the light-

receiving part of the sensor head fits into
the hole of the dome attachment for the IV2
series.
yyIf the engagement between the sensor
head and the dome attachment is too
tight, please spread the hook of the dome
attachment by hand.

2-4 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Mounting the Sensor

2 Fix the dome attachment for the IV2 series with „„

Mounting examples
attached mounting screws. Mounting screw (M4 x L10)
yyTightening torque : 0.5N m (long)
Transverse mounting bracket
for the IV2 series
(OP-87909)

Screws for
securing the sensor
head are tightened
on this side.
2

Installation and Connection

Mounting screw
(M4 x L8)
(short)

Make sure to fix the dome attachment for the

IV2 series with the mounting screws (M4 x L8)
to prevent it from falling down. To attach the adjustable bracket for the IV2 series (OP-
yyIf the attached mounting screws (M4 x L10) 87910), connect the convex part to the dome attachment
or screws with no double-washer sems are for the IV2 series.
used, the sensor head may be damaged.
yyThe attached mounting screws (M4 x L10)
are used for securing the mounting bracket.
yyIf the included mounting screws are not to
be used, use double-washer sems screws
(M4 x L8). Convex part

If a sensor head with the dome attachment

yyTighten the mounting screws on the one side for the IV2 series is to be directly mounted
of the sensor head. If they are to be used on to sheet metal, pay attention to the following
the opposite side, tighten them on the same items.
side. yyIf they are to be secured from the sheet
yyThe mounting method for the IV2-GD10 is metal side with screws, be sure to use M4
described here. The IV2‑GD05 can also be screws (whose length of screw engagement
mounted in the same way. should be 2.5 to 3.5 mm), and the tightening
torque should be 0.7 to 1.5 N•m.
The vertical mounting bracket for the V2 series (OP- yyIf the screws are to be secured from the
87908), transverse mounting bracket for the the IV2 sensor head side, be sure to use the M3
series (OP-87909), or adjustable bracket for the screws “double-washer sems screws” or
IV2 series (OP-87910) can be used with the dome else “screws with spring washer and flat
attachment for the IV2 series mounted on the sensor washer” should be used, and the tightening
head. torque should be 0.5 N•m. If screws larger
To use the bracket, attach it on the other side of the than M4 are used, the sensor head will be
sensor head on which the mounting screws (M4 x damaged.
L8) were tightened in step 2.
To attach the bracket, use the two attached If the dome attachment for the IV2 series is used for
mounting screws (M4 x L10). the IV2-G300CA/IV2-G600MA, the field of view will
be as shown below.
When the IV2-GD05 is used
Installed
distance WD View H (mm) View V (mm)
(mm)
0 24 31
30 46 51
When the IV2-GD10 is used
Installed
distance WD View H (mm) View V (mm)
(mm)
0 38 45
50 73 78

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 2-5

 Mounting the Sensor

„„
Dismounting the dome attachment for the Using the polarizing filter attachment
IV2 series
(OP‑87899/OP-87900/OP-87901) or spread
1 Dismount the mounting screw. lens attachment (OP-87902)
yyWhen using the polarization filter attachment,
adjust brightness with the polarization filter

2 attached.
“Auto Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-12)
yyFor the color type, adjust the white balance
with the polarization filter attachment mounted.
Installation and Connection

“White Balance (for color type only)” (Page

Mounting screw
7-25)
(M4 x L8)

„„
Mounting the polarizing filter attachment for
the IV2 series (OP-87899),
polarizing filter attachment for IV2-G300CA
2 Dismount by lifting the front part of the sensor (OP-87900),
head, while pulling out the hook of the dome
attachment for the IV2 series. or polarizing filter attachment for IV2-G600MA
(OP-87901)

1 Hook the groove on the sensor head onto the

hook of the polarizing filter attachment, and push
it in until you hear the clicking sound.
Hook the groove on the
Hook sensor head onto the
hook of the attachment.

Push until you hear

the clicking sound.

2 Secure the polarizing filter attachment with the

attached screw.
yyTightening torque : 0.3 to 0.6N•m

2-6 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Mounting the Sensor

„„
Mounting the spread lens attachment for
IV2-G150MA (OP-87902)

1 Mount the sensor head to the spread lens

attachment with the correct orientation, as shown
below.

Installation and Connection

2 Secure the spread lens attachment with the
attached screws.
yyTightening torque : 0.2 to 0.3N•m

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 2-7

 Mounting the control panel

Mounting the control panel

Mounting to a wall Mounting with the wall mounting adapter

Use the wall mounting adapter (accessories or OP-88349). The monitor can be operated using the following methods.
Hang it on a hook with the wall mounting adapter mounted yyRemove the control panel from the wall mounting adapter
to the control panel, or mount the control panel to the wall and operate while holding in your hand.
mounting adapter that is mounted on the wall. yyOperate it while mounted on the wall.

1 Mount the wall mounting adapter to the wall.

2
The control panel is shipped installed on the wall
mounting adapter.
zz
Mounting by creating a screw hole in the wall
yyScrew : M3 x 4
Hanging on a hook
Installation and Connection

Use the attached screws.

While operating, take the control panel from the hook and yyTightening torque : 0.27 to 0.33 N·m
hold it in your hands.

1 Mount the control panel to the wall mounting

adapter by aligning the stopper of the wall
mounting adapter to the groove on the rear
control panel.
Slide the control panel down all the way, and confirm
that the control panel is locked.

zz
Mounting by creating a plated through hole on
the panel
yyScrew : M3 x 4, Nut : M3 x 4
Use the attached screws and nuts.
yyMountable board thickness : 5 mm or lower
yyTightening torque : 0.27 to 0.33 N·m

Stopper

2 Hang the control panel on a hook.

2-8 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Mounting the control panel

2 Mount the control panel to the wall mounting Mounting on the Panel Surface of the
adapter by aligning the stopper of the wall
Control Board
mounting adapter to the groove on the rear
control panel. Fix the control panel on the board surface of the control
Slide the control panel down all the way, and confirm board etc. to operate.
that the control panel is locked. Mount the control board mounting adapter (OP-88350) on
the control panel to be mounted on the board surface.

1 Connect the power cable and Ethernet cable to

2
the control panel.

Installation and Connection

“Cables” (Page 2-11)

2 Mount the control board mounting adapter on the

control panel and fix it with the attached screws.
yyScrew : M3, 8 mm long, with 4 washers
Use the attached screws.
yyTightening torque : 0.27 to 0.33 N·m

Stopper

Unmounting from the wall mounting adapter

Unlock the control panel from the wall mounting adapter by
pulling toward the unlock button. Then slide up to unmount
the control panel mounted to the adapter.

Unlock

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 2-9

 Mounting the control panel

3 Mount the control panel where the control board

mounting adapter is installed from the rear side,
and fix it with the screws.
yyOpen the hole for embedding with 139 mm x 171 mm
on the board surface.
yyMountable board thickness : 1 to 4 mm
yyScrew : M3, 8 mm long, with 4 washers

2 Use the attached screws.

yyTightening torque : 0.5 N·m or lower
Installation and Connection

Strap holder

Stylus can be hung from the strap holder using the

hanging string (accessory).

Panel hole dimension

(Circular hole position for screw)
168 4xφ3.5
(Circular hole position for screw)
(Panel square hole dimension)
139 +10

146

171 +10
(Panel square hole dimension)

2-10 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Cables

Cables

Sensor wiring Connecting the sensor head/amplifier cable

for the IV2 series and sensor amplifier
Connecting the sensor head/amplifier cable
for the IV2 series and sensor head 1 Connect the cable to the sensor amplifier as
shown below.
1 Connect the cable to the sensor head as shown
below. Adjust the pins and
the pin connection
2
Adjust the pins and

Installation and Connection

the pin connection

2 Tighten the connector by turning the screw-on

2 Tighten the connector by turning the screw-on connector in the clockwise direction.
connector in the clockwise direction. yyTightening torque : 0.4 to 0.8N m
yyTightening torque : 0.8N m or lower

To tighten the screw by hand, turn it until the

connector of the cable touches the sensor
head firmly.
Then turn it more about by 5° using a tool
such as plyers.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 2-11

 Cables

Connecting the cable to the sensor amplifier „„

Connecting the I/O Cable for IV2 Series
Connect the I/O cable for the IV2 series (OP-87906) to
the sensor amplifier as shown below.

2
Align the connectors.
Connecting the Ethernet
cable
Installation and Connection

Connecting port of the I/O

cable for the IV2 series

„„
Connecting the Ethernet cable or LAN cable
Connect the cable to the sensor amplifier as shown
below.
To disconnect the cable, push in the tabs on both sides
of the connector and pull out the cable.

To disconnect the cable, pull the cable while pushing in

the tab on the Ethernet cable.
zz
Connector terminal number

B1 A1

B10 A10

A1 B1

A10 B10

2-12 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Cables

zz
Terminal Number and Wiring Color of the I/O Cable for the IV2 Series (OP-87906)
A1 (brown)

2
A10 (black)
B1 (brown)

Installation and Connection

B10 (black)

Terminal Wiring Assigning default

Name Description
No. color value
Set external trigger.
A1 Brown IN1 Ext. Trigger ↑
Rising timing (↑) or falling timing (↓) can be set.

A2 Red IN2 OFF

A3 Orange IN3 OFF

Input assignable function
A4 Yellow IN4 OFF yyProgram bit0 to bit6
yyClear Error
A5 Green IN5 OFF
yyExt. Master Save
A6 Blue IN6 OFF yyStop saving the SD card
yyOFF (not used)
A7 Purple IN7 OFF

A8 Gray IN8 OFF

A9 White Unused Unused

Unused
A10 Black Unused Unused

B1 Brown OUT1 Total Status (N.O.)

Output assignable function
B2 Red OUT2 BUSY (N.O.) yyTotal Status
yyTot.StatusNG
B3 Orange OUT3 Error (N.C.) yyRUN
yyBUSY
B4 Yellow OUT4 OFF yyReady
yyStrobe
B5 Green OUT5 OFF yyError
yySD card error
B6 Blue OUT6 OFF yyPos. Adj.
yyStatus result of each tool (Tool 1 to 16)
B7 Purple OUT7 OFF yyLogical operation result of each tool (Logic 1 to 4)
yyOFF (not used)
B8 Gray OUT8 OFF

B9 White Unused Unused

Unused
B10 Black Unused Unused

Cable specification : AWG28

The output assignment, N.O./N.C., and input line assignment can be changed.

yyIndividually insulate the unused input-output cables.

yyFor input cables of this sensor, connect with non-contact output (transistor output/SSR output). For
contact output (relay output), incorrect input may occur due to contact bouncing.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 2-13

 Cables

„„
Supplying power to the sensor amplifier „„
Connection diagram
The power terminal block is mounted on the bottom of the
sensor amplifier. zz
Selecting NPN output
When NPN is selected as the Polarity
Use wire whose temperature rating is 80 ºC or Sensor Amplifier External device
higher for the power supply.
24 V line of power terminal

2
Follow the instructions mentioned below to block (DC24V)
avoid damage caused by bad connections. Load
yyThe nominal cross-sectional area of the wire OUT1 to OUT8*
for connecting the power should be 0.8 mm2
Installation and Connection

to 1.3 mm2 (AWG16 to 18). DC24V

yyLength of the insulation removed from the IN1 to IN8*
wire should be around 9mm.
yyThe stripped part of the wire should not be (NPN)
soldered (pre-soldered). 0 V line of power terminal block
yyInsert the wires to the power terminal block (0 V)
completely.
yyWire the power cables directly into the FG of power terminal block
terminal block.
yyUse a rod terminal when using a crimp-type
terminal. * For the terminal number and wiring color, refer to
“●Terminal Number and Wiring Color of the I/O
Cable for the IV2 Series (OP-87906)” (Page 2-13).
1 Insert the wire to B by pushing A in with a zz
Selecting PNP output
screwdriver.
When PNP is selected as the Polarity
Pull the wire out slightly to confirm that it is secured. Sensor Amplifier External device

24 V line of power terminal

block (DC24V)
(PNP)

IN1 to IN8*
DC24V

OUT1 to OUT8*

A Load
0 V line of power terminal block
(0 V)
B
FG of power terminal block
24V
Wire to DC 24 V of the power
24 V
supply. * For the terminal number and wiring color, refer to
0V
0V Wire to 0 V of the power supply. “●Terminal Number and Wiring Color of the I/O
Cable for the IV2 Series (OP-87906)” (Page 2-13).
Ground.
0 V and FG are insulated.

2-14 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Cables

Specification of Sensor I/O Circuit and Current

Input circuit Output circuit

„„
No-voltage input (When NPN output is „„
When NPN output is selected
selected) When NPN is selected as the Polarity, the circuit
When NPN is selected as the Polarity, the circuit
becomes a no-voltage input circuit. External power
supply is not necessary.
becomes an open collector NPN output circuit.
yyMaximum rating : 26.4 V, 50 mA
yyRemaining voltage : 1.5 V or lower
2
yyON voltage : 2 V or lower

Installation and Connection

DC24V
yyOFF current : 0.1 mA or lower
yyON current : 2 mA (short circuit)

Load
DC24V

protection circuit
Overcurrent
Main circuit
+5V
OUT1 - OUT8
*
Main circuit

IN1 - IN8
* 0V

* Refer to “●Terminal Number and Wiring Color of the I/O

0V
Cable for the IV2 Series (OP-87906)” (Page 2-13).
Use by assigning the optional functions to OUT1 to OUT8
* Refer to “●Terminal Number and Wiring Color of the I/O
Cable for the IV2 Series (OP-87906)” (Page 2-13). „„
When PNP output is selected
Use by assigning the optional functions to IN2 to 8 When PNP is selected as the Polarity, the circuit
becomes an open collector PNP output circuit.
„„
Voltage input (When PNP output is selected) yyMaximum rating : 26.4 V, 50 mA
yyRemaining voltage : 2 V or lower
When PNP is selected as the polarity, the circuit
becomes a voltage input circuit. DC24V
yyInput maximum rating : 26.4 V
yyON voltage : 18 V or higher
yyON current : 2 mA (at 24 V)
protection circuit

yyOFF current : 0.2 mA or lower

Overcurrent
Main circuit

DC24V OUT1 - OUT8

*
Load
Main circuit

0V
IN1 - IN8
*
* Refer to “●Terminal Number and Wiring Color of the I/O
Cable for the IV2 Series (OP-87906)” (Page 2-13).
Use by assigning the optional functions to OUT1 to OUT8
0V

* Refer to “●Terminal Number and Wiring Color of the I/O

Cable for the IV2 Series (OP-87906)” (Page 2-13).
Use by assigning the optional functions to IN2 to 8

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 2-15

 Cables

Connecting the power cable of the control

panel

1 Align the arrow mark of the power cable in the

direction of the front of the control panel, and

2
connect the cable to the control panel.
Installation and Connection

Arrow mark

2 Tighten the connector by turning the screw-on

connector in the clockwise direction.

3 Wire to the power supply.

Brown (DC24V)
Panel/Monitor power
DC24V
cable
(2 m/5 m/10 m) Blue (0V)
Cable specification Brown/Blue : AWG24

2-16 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Cables

Connecting the Sensor with the Control When you cannot tighten the screw by hand any more,
use a tool such as pliers for further tightening. Tightening
Panel torque, retorque degree, and acceptable spaces between
connectors are shown below.
yyTightening torque : 0.8 to 1.0 N·m
Connecting directly (1 unit) yyRetightening degree : 5 to 10°
Connects the sensor amplifier and control panel using an yySpaces between connectors (reference value) : 3 mm
Ethernet cable.
If the connector cable tightening is weak,
vibration may loosen the connector and cause 2
bad connections or cable disconnections. Also,

Installation and Connection

the enclosure rating may not be maintained
with loose connection.
Properly follow the procedures above and
tighten the connector completely.

Check the spaces between the Ethernet cable

connector and the cable connector.
Align the pins and the
pin connection

Spaces between connectors

(reference value) : 3 mm

Ethernet cable
Sensor Head OP-87907 (1 m)
OP-87457 (2 m)
OP-87458 (5 m)
OP-87459 (10 m)
OP-88042 (1 m: L type)
OP-88043 (2 m: L type)
OP-88044 (5 m: L type)
OP-88045 (10 m: L type)

yyThe sensors to which the IV2-CP50 can connect

are the IV2 series and IV series.
yyIf connecting with the IV series sensor, the IV2-
CP50 enters IV-M30 mode.
yyFor details on connecting with a sensor of the IV-
HG/IV-H series, refer to “IV-HG/IV-H Series User’s
Manual (Monitor)”.
yyFor details on connecting with a sensor of the
IV-G/IV series, refer to “IV-G/IV Series User’s
Manual (Monitor)”.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 2-17

 Cables

Connecting via Network (Direct Connection (2 units or more)/Network Connection)

Connect single control panel with multiple sensor amplifiers using Ethernet switch.

Control panel for the IV2 series

IV2-CP50
Ethernet switch

2
(Example) NE-Q05
Installation and Connection

Ethernet cable
OP-87907 (1 m)
OP-87457 (2 m)
OP-87458 (5 m)
OP-87459 (10 m)
OP-88042 (1 m: L type)
OP-88043 (2 m: L type)
OP-88044 (5 m: L type)
OP-88045 (10 m: L type)
LAN cable
OP-87950 (1 m)
Sensor Amplifier OP-87951 (3 m)
IV2-G30F/IV2-G30 OP-87952 (5 m)
OP-87953 (10 m)

Sensor head
/amplifier cable
OP-87903 (2 m)
OP-87904 (5 m)
OP-87905 (10 m)

Sensor Head
IV2-G150MA PLC
IV2-G500MA (Communication network)
IV2-G500CA FTP server
IV2-G300CA (Network connection only)
IV2-G600MA

* The method to connect the control panel with a Ethernet cable is the same as “Connecting directly (1 unit)” (Page 2-17).
The sensor and control panel do not support PoE. Supply power using the power cable.

yyThe sensors to which the IV2-CP50 can connect are the IV2 series and IV series.
yyIf connecting with the IV series sensor, the IV2-CP50 enters IV-M30 mode.
yyFor details on connecting with a sensor of the IV-HG/IV-H series, refer to “IV-HG/IV-H Series User’s Manual (Monitor)”.
When using the listed manual, please replace the description of IV-M30 with IV2-CP50.
yyFor details on connecting with a sensor of the IV-G/IV series, refer to “IV-G/IV Series User’s Manual (Monitor)”.
When using the listed manual, please replace the description of IV-M30 with IV2-CP50.

2-18 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3 This chapter explains the contents of the control panel display
and operation of the IV2 series, basic operation flow, and
operation when turning on the power for the first time.
In addition, this chapter explains the method to change which
Basic Operation sensor to connect to, procedures to restore the sensor and
control panel to the default factory settings, and the basic
operation of the control panel.

Basic Operation
Overview of Screen and Operation........................................3-2
Basic Operation Flow.............................................................3-4
Operation when the Power is Turned on................................3-5
Switching and Terminating the Sensor to be Connected.....3-14
Setting to the Factory Default...............................................3-16
Basic operation of the control panel.....................................3-18

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 3-1

 Overview of Screen and Operation

Overview of Screen and Operation

This section explains control panel displays and operation.

For details of what can be set on each screen and its operation, refer to the applicable section.

Additional Learning (learning mode only)

Apply additional images to the learning algorithm.
Run screen
“ Auto Adjustment by the Additional Learning
Images and judges based on the judgment condition.
(Learning Mode Only)” (Page 6-2)
“ Starting an Operation” (Page 5-2)

Hide menu Show menu

3
A
Basic Operation

B C D E Limit Adjustment
Adjusts the judgment threshold.
“ Adjusting Thresholds for
Judgment” (Page 6-16)
Operation Information Display Switch
Displays the operation information. Switches the display method of the
“ Displaying the Operation operation screen.
Information” (Page 5-6) “ Display Method” (Page 5-8)

Histogram Simple display

Processing
time

List display

Count

All screen display

Output
monitor

A (Back to hide) A (Back to hide)

3-2 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Overview of Screen and Operation

Program Details
Checks or initializes the program.
“ Operations that can be performed
with the program functions” (Page
7-3)

Sensor Setup Menu

Sets condition to judge a target.
“ Displaying the Sensor Setup
Menu Screen” (Page 7-2)

Settings Navigator
Sets the program to be used for
3
judgment.

Basic Operation
“ 4 Settings Navigator” (Page
4-1)

B C D E A Sensor Advanced
Controls the sensor advanced settings.
“ Setting the Extended Functions of
the Sensor” (Page 7-11)

Image History
Change Connected Sensor Opens the running image and learning image history
Switches the connected sensor or terminates the sensor (learning mode only) of the sensor.
connection. “Confirming the Images Whose Judgment are NG
“ Switching the Sensor to be Connected” (Page 3-14) (Image History)” (Page 5-18)

B D

External Media
Panel Settings Controls the operation for using either USB memory or an
Sets each function of the control panel. SD card.
“Setting Advanced Control Panel Information” (Page “Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a USB
7-26) Memory” (Page 8-3)

C E

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 3-3

 Basic Operation Flow

Basic Operation Flow

Mounting, Connecting, and Wiring the Sensor with the Control Panel
Mount the sensor and control panel, and then connect and wire the cable.
“2 Installation and Connection” (Page 2-1)

Turning on the power

Turn on the power of the sensor and control panel, and then perform the initial startup operation.
“Operation when the Power is Turned on” (Page 3-5)

3
Settings Navigator
Basic Operation

Create the program to be used for operation in [Settings Navigator] (Sensor Setup).

STEP 1: Setting of image optimization

Set the image optimization settings for clearly imaging a target. Adjust the image settings to clearly
define the differences between an “OK” and “NG” image.
Set the trigger options, adjust the brightness and camera focal distance.
“1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)” (Page 4-8)

STEP 2: Registration of a master image

Capture an “OK” image and register the master image to serve as the reference of judgment.
“2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as a Reference)” (Page 4-18)

STEP 3: Learning settings/Tool settings

Sets the conditions to judge a target.
yyLearning Settings
Sets the detection window on the master image, and performs learning of good and bad parts.
The target OK/NG will be judged based on the learning results.
Up to 16 detection windows and 1 position adjustment window in one program can be set.
“3. Learning Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target in Learning Mode)” (Page 4-24)
yyTool Settings
Set the tools onto the master image and set the threshold for judgment.
Up to 16 detection tools and 1 position adjustment tool in one program can be set.
“3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)” (Page 4-41)

STEP 4: Output assignment

Assign the function to output to each output line.
“4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-149)

Starting the operation/adjustment

Switch the settings screen to the run screen, and start the operation.
“5 Running” (Page 5-1)
If the settings are not appropriate, perform the additional learning or limit adjustment.
“6 Adjusting” (Page 6-1)

3-4 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Operation when the Power is Turned on

Operation when the Power is Turned on

Operation flow when the power is turned (1) When

‌ the power of the control panel is turned on for
the first time, set the display language, date and time,
on and the connection method with the sensor. For the
connection method with the sensor, there is Direct
Connection (“1 unit” or “2 units or more”) and Network
Turning on the power Connection.
yyDirect connection (1 unit)/Direct connection (2 units or
more)
Use this connection type when the device
(1) configuration contains only the sensors and the
control panel, or when network settings are not

Initial startup of the control

required.

“Operation for Initial Startup of the Control Panel
(Direct Connection (1 unit))” (Page 3-6)
3
panel 
“Operation for Initial Startup of the Control Panel

Basic Operation
yyDirect Connection (1 unit) (Direct Connection (2 units or more))” (Page 3-7)
yyDirect Connection (2 units yyNetwork Connection:
or more) Use this connection type if there is another device
yyNetwork Connection: used in the configured local area network. Use a static
IP address to fix the IP address of both the sensor
and the control panel.
(2) (4) (5) 
“Operation for Initial Startup of the Control Panel
(Network Connection)” (Page 3-8)
(2) ‌When the sensor is turned on for the first time, perform
the Initial Sensor Setup.
Initial start-up of the “Operation for initial startup of the sensor” (Page
sensor 3-12)
(3) The
‌ [Sensor Setup Menu] screen opens. Create a
program with the Settings Navigator. After being
(3) created, operation begins.
“4 Settings Navigator” (Page 4-1)
(4) If
‌ the control panel and sensor setup has already been
performed, move to operation automatically by turning
Sensor Setup Menu RUN Connecting... on the power.
“5 Running” (Page 5-1)
(5) When
‌ the connection process fails, the IV2-CP50 will
remain in the connecting screen.
“Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected
with the Sensor” (Page A-17)

The sensor can be independently operated.

Operation when connecting with an IV series

sensor.
yyThe control panel will be restarted and enter
IV-M30 mode.
yyFor details on connecting with a sensor of
the IV-HG/IV-H series, refer to “IV-HG/IV-H
Series User’s Manual (Monitor)”.
yyFor details on connecting with a sensor of
the IV-G/IV series, refer to “IV-G/IV Series
User’s Manual (Monitor)”.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 3-5

 Basic Operation Flow

Operation for Initial Startup of the Control 5 Turn on the power of the sensor.
Panel (Direct Connection (1 unit)) Turn on the power of the sensor before the
control panel is restarted by tapping the [OK]

1 Turn on the power of the control panel. button in step 6.

The screen to select the language opens.

6 Tap the [OK] button.
2 Select the language to be displayed on the
control panel and tap the [OK] button.

3
Basic Operation

The control panel will be restarted to be connected with

the sensor.
[English] is selected as the default setting. yyWhen the control panel is connected with the sensor
If a language other than [English] is selected, the for the first time, perform the Initial Sensor Setup and
[Information] screen opens. Tap the [OK] button. The set the polarity and time of the sensor.
control panel will restart automatically. Refer to “Operation for initial startup of the sensor”
(Page 3-12).
3 Set the current date and time, and tap the [OK] yyFor the second time and beyond that the sensor is
button. connected with the control panel, the operation screen
or [Sensor Setup Menu] screen opens.
yyWhen connection is unavailable with a frozen
connection screen, refer to “Remedy when
direct connection (1 unit) is unavailable” (Page
A-17).
yyFor direct connection (1 unit), the IP address
is automatically set.
yyIf direct connection (1 unit) is used while
the PROFINET function is being used, the
PROFINET function will stop. To use the
PROFINET function, change the configuration
to [Network Connection].
yyMove to the item to be set with the or button
and enter the numbers.
yyTap the [Delete] button to reset the display of the
selected item.

4 Tap the [1 unit] button and tap the [OK] button.

The Complete Configuration screen opens.

3-6 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Basic Operation Flow

Operation for Initial Startup of the Control Panel 5 Turn on the power of the sensor.
(Direct Connection (2 units or more)) Turn on the power of the sensor before the
control panel is restarted by tapping the [OK]

1 Turn on the power of the control panel. button in step 6.

The screen to select the language opens.

6 Tap the [OK] button.
2 Select the language to be displayed on the
control panel and tap the [OK] button.

Basic Operation
The Network Settings screen opens.

[English] is selected as the default setting. 7 Tap the [OK] button.

If a language other than [English] is selected, the
[Information] screen opens. Tap the [OK] button. The
control panel will restart automatically.

3 Set the current date and time, and tap the [OK]
button.

The control panel will be restarted.

After the restart, the sensor connection setup screen opens.
yyWhen the search starts, the IP address of the
sensor amplifier may be changed. If you do
not want to change the IP address, do not start
the search.
yyMove to the item to be set with the or button yyDo not connect a device other than the IV2
and enter the numbers. Series, IV2-CP50 or a PC to the same network.
yyTap the [Delete] button to reset the display of the
selected item.
8 Tap the [Search Sensor] button.
4 Tap the [2 units or more] button and tap the [OK]
button.

The Search Sensor process begins.

The Complete Configuration screen opens. When searching is finished, the searched result will be
displayed.
Up to 16 sensors can be searched for with a
single IV2-CP50.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 3-7

 Basic Operation Flow

9 Select a sensor to be connected and tap the Operation for Initial Startup of the Control
[Connect] button.
Panel (Network Connection)

Only engineers who are knowledgeable about

networks should attempt connection when
connecting the IV2 series to a network.

Setting the network address of the control

panel
3 1 Turn on the power of the control panel.
The screen to select the language opens.
Basic Operation

yyBy tapping the [LED Blinking] button, the

indicator light of the selected sensor head
2 Select the language to be displayed on the
control panel and tap the [OK] button.
blinks alternately (green and red). Use this
function for checking which sensor to connect
to.
yyBy tapping the [Device Name Setting] button,
the screen for entering the device name will
open.
“Device name” (Page 7-19)
yyBy tapping the [Search Sensor] button, the
search sensor process will restart.
yyWhen the control panel is connected with the sensor for
the first time, perform the Initial Sensor Setup and set the
polarity and time of the sensor.
Refer to “Operation for initial startup of the sensor”
(Page 3-12). [English] is selected as the default setting.
yyFor the second time and beyond that the sensor is If a language other than [English] is selected, the
connected with the control panel, the operation screen or [Information] screen opens. Tap the [OK] button. The
[Sensor Setup Menu] screen opens. control panel will restart automatically.
yyIf the IP address of the sensor has not been
set, it is automatically assigned. 3 Set the current date and time, and tap the [OK]
button.
yyWhen connection is unavailable with a frozen
connection screen, refer to “Remedy
when direct connection (2 units or more) is
unavailable” (Page A-18).
yyFor direct connection (2 units or more), the IP
address is automatically set.
yyIf direct connection (2 units or more) is used,
a sensor with PROFINET settings enabled will
not be searched for.

yyMove to the item to be set with the or button

and enter the numbers.
yyTap the [Delete] button to reset the display of the
selected item.

3-8 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Basic Operation Flow

4 Select the [Network Connection] button and tap 7 Set the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default
the [OK] button. Gateway individually, and then tap the [OK]
button.

IP Address

Basic Operation
The [Complete Configuration] screen opens.
The system returns to the [Network Settings] screen.
5 Tap the [OK] button.
8 Tap the [OK] button.

6 Tap each [Edit] button of the IP address, subnet The control panel will be restarted.
mask, and default gateway.
After the restart, the [Sensor Connection Settings]
screen opens.

The screen to set each item opens.

At the initial startup or initialization of the There are two ways to set the sensor to be connected.
control panel, the control panel starts up For details, refer to the following sections.
with “192.168.10.100” as the IP address.
If there is a device with the same IP address zz
When searching for the sensor on the network
on the network, change the IP address before “Searching for a sensor to be connected” (Page 3-10)
connecting the monitor to the network.
zz
When specifying the sensor by the IP address
“Specifying sensor to be connected by IP address”
(Page 3-12)

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 3-9

 Basic Operation Flow

Searching for a sensor to be connected zz

When a sensor without an IP address is found

Automatically searches for a sensor on the network and

connects with it.
yyThe search time is about 10 seconds.
yySearching range and retrievable number of units
are as follows.
yySensor with no IP address (default) : Not Set
A maximum of 8 units can be retrieved within a
range that the BOOTP packet from the sensor
(Page A-30) reaches.

3 yySensor with IP address :

A maximum of 16 units can be retrieved on
the local network to which the control panel is
connected. zz
When a sensor with an IP address is found
Basic Operation

1 Turn on the power of the sensor.

2 Tap the [Search Sensor] button.
IP Address

3 When multiple sensors are found, select the

sensor to be connected with the [◄] or [►]
button.

Searching the sensor begins. 4 Connect to the sensor.

zz
When connecting to the sensor without an IP
address
Tap the [Connect] button.

When searching is finished, the searched result will be

displayed.
If no sensor is found, refer to “When the
connection cannot be established by searching The confirmation screen opens.
for the sensor” (Page A-20).

Tap the [OK] button.

3-10 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Basic Operation Flow

The confirmation screen opens. The system returns to the network setup screen for the
sensor to be connected.

3
Tap the [Yes] button to copy the network settings of the

Basic Operation
control panel. Tap the [Connect] button.
When copying is completed, the information screen
opens. yyWhen the control panel is connected with the sensor for
the first time, perform the Initial Sensor Setup and set the
polarity and time of the sensor.
Refer to “Operation for initial startup of the sensor”
(Page 3-12).
yyFor the second time and beyond that the sensor is
connected with the control panel, the operation screen or
[Sensor Setup Menu] screen opens.

zz
When connecting to a sensor with a set IP
address
Tap the [Connect] button.

Tap the [OK] button.

The sensor network setup screen opens.

The panel connects to the sensor and the run screen or

the [Sensor Setup Menu] screen opens.

Tap each [Edit] button of the IP address, subnet mask,

and default gateway, and set these items individually.
When the IP address of the control panel
is copied, the IP address of the sensor and
control panel will be the same. Make sure to
change the IP address.

IP Address

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 3-11

 Basic Operation Flow

Specifying sensor to be connected by IP Operation for initial startup of the sensor

address When the sensor in the default setting is to be connected,
Used when the IP address of the sensor to be connected is perform the [Initial Sensor Setup] and select the polarity of
defined beforehand. the sensor (NPN or PNP) and date settings.
After the polarity is selected, set up the sensor in Settings
1 Turn on the power of the sensor. Navigator.
For details on polarity, refer to “Specification of Sensor
2 Tap the [Edit] button. I/O Circuit and Current” (Page 2-15).

1 Tap the [Go] button.

3
Basic Operation

3 Enter the IP address of the sensor to be

connected and tap the [Connect] button.
2 Tap the [OK] button.

The run screen or the [Sensor Setup Menu] screen

opens. The “Initial sensor setup” begins. After initialization is
completed, the initialization completion screen opens.
When the connection with the sensor is
unavailable, refer to “When the connection
cannot be established by specifying the sensor”
3 Tap the [OK] button.
(Page A-21).

The [Polarity] screen opens.

3-12 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Basic Operation Flow

4 Select the “Polarity” of the sensor and tap the Operation when changing the sensor
[OK] button.
If the type of sensor head connected to a sensor amplifier
is changed, initialization of the sensor amplifier is required.
Turn on the control panel and initialize the sensor amplifier
following the instructions on the displayed screen.
The program information used by the sensor
head is saved in the sensor amplifier. Before
initializing the sensor amplifier, performing
[Batch Backup] is recommended.

3
For details, refer to “Backing up in a batch”
(Page 8-4).

1 Tap the [Initialize Sensor] button.

Basic Operation
The [Sensor Date/Time] screen opens.

5 Set the current date and time, and tap the [OK]
button.

Initializing the sensor begins. After initialization is

completed, the initialization completion screen opens.

yyMove to the item to be set with the or button

2 Tap the [OK] button.
and enter the numbers.
yyTap the [Delete] button to reset the display of the
selected item.
yyTap the [Copy Panel Date/Time] button to use the
time that is set in the control panel for the sensor.
The [Sensor Setup Menu] screen opens.

6 Tap the [Sensor Setup] button and set up the

program.

The [Sensor Setup Menu] screen opens.

3 Tap the [Sensor Setup] button.

For details, refer to “4 Settings Navigator” (Page

4-1).

For details on the Settings Navigator, refer to “4

Settings Navigator” (Page 4-1).

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 3-13

 Switching and Terminating the Sensor to be Connected

Switching and Terminating the Sensor to be

Connected
Switching the Sensor to be Connected 1 Connect the control panel with the sensor by
direct connection (2 units or more) or via network
When multiple sensors are connected to a control panel, the connection.
sensor displayed on the control panel can be changed.
“When directly connecting with multiple sensors (2
units or more)” (Page 7-29)
“When connecting to the sensor via network
connection” (Page 7-30)

2 Display the control panel menu, and tap the

[Sensor Switch/Disconnect] button.

3 Ethernet switch
Basic Operation

Control panel
IV2-CP50

The list of sensors connected to the control panel will

be displayed.

3 Select the sensor with the desired inspection and

tap the [Connect] button.

yyWhen direct connection (1 unit) is used, this The screen for the selected sensor opens.
function cannot be used.
yyThe IV2 series and IV series can be mixed
and the display changed.
yyWhen connecting to the IV series, the mode
changes to IV-M30 mode.

yyIf the settings for the selected sensor have

not been made, the [Sensor Setup Menu]
screen will be displayed. For details, refer to
“4 Settings Navigator” (Page 4-1).
yyThe sensors displayed on the [Change
Connected Sensor] screen are those
displayed as the search results of the
network search. Sensors added to the
network later can be displayed on the list by
tapping the [Search Sensor] button.

3-14 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Switching and Terminating the Sensor to be Connected

Connection and Disconnection with the Disconnecting from the [Menu] button
Sensor
1 Display the control panel menu, and perform the
following.
Disconnecting in the [Sensor Connection
Settings] screen zz
Direct Connection (1 unit)
Tap the [Disconnect Sensor] button.
1 Display the control panel menu, and tap the
[Panel Settings] button.
zz
3
“Control panel settings” (Page 7-26) Direct Connection (2 units or more)/
Network Connection
2 Tap the [Disconnect] button of the [Sensor Tap the [Sensor Switch/Disconnect] button.
Connection Settings] tab.

Basic Operation
The [Change Connected Sensor] screen opens.
Tap the [Disconnect Sensor] button.

3 Tap the [OK] button.

2 Tap the [OK] button.

The [Sensor Connection Settings] screen opens.

The [Sensor Connection Settings] screen opens.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 3-15

 Setting to the Factory Default

Setting to the Factory Default

Initializing the sensor 4 Tap the [Go] button.

Initializes the information set in the sensor and sets the
sensor to the factory default.
yyThe following settings will not be initialized.
yyPolarity (Switching NPN/PNP) (Page 7-18)
yyNetwork Settings (IP Address / Subnet Mask /
Default Gateway / Port number (TCP)) (Page
7-21)
yyTo initialize the registered programs individually,

3
refer to “Initializing a program” (Page 7-10).

1 Display the control panel menu, and tap the

[Sensor Setup] button. The confirmation screen opens.
Basic Operation

5 Tap the [OK] button.

Initialization begins. After initialization is completed, the
initialization completion screen opens.

6 Tap the [OK] button.

2 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button.

The system returns to the sensor advanced screen.

3 Tap the [Initialize Sensor] button of the [Initialize/

Update] tab.

3-16 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Setting to the Factory Default

Initialization of the Control Panel 4 Tap the [OK] button.

Initializes the information set in the control panel and sets
the control panel to the factory default.
The following settings will not be initialized.
yy“Language” (Page 7-33)
yy“Panel Date/Time” (Page 7-34)

1 Display the control panel menu, and tap the

[Panel Settings] button.
3
Initialization begins. After initialization is completed, the

Basic Operation
initialization completion screen opens.

5 Tap the [OK] button.

2 Tap the [Initialize Panel] button of the [Initialize/

Update] tab.

The control panel will be restarted.

After restarting, set the display language, date and time,
and the connection method with the sensor.
For the connection method with the sensor, there is
Direct Connection (“1 unit” or “2 units or more”) and
Network Connection.
“Operation for Initial Startup of the Control Panel
(Direct Connection (1 unit))” (Page 3-6)
“Operation for Initial Startup of the Control Panel
(Direct Connection (2 units or more))” (Page 3-7)
3 Tap the [Go] button. “Operation for Initial Startup of the Control Panel
(Network Connection)” (Page 3-8)

The confirmation dialog opens.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 3-17

 Basic operation of the control panel

Basic operation of the control panel

Operation of the Image Tool Bar Operation when Displaying Enlarged Images
This section explains the operation method of the “Image By tapping the move button, or dragging images while
Tool Bar” displayed on the upper part of the image display remaining tapped, the image display area will be moved in
of the control panel, and the [Full Screen] button displayed the direction.
at the bottom part.
zz
Sensor Setup Screen
(1) (2) (4)

3 Move
button
Basic Operation

In the enlarged display, the enlarged area currently

displayed is indicated at the bottom left of the
image.

zz
Screen while in operation Enlarged area
(1) (2) (3) (4) currently displayed

Entire image

Operation with Full Screen Display of Image

In the full screen display, only the image and image tool bar
are displayed.

(1) (Reduce) / (Enlarge) button, display

magnification
The display is reduced/enlarged each time you tap on
the button.
Displays the current display magnification.
Enlarging and reducing will be done according
to the center of the image. yyBy tapping the [Hide] button, the image tool bar can be
For operation when enlarging images, refer to the hidden. By tapping the [Show] button, the image tool bar
following. can be displayed again.
“Operation when Displaying Enlarged Images” (Page yyBy tapping the [Back] button, the control panel will exit full
screen display mode.
3-18)
(2) (Window fit) button
Changes the display magnification to 100%.
(3) Button to switch the display method
Switches the display method of the tools.
“Selecting the Display Method of the Detection
Window/Tool Window” (Page 5-10)
(4) [Trigger ON]/[Trigger] button
By tapping this button, an image will be captured using
the internal trigger.
“Main screen for Image Optimization” (Page 4-8)

3-18 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Basic operation of the control panel

Editing the Window zz

Changing the size of the window
By touching either side of the window, or will be
The window displayed when the Settings Navigator displayed. The height or width of the window can be
(learning mode) or the tool (standard mode) is set can be changed by touching and dragging it.
edited to any size or direction.
This section explains how to edit the window using an
example of [Add Window] (Learning Mode).

1 In the [Detection Range Settings] of the Settings

Navigator, tap the [Add Window] button.

3
A window will be displayed at the center of the control
panel. By touching one of the corners of the window, will
be displayed. The size of the window can be changed
by touching and dragging it.

Basic Operation
Window

When the [○ Circle] is selected in the window shape

settings, the size of the circle can be changed by
touching and dragging the outline of the circle.
2 Set the window.
zz
Selecting the shape of the window
[Window Shape] ([□ Rect] or [○ Circle]) can be selected.
Rect Circle

zz
Changing the direction (angle) of the window
By touching and dragging the arrow mark on the upper
right of the window, the direction (angle) of the window
can be changed.
zz
Moving the window
By tapping inside the window, will be displayed.
Move the window by touching and dragging it.

The operations when an image is enlarged by

the [Zoom] button are as follows.
yySlide the slider while tapping inside the tool
window to move the tool window.
yySlide the slider while tapping outside the tool
window to change the image display position.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 3-19

 Basic operation of the control panel

Editing Numbers Setting by inputting a value

The numbers such as a trigger interval value and the
threshold of each tool can be edited by multiple methods. 1 Tap the number field.
Setting by the slider
Touch the slider, and then slide it to the right or left to
set the number.

3
Basic Operation

2 Enter a number and tap the [OK] button.

Slider

Setting by the [-] / [+] button

By tapping the [-] / [+] button, the number decreases/
increases.
By pressing and holding, the number decreases/
increases continuously.

yyBy tapping the [Delete] button, the last digit of the

number can be deleted.
yyBy tapping the [Reset] button, the number before edit
can be recovered.
The range to be entered is displayed in the
number input screen. A number that exceeds
the range to be entered cannot be input.

[-]/[+] button

3-20 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Basic operation of the control panel

Inputting characters 3 Edit the program name.

(1) (2) (3) (4)
The programs or tools to be displayed on the control panel
can be given a user-defined name.
This section explains how to input characters using the
example of [Program Name].

1 On the [Sensor Setup Menu] screen, tap the

[Detail Information] button.
(5)

Basic Operation
(6) (7) (8) (9)
(1) Name
Display the name of the program.
(2) button
Moves the cursor position to the left.
(3) button
Moves the cursor position to the right.
2 Select the program to change the name and tap (4) [Delete] button
the [Edit] button.
Deletes one character to the left of the cursor.
Select the
program (5) Character button
Inputs the character that is tapped.
According to the selection of the [Full-width Kana]/[Half-
width Kana]/[Alphanumeric] button or [Upper-case]/
[Lower-case] button, the characters that can be input
will be different.
(6) [UpperCase] button
Switches the character to be input to lowercase.
(7) [LowerCase] button
Switches the character to be input to lowercase.
(8) [Cancel] button
Discard the character input contents, and close the
character input screen.
(9) [OK] button
Save the character input contents, and close the
character input screen.

4 After editing the name has completed, tap the

[OK] button.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 3-21

 Basic operation of the control panel

Selecting the File/Folder in the USB 5 Select the file to be sent.

(1)
Memory
This section explains how to select a file in the USB memory
connected to the control panel using an example of [Transfer
Program Settings]. (2) (3)

1 Tap the [External Media] button in the [Sensor (5)

Setup Menu] screen. (4) (6)

3
(7)
(8)
Basic Operation

(9) (10)
(1) Folder display
Displays the path of currently displayed folder.
(2) [Up One Folder] button
By tapping the button, you can go to the upper hierarchy
of currently displayed folder.
(3) [Open Folder] button
2 Tap the [Transfer Program Settings] button. By tapping the button when selecting a folder, you can
open the folder.
(4) File / Folder display
Displays the files and folders stored in the currently
displayed folder.
(5) button
Moves to the last page in the folder.
(6) button
Changes which file or folder is selected, moving in the
upward direction.
(7) button
The confirmation screen opens.
Changes which file or folder is selected, moving in the
3 Tap the [OK] button. downward direction.
The folder and file in the USB memory are displayed. (8) button

4 Select the folder that stores the data and tap the Moves to next page in the folder.
(9) [Cancel] button
[Open Folder] button.
Cancels the setting and returns to the [External Media]
Select Folder screen.
(10) [OK] button
Determines the file selection.
Tap
6 After selecting a file, tap the [OK] button and
proceed to the next setting.

The folder and file stored in the selected folder will be

displayed.

3-22 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 4 This chapter explains the functions and operations of the
Settings Navigator.

Settings Navigator
(Setting the Status Conditions)

Settings Navigator..................................................................4-2
4
Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator.............................4-4

Settings Navigator
1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)....................4-8
2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as a
Reference)............................................................................4-18
3. Learning Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of
the Target in Learning Mode)...............................................4-24
3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the
Target of Standard Mode)....................................................4-41
4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to
Output Line)........................................................................4-149

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-1

 Settings Navigator

Settings Navigator

In the Settings Navigator, the settings of the program required for judging the target with the sensor are set in each step.
Select sensor setup mode ([Learning mode] or [Standard mode]) while sequentially following the steps with the navigation
buttons, and adjust the settings using the menu buttons according to the Settings Navigator guide.
Navigation button

4 Navigation button

yyIn the case of [Learning Mode] (IV2-G30F only), step 3 becomes [Learning Settings].
yyIn the case of [Standard Mode], step 3 becomes [Tool Settings].
Settings Navigator

Flow of the Settings Navigator: Learning Mode (IV2-G30F only)

Step 1: Image optimization settings

Set the image optimization settings for clearly imaging a target. Adjust the
image settings to clearly define the differences between an “OK” and “NG”
image.
Set the trigger options, adjust the brightness and camera focal distance.
“1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)” (Page 4-8)

Step 2: Registration of a master image

Capture an image of the “OK” target and register the master image that
becomes standard of reference for the detection window settings and position
adjustment.
“2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as a Reference)” (Page 4-18)

Step 3: Learning Settings

Set the detection window and learn from various images to judge OK/NG
Up to 16 detection windows and 1 position adjustment window in one program
can be set.
“3. Learning Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target in
Learning Mode)” (Page 4-24)

Step 4: Output assignment

Assign the content to output to each output line.
“4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)” (Page
4-149)

4-2 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Settings Navigator

Flow of the Settings Navigator: Standard Mode

Step 1: Image optimization settings

Set the image optimization settings for clearly imaging a target. Adjust the
image settings to clearly define the differences between an “OK” and “NG”
image.
Set the trigger options, adjust the brightness and camera focal distance.
“1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)” (Page 4-8)

Step 2: Registration of a master image

Image an “OK” image and register the master image to serve as the reference
of judgment.
“2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as a Reference)” (Page 4-18) 4

Settings Navigator
Step 3: Tool settings
Set tools to judge a target.
Set the tool onto the master image and set the threshold for judgment. Up to
16 detection tools and 1 Position Adjustment tool in one program can be set.
“3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard
Mode)” (Page 4-41)

Step 4: Output assignment

Assign the content to output to each output line.
“4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)” (Page
4-149)

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-3

 Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator

Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator

Starting the Settings Navigator 6 Tap the [Change Mode] button when changing
the operation mode.
Tap OK in the confirmation screen.
1 Turn on the power of the sensor and control
panel. Settings other than “1. Image Optimization”
and “2. Master Registration” are initialized
When the sensor is in one of the following conditions, when the mode is switched.
the [Sensor Setup Menu] screen will be displayed.
Proceed to step 5.
yyWhen the power is turned on for the first time 7 Tap the [Sensor Setup] button.
yyIf a program has not been set
yyWhen a sensor head has been changed

2 Tap the [Menu] button.

4
Settings Navigator

zz
When a program which has not been set is
selected
The [Select Mode] screen is displayed when the sensor
amplifier is “IV2-G30F”.
The menu bar opens.
Select the mode (Learning Mode/Standard Mode) to be
3 Tap the [Sensor Setup] button. used for judgment and click [OK].
When the mode has been changed in step 6, or the
sensor amplifier is “IV2-G30”, the [Select Mode] screen
will not be displayed.

The confirmation screen opens.

4 Tap the [Yes] button. The startup screen of the “Settings Navigator” opens.
The [Sensor Setup Menu] screen opens.

5 Select the program to be set.

Tap the [Start] button and start setting [1. Image

Optimization].
“ 1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)”
“Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)” (Page (Page 4-8)
7-3)

4-4 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator

zz
When the program which has been set is Image Types of the Settings Navigator
selected
The startup screen of the Settings Navigator opens. The image types displayed in the Settings Navigator screen
Tap the button for the step to be viewed. are as follows.

Image Type

The Settings Navigator screen opens.

4
“1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)” Type Description

Settings Navigator
(Page 4-8)
“2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as a The current taken image.
Reference)” (Page 4-18)
“3. Learning Settings (Setting the Judgment Method
of the Target in Learning Mode)” (Page 4-24) The image registered as the master.
(Learning Mode)
“3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method
Test operation screen.
of the Target of Standard Mode)” (Page 4-41) Displays the taken image.
(Standard Mode)
“4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting The image viewed from files or image
to Output Line)” (Page 4-149) history.
zz
Settings “Navi Guide”
Select [OFF] or [ON] and change the display of the
Settings “Navi Guide”.

By selecting [ON], [Settings Navi Guide] opens

automatically according to the step progress of the
Settings Navigator or operation contents.
[Settings Navi Guide] is displayed automatically only
once during the initial setup. By finishing the Settings
Navigator and restarting, it will appear again.
By tapping displayed in the screen, [Settings
Navi Guide] can be displayed at any time.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-5

 Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator

Settings Navigator screen and operation flow

This section explains the screens displayed in the Settings Navigator and the operation flow.
For details of the contents that can set on each setting screen and its operation, refer to the applicable section.
When the [Learning Mode] If programs are not being set When the [Standard Mode]
program is selected program is selected

4
Settings Navigator

Step 1: Image Optimization

“1. Image Optimization (Clearly
Image a Target)” (Page 4-8)

2. Master Registration
“2. Master Registration (Registering an
Image as a Reference)” (Page 4-18)

3. Learning Step 3: Tool

Settings Settings
“3. Learning “3. Tool Settings
Settings (Setting the (Setting the Judgment
Judgment Method Method of the Target
of the Target in of Standard Mode)”
Learning Mode)” (Page 4-41)
(Page 4-24)

4. Output Assignment
“4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of
Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-149)

4-6 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator

Finishing the Settings Navigator Finishing without completing the step

Finishing by completing all steps 1 Tap the [Save] button.

1 Set all steps in the Settings Navigator.
2 Tap the [Complete] button.

zz
When the required settings are completed
4
The confirmation dialog to save opens.

Settings Navigator
zz
When the required settings are not completed
The confirmation dialog to finish opens.
The confirmation dialog to save opens. yyBy tapping the [Yes] button, the confirmation dialog to
save opens.
3 Tap the [Yes] button. yyBy tapping the [No] button, the system returns to the
The settings in the Settings Navigator will be saved and Settings Navigator screen.
the system returns to the [Sensor Setup Menu] screen.
The required settings have not been
yyBy tapping the [No] button, the confirmation completed yet. Even if the [OK] button is
dialog to cancel the settings opens. By tapping tapped and the setting contents are saved
the [Yes] button, the Settings Navigator closes in the program, proper operation cannot be
without saving the settings. performed.
yyBy tapping the [Cancel] button, the system
returns to the Settings Navigator screen.
2 Tap the [Yes] button.
The settings in the Settings Navigator will be saved and
the system returns to the [Sensor Setup Menu] screen.
yyBy tapping the [No] button, the confirmation
dialog to cancel the settings opens. By tapping
the [Yes] button, the Settings Navigator closes
without saving the settings.
yyBy tapping the [Cancel] button, the system
returns to the Settings Navigator screen.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-7

 1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)

1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)

Setting the Image Optimization Main screen for Image Optimization

In this section, adjust the Image Optimization settings This section explains the main screen for Image
used for taking an image of the target. Adjust the image for Optimization.
defining differences in an “OK” and “NG” image. (1) (2)
zz
Trigger Options
A trigger in this manual indicates the timing to start
imaging with the built-in camera of the sensor. In the
(3) (6)
Trigger Options, set the timing to image a target within
(4)
the field of view of this device. This device can image a (7)
target at any timing and can image continuously.
“Setting the Trigger Options” (Page 4-9) (8)
“Checking the Field of View and installed distance” (5)
(Page 2-2) (9)

4 zz
Auto Brightness Adjustment
The sensor images a target by receiving the reflected
light from the built-in light exposed to a target using the
Settings Navigator

CMOS image sensor. (10) (11)

In the Auto Brightness Adjustment, a target can be
(1) Navigation button
imaged with an appropriate brightness by automatically
Moves steps in the Settings Navigator.
adjusting the light intensity and shutter speed according
to the shape and surface condition (color, shininess, (2) [Save] button
material) of the target. Finishes the Settings Navigator and returns to the
“Auto Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-12) [Sensor Setup Menu] screen.
(3) Image tool bar
zz
Focus Adjustment “Operation of the Image Tool Bar” (Page 3-18)
Adjusts the focus of lens. Adjusts the focus to clearly
image the shape of the target. Auto focus can adjust the (4) [Trigger ON] button
focusing position automatically. If [External] is selected for [Trigger Options] or [Internal
“Focus Adjustment” (Page 4-12) Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to [Yes], the [Trigger
ON] button will be displayed.
Tapping the button will capture an image using the
internal trigger. Tap this button to image a target in a
situation where an external trigger cannot be input.
“Internal Trigger Control with IN1 Input” (Page 7-15)
(5) Image taken by the sensor
Displays an image taken by the sensor. The image
type to be displayed differs depending on the settings
screen.
(6) [Adv. Settings] tab
Displays the advanced settings menu for image
optimization.
“Advanced Settings for Image Optimization” (Page
4-14)
(7) [Trigger Options] button
Adjust the settings for the Trigger Options.
“Setting the Trigger Options” (Page 4-9)
(8) [Auto Brightness Adjustment] button
Automatically adjusts brightness.
“Auto Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-12)
(9) [Focus Adjustment] button
Automatically adjusts focus.
“Focus Adjustment” (Page 4-12)
(10) [Full Screen] button
“Operation with Full Screen Display of Image” (Page
3-18)
(11) [Next to STEP2] button
Proceeds to “2. Master Registration”.
“2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as a
Reference)” (Page 4-18)

4-8 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)

Setting the Trigger Options

A trigger in this manual indicates the timing to start imaging with the built-in camera of the sensor. In the Trigger Options,
set the timing to image a target within the field of view of this device. This device can image a target at any timing and can
image continuously.

Settings for the Trigger Options

Items Description Setting range

yyInternal (default)
Starts imaging continuously within the interval
specified in the trigger interval setting.
If [Internal Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set
to [Yes], an external input can control the internal
Trigger Type Select the type of timing used to take an image.
trigger.
yyExternal
Starts imaging when receiving an external trigger
4
from a photoelectric sensor or a PLC. The external

Settings Navigator
trigger can be synchronized with a target’s motion.
The time (trigger delay) between inputting the
trigger and when imaging starts can be set.

Set when [Internal] is selected in the trigger type

setting. 1 to 10000 ms
Trigger Interval
Set an interval (cycle) at which the sensor (default: 50 ms)
automatically images.

Set when [External] is selected in the trigger type

setting.
Used when the output timing of the sensor used 0 to 10000 ms
Trigger Delay as an external trigger and the imaging timing of (default: 0 ms)
this device cannot be synchronized. This device
starts imaging after the set trigger delay time of the
timing input passes.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-9

 1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)

zz
Internal trigger
Trigger Interval Trigger Interval
(1)
Internal trigger

(2)
Imaging/internal
processing
(3)
Status output

4
(1) The trigger interval is determined according to the trigger interval settings.
(2) Perform internal processing after the imaging.
(3) Output the status result.
€ [Internal Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to [Yes]
€If
Settings Navigator

IN1
(1) Trigger Interval Trigger Interval

Internal trigger

(2)
Imaging/internal
processing
(3)
Status output

(1) The sensor will trigger within the period of “internal trigger interval + 1ms” after IN1 is activated (the sensor will
trigger while IN1 is input). Thereafter the trigger interval is determined according to the trigger interval settings.
(2) Perform internal processing after the imaging.
(3) Output the status result.
“Internal Trigger Control with IN1 Input” (Page 7-15)

zz
External trigger
Trigger Delay

(1)
External trigger

(2)
Imaging/internal
processing
(3)
Status output

(1) Start imaging by inputting the trigger signal from another device.
When the trigger delay interval is set, the imaging start time will be delayed by the specified period.
(2) Perform internal processing after the imaging.
(3) Output the status result.

4-10 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)

Setting the Trigger Options 5 Set [Trigger Interval] or [Trigger Delay].

The setting of [Trigger Interval] and [Trigger
1 Start the Settings Navigator. Delay] can be changed by using the slider or
inputting the value.
“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-4) “Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20)
2 Display the main screen for Image Optimization. zz
When [Internal] is selected in step 4
“Settings Navigator screen and operation flow” (Page
Set the trigger interval within the range of 1 to 10000
4-6)
ms.
3 Tap the [Trigger Options] button.

Settings Navigator
A trigger error occurs in the following cases:
4 Select the trigger type. [Trigger Accept Timing] is set to [Send after
BUSY Output OFF] and busy output is ON
Select the [Internal] or [External] button. An internal trigger is input when ready
output is OFF for [Link with READY Output].
“Trigger Accept Timing” (Page 7-17)
“Internal trigger” (Page 10-4)
“Error Messages” (Page A-9)

zz
When [External] is selected in step 4
Set the trigger delay within the range of 1 to 10000 ms.

6 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for the Image
Optimization.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-11

 1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)

Auto Brightness Adjustment Focus Adjustment

In Auto Brightness Adjustment, the target can be imaged Adjusts the focusing position for clearly imaging the shape
with an appropriate brightness by automatically adjusting of a target.
the light intensity, the exposure time and the imaging
mode according to the shape and surface condition (color, yyPlace a target at the appropriate position.
shininess, material) of the target. “Mounting the Sensor” (Page 2-2)
yyDo not move the target during focus
Do not move the target during auto brightness adjustment. The focus may not be adjusted
adjustment. The focus may not be adjusted correctly.
correctly.

1 Start the Settings Navigator.

1 Start the Settings Navigator. “Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-4)
“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-4)
2 Display the main screen for Image Optimization.
4 2 Display the main screen for Image Optimization.
“Settings Navigator screen and operation flow” (Page
“Settings Navigator screen and operation flow” (Page
4-6)
4-6)
3 Tap the [Focus Adjustment] button.
Settings Navigator

3 Tap the [Auto Brightness Adjustment] button.

When [Auto Focus Adj Pos] (Page 7-12) is set

After completing the adjustment, the [Brightness to [Common], the following dialog opens.
Adjustment] screen opens.

The focusing position is adjusted automatically.

yyIf you touch on the screen, the brightness

around the touched area will be adjusted
optimally.
“Advanced Brightness Adjustment” (Page
4-15)
yyThe brightness of an image can be adjusted
manually.
“Advanced Brightness Adjustment” (Page
4-15)
yyDuring the auto brightness adjustment, the
sensor automatically images a target by
inputting the internal trigger regardless of the
Trigger Options settings.

4 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for the Image
Optimization.

4-12 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)

4 Adjust the focusing position as needed. 5 When setting has completed, tap the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for Image
zz
When the focusing position is to be adjusted
Optimization.
automatically again
When the [Cancel] button is tapped, the focus will be
When the [Automatic Focus Adjustment] button is
reset to the previous position.
tapped, the focusing position is adjusted automatically
again. yyDuring auto adjustment, imaging will be
performed automatically using the internal
trigger regardless of the settings of the Trigger
Options (Page 4-9). Also, when continuous
lighting (Page 4-17) is set, imaging will be
performed with flash lighting.
yyAuto adjustment searches positions that
can be focused over the entire field of view
regardless of the settings of the imaging area

4
(Page 4-15).

Settings Navigator
zz
When the focusing position is to be adjusted
manually
Adjust the focus using the slider.
“Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20)

zz
When multiple focusing positions exist
When there are multiple focusing positions, the sensor
adjusts to the position closest to the sensor. The
available focusing positions will be indicated with ( )
mark.
To change the focusing position to a different position,
tap the [Next Pos] or the indicator ( ) of the focusing
position.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-13

 1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)

Advanced Settings for Image Optimization

Adjust the image optimization settings using the advanced settings menu.

Advanced Settings for Image Optimization

Items Description Setting range Ref.

yyIV2-G500CA : 1 to 105
Brightness
yyIV2-G500MA : 1 to 130
Adjusts the brightness of the image
yyIV2-G150MA : 1 to 115
manually.
yyIV2-G300CA : 1 to 115
(default: 20)
yyIV2-G600MA : 1 to 125

yyNormal (default)

4
This mode is the basic imaging mode. The
target can be imaged with less noise.
Advanced Brightness yyHDR
4-15
Adjustment Imaging Mode Select to image a target such as a metal that
Settings Navigator

Selects imaging mode for sensor. reflects light and has high contrast.
yyHighGain
Select to shorten the exposure time and when
the imaging environment is in a dark place.
Lowers imaging quality due to high gain.

Adjusts automatically the brightness so that the

Adjusting automatically by
brightness around the tapped image can be
tapping the target
optimal.

yyEntire (default)
Sets the imaging area (image size Sets the field of view of the imaging area for
of the sensor). When the imaging the sensor to the entire available area.
Imaging Area
area is reduced, the shutter speed yyPartial 4-15
(standard mode only)
and judgment process become Edit a tool window and set a user-defined area
faster. in the sensor's field of view as the imaging
area.

Digital Zoom Sets the digital zoom. OFF (default)/2x/4x

Specify a user-defined area. 4-16

Specify an area in the sensor's field
Zoom Area To move the zoom area to the center of the
of view as the zooming area.
screen, tap the [To image center] button.

yyFlash (default)
The built-in light lights within the exposure
when imaging.
yyContinuous
Selects lighting mode for built-in (other than IV2-G300CA/IV2-G600MA)
Lighting 4-17
light. The built-in light lights continuously regardless
of specified exposure time when imaging a
target.
yyOFF
Turns OFF the built-in light.

If it is difficult to extract the edge

(outline) of targets of different
colors, select a filter for a color OFF (default)/
Color Filters 4-17
or a complementary color to be Red/Green/Blue/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
detected.
(Color type only)

4-14 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)

Advanced Brightness Adjustment Imaging Area (Standard Mode Only)

1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab. 1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab.
“Main screen for Image Optimization” (Page 4-8) “Main screen for Image Optimization” (Page 4-8)

2 Tap the [Advanced Brightness Adjustment] 2 Tap the [Imaging Area] button.
button.

Settings Navigator
3 Select type of imaging area.
3 Adjust the brightness by the following methods. If [Partial] is selected, edit the imaging area.
zz
Tapping the [Auto Brightness Adjustment] button
The same as “Auto Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-12).
Adjust automatically the brightness so that the entire
image becomes optimal.
zz
Adjusting automatically by tapping the target
If you touch on the screen, the brightness around the
touched position will be optimized automatically.
Used when the adjustment results of the [Auto Brightness Imaging Area
Adjustment] button are too bright or dark due to the
influence of the image brightness other than the target.
zz
Setting the “Brightness” and “Imaging Mode”
Adjust the brightness manually according to the
If a tool has been set, a rectangular area
combination of the brightness slider and imaging mode.
containing tool windows of all tools which
“Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20)
have been set will be displayed by dotted line
rectangle as [Actv Range]. The imaging area
cannot be set smaller than the active range.
To narrow down the imaging area, change
the placement of the tool windows within the
imaging area.

For details about how to edit the tool window,

refer to “Editing the Window” (Page 3-19).

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

When an imaging area is specified, the area
outside the specified area will be displayed in
yyAuto adjustment optimizes the imaging mode and black.
brightness automatically.
yyThe exposure time will be calculated automatically.

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

When the master image is registered and Outside of specified
settings other than Trigger Options and imaging area
area are changed, a confirmation message that
recommends you to re-register the master image
opens. Tap the [OK] button and re-register the
master image.
“2. Master Registration (Registering an
Image as a Reference)” (Page 4-18)

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-15

 1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)

Digital Zoom 4 Set [Zoom Area] as needed.

1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab.
“Main screen for Image Optimization” (Page 4-8)

2 Tap the [Digital Zoom] button.

zz
Zoom Area

4 The zoom area for digital zoom is specified.

Tap the zoom area to set the area to be zoomed.
Settings Navigator

3 Set the [Zoom Magnification].

Zoom area

To move the zoom area to the center of the screen, tap

the [To image center] button.
If the zoom area is moved, the imaging area
and tool window are moved together. It is
recommended to re-register the master image
and re-set the tool.

5 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

4-16 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)

Lighting Color Filters (color type only)

1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab. The color filters are not applied to the following.
yyDetection window (learning mode)
“Main screen for Image Optimization” (Page 4-8) yyColor area tool (standard mode)

2 Tap the [Lighting] button.

1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab.
“Main screen for Image Optimization” (Page 4-8)

2 Tap the [Color Filters] button.

Settings Navigator
3 Select the lighting mode between [Flash]/
[Continuous]/[OFF].

The image changes to monochrome. In the example

in the figure above, the red and blue outlines become
unclear.

3 Select the color to apply the color filter.

Select the filter for the color or the complementary color
to be detected. Select red here.

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

yyIf the lighting mode is changed, re-register the
master image and re-set the tool. Otherwise a
correct judgment may not be possible.
yyWhen [Continuous] has been selected, the
light goes off (for approximately 0.2 ms) right
before imaging.
yyWhen the IV2-G300CA/IV2-G600MA is used,
[Continuous] cannot be selected. The color filter corresponding to the selected color will
be applied. The red color becomes brighter and the
outline with the blue color becomes clear.

Clarified
outline

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-17

 2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as a Reference)

2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as a Reference)

Main screen for Master Registration Register Live Image as Master

This section explains the main screen for master image
registration. 1 Start the Settings Navigator.
(1) (2) “Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-4)

2 Display the main screen for the Master

Registration.
(3) (5) “Settings Navigator screen and operation flow” (Page
4-6)
(6)
3 Place the target that will be used as the reference
for judgment in the imaging position.
(4)
(7)
4 Tap the [Register Live Image as Master] button.
4 (8)
Settings Navigator

(9) (10) (11)

(1) Navigation button

Moves steps in the Settings Navigator.
(2) [Save] button
Finishes the Settings Navigator and returns to the
[Sensor Setup Menu] screen.
(3) Image tool bar
“Operation of the Image Tool Bar” (Page 3-18)
(4) Master Image Switches to the [LIVE] screen.
Displays a master image. If no master image is
registered, [No Master Image] will be displayed. 5 Image the target.
(5) [Advanced Settings] tab If [Trigger Options] is set to [External] or [Internal
Displays the advanced settings menu for Master Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to [Yes], input the
Registration. external trigger.
“Advanced Settings for Master Registration” (Page If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the [Trigger
4-22) ON] button to take an image of the target using the
internal trigger.
(6) [Register Live Image as Master] button
Registers an image taken by the sensor as the master
image.
“Register Live Image as Master” (Page 4-18)
(7) [Register From History] button
Registers an image from the image history as the
master image. 6 Check the displayed taken image and tap the
[Register this image] button.
“Register From a Running Image History” (Page
4-19)
(8) [Register From a File Image] button
Registers an image in USB memory as the master
image.
“Register From a File Image” (Page 4-20)
(9) [Full Screen] button
“ Operation with Full Screen Display of Image” (Page
3-18)
(10) [Back] button
Returns to the settings screen for Image Optimization.
“1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target)”
(Page 4-8)
The confirmation dialog for the Master Registration
(11) [Next to STEP3] button opens.
Proceeds to “3. Learning Settings” (Learning Mode) or
“3. Tool Settings” (Standard Mode).
“3. Learning Settings (Setting the Judgment Method
of the Target in Learning Mode)” (Page 4-24)
“3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of
the Target of Standard Mode)” (Page 4-41)

4-18 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as a Reference)

7 Tap the [OK] button. Register From a Running Image History

Registers an image from the image history saved in the
memory within the sensor as a master image.
yyTo register the master image from the image
history, the image to be registered as a master
image in the [Running Image History] must be
saved.
“Confirming the Images Whose Judgment
are NG (Image History)” (Page 5-18)

1 Start the Settings Navigator.

“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-4)
The master image will be registered and the sensor will
return to the main screen for Master Registration.
The settings for the disabled outlines (Page
2 Display the main screen for Master Registration.
“Settings Navigator screen and operation flow” (Page
4
4-53, Page 4-86) will be initialized. Set the 4-6)

Settings Navigator
outlines that will be disabled again as needed.
3 Tap the [Register From History] button.

The [Register From Image History] screen opens.

4 Select the image to be registered as the master

image and tap the [OK] button.

Select the
image

For details of how to operate the screen, refer

to “Loading and confirming saved images”
(Page 5-20).
The selected image will be displayed.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-19

 2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as a Reference)

5 Check the displayed image and tap the [Register] Register From a File Image
button.
Registers an image in USB memory as the master
image.
yyThe file to be registered as the master
image must be saved in the media.
yyThe file types which can be registered as a
master image are batch backup files (*.iv2a)
and image capture files (*.iv2p).
“Saving the Sensor Settings and Images
to a USB Memory” (Page 8-3)
yyIV2-G30F files (*.iv2a, *.iv2p) cannot
be registered as master images for the
IV2-G30.

4 The confirmation screen opens.

If the imaging area of the loaded image is
1 Start the Settings Navigator.
“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-4)
different, the confirmation dialog opens. If an
Settings Navigator

area that has not been imaged is registered, the

area will be displayed in black. 2 Display the main screen for Master Registration.
“Settings Navigator screen and operation flow” (Page
4-6)
6 Tap the [OK] button.
3 Tap the [Register From a File Image] button.

The new master image will be registered and the sensor

returns to the main screen for Master Registration. Connect the USB memory to the control
panel beforehand.

The data in the USB memory will be displayed.

4-20 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as a Reference)

4 Select the file to be registered as the master zz

When using an image capture file (*.iv2p)
Select the file to be registered as the master image and
image.
tap the [OK] button.
zz
When using a batch backup file (*.iv2a)
Select the file to be registered as the master image and
tap the [OK] button.

Select the
file

Select the
file

“Selecting the File/Folder in the USB Memory” (Page

3-22)
4
5 Check the displayed image and tap the [Register]

Settings Navigator
“Selecting the File/Folder in the USB Memory” (Page
3-22) button.
Select the image type to be imported from the following.
Select the [Target program] only when selecting
[Learning Image History].
yyRunning Image History
yyMaster Image
yyOK/NG Registration Image
yyLearning Image History

The confirmation screen opens.

If the imaging area of the loaded image is
different, the confirmation dialog opens. If an
area that has not been imaged is registered,
the area will be displayed in black.

A list of images saved as the image type of the selected

file is displayed.
6 Tap the [OK] button.
Select the image to be registered as the master image
and tap the [OK] button.

Select the
image

The new master image will be registered and the sensor

returns to the main screen for Master Registration.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-21

 2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as a Reference)

Advanced Settings for Master Registration 4 Set the tool window to be a reference for the
brightness correction.
“Editing the Window” (Page 3-19)
Advanced Settings for Master Registration
zz
Brightness correction
The impact from changes in lighting can be reduced by
setting the brightness level for the master image.
Region
yyBrightness correction can be set only when to be the
a master image is registered. brightness
yyBrightness correction is not applied to the correction
following: standard
yyDetection window for learning mode
(color type)

4 yyColor Area tool, Color Average tool, and

Protrusion/Deviation tool (color type)
For the region to be a reference of brightness
correction, specify the following.
Settings Navigator

Brightness correction yyA region with average medium brightness.

A region with strong shininess and
reflection or a region which is too dark may
1 Start the Settings Navigator. not be corrected properly.
“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-4) yyA region with a constant imaging status
which does not change, such as device
2 Display the main screen for Master Registration. parts other than the target’s.
“Settings Navigator screen and operation flow” (Page
4-6)
5 Tap the [Test run] button.
3 Select the [Adv. Function] tab and tap the
[Enable] button.

Insert a shield or something similar and if the brightness

in the specified standard region changes, check that the
brightness for the entire image is corrected.

6 Tap [Before Corr]/[After Corr] and check the run

status before and after brightness correction.

4-22 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as a Reference)

7 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the brightness correction settings
screen.
yyTo not use brightness correction, tap the
[Disable] button on the screen from step 3.
yyBrightness correction corrects the brightness
of the entire image so that the average
brightness of the window that is used as the
the brightness standard is the same as the
brightness of the master image.

8 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

Settings Navigator

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-23

 3. Learning Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target in Learning Mode)

3. Learning Settings
(Setting the Judgment Method of the Target in Learning Mode)

This section explains the setting methods of “Step 3. Flow of Learning Settings Operation
Learning Settings” in learning mode.
For “Step 3: Tool Settings” in standard mode, refer to “3. Start settings (not learned)
Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target
of Standard Mode)” (Page 4-41). Status that cannot
OK NG be judged
The learning mode is the mode to recognize the difference
automatically to identify by registering an “OK” and “NG”
image for learning.
By performing the additional learning, stability can be Unregistered Unregistered
improved as well.
“Auto Adjustment by the Additional Learning (Learning
Mode Only)” (Page 6-2)
Learning Settings
In the learning settings, learning will be executed after

4 setting the detection windows used to identify OK/NG parts

(images where the differences are clear) and registering an
“OK” image and a “NG” image.
Detection Window Settings (Page 4-26)

Up to 16 detection windows and 1 position adjustment

Settings Navigator

window in one program can be judged at a single time.

The position adjustment window operation is the Learning OK/NG Targets (Page 4-35)
same as the Position Adjustment tool.
“Position Adjustment tool” (Page 4-43)

Registered as OK Registered as NG

Execute Learning OK/NG Targets

Settings completed (Learning OK/NG Targets completed)

Status that can be
OK NG judged

4-24 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Learning Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target in Learning Mode)

Main Screen for the Learning Settings (1) Navigation button

Moves steps in the Settings Navigator.
This section explains the main screen for the learning (2) [Save] button
settings. Finishes the Settings Navigator and returns to the
(1) (2) [Sensor Setup Menu] screen.
(3) Image tool bar
“Operation of the Image Tool Bar” (Page 3-18)
(3) (4) Master Image
Displays the master image and detection window. If a
(5) search range is set, the tool window which indicates the
search range (light blue) will be displayed.
(5) [Detection Window Settings] button
(4) (6) Adjusts the settings of the detection window and
position adjustment window.

4
(7)
“Detection Window Settings” (Page 4-26)
(6) [Learning OK/NG Targets] button
Performs the imaging and learning of an OK or NG

Settings Navigator
(8) (9) (10) (11) target.
“Learning OK/NG Targets” (Page 4-35)
(7) Condition Display
Displays the current condition of the learning settings.
Show Status

Detection
The detection window is not set.
Window Not Set

OK target/NG target learning has not

Not learned
been completed.

OK target/NG target learning has

Learned
been completed.

Relearning Relearning is needed by setting

required changes.

(8) [Full Screen] button

“Operation with Full Screen Display of Image” (Page
3-18)
(9) [Navi] button
Displays the Settings Navigator guide.
(10) [Back] button
Returns to the master registration screen.
“2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as a
Reference)” (Page 4-18)
(11) [Next to STEP4] button
Proceeds to the Output Assignment settings.
“4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting
to Output Line)” (Page 4-149)

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-25

 3. Learning Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target in Learning Mode)

Detection Window Settings

Setting items for the detection window settings

zz
[Add Window] button
Items Description Setting range

yyRect (default)
Specifies with a rectangular window. A user-defined
Selects the window shape for the area size, position, and angle can be specified with
that will be used to identify and learn stylus.
Window Shape
the differences of the target to be
detected. yyCircle
Specifies with a circular window. A user-defined

4
size and position can be specified with stylus.

Add Mask Adds a rectangular/circular mask

Settings Navigator

region in the detection window frame. yyRect (default)

Areas inside the mask region are Specifies a rectangular mask region or mask cutting
Mask excluded from learning on the target to region. A user-defined size, position, and angle can
Shape be detected. be specified with stylus.
Mask yyCircle
Specifies a circular mask region or mask cutting
Cut Mask Removes a rectangular/circular area region. A user-defined size and position can be
from the mask. Inside the area cut from specified with stylus.
the mask, the mask is disabled and yySetting counts
learning for the target is enabled in the A mask can be applied or cut up to 20 times.
Cut Shape region.

A user-defined name such as the name

of a target can be set for the window.
Window Name Up to 16 characters can be set.
Window names can be checked on the
run screen.

zz
[Add Pos. Adj.] button: [Settings] tab
Items Description Setting range

yyRect (default)
Specifies with a rectangular window. A user-defined
Select the shape of the window to size, position, and angle can be specified with
Window stylus.
specify the area of the target used as
Shape
the position adjustment reference. yyCircle
Specifies with a circular window. A user-defined
Edit size and position can be specified with stylus.
Window
yyEntire (default)
Specifies the area to search the image Specifies the entire imaging area as the search
for the target used as a reference of range.
Search
position adjustment. By specifying a
Range yyPartial
narrower area as the search range, the
processing time will be shortened. Specifies the search range to a user-defined size in
the imaging area.

4-26 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Learning Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target in Learning Mode)

Items Description Setting range

yyUndo
The previous operation can be cancelled.
You can undo up to 5 prior operations. (UNDO)
Unnecessary outlines which disrupt the
yyClear
Remove stability of the position adjustment can
Initializes and removes all disabled outlines. (All
Outline be disabled. Specifies by tracing the
outlines are enabled).
extracted outline with stylus.
yyEraser Width
Selects the eraser width (light/medium/heavy) used
when removing unnecessary outlines.
Fine Tune
Outline yyHigh
Extracts an outline of the image with low contrast.
Used when an outline you wish to detect cannot be

Sensitivity
The sensitivity of the outline extraction
for a target can be selected.
extracted with Normal or Low sensitivity.
yyNormal (default) *
Extracts the standard outline.
4

Settings Navigator
yyLow
Reduces the extracted volume of the outline. Used
in situations where an outline is not necessary for
the position adjustment.

Adjusts a threshold (matching rate)

which judges whether the position
adjustment succeeds or fails. During
0 to 100
Limit Adjustment threshold adjustment, the system
(default: 50)
switches to Test mode so that the
threshold can be adjusted to an
applicable value for operation.

* If digital zoom is set to [Zoom Magnification: x4] on the IV2-G300CA/IV2-G600MA, the default value is [High].

zz
[Add Pos. Adj.] button: [Adv. Settings] tab

Items Description Setting range

Sets the allowable range for the position
adjustment to rotate.
If the angle of the target exceeds the position
adjustment’s rotation range, the status result
of the position adjustment will be NG and 0 to ±180°
Rotation Range adjustment will not occur. (Unit: 1°)
yyIf the rotation range is set wide, the (default: ±20°)
acceptable range of variation in the angles
at which a target can be placed is wider.
yyIf the rotation range is set to be narrow, the
processing time can be shortened.
yyON (default)
The tool window will search with the range ±
few degrees wider than the setting value of
Select whether or not to allow a margin for a rotation range.
Margin
limited angle set in Rotation Range.
yyOFF
The tool window will search only within the set
rotation range.
yyHigh Accuracy
The position adjustment can be performed
The position adjustment capability of the with high accuracy. Misalignment of the
Search Algorithm position adjustment window can be selected position adjustment can be decreased.
depending on the target. yyHigh speed (default)
Position adjustment can be performed faster
than in high accuracy mode.

zz
[Edit] button
Edit the selected detection window.
zz
[Delete] button
Delete the selected detection window.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-27

 3. Learning Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target in Learning Mode)

Detection window settings screen Procedure for Detection Window Settings

1 Tap the [Detection Window Settings] button.

(1) “Main Screen for the Learning Settings” (Page 4-25)
(3)
2 Tap the [Add Window] button.
(2) (4)

4 (5)
(1) Image tool bar
(6)

“Operation of the Image Tool Bar” (Page 3-18)

Settings Navigator

(2) Master Image

Displays the master image and detection windows. If
a search range is set, a window which indicates the 3 Select the detection window shape and set the
position, size, and angle according to a target.
search range (light blue) will be displayed.
“Editing the Window” (Page 3-19)
(3) Window operation button
Performs adding/editing/deleting of the detection
window and position adjustment window.
(4) Window selection button
Select the window to confirm/edit/delete the setting
contents.
(5) [Full Screen] button
“Operation with Full Screen Display of Image” (Page
3-18) Set a position,
(6) [OK] button size, and
Returns to the main screen of the learning settings. angle

The detection window size should be set

according to the size of the image where the
difference between an “OK” and “NG” target
is clear.
“Optimizing the Size of the Detection
Window” (Page 6-20)

4 Add or Adjust the [Mask] as needed.

“Mask” (Page 4-29)

5 Perform [Edit Window Name] as needed.

“Edit Window Name” (Page 4-30)

6 Perform [Add Pos. Adj.] as needed.

“Procedure to Add the Position Adjustment Window”
(Page 4-31)
If misalignment of the detection window
occurs because of target position
misalignment when optimizing the detection
window, set the position adjustment window.
“Procedure to Add the Position
Adjustment Window” (Page 4-31)

7 Tap the [OK] button.

Returns to the [Detection Window Settings] screen.

8 Tap the [OK] button.

Returns to the main screen of [Learning Settings].

4-28 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Learning Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target in Learning Mode)

„„
Mask 5 Tap the [Cut Mask] button to remove a mask
region.
1 Tap the [Mask] button

2 Tap the [Add Mask] button.

6 Select the position, size, angle, and shape of
the region to cut from the mask according to the
4
target.

Settings Navigator
“Editing the Window” (Page 3-19)

Set cut
shape
3 Select the position, size, angle, and mask shape
according to the target.
“Editing the Window” (Page 3-19) 7 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
The system returns to the screen to set a mask region.

8 Repeat steps 2 to 7 as needed to set the mask

region.

9 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

Set the mask

shape Area not to
be masked

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the screen to set a mask region.
Area to be
masked

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-29

 3. Learning Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target in Learning Mode)

„„
Edit Window Name
If the display language (Page 7-33) is changed,
characters may become unreadable.

1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab.

2 Tap the [Window Name] button.

4
Settings Navigator

3 Edit the window name.

Up to 16 characters can be set.
“Inputting characters” (Page 3-21)

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

4-30 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Learning Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target in Learning Mode)

Procedure to Add the Position Adjustment 4 Select the position adjustment window’s
position, size, angle, and shape according to the
Window target.
“Editing the Window” (Page 3-19)
1 Set a detection window.
“Main Screen for the Learning Settings” (Page 4-25)

2 Tap the [Add Pos. Adj.] button.

Set a position,

Rect Circle
size, and
angle 4

Settings Navigator
3 Tap the [Edit Window] button.

Set the position and size of the position

adjustment window to capture as much of a
part that is common amongst all targets as
possible.
“Stabilizing the position adjustment”
(Page 6-22)

5 Set a search range as needed.

“Search Range Settings” (Page 4-32)
By tapping the position adjustment window, the
window can be edited. 6 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for [Pos. Adj.].

7 Adjust the outline as needed.

“Settings for disabling outlines” (Page 4-33)
“Setting the sensitivity” (Page 4-33)

8 Tap the [Limit Adjustment] button.

The sensor changes to Test mode.

9 Image the target.

If [Trigger Options] is set to [External] or [Internal
Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to [Yes], input the
external trigger.
If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the [Trigger
ON] button to take an image of the target using the
internal trigger.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-31

 3. Learning Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target in Learning Mode)

10 Adjust the threshold to judge whether or not the „„

Search Range Settings
position adjustment succeeded by checking the
matching rate. 1 Tap the [Partial] button.

Match

Threshold

4 yyIf there are many variations of the target shape 2 Set the window that indicates the search range.
that the position adjustment window has been
Settings Navigator

set to, set the threshold to a lower matching

rate.
yyA target is detected as OK if the matching rate
is greater than the threshold, and detected
as NG if the matching rate is lower than the
threshold.
“Selecting the Display Method of the
Detection Window/Tool Window” (Page
5-10) Search
“Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20) Range
“Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page
6-16)
“Editing the Window” (Page 3-19)
11 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button. The search range cannot be rotated.
The system returns to the main screen for [Pos. Adj.].
3 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
12 Tap the [OK] button. The system returns to the main screen for [Pos. Adj.].
Return to the main screen of the detection window
settings.

4-32 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Learning Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target in Learning Mode)

„„
Settings for disabling outlines „„
Setting the sensitivity

1 Tap the [Fine Tune Outline] button. 1 Tap the [Fine Tune Outline] button.

The outline
cannot be

2 Select [Eraser Width], and specify the outline

extracted

2 Select [Sensitivity] for the position adjustment

4
that is not required for judgment. window.

Settings Navigator
The outline that will not be used for judgment changes
from green to yellow.

3 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The outline that the outline

extraction has disabled
Extracted
(yellow)
outline

The [Undo] button can be used up to 5 times.

3 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for [Pos. Adj.].

The system returns to the main screen for [Pos. Adj.].

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-33

 3. Learning Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target in Learning Mode)

Advanced settings of the position adjustment window

„„
Rotation Range „„
Search Algorithm

1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab. 1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab.
2 Tap the [Rotation Range] button. 2 Tap the [Search Algorithm] button.

4
Settings Navigator

3 Set the rotation range of the Position Adjustment 3 Select the type of search algorithm (High
Accuracy/High Speed).
tool.

“Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20) yySelect [High Accuracy] when detection

is not stable because the position of
4 Set the margin of the rotation range. the detection window after the position
adjustment does not match the target
position.
yySelect [High Speed] to shorten the
processing time.

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

yySelect [ON] when the position adjustment

is not stable because of the angle of
rotation of the target.
The tool window will search with a range a
few degrees wider than the setting value of
the rotation range.
(The tool window will search ± a few
degrees even if the rotation range is set to
0°.)
yySelect [OFF] when detection of the target
should be performed according to the set
rotation angle of the target.

5 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

4-34 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)
 3. Learning Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target in Learning Mode)

Learning OK/NG Targets

Setting items for Learning OK/NG Targets

Items Description Setting range

Add OK Registers LIVE images as the OK target/NG

--
Add NG target.

Imports images to be registered as the OK

From a File target/NG target from the file saved in the --
Settings
USB memory.

Imports images to be registered as the OK

4
From a Hist. --
target/NG target from the image history.

Start Learning Learns the OK target/NG target. --

Settings Navigator
The settings become enabled when
the [T] button is ON at the time of the
Sets whether to register multiple images of internal trigger or external trigger.
different brightness when registering the OK yyOFF
Advanced
Variable Brightness target/NG target. Learning brightness change will not
Settings
To use variable brightness, the target must be performed.
not be moving. yyON (default)
The learning brightness change will
be performed.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-35

 3. Learning Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target in Learning Mode)

(9) [Navi] button

Learning OK/NG Targets Displays the Settings Navigator guide.
(10) [From a File] button
Registers an image saved in the USB memory as an
(1) (3)
OK target or NG target.
(4) “Registration of Image Saved in a File” (Page 4-39)
(5) (11) [From a Hist.] button
(6) Registers an image from the image history as an OK
(2) (3) target or NG target.
(4)
(5)
“Registration of Image from the Image History” (Page
4-39)
(6)
(7)
(12) [Cancel] button
Returns to the main screen of the learning settings.
(13) [Start Learning] button

4 (8) (9) (10) (11)

(1) Image tool bar
(12) (13)

“Operation of the Image Tool Bar” (Page 3-18)

Starts learning.
Settings Navigator

(2) Image taken by the sensor

Displays the image taken by the sensor.
(3) Registered image
Displays the last registered image.
(4) Operation buttons

Deletes all registered images.

Deletes the last registered image.

The registered image can be expanded and

checked.
If multiple images have registered , they can be
checked with the move buttons.

(5) Number of images registered

Displays the number of images registered.
If variable brightness is [ON], nine images are
registered when registering the first image.
These images include the images taken of
variable brightness (eight images).

(6) [Add OK]/[Add NG] button

Tap the [Add OK] button when registering a captured
image as the OK target. Tap the [Add NG] button when
registering as the NG target.
Registers at least one image each.
Repeat the operation to register multiple images.
(7) Condition Display
Learning Ready...OK target and NG target image
registration has completed. The
sensor is ready to start learning.
(8) [Full Screen] button
“Operation with Full Screen Display of Image” (Page
3-18)

4-36 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Learning Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target in Learning Mode)

Procedure for OK/NG target learning 3 Register [NG Target].

The registration method is the same as step 2.

1 Tap the [Learning OK/NG Targets] button. The registered image will be displayed.
“Main Screen for the Learning Settings” (Page 4-25)

2 Register [OK Target].

zz
Registration of taken image
“Registration of Taken Image” (Page 4-38)
zz
Registration of image from the image history
“Registration of Image from the Image History” (Page
4-39)
zz
Registration of image saved in a file

4
“Registration of Image Saved in a File” (Page 4-39)
The registered image will be displayed.
yyIf multiple detection windows are set,
capture a target where all detection window

Settings Navigator
judgments are NG. Learning cannot be
performed correctly on a target with
mixed OK and NG judgments. In this case,
perform additional learning.
“Auto Adjustment by the Additional
Learning (Learning Mode Only)” (Page 6-2)
yyIf a NG target is not prepared, capture the
background to register as a NG target.
Registration example
OK target NG target (background)

If multiple detection windows are set,

capture a target where all detection window
judgments are OK. Learning cannot be
performed correctly on a target with mixed
OK and NG judgments.
In this case, perform additional learning.
“Auto Adjustment by the Additional
Learning (Learning Mode Only)” (Page 6-2) 4 Repeat step 2 or step 3 when registering multiple
images.

By capturing multiple images of different

judgment criteria, the judgment stability will
be improved automatically.
“Learning Multiple Images for Stability”
(Page 6-21)

5 Tap the [Start Learning] button.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-37

 3. Learning Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target in Learning Mode)

6 Check the registered image and tap the [OK] „„

Registration of Taken Image
button.
1 When changing the [Variable Brightness] setting,
select the [Adv. Settings] tab.

4 Returns to the main screen of [Learning Settings].

When the learning settings are completed,
[Learned] will be displayed. Variable brightness can be ON in the following
Settings Navigator

cases.
yyDuring internal trigger
yyWhen tapping the [T] button with external
trigger set to image by using the internal
trigger.

2 Image a target to be registered.

If [Trigger Options] is set to [External] or [Internal
Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to [Yes], input the
external trigger.
If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the [T] button
to take an image of the target by temporarily using the
internal trigger.

3 Tap the [Add OK] or [Add NG] button.

The captured image will be displayed.

4-38 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Learning Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target in Learning Mode)

„„
Registration of Image from the Image „„
Registration of Image Saved in a File
History
1 Insert the USB memory on which the batch
1 Tap the [From a Hist.] button. backup files (*.iv2a) or image capture files (*.iv2p)
are saved into the control panel.
“Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a USB
Memory” (Page 8-3)

2 Tap the [From a File] button.

4
2 Select the image to be registered, and tap the

Settings Navigator
[OK] button.

3 Select the file to be imported, and tap the [OK]

button.

Select the
image

3 Tap the [Registered as OK] or [Registered as NG] Select the

file
button.

“Selecting the File/Folder in the USB Memory” (Page

3-22)

The registered image will be displayed.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-39

 3. Learning Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target in Learning Mode)

4 If a batch backup file (*.iv2a) is selected, 6 Tap the [Registered as OK] or [Registered as NG]
select the image type to be imported from the button.
following.
yyRunning Image History
yyMaster Image
yyOK/NG Registration Image
yyLearning Image History
When selecting [Learning Image History], select the
[Target program].

4 The registered image will be displayed.

Settings Navigator

A list of images saved in the image type of the selected

file is displayed.

5 Select the image to be registered, and tap the

[OK] button.

Select the
image

The registered image will be displayed.

4-40 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

3. Tool Settings
(Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

This section explains the setting methods for “Step 3. Tool Types of tools
Settings” of standard mode.
For “Step 3: Learning Settings” of learning mode, refer to
“3. Learning Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of „„
Basic Tools
the Target in Learning Mode)” (Page 4-24). zz
Outline tool
A detection tool to calculate the matching rate for the
In standard mode, set tools in the master image to judge target based on the outline information of a registered
whether a target is OK or No Good. “OK” image.
The aspects of the target registered as the master image Judges whether a target is OK or NG by setting the
are set as an “OK” image. During operation, the sensor threshold for the matching rate.
judges whether the image is an “OK” image or “NG” image “Outline tool” (Page 4-51)
by judging the differences in the registered master image
and the target to be examined. Tool settings
Up to 16 detection tools in one program and up to 1 Master Image Outline extraction processing
position adjustment tool can be set. All tools on a single
inspection judge the target at the same time.
4

Settings Navigator
Processing and judgment during an operation
Internal processing <Judge is OK>

Searches the region for a target which has the outline of the
same shapes as the outline of the “OK” image.
Outline can be detected even if a target is rotated.

Example when the result was NG

No same shapes exist Different shape
(Detection of existence) (Shape detection)

Different direction
(Detection of direction)

The matching rate is indicated in 0 to 100.

100 indicates that an outline is completely
matched. The matching rate decreases with
more non-matching parts.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-41

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

zz
EdgePixels tool zz
Color Area/Area tool
A tool to calculate the matching rate of the number of A tool to calculate the matching rate of the area (number
edge pixels of a target in comparison to the number of of pixels) of a target in comparison to the area (number
edge pixels of a registered “OK” image (100%). Judges of pixels) of a registered “OK” image (100%). Judges
whether a target is OK or No Good by setting the whether a target is OK or NG by setting the threshold
threshold for the matching rate. for the matching rate.
The EdgePixels tool differs from the Outline tool as the If the sensor is a color type, the tool will be Color Area
target shape is not considered. tool. The system judges the area for presence of pixels
“EdgePixels tool” (Page 4-58) of a user-specified color.
If the sensor is a monochrome type, the tool will be the
Tool settings Area tool. The system judges the area for presence of
Master Image Edge pixels extract pixels of a user-specified brightness.
“Color Area/Area tool” (Page 4-63)
Tool settings

4 Color extraction process

(Color type)
Brightness extraction process
Master Image (Monochrome type)
Settings Navigator

Processing and judgment during an operation

Internal processing <Judge is OK>

Processing and judgment during an operation

Compares the edge pixels of a target by defining edge Internal processing <Judge is OK>
pixels of an “OK” image as 100%.

Example when the result was NG

Number of edge pixels Number of edge pixels
is high is low

Compares the area of a target as defining an

area of an “OK” image to 100 %.

Example when the result was NG

Area is narrow Area is wide

yyThe matching rate is indicated in 0 to 100

(default).
100 indicates that edge pixels are completely
matched.
The matching rate decreases as the edge
pixels of a target drop off.
yyThe setting for the display range and threshold yyThe matching rate is indicated in 0 to 100
for matching rate can be changed to 0-200 or (default).
0-999. Also, a target can be judged by setting 100 indicates that an area is completely
an upper limit for the threshold. matched. The matching rate decreases as the
“Upper Limit Settings” (Page 4-61) area of a target narrows.
yyThe setting for the display range and threshold
for matching rate can be changed to 0-200 or
0-999. Also, a target can be judged by setting
an upper limit for the threshold.
“Upper Limit Settings” (Page 4-70)

4-42 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

zz
Color/Brightness Average tool zz
Position Adjustment tool
A tool to calculate the matching rate in the color/ A tool to correct the differences in position of a target by searching
brightness of a target to be examined in comparison for the outline information of a registered “OK” image. The position
to the color/brightness of a registered master image adjustment is used in conjunction with other detection tools.
(100%). Judges whether a target is OK or NG by setting “Position Adjustment tool” (Page 4-84)
the threshold for the matching rate. Tool settings
If the sensor is color type, the tool will be the Color Average Master Image
tool. The system judges using a user-defined color.
If the sensor is monochrome type, the tool will be the Tool window
Brightness Average tool. The system judges using a Position adjustment
user-defined brightness. window
This tool is different from the Color Area/Area tool, as
only the color/brightness is considered, and not the
amount of pixels in the target area. Processing during an operation
“Color/Brightness Average Tool” (Page 4-74)

4
Position adjustment process
Tool settings
Tool window
Master image
Color average extraction process

Settings Navigator
(Color type)
Brightness average extraction Search range of the
process tool window
(Monochrome type) Position adjustment window

Tool window yyWhen the Position Adjustment tool is being

Processing and judgment during an operation used, the processing time will be longer.
Internal processing <Judge is OK> yyWhen using an Outline tool with a Position
Adjustment tool, the search range position of
the Outline tool will be adjusted. The outline of
the target is searched in the adjusted search
range and the searched outline will be judged.
yyIf position adjustment fails, the result of
position adjustment is NG. In this case,
the total status result is NG. In addition,
Compares the average color (color type) or brightness all other detection tools will not perform
(monochrome type) inside a tool window with the color/ their judgment process. Failure of
brightness defined in the master image. position adjustment can be checked with
Example when the result was NG the position adjustment output. When
Color is different Brightness is different
position adjustment fails, review the
(Color type) (Monochrome type) position adjustment settings and position
determining accuracy for a target.
“‌ 4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of
Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-149)
yyWhen the Position Adjustment tool is added,
the following settings for the detection tools
that have been set will be changed.

yyThe matching rate is indicated in 0 to 100. When the search range is

100 indicates that the color or brightness set as the entire range, field
of view the search range will
are completely matched. The matching rate Outline tool
be initialized to the default
decreases as the color or brightness of the
value in which the position
target differs. adjustment is enabled.
yyThe average color/brightness value is extracted
from inside the tool window. If there are multiple When the window shape
color/brightness values mixed inside the is set to the entire range,
tool window, the average value is calculated Color Area/ the window shap will be
according to the area. For example, if red and Area tool initialized to the default
white are mixed, the color average will be pink. value in which the position
Color average process adjustment is enabled.
When the window shape
is set to the entire range,
EdgePixels the window shape will be
tool initialized to the default
value in which the position
Tool window adjustment is enabled.
yyUsing in combination with the external master
image registration function enables target yyOnly one Position Adjustment tool can be
changeover of the type of product to be set in each program. By setting the position
adjustment, the position adjustment will be
performed easily.
applied to all detection tools.
“Input Settings” (Page 7-14)
“Registering the Master Image” (Page 10-10)

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-43

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Advanced Tools zz
Diameter tool
A tool to calculate the matching rate of the diameter of a
zz
Width tool target in comparison to the diameter of a registered “OK”
A tool to calculate the matching rate of the width of a image (100%). Judges whether a target is OK or NG by
target in comparison to the width of a registered “OK” setting the threshold for the matching rate.
image (100%). Judges whether a target is OK or NG by “Diameter tool” (Page 4-98)
setting the threshold for the matching rate.
“Width tool” (Page 4-90) Tool settings
Master Image Diameter extraction processing
Tool settings
Width (height) extraction
Master Image processing

4 Processing and judgment during an operation

Internal processing <Judge is OK>

Processing and judgment during an operation

Settings Navigator

Internal processing <Judge is OK>

Compares the diameter of a target by defining

the diameter of an “OK” image as 100%.
Find the width of a target from both directions.
Compares the width of a target by defining the width of Example when the result was NG
an “OK” image as 100%. Diameter is small Diameter is big

Example when the result was NG

Width (height) is short Width (height) is long

yyThe matching rate is indicated in 0 to 200

(default).
100 indicates that the diameter is completely
yyThe matching rate is indicated in 0 to 200 matched to the master image.
(default). The matching rate decreases as the diameter
100 indicates that the width is completely of a target decreases.
matched to the master image. yyThe setting for the display range and threshold
The matching rate decreases as the width of a for the matching rate can be changed to 0 to
target shortens. 100 or 0 to 999. If it changes to 0 to 100, set
yyThe setting for the display range and threshold the threshold only for the lower limit.
for the matching rate can be changed to 0 to “Upper Limit Settings” (Page 4-101)
100 or 0 to 999. If it changes to 0 to 100, set
the threshold only for the lower limit.
“Upper Limit Settings” (Page 4-93)

4-44 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

zz
Edge tool zz
Pitch tool
A tool to count and judge the number of edges for a A tool to calculate the matching rate for the distance
registered “OK” image (Bright/Dark changes). The between pitches of a target in comparison to the
target is judged within the set region. The Edge tool average value of the distance between pitches of a
judges whether a target is OK or NG by setting the registered “OK” image (100%). Judges whether a target
threshold for the number of edges. is OK or NG by setting the threshold for the matching
“Edge tool” (Page 4-106) rate.
“Pitch tool” (Page 4-114)
Tool settings
Master Image Tool settings
Extract distance between
Master Image pitches

Tool window

Processing and judgment during an operation

Internal processing <Judge is OK>
4

Settings Navigator
Processing and judgment during an operation
Internal processing <Judge is OK>

Search the target edge from one direction.

Rotate the tool window to set the direction to be
examined. Compares the distance between pitches of a target by
defining the average value of the distance between
Example when the result was NG pitches of an “OK” image as 100%.
No edge Number of edges is high
Example when the result was NG
Number of pitches is Distance between
different pitches is different

yyMaximum value of the matching rate is

adjusted automatically.
The matching rate is indicated in the number
of edges. 0 indicates that there is no edge in yyThe matching rate is indicated in 0 to 200
the window. (default).
yyUp to 128 edges can be counted. Targets with The average value of all the distances
129 or more edges cannot be counted. between pitches is 100.
yyThe setting for the display range and threshold Among all of the distances between pitches,
for the matching rate can be changed to 0 to the one which deviates the most from the
5, 0 to 10, 0 to 20, 0 to 50, or 0 to 128. Also, a average value is displayed to show the
target can be judged by setting an upper limit matching rate.
for the threshold. yyBoth maximum and minimum values of
“Upper Limit Settings” (Page 4-110) the distances between all the pitches are
displayed in status gauge.
yyWhen the number of pitches is different from
the number for master image, the matching
rate is 0.
yyThe maximum number of detectable pitches is
63 when the measurement mode is [Pin Pitch],
and 64 when the measurement mode is [Pin
Width]. More pitches cannot be detected.
yyThe display range of matching rate and the
setting range of threshold can be changed to 0
to 999.
“Upper Limit Settings” (Page 4-117)

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-45

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

zz
Hi-Sp.Adj tool yyBy using Hi‑Sp.Adj tool, processing time
A tool to correct for differences in position of a target by increase is smaller than that of the Position
searching the edge feature of a registered “OK” image. Adjustment tool.
The Hi-Sp.Adj tool is used with other detection tools. yyWhen using the Hi-Sp.Adj tool with an
Compared with the normal position adjustment tool, Outline tool, the high speed adjustment
the Hi-Sp.Adj tool allows for a high speed adjustment tool will adjust the search range. The
process. outline of the target will be searched for
Select either 1-Axis Adjustment which corrects X axis and judged in the adjusted search range.
position or Y axis position, or 2-Axis Adjustment which yyIf the Hi‑Sp.Adj fails, the result of the
corrects both directions of X axis and Y axis. Position Adjustment tool is NG. In this
“Hi-Sp.Adj tool” (Page 4-123) case, the total status result is NG. In
addition, the detection tools will not
Tool settings perform their judgment processes. Failure
Master Image of Hi-Sp.Adj can be checked with the Hi-Sp.
Adj output. Review the Hi-Sp.Adj settings

4
and the position determining accuracy for
a target.
“‌ 4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of
Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-149)
Settings Navigator

yyWhen the Hi-Sp.Adj tool is added, the

Tool window following settings for the detection tools
Position adjustment window which have been set will be changed.

When the search range

Processing during an operation is set as the entire
Position adjustment process
range, the search range
Outline tool
will be initialized to the
default value in which
the Hi‑Sp.Adj is enabled.

When the window shape

is set as the entire
Tool window range, the window
Color Area/
Position adjustment window shape will be initialized
Area tool
to the default value in
which the Hi‑Sp.Adj is
enabled.

When the window shape

is set as the entire
range, the window
EdgePixels
shape will be initialized
tool
to the default value in
which the Hi‑Sp.Adj is
enabled.

yyOnly one Hi-Sp.Adj tool can be set in each

program. If the Hi-Sp.Adj is set, the Hi-Sp.
Adj will be applied to all detection tools.

4-46 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

zz
OCR Tool zz
Color Prohibition/Brightness Prohibition tool
A tool used to determine whether the text and date of A tool that judges protrusions and misalignment of
the object match the registered “OK” image text and a target into the prohibition range. If protrusion or
date. misalignment occurs into the range registered as the
“OCR Tool” (Page 4-130) standard (100%) (protrusion/misalignment prohibited
area), the matching rate decreases. Judges whether
Tool settings a target is OK or NG by setting the threshold to for
Master text extraction
(character reading) matching rate.
Master date extraction The system judges protrusions and misalignments
Master Image (date reading) by the area the target is protruding into the specified
tool window. If the sensor is a color type, the system
EXP. date EXP. date judges by the color area specified by the user. If it is a
monochrome type, the system judges by the brightness
01.10.20xx 01.10.20xx area specified by the user.
0 1 . 1 0 . 2 0 x x
“Color Prohibition/Brightness Prohibition Tool” (Page

Processing and judgment during an operation

4-141)
Tool settings
4
Internal processing <Judge is OK> Color extraction process

Settings Navigator
(Color type)
EXP. date EXP. date Brightness extraction process
Master image (Monochrome type)
01.10.20xx 01.10.20xx
0 1 . 1 0 . 2 0 x x

The text and date on the object are read and compared
to the text and date on an “OK” image.

Example when the result was NG Correct position Tool window

Character/date is Character/date is (Protrusion/misalignment prohibited area)
wrong incomplete
Processing and judgment during an operation
EXP. date EXP. date Internal processing <Judge is OK>

02.10.20xx 0 .10.20xx

yyThe matching rate is indicated as 0 or 100.

If all the text or date match, 100 is displayed. If Defined as 100% if there are no protrusions or
the text or date does not match, or the number misalignments inside the target tool window.
of letters does not match, 0 is displayed.
yyIf the shade contrast function is enabled, the Example when the result was NG
matching rate may vary depending on the Misalignment Protrusion
color shading, even if the text and date match.
The lighter the printing is for the text and date,
the lower the matching rate will be.

Tool window Mask

Tool window

The matching rate is indicated in 0 to 100. 100

indicates that there are no misalignments or
protrusions. The matching rate decreases the
more the protrusion and misaligned area (the
amount of area the target enters the protrusion
prohibited area) increases.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-47

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Main screen for the Tool Settings Adding/Editing/Copying/Deleting a Tool

This section explains the main screen for the Tool settings.
(1) (2) Adding a tool

(5)
1 Tap the [Add Tool] button.
(3)

(4) (6) 2 Tap the tool to be added.

4
(7) (8) (9)
Settings Navigator

(1) Navigation button

Moves steps in the Settings Navigator.
(2) [Save] button
Finishes the Settings Navigator and returns to the
[Sensor Setup Menu] screen.
(3) Image tool bar
“Operation of the Image Tool Bar” (Page 3-18)
(4) Master Image
3 Set setting items for each tool.
Displays the master image and tool window. If a search zz
Basic Tools
range is set, a tool window which indicates the search “Outline tool” (Page 4-51)
range (light blue) will be displayed. “EdgePixels tool” (Page 4-58)
By tapping the tool window, the selected tool can be “Color Area/Area tool” (Page 4-63)
switched. “Color/Brightness Average Tool” (Page 4-74)
“Position Adjustment tool” (Page 4-84)
(5) Tool operation button
Performs adding/editing/copying/deleting tools. zz
Extra 1
“Adding/Editing/Copying/Deleting a Tool” (Page 4-48) “Width tool” (Page 4-90)
(6) Tool selection button “Diameter tool” (Page 4-98)
Select the tool to confirm/edit/delete the setting “Edge tool” (Page 4-106)
contents. “Pitch tool” (Page 4-114)
“Editing a tool” (Page 4-49) “Hi-Sp.Adj tool” (Page 4-123)
(7) [Full Screen] button zz
Extra 2
“Operation with Full Screen Display of Image” (Page “OCR Tool” (Page 4-130)
3-18) “Color Prohibition/Brightness Prohibition Tool” (Page
(8) [Back] button 4-141)
Returns to the master registration screen.
“2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as a
Reference)” (Page 4-18)
(9) [Next to STEP4] button
Proceeds to the Output Assignment settings.
“4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting
to Output Line)” (Page 4-149)

4-48 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Editing a tool Copying a Tool

1 Select a tool to edit the settings. yyCopies a tool which has been set, and pastes
it to the same position. The Pos. Adj. tool and
Hi‑Sp.Adj tool cannot be copied.
yyIf 16 tools are set, tools cannot be copied.

Selected tool
1 Select a tool to copy.

Selected tool

2 Tap the [Edit Tool] button.

4

Settings Navigator
3 Edit setting items for each tool. 2 Tap the [Copy] button.
zz
Basic Tools
“Outline tool” (Page 4-51)
“EdgePixels tool” (Page 4-58)
“Color Area/Area tool” (Page 4-63) The [Confirmation] screen opens.
“Color/Brightness Average Tool” (Page 4-74)
“Position Adjustment tool” (Page 4-84) 3 Tap the [OK] button.
zz
Extra 1 The copied tool window will be selected and displayed
“Width tool” (Page 4-90) in the copy source tool window.
“Diameter tool” (Page 4-98)
“Edge tool” (Page 4-106)
“Pitch tool” (Page 4-114)
“Hi-Sp.Adj tool” (Page 4-123) Copied tool
zz
Extra 2 window
“OCR Tool” (Page 4-130)
“Color Prohibition/Brightness Prohibition Tool” (Page
4-141) Copied tool

The next available tool number that has not

been set will be automatically assigned to the
copied tool number.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-49

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

4 Tap the [Edit Tool] button and adjust the settings Deleting a tool
of the copied tool.
zz
Basic Tools 1 Select a tool to be deleted.
“Outline tool” (Page 4-51)
“EdgePixels tool” (Page 4-58)
“Color Area/Area tool” (Page 4-63)
“Color/Brightness Average Tool” (Page 4-74)
zz
Extra 1
“Width tool” (Page 4-90)
“Diameter tool” (Page 4-98)
“Edge tool” (Page 4-106)
“Pitch tool” (Page 4-114)
zz
Extra 2

4 “OCR Tool” (Page 4-130)

“Color Prohibition/Brightness Prohibition Tool” (Page
4-141)
2 Tap the [Delete] button.
Settings Navigator

The [Confirmation] screen opens.

3 Tap the [OK] button.

The selected tool will be deleted and the sensor will
return to the main screen for Tool settings.

4-50 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Outline tool

Setting items for the Outline tool

Items Description Setting range

yyRect (default)
Specifies with the rectangular window. A user-defined
Select the window shape used to size, position, and angle can be specified with the
Window
specify the area of the target to be stylus.
Shape
detected. yyCircle
Specifies with the circular window. A user-defined size
Edit Window and position can be specified with the stylus.

4
Specifies an area in which to search yyEntire (default: no position adjustment)
for the outline of a target. By using Specifies the entire imaging area as a search range.
Search
a narrower area for the search yyPartial (default: with position adjustment)
Range
range, the processing time will be Specifies the search range as a user-specified size

Settings Navigator
shortened. within the imaging area.

yyEraser Width
Selects the eraser width (light/medium/heavy) of the
pen when specifying an unnecessary outline.
yyUndo
Disables an unnecessary outline The previous operation can be cancelled.
Eraser which disrupts stable detection. You can undo up to five operations. (UNDO)
Width Specify the unnecessary outline by yyRedo
tracing extracted outline with stylus. Cancel the [Undo] operation.
(REDO)
yyClear
Fine Tune Initializes all of the disabled outlines. Returns all outlines
Outline to an active state.

yyHigh
Extracts an outline of a image with low contrast. Used
when the desired outline cannot be extracted with
Normal sensitivity.
The outline extraction sensitivity can *1
yyNormal (default)
Sensitivity be selected according to the target
Extracts the standard outline.
quality.
yyLow
Reduces the extracted volume of the outline. Used
in situations where an outline is not necessary for
inspection.

Adjusts the threshold (matching

rate*2) used for OK/NG judgment.
During threshold adjustment, the 0 to 100
Limit Adjustment
system turns to Test mode so that (default: 70)
the thresholds can be adjusted to the
applicable value for operation.

*1 If digital zoom is set to [Zoom Mag: x4] on the IV2-G300CA/IV2-G600MA, the default value is [High].
*2 A matching rate of 100 indicates that an outline is completely matched. The matching rate decreases with differences
between the outline of the target and the master image.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-51

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Setting the Outline tool 7 Tap the [Limit Adjustment] button.

1 Adds the [Outline] tool.
“Adding a tool” (Page 4-48)
The main screen for [Outline] opens.

2 Tap the [Edit Window] button.

The sensor changes to Test mode.

4 8 Take an “OK” image and a “NG” image.

If [Trigger Options] is set to [External] or [Internal
Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to [Yes], input an
Settings Navigator

external trigger.
If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the [Trigger
Editing the window can be performed by ON] button to take an image of the target with the
tapping the window as well. internal trigger.

3 Select a tool window shape, position, size, and 9 Adjust the threshold for anomaly detection by
checking the matching rate.
angle according to the target.
<Setting example>
“Editing the Window” (Page 3-19) If the matching rate of an “OK” image is higher than
90 and if the matching rate of a “NG” image is lower
than 40, set the threshold to 65, the value intermediate
between 40 and 90.

Matching rate

Set a position,
size, and Threshold
angle

Rect Circle

A target is detected as OK if the matching rate is

greater than the threshold, and detected as NG
if the matching rate is lower than the threshold.
4 Set a search range as needed. “Selecting the Display Method of the
Detection Window/Tool Window” (Page
“Search Range Settings” (Page 4-53)
5-10)
5 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button. “Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20)
“Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page
The system returns to the main screen of [Outline].
6-16)
6 Adjust the outline as needed. “Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and
Position Adjustment Tool” (Page A-6)
“Settings for disabling outlines” (Page 4-53)
“Setting the sensitivity” (Page 4-54)
10 After setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen of [Outline].

11 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.

4-52 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Search Range Settings „„
Settings for disabling outlines

1 Tap the [Partial] button. 1 Tap the [Fine Tune Outline] button.

2 Set the tool window that indicates the search 2 Select [Eraser Width], and specify the outline
4
range. that is not required for judgment by tracing it

Settings Navigator
“Editing the Window” (Page 3-19) with stylus.
The disabled outline changes from green to yellow.

Search
Range

The search range cannot be rotated.

3 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen of [Outline].

The outline that the outline

extraction has disabled
(yellow)

The [Undo] button can be used up to 5 times.

3 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen of [Outline].

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-53

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Setting the sensitivity

1 Tap the [Fine Tune Outline] button.

The outline
cannot be
extracted

4 2 Select [Sensitivity] of the outline.

Settings Navigator

3 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

Extracted
outline

The system returns to the main screen of [Outline].

4-54 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Advanced Settings for the Outline Tool

Items Description Setting range Ref.

Sets the range of rotation to search for the

outline of the target.
The system judges NG if the angle of the
target exceeds its rotation range even if
the target is the same shape.
yyIf the rotation range is set wide, the
Rotation angle 0 to ±180° (Unit: 1°)
acceptable range of variation in angles
range (default: ±20°)
in which a target can be placed can be
wider.
yyIf the rotation range is set narrow, the
Rotation processing time can be shortened.

4
4-56
Range yyThe direction of the target can be judged
by limiting the rotation range.

yyON (default)

Settings Navigator
The tool window will search a range
that is a few degrees wider and
Select whether or not to allow a margin for narrower than the set value of the
Margin rotation range.
the angle set as the Rotation Range.
yyOFF
The tool window will search only
within the set rotation range.

yyHigh Accuracy
Differences in the outline can be
detected with a high degree of
accuracy. This is selected when
identifying the target where the
outline difference is small.
The detection mode of the Outline tool can yyNormal (default)
Search Algorithm be changed depending on the inspection Standard differences in the outline 4-56
requirements. can be detected.
yyHigh Speed
Judgment can be performed with
high speed.
There may be an influence from the
background or unnecessary outlines
other than the target.

A user-specified name, such as the name

of the target, can be set for the tool. Tool
Tool Name Up to 16 characters can be set. 4-57
names can be checked on the run screen.
“‌ 5 Running” (Page 5-1)

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-55

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Rotation Range „„
Search Algorithm

1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab. 1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab.
2 Tap the [Rotation Range] button. 2 Tap the [Search Algorithm] button.

4
3 Set the angle of rotation for the Outline tool. 3 Select the type of search algorithm (High
Settings Navigator

Accuracy/Normal/High Speed).

“Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20)

4 Select whether to include the margin in the 4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
rotation range.
yySelect [High Accuracy] when detection is
not stable because of a small difference
in the matching rate between an “OK” and
“NG” image.
yySelect [Normal] when detection is not
stable because of the influence of an
unnecessary outline other than the target
such as the background.
yySelect [High Speed] to shorten the
processing time.

yySelect [ON] when the outline is not stable

because of the angle of rotation of the
target.
The tool window will search with a range a
few degrees wider and narrower than the
setting value of the rotation range.
(The tool window will search ± a few
degrees even if the rotation range is set to
0°.)
yySelect [OFF] when detection of the target
should be performed according to the set
rotation angle of the target.

5 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

4-56 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Tool Name
If the display language (Page 7-33) is changed,
characters may become unreadable.

1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab.

2 Tap the [Tool Name] button.

Settings Navigator
3 Edit the tool name.
Up to 16 characters can be set.
“Inputting characters” (Page 3-21)

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-57

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

EdgePixels tool

Setting items for the EdgePixels tool

Items Description Setting range

yyRect (default)
Specify the area to inspect with a rectangular
window. Size, position, and angle of the
window can be specified with the stylus.
yyCircle
Select the window shape to specify Specify the area to inspect with a circular
Window Shape
the area of the target to detect. window. Size, position, and angle of the
window can be specified with the stylus.

4 yyEntire
The entire area (imaging area) of the image
displayed in the control panel becomes the
Settings Navigator

extract area.
Edit
Window Add Mask Adds a rectangular/circular mask yyRect (default)
region in the tool window frame. Specifies the area to mask the target or
Mask The area inside the mask region remove from the mask with a rectangular
Shape is excluded from the edge pixels window. Size, position, and angle of the
extraction target. window can be specified with the stylus.
Cut Mask yyCircle
Mask Specifies the area to mask the target or
Removes a rectangular/circular remove from the mask with a circular window.
region from the mask region. Inside Size, position, and angle of the window can
the region removed from the mask, be specified with the stylus.
Cut Shape the mask is disabled and edge
pixels extraction is enabled. yySetting counts
Adding a mask or removing sections of the
mask can be performed up to 20 times.
yyNormal (default)
Extracts the edge pixels from the target with
Set the extraction sensitivity for the standard sensitivity.
Edge Sensitivity Adjustment edge pixels tool according to the yyHi Sens
target. Increase the volume of edge pixels extracted
from the target. Used when the edge pixels
desired to detect cannot be extracted.
The extraction sensitivity of the
To Live Image edge pixels tool can be adjusted --
from the Live image of the target.
Adjusts the threshold (matching
rate*) used in the OK/NG judgment. 0 to 100 (if [Upper Limit] is [Disable])
During threshold adjustment, the (default: 50)
Limit Adjustment
system turns to Test mode so that The settings range is different depending on
the thresholds can be adjusted to [Upper Limit Settings].
the applicable value for operation.
Enables the upper limit on the
threshold. yyEnable
Enable when OK/NG judgment is Activates [Upper Limit].
Upper Limit
desired for a situation when the target yyDisable (default)
edge pixels are larger than the edge Disables [Upper Limit].
Upper pixels extracted from the master image.
Limit yy0 to 200 (default)
Settings When the upper limit of the Sets the upper and the lower limit of a
threshold is ON, select the threshold in a range within 0 to 200.
Scale threshold scale according to the yy0-999
range of the matching rate required Sets the upper and the lower limit of a
for the judgment. threshold in a range within 0 to 999.
The slider movement unit is 5.
* The matching rate is 100 when the number of edge pixels in an image matches the edge pixels of the master image. The edge
pixels become smaller with a lower number of edge pixels and larger with a higher number of edge pixels. If the matching rate
exceeds the upper limit of the threshold range, the matching rate will display as the upper limit of the threshold range.

4-58 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Setting the EdgePixels tool 7 Tap the [Limit Adjustment] button.

1 Add the [EdgePixels] tool.
“Adding a tool” (Page 4-48)
The main screen for [EdgePixels] opens.

2 Tap the [Edit Window] button.

The sensor changes to Test mode.

8 Take an “OK” image and a “NG” image.

If [Trigger Options] is set to [External] or [Internal
4
Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to [Yes], input the

Settings Navigator
external trigger.
If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the [Trigger
ON] button to take an image of the target using the
Editing the window can be performed by internal trigger.
tapping the tool window as well.
9 Adjust the threshold for anomaly detection by
3 Select the tool window shape, position, size, and checking the matching rate.
angle according to the target. <Setting example>
“Editing the Window” (Page 3-19) If the matching rate of an “OK” image is higher than
90 and if the matching rate of a “NG” image is lower
than 40, set the threshold to 65, the value intermediate
between 40 and 90.

Matching rate

Threshold
Set a position,
size, and
angle
Rect Circle

A target is detected as OK if the matching rate is

greater than the threshold, and detected as NG
if the matching rate is lower than the threshold.
When [Entire] is selected, the tool window will be “Selecting the Display Method of the
Detection Window/Tool Window” (Page 5-10)
hidden.
“Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20)
4 Apply the mask as needed. “Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page
6-16)
The area inside the mask region is excluded from an edge
pixels extraction target.
“Mask” (Page 4-60) 10 Set the upper limit as needed.
5 Tap the [OK] button. “Upper Limit Settings” (Page 4-61)
The system returns to the main screen for [EdgePixels].
11 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
6 Perform [Edge Sensitivity Adjustment] as The system returns to the main screen for [EdgePixels].
needed.
“Edge Sensitivity Adjustment” (Page 4-61) 12 Tap the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-59

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Mask 5 Tap the [Cut Mask] button to remove a region
from the mask.
1 Tap the [Mask] button

4 2 Tap the [Add Mask] button.

6 Select the shape, position, size, and angle of the
area to remove from the mask according to the
target.
Settings Navigator

“Editing the Window” (Page 3-19)

Set cut
shape
3 Select the mask shape, position, size, and angle
according to the target.
“Editing the Window” (Page 3-19) 7 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
The system returns to the screen to set a mask region.

8 Repeat steps 2 to 7 as needed to set the mask

region.

9 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

Set the mask Area not to

shape be masked

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the screen to set a mask region.
Area to be
masked

The system returns to the main screen for [EdgePixels].

4-60 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Edge Sensitivity Adjustment „„
Upper Limit Settings

1 Tap the [Edge Sensitivity Adjustment] button. 1 Tap the [Upper Limit Settings] button.

2 Select the extraction sensitivity of the edge 2 Tap the [Enable] button to enable the upper limit
4
pixels. threshold and set the scale.

Settings Navigator
When the [To Live Image] button is tapped, the Select the scale according to the range of the matching
extraction sensitivity of the edge pixels can be rate required for judgment.
adjusted from the target Live image.
3 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
3 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button. The sliders to set the upper limit and the lower limit of
the threshold will be displayed.
The system returns to the main screen for [EdgePixels].
4 Adjust the threshold for anomaly detection by
checking the matching rate.

Threshold
(upper limit)

Threshold
(lower limit)

The target is judged OK when the matching

rate is within threshold range, and NG when it is
outside the range.
“Selecting the Display Method of the
Detection Window/Tool Window” (Page 5-10)
“Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20)
“Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page
6-16)

5 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for [EdgePixels].

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-61

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Advanced settings for the EdgePixels tool

Items Description Setting range Ref.

yyBased on Master (default)

Matches the number of pixels of an edge
extracted from the master image as the
Fixed Reference Select a condition which the matching rate of criteria of a rate of 100%.
4-62
Area the EdgePixels tool is 100%. yyEnable
Sets 1/20th of number of pixels in sensor's
FOV range as the standard of 100%
matching level.

A user-specified name, such as the name of

the target, can be set for the tool. Tool names

4
Tool Name Up to 16 characters can be set. 4-62
can be checked on the run screen.
“‌ 5 Running” (Page 5-1)

„„
Fixed Reference Area „„
Tool Name
Settings Navigator

Select [Fixed Ref.] if the master image does not If the display language (Page 7-33) is changed,
contain the edge pixels to be judged. characters may become unreadable.

1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab.

1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab.
2 Tap the [Fixed Reference Area] button.
2 Tap the [Tool Name] button.

3 Adjust the fixed reference area settings.

3 Edit the tool name.
Up to 16 characters can be set.
“Inputting characters” (Page 3-21)

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

yyWhen the number of edge pixels extracted

from the master image is to be used as the
reference for judgment, select [Based on
Master].
yyWhen 1/20th of number of pixels in the
sensor's FOV range is to be used as the
reference for judgment, select [Enable].
Number of edge pixels
for 1/20 of sensor
FOV = Matching rate
100

View size

4 Tap the [OK] button.

4-62 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)
 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Color Area/Area tool

Setting items for the Color Area/Area tool

Items Description Setting range

yyRect (default)
Specify the area to inspect with a
rectangular window. Size, position, and
angle of the window can be specified with
the stylus.
yyCircle
Select the window shape to specify
Window Shape Specify the area to inspect with a circular
the area of the target to inspect.
window. Size, position, and angle of the
window can be specified with the stylus.
yyEntire
The entire area (imaging area) of the
4

Settings Navigator
image displayed in the control panel
becomes the extraction target.

Edit Window
yyRect (default)
Add Mask Adds a rectangular/circular mask Specifies the area to mask the target or
region in the tool window frame. remove from the mask with a rectangular
The area inside the mask region is window. Size, position, and angle of the
excluded from the area extraction window can be specified with the stylus.
Mask
target.
Shape yyCircle
Mask Specifies the area to mask the target or
remove from the mask with a circular
Cut Mask Removes a rectangular/circular window. Size, position, and angle of the
region from the mask region. Inside window can be specified with the stylus.
the region removed from the mask, yySetting counts
the mask is disabled and the area Adding a mask or removing sections
Cut Shape extraction is enabled. of the mask can be performed up to 20
times.

yyExtract
Tap the color to be extracted from Extract the tapped color.
Color extraction by tap the master image and set the yyExclude
extraction range. Tap the extracted color to exclude from
the inspection.

yy[+]
Expands the range of the color to be
extracted and expands the extraction
area.
yy[-]
Color Expands or reduces automatically Contracts the range of the color to be
Extraction Extract Area the extraction area of the color extracted and narrows the extraction area.
(For color extracted by tap. yyUndo
type) The previous operation can be canceled.
(UNDO)
yyClear
Removes the extracted color from the
tool.

The color range can be extracted

from the Live image of the target.
In addition, the range of color to
To Live Image --
be extracted can be based on the
image in the image history or from
an image on a saved file.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-63

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Items Description Setting range

yy[+]/[-]
Sets the upper and lower range of
brightness within the range of 0 to 255
with the tapped brightness as a reference.
Tap the brightness to be extracted
yyUndo
Brightness Extract brightness by tap from the master image and set the
The previous operation can be canceled.
Extraction extraction range.
(UNDO)
(For monochrome
yyClear
type)
Removes the extracted brightness from the
tool.

The brightness range can be

To Live Image extracted from the Live image of --

4 the target.

Adjusts the threshold (matching

rate*) used in the OK/NG judgment. 0 to 100 (if [Upper Limit] is [Disable])
Settings Navigator

During threshold adjustment, the (default: 50)

Limit Adjustment
system switches to Test mode so The settings range is different depending on
that the threshold can be adjusted [Upper Limit Settings].
to an applicable value for operation.

Enables an upper limit on the yyEnable

threshold. ON
Enable when OK/NG judgment is Activates [Upper Limit].
Upper Limit
desired for a situation when the
target area is larger than the area yyDisable (default)
extracted from the master image. Disables [Upper Limit].
Upper Limit
Settings yy0 to 200 (default)
When the upper limit of the Sets the upper and the lower limit of a
threshold is ON, select the threshold in a range within 0 to 200.
Scale threshold scale according to the yy0-999
range of the matching rate required Sets the upper and the lower limit of a
for the judgment. threshold in a range within 0 to 999.
The slider movement unit is 5.

* The matching rate is 100 when an area matches perfectly. This becomes smaller with a narrower area and larger with a wider
area. If the matching rate exceeds the upper limit of the threshold range, the matching rate will display as the upper limit of the
threshold range.

4-64 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Setting the Color Area/Area tool 6 Set the area from the target to be extracted.
zz
For color type
1 Add the [ColorArea] tool (color type) or [Area] Tap the [Color Extraction] button.
tool (black and white type).
“Adding a tool” (Page 4-48)
The main screen for [ColorArea]/[Area].

2 Tap the [Edit Window] button.

The screen to select a color to be extracted opens. 4

Tap the color to be the reference of judgment for the

Settings Navigator
color area.

Editing the window can be performed by

tapping the tool window as well.

3 Select the tool window shape, position, size, and

angle according to the desired target.
“Editing the Window” (Page 3-19)

The tapped color will be extracted.

yyIf the areas of color that have not been extracted
are tapped repeatedly, the extraction range can be
adjusted.
yyTap the [Exclude] button to specify a color excluded
Set a position, from the extracted color.
size, and yyTap the [+]/[-] button of the extraction area
angle adjustment, and the range of color to be extracted can
be expanded/reduced.
yyWhen the color extraction is to be performed again,
Rect Circle
tap the [Clear] button and then tap the color to be the
reference of judgment.
yyBy tapping the [To Live Image] button, the range of
color can be extracted based on the image saved
as the Live Image, the images saved in the image
history, or the images saved in the USB memory.
When [Entire] is selected, the tool window will be “Adjusting in the LIVE Screen (Color Area Tool Only)”
hidden. (Page 4-68)

4 Apply the mask as needed.

Inside the mask region is excluded from an area
extraction.
“Mask” (Page 4-67)

5 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for [ColorArea]/
[Area].

After setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for [ColorArea].

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-65

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

zz
For monochrome type
Tap the [Brightness Extraction] button.
7 Tap the [Limit Adjustment] button.

The sensor changes to Test mode.

4
The screen to select brightness to be extracted opens.
Tap the brightness that will be used as the reference for
judgment for the area tool.
8 Take an “OK” image and a “NG” image.
If [Trigger Options] is set to [External] or [Internal
Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to [Yes], input the
Settings Navigator

external trigger.
If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the [Trigger
ON] button to take an image of the target using the
internal trigger.

9 Adjust the threshold for anomaly detection by

checking the matching rate.
<Setting example>
If the matching rate of an “OK” image is higher than
90 and if the matching rate of a “NG” image is lower
than 40, set the threshold to 65, the value intermediate
between 40 and 90.
The tapped brightness will be extracted.
yyIf areas of brightness that have not been extracted are
tapped, the extraction range can be expanded.
yyAdjust the slider, and the range of the brightness to
be extracted can be expanded/reduced. Matching rate
“Setting by the slider” (Page 3-20)
yyWhen brightness extraction is not sufficient and needs Threshold
to be performed again, tap the [Clear] button and then
tap the brightness to be used as the reference for
judgment again.
yyBy tapping the [To Live Image] button, the range of
the brightness to be extracted can be extracted from
the Live image of the target.
A target is detected as OK if the matching rate is
greater than the threshold, and detected as NG
if the matching rate is lower than the threshold.
“Selecting the Display Method of the
Detection Window/Tool Window” (Page 5-10)
“Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20)
“Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page
6-16)

10 Adjust the [Upper Limit Settings] as needed.

“Upper Limit Settings” (Page 4-70)

After setting is completed, tap the [OK] button. 11 After setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for [Area]. The system returns to the main screen for [ColorArea]/
[Area].

12 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.

4-66 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Mask 5 Tap the [Cut Mask] button to remove a region of
the mask.
1 Tap the [Mask] button

2 Tap the [Add Mask] button.

6 Select the shape, position, size, and angle of the
area to be cut from the mask according to the
4
target.

Settings Navigator
“Editing the Window” (Page 3-19)

Set cut
shape
3 Select the mask shape, position, size, and angle
according to the target.
“Editing the Window” (Page 3-19) 7 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
The system returns to the screen to set a mask region.

8 Repeat steps 2 to 7 as needed to set the mask

region.

9 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

Set the mask

shape Area not to
be masked

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the screen to set a mask region.
Area to be
masked

The system returns to the main screen for [ColorArea]/

[Area].

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-67

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Adjusting in the LIVE Screen (Color Area When selecting a batch backup file (*.iv2a), select the
image type, and tap the [OK] button.
Tool Only)
yyRunning Image History
1 Tap the [To Live Image] button. yyMaster Image
yyOK/NG Registration Image
yyLearning Image History
When [Learned Image History] is selected, select the
[Target Program] as well.

4 The Master image (left) and LIVE image (right) are

Settings Navigator

displayed.
When adjusting with the LIVE image, go to step 3.

2 When adjusting with images other than the LIVE A list of images saved as the selected image type of the
selected file is displayed.
image, tap the [Adv. Settings] tab to import the
image. Select the image to be used to adjust the [ColorArea]
tool and tap the [OK] button.
zz
When importing from a file saved in USB memory
Tap the [Load from File] button.

Select the
image

Confirm the image, and tap the [OK] button.

Select the file to be used and tap the [OK] button.

Select the
file

The imported image will be displayed on the right side

of the screen.
“Selecting the File/Folder in the USB Memory” (Page
3-22)

4-68 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

zz
When importing from the image history
Tap the [From a Hist.] button.
3 Adjust the color extraction area by checking the
matching rate.

Matching rate

4
Select the image to be imported, and tap the [OK] By selecting the [Extract] or [Exclude] button and
button. tapping an image (Master/Live/Log), you can adjust the
color extraction area.
yyIf the [Extract] button is tapped, and the areas of color

Settings Navigator
that have not been extracted are tapped, extraction
area can be added.
yyTap the [Exclude] button to exclude the color from the
extracted color area.
Select the yyTap the [+]/[-] button, and the range of color to be
image extracted can be expanded/reduced.
yyWhen the color extraction is insufficient and needs to
be performed again, tap the [Clear] button and then
tap the color to be used as the reference of judgment
again.
Confirm the image, and tap the [OK] button.
4 After setting is completed, tap the [Return to
Master Image] button.

The imported image will be displayed on the right side

of the screen.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-69

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Upper Limit Settings

1 Tap the [Upper Limit Settings] button.

4 2 Tap the [Enable] button to enable the upper limit

threshold and select the scale.
Settings Navigator

Select the scale according to the range of the matching

rate required for judgment.

3 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The slider to set the upper limit and the lower limit of the
threshold will be displayed.

4 Adjust the threshold for anomaly detection by

checking the matching rate.

Threshold
(upper limit)

Threshold
(lower limit)

A target is detected as OK if the matching rate is

greater than the threshold, and detected as NG
if the matching rate is lower than the threshold.
“Selecting the Display Method of the
Detection Window/Tool Window” (Page 5-10)
“Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20)
“Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page
6-16)

5 After setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for [ColorArea]/
[Area].

4-70 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Advanced Settings of the Color Area/Area Tool

Items Description Setting range Ref.

yyH (Hue)
0° to 359°
(both starting point and ending
Advanced Color Extraction yyColor type point)
Settings Specifies a color to be extracted with the HSV
(For color type) yyS (Saturation)
values (H: Hue, S: Saturation, V: Brightness).
0 to 255
Adv. Brightness Extraction yyB (Brightness) 4-72
(For monochrome type) 0 to 255

yyMonochrome type
0 to 255

4
Specifies brightness value to be extracted.

A color/brightness range to be extracted can be

To Live Image --
set from the Live image of the target.

Settings Navigator
yyBased on Master (default)
Matches the area extracted from
the master image as the criteria
of a rate of 100%.
yyEnable: Large
Select a condition which the matching rate of Matches 1/10th of the total
Fixed Reference Area 4-73
the Color Area/Area is 100%. sensor view as the criteria of a
rate of 100%.
yyEnable: Small
Matches 1/100th of the total
sensor view as the criteria of a
rate of 100%.

A user-specified name, such as the name of the

target, can be set for the tool. Tool names can
Tool Name Up to 16 characters can be set. 4-73
be checked on the run screen.
“5 Running” (Page 5-1)

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-71

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Advanced Color Extraction/Advanced zz
For monochrome type
Brightness Extraction

1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab.

2 Tap the [Advanced Color Extraction] button.
For monochrome type, tap the [Advanced Brightness
Extraction] button.

yyAdjust the value by slider while confirming the

4 monochrome histogram.
The values within the range specified by the
sliders will be used as the brightness.
yyThe vertical axis indicates the extracted pixel.
Settings Navigator

Among the extracted pixels of each brightness,

the one that has the most pixels becomes the
maximum value of vertical axis.
3 Specify the color or brightness of the extraction yyThe range and extraction rules of the
target. extraction detail settings are as follows.

zz
For color type Set the upper limit and lower limit in
the range of 0 to 255.
Bright The extraction range of the
brightness is from the lower limit to
the upper limit.

yyBy tapping the [To Live Image] button, the

range of the brightness to be extracted can be
set from the Live image of the target.

4 After setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

yyYou can adjust the value by slider while

confirming the color histogram. The values
within the range specified by the sliders will be
used as the color.
yyThe vertical axis indicates the extracted pixel.
Among the pixels of each color to be extracted,
the maximum pixel becomes the maximum
value of the vertical axis.
yyThe range and extraction rules of the color
extraction detail settings are as follows.

Set the upper limit and lower limit in the

range of 0 to 359.
yyLower limit ≤ Upper limit
The extraction range of a color is from
H the lower limit to the upper limit.
yyLower limit > Upper limit
The extraction range of a color is
from 0 to the upper limit, and from the
lower limit to 359.

Set the upper limit and lower limit in the

S range of 0 to 255.
The extraction range of a color is from
V the lower limit to the upper limit.

yyBy tapping the [To Live Image] button, the

range of color to be extracted can be set from
the Live image of the target.

4-72 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Fixed Reference Area „„
Tool Name
yySelect [Enable] if the master image does not If the display language (Page 7-33) is changed,
not contain the color/brightness to be used for characters may become unreadable.
judgment.
yy “Color Prohibition/Brightness Prohibition
Tool” (Page 4-141) is helpful for judging target
protrusions and misalignments.
1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab.
2 Tap the [Tool Name] button.
1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab.
2 Tap the [Fixed Reference Area] button.

Settings Navigator
3 Edit the tool name.
Up to 16 characters can be set.
“Inputting characters” (Page 3-21)
3 Adjust the fixed reference area settings. 4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

4 Tap the [OK] button.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-73

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Color/Brightness Average Tool

Setting Items for the Color/Brightness Average tool

Items Description Setting range
yyRect (default)
Specify the area to inspect with a
rectangular window. Size, position, and
angle of the window can be specified with
the stylus.
Select the window shape to yyCircle
Window Shape specify an area of the target Specify the area to inspect with a circular
to be extracted. window. Size, position, and angle of the

4 window can be specified with the stylus.

yyEntire
The entire area (imaging area) of the image
displayed in the control panel becomes the
Settings Navigator

extraction target.
When the window shape
Master color Reset Angle is set to [Rect], resets the -
Settings angle of the window.
(For color type)
Adds a rectangular/circular yyRect (default)
Master mask region in the tool Specifies the area to mask the target or
brightness window frame. The area remove from the mask with a rectangular
settings Add Mask
inside the mask region is window. Size, position, and angle of the
(For excluded from the area window can be specified with the stylus.
monochrome extraction target.
yyCircle
type)
Specifies the area to mask the target or
Removes a rectangular/ remove from the mask with a circular
circular region from the window. Size, position, and angle of the
mask region. Inside the window can be specified with the stylus.
Mask Cut Mask region removed from the yySetting counts
mask, the mask is disabled Adding a mask or removing sections of the
and the area extraction is mask can be performed up to 20 times.
enabled.
The previous operation can
be cancelled.
Undo Up to 20 prior operations -
can be undone.
(UNDO)
Deletes the mask region
Clear -
which has been set.
Adjusts the threshold
Limit 0 to 100
Matching rate (matching rate*) used in the
Adjustment (default: 70)
OK/NG judgment.
* The matching rate is 100 when a color or brightness is completely matched. The matching rate decreases as the color
or brightness of the target differs from the master image. For the color average tool, the smallest matching rate for H/S/V
calculated individually will be the matching rate for the tool.

4-74 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Setting the Color/Brightness Average Tool yyThe average color or average brightness
value is automatically extracted from inside
the window.
1 Add the [Color Avg.] tool (color type) or [Bright yyOnly set the window size to the color or
Avg.] tool (monochrome type). brightness area that you want to judge. If
“Adding a tool” (Page 4-48) the background is included, the average
The main screen for [Color Average]/[Brightness color or brightness average that includes
the background color will be registered.
Average] opens.
Therefore, the matching rate difference
2 Tap the [Master Color Settings] button. between “OK” targets and “NG” targets
that are desired to be judged will decrease.
For monochrome type, tap the [Master Brightness Good example Bad example
Settings] button.

Settings Navigator
4 Apply the mask as needed.
The area inside the mask area is excluded from
average color or average brightness extraction.
“Mask” (Page 4-76)

5 Tap the [OK] button.

Tapping the tool window will also allow for The system returns to the main screen for [Color
editing of the window. Average]/[Brightness Average].

3 Select the tool window shape, position, size, and 6

Tap the [Limit Adjust] button.
angle according to the desired target.
“Editing the Window” (Page 3-19)

Set the
position, size,
and angle The sensor changes to Test mode.

Average color or average brightness in the window is

7 Take an “OK” image and a “NG” image.
If [Trigger Options] is set to [External] or [Internal
displayed
Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to [Yes], input the
Rect Circle external trigger.
If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the [Trigger
ON] button to take an image of the target using the
internal trigger.

When [Entire] is selected, the tool window will be

hidden.
The window angle can be reset by the [Angle
Reset].

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-75

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

8 Adjust the threshold for anomaly detection by „„

Mask
checking the matching rate.
<Setting example> 1 Tap the [Mask] button
If the matching rate of an “OK” image is higher than
90 and if the matching rate of a “NG” image is lower
than 40, set the threshold to 65, the value intermediate
between 40 and 90.
Average color/brightness of the master
image
Average color/brightness of the Live
image

4
Match

Threshold 2 Tap the [Add Mask] button.

Settings Navigator

yyFor the color average tool, the smallest

matching rate for H/S/V calculated individually
will be the matching rate for the tool.
yyA target is detected as OK if the matching rate
is greater than the threshold, and detected
as NG if the matching rate is lower than the
threshold.
“Selecting the Display Method of the
Detection Window/Tool Window” (Page 3 Select the mask shape, position, size, and angle
5-10) according to the target.
“Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20) “Editing the Window” (Page 3-19)
“Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page
6-16)

9 After setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for [Color
Average]/[Brightness Average].

10 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for tool settings. Set the mask
shape

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the screen to set a mask region.

4-76 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

5 Tap the [Cut Mask] button to remove a region of

the mask.

6 Select the shape, position, size, and angle of the

area to be cut from the mask according to the
4
target.

Settings Navigator
“Editing the Window” (Page 3-19)

Set cut
shape

7 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

8 Repeat steps 2 to 7 as needed to set the mask
region.

Area not to
be masked

Area to be
masked

9 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for [Color
Average]/[Brightness Average].

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-77

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Advanced settings of the Color/Brightness Average tool

Items Description Setting range Ref.

yyHi Sens
Judges the difference in color/
brightness with high sensitivity.
yyNormal (default)
Judges the color/brightness
yyColor type
difference with the standard
Color range Specifies the judgment sensitivity for the color
sensitivity.
(For color type) extracted from the master image.
yyLowSens
Brightness range yyMonochrome type This setting makes judgment
(For monochrome type) Specifies the judgment sensitivity for the resistant to individual color/

4
brightness extracted from the master image. brightness differences and
ambient light interference. 4-79
yyManual
Individually set the color/
Settings Navigator

brightness of the range to be

used as an OK target.

The color range to be extracted can be selected

Live Image -
from the Live image of the target.

Imports images to be used for the judgment

From a Hist. -
sensitivity from the running image history.

Imports an image used for the judgment

From a File -
sensitivity from a file saved in USB memory.

yyFrom master image (default)

Matches the color/brightness
Specify Mast. color extracted from the master image
(For color type) as the criteria for the matching
Selects how to specify the master color/
rate of 100%. 4-83
brightness.
Specify Mast.Bright yyInput Value
(For monochrome type) Input the HSV/brightness value
manually to specify the master
color/brightness.

A user-defined name, such as the name of a

target, can be set for tools. Tool names can be
Tool Name Up to 16 characters can be set. 4-83
checked on the RUN screen.
“5 Running” (Page 5-1)

4-78 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Color Range/Brightness Range 4 Select the color/brightness judgment sensitivity.
1 Select the [Advanced Settings] tab. zz
For color type
yySelecting [Hi Sens]/[Normal]/[LowSens]
2 Tap the [ColorRange] button. automatically sets the judgment area. (The
For monochrome type, tap the [BrightnessRange] average color (HSV) value is the center of
button. the master image window.)
yyTo narrow the OK area, select [Hi Sens].
This enables small color differences to be
differentiated.
yyTo widen the OK area, select [LowSens].
This setting makes judgment resistant to
individual OK color differences and light
interference.
yy[Manual] enables the desired area to be set
as needed.
yyRe-registering the master image or
registering an external master image
4
automatically updates the area in

Settings Navigator
conjunction with the average color for
the updated master image. If [Manual] is
3 Select an image for which you want to adjust the selected, it is automatically updated while
color/brightness area. retaining the specified area.
If you want to use the master image, go to step 4.
€
€Selecting sensitivity on the master image

(1)

(2)

(4)
(3)
zz
To use the Live image
Tap the [Live Image] button. No. Description
The color area can be set based on the Live image of
the target. Select the color/brightness judgment sensitivity ([Hi
(1)
Sens]/[Normal] (default)/[LowSens]/[Manual]).
zz
When importing from the image history
Tap the [From a Hist.] button to select the image that is The following items are displayed on the bar graph
desired to be used. (H/S/V).
For details of how to perform this operation, refer yy (Average color value of the master image)
to “When importing from the image history” yySolid line (color judgment sensitivity area)
(Page 4-69). yyDotted line (threshold area of the color average
(2) tool)
zz
When importing from a file saved in a USB Bar graph scale
memory H : Automatically adjusts the average
Tap the [From a File] button to select the file desired to color value of the master image to
be imported. be centered on the bar.
S/V : Left end is 0 and right end is 255.
For details of how to perform this operation,
refer to “When importing from a file saved in Displays the average HSV value of the master
USB memory” (Page 4-68). (3)
image.
If a batch backup file (*.iv2a) is selected, select the (4) Displays the average color of the master image.
image type from the following types:
yyRunning Image History
yyMaster Image
yyOK/NG Registration Image
yyLearning Image History
Select the target program when the learning image
history is selected.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-79

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

€
€Selecting sensitivity on an image other than the Relationship between the color judgment
master image sensitivity and matching rate
yyWhen the average color of the target matches
the average color of the master image, the
matching rate is 100. The matching rate
decreases as the difference between the
(1) average color of the target and master image
increases. The sensitivity area is automatically
adjusted so that the matching rate becomes
(2) 70.
Matching rate
Color average
(4) 100
(6)
70

4 No.
(7) (5)

Description
(3) Threshold

H/S/B
Settings Navigator

Select the color judgment sensitivity ([Hi Sens]/

(1) HSV sensitivity
[Standard] (default)/[LowSens]/[Manual]).
range
yyThe following items are displayed on the bar Matching rate
graph (H/S/V). threshold range
yy (Average color value of the master image)
yy (Average color value of the Live image) yyThe color average tool individually calculates
the matching rate of H (hue)/S (saturation)/V
yy ( Average color value of the image file or (brightness) for the target.
history image) yyThe smallest matching rate for H/S/V
yySolid line (color judgment sensitivity area) calculated individually will be the matching rate
yyDotted line (threshold area of the color average for the color average tool.
tool)
yyDisplays the total status result for each sensitivity
€
€When [Manual] is selected
on the right side of the bar graph (H/S/B). When
all status results are OK, the total status result for The OK range can be adjusted arbitrarily.
(2) the tool will be OK.

Status result
(Green: OK; red: NG)

Adjust the
Bar graph scale range with the
H : Automatically adjusts the average slider
color value of the master image to
be centered on the bar.
S/V : Left end is 0 and right end is 255
For an image other than the master image, the average
Displays the average HSV value of the master color value of the imported image is displayed.
(3)
image.

(4) Displays the average color of the master image.

Displays the average HSV value of the imported

(5)
image.

(6) Displays the average color of the imported image.

(7) When setting is completed, tap this button.

4-80 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

zz
For monochrome type €
€Selecting sensitivity on an image other than the
master image
yySelecting [Hi Sens]/[Standard]/[LowSens]
automatically sets the judgment area. (The
average brightness value is the center of
the master image window.)
yyTo narrow the range of OK brightness, (1)
select [Hi Sens]. This enables small
brightness differences to be differentiated.
yyTo widen the range of OK brightness,
(2)
select [LowSens]. This setting makes
judgment resistant to individual brightness
differences and light interference.
(4)
yy[Manual] enables the desired area to be set (6)
as needed.
yyRe-registering the master image or
registering an external master image
automatically updates the area in
conjunction with the average brightness
No.
(7) (5) (3)

Description
4
for the updated master image. If [Manual] is

Settings Navigator
Select the brightness judgment sensitivity ([Hi
selected, it is automatically updated while (1)
Sens]/[Standard] (default)/[LowSens]/[Manual]).
retaining the specified area.
yyThe following items are displayed on the bar
€
€Selecting sensitivity on the master image graph.
yy (Average brightness value of the master
image)
yy (Average brightness value of the Live
image)
(1) yy (Average brightness value of the image file
or history image)
yySolid line (brightness judgment sensitivity area)
(2) (2) yyDotted line (threshold area of the brightness
average tool)
(3) yyThe tool status result is displayed on the right
(4) side of the bar graph.

Status result
No. Description (Green: OK; red: NG)

Select the brightness judgment sensitivity ([Hi The bar graph scale is from 0 on the left
(1)
Sens] / [Normal] (default) / [LowSens]/[Manual]). to 255 on the right.

The following items are displayed on the bar graph. Displays the average brightness value of the
yy (Average brightness value of the master (3)
master image.
image)
yySolid line (brightness judgment sensitivity area) (4) Displays the average brightness of the master image.
(2) yyDotted line (threshold area of the brightness
Displays the average brightness value of the
average tool) (5)
imported image.
The bar graph scale is from 0 on the left
to 255 on the right. (6) Displays the average brightness of the imported image.

(7) When setting is completed, tap this button.

Displays the average brightness value of the
(3)
master image.

Displays the average brightness of the master

(4)
image.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-81

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Relationship between the brightness judgment €

€When [Manual] is selected
sensitivity and matching rate You can make adjustments to the “OK” target area as
yyWhen the average brightness of the target you like.
matches the average color of the master
image, the matching rate is 100. The matching
rate decreases as the difference between the
average brightness of the target and master
image increases. The sensitivity area is
automatically adjusted so that the matching
Adjust the
rate becomes 70.
range with the
Matching rate Brightness slider
average
100

70

4 Threshold
For an image other than the master image, the average
brightness value of the imported image is displayed.
Bright
Settings Navigator

Sensitivity range

Matching rate
threshold range

5 After setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for the Extended
Functions settings.

6 Tap the [Settings] tab.

The system returns to the main screen for [Color
Average]/[Brightness Average].

4-82 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Specify Master Color/Master Brightness „„
Tool Name

1 Select the [Advanced Settings] tab. If the display language (Page 7-33) is changed,
characters may become unreadable.
2 Tap the [Specify Mast. Color].
For monochrome type, tap the [Specify Mast.Bright
] button.
1 Select the [Advanced Settings] tab.
2 Tap the [Tool Name] button.

Settings Navigator
3 Select how to specify the master color/
brightness.
3 Edit the tool name.
When updating the master color/brightness Up to 16 characters can be set.
registered for the master image, select [From “Inputting characters” (Page 3-21)
master image].
4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
zz
From Mast.Img. (default)
The average color/brightness value in the window
specified with the master image is set as the master
color/brightness.
If the master image is updated, the master color is
automatically updated.

zz
Input Values
Input the HSV value/brightness to specify the master
color/brightness.
Even if the master image is updated, the master color is
not automatically updated.

Enter a value

4 After setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-83

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Position Adjustment tool

Setting items for the Position Adjustment tool

Items Description Setting range

yyRect (default)
Specify the area to inspect with a rectangular
window. Size, position, and angle of the window
Window Select the window shape to specify the can be specified with the stylus.
Shape area of the target to detect. yyCircle
Specify the area to inspect with a circular window.
Size, position, and angle of the window can be
Edit Window specified with the stylus.

4 Specifies an area in which to serve as

the reference of position adjustment for a
yyEntire (default)
Specifies the entire imaging area as a search
Search range.
Settings Navigator

target. By using a narrower area for the

Range yyPartial
search range, the processing time will be
shortened. Specifies the search range as a user-specified size
within the imaging area.

yyUndo
The previous operation can be cancelled.
Up to 5 prior operations can be undone. (UNDO)
Unnecessary outlines which interfere
yyClear
with a stable position adjustment can be
Remove Initializes all of the disabled outlines. Returns all
removed from the inspection area. The
Outline outlines to an active state.
disabled outlines can be specified by
tracing the extracted outline with the stylus. yyEraser Width
Selects the eraser width (light/medium/heavy) of
the pen used when specifying an unnecessary
Fine Tune outline.
Outline yyHigh
Extracts the outline of the image with low contrast.
Used when the desired outline cannot be
extracted with Normal sensitivity.
*1
The outline extraction sensitivity can be yyNormal (default)
Sensitivity
selected according to the target quality. Extracts the standard outline.
yyLow
Reduces the extracted volume of the outline. Used
in situations where an outline is not necessary for
inspection.

Adjusts the threshold (matching rate*2)

which judges whether the position
adjustment succeeds or fails. During
0 to 100
Limit Adjustment threshold adjustment, the system switches
(default: 70)
to Test mode so that the threshold can
be adjusted to an applicable value for
operation.

*1 If digital zoom is set to [Zoom Mag: x4] on the IV2-G300CA/IV2-G600MA, the default value is [High].
*2 A matching rate of 100 indicates that an outline is completely matched.
The matching rate decreases with differences between the outline of the target and the master image.

4-84 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Setting of the Position Adjustment Tool 6 Adjust the outline as needed.

“Settings for disabling outlines” (Page 4-86)
“Setting the sensitivity” (Page 4-87)
1 Adds the [Pos. Adj.] tool.
“Adding a tool” (Page 4-48) 7 Tap the [Limit Adjustment] button.
The main screen for [Pos. Adj.] opens.

2 Tap the [Edit Window] button.

4
The sensor changes to Test mode.

Settings Navigator
8 Image the target.
Editing the window can be performed by tapping If [Trigger Options] is set to [External] or [Internal
the tool window as well. Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to [Yes], input the
external trigger.
If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the [Trigger
3 Select the tool window shape, position, size, and ON] button to take an image of the target using the
angle according to the target. internal trigger.
“Editing the Window” (Page 3-19)
9 Adjust the threshold used to judge whether
or not the position adjustment succeeds by
checking the matching rate.

Matching rate

Set a position, Threshold

size, and
angle
Rect Circle

yyIf there are many variations of the target shape

that the position adjustment window has been
set to, set the threshold to a lower matching
Set the position and size of the position rate.
adjustment tool to capture as much of a yyA target is detected as OK if the matching rate
part that is common amongst all targets as is greater than the threshold, and detected
possible. as NG if the matching rate is lower than the
“Stabilizing the position adjustment” threshold.
(Page 6-22) “Selecting the Display Method of the
Detection Window/Tool Window” (Page 5-10)
“Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20)
4 Set a search range as needed. “Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page
“Search Range Settings” (Page 4-86) 6-16)

5 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button. 10 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for [Pos. Adj.].
The system returns to the main screen for [Pos. Adj.].

11 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-85

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Search Range Settings „„
Settings for disabling outlines

1 Tap the [Partial] button. 1 Tap the [Fine Tune Outline] button.

4 2 Set the tool window to indicate the search range. 2 Select [Eraser Width], and specify the outline
that is not required for judgment by tracing it
Settings Navigator

with stylus.
The disabled outline changes from green to yellow.

Search
Range

“Editing the Window” (Page 3-19)

The search range cannot be rotated.

3 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for [Pos. Adj.].
The outline that the outline
extraction has disabled
(yellow)

The [Undo] button can be used up to 5 times.

3 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for [Pos. Adj.].

4-86 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Setting the sensitivity

1 Tap the [Fine Tune Outline] button.

The outline
cannot be

4
extracted

2 Select [Sensitivity] of the outline.

Settings Navigator
3 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

Extracted
outline

The system returns to the main screen for [Pos. Adj.].

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-87

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Advanced Settings for the Position Adjustment Tool

Items Description Setting range Ref.

Sets the range of rotation to adjust the position for the

target.
The status result of the position adjustment is NG and
position is not adjusted if the angle of rotation of the
target exceeds its rotation range. 0 to ±180° (Unit: 1°)
Rotation Range
yyIf the rotation range is set wide, the acceptable range (default: ±20°)
of variation in angles in which a target can be placed
can be wider.
yyIf the rotation range is set narrow, the processing time
can be shortened. 4-88

4
yyON (default)
The tool window will search a range
that is a few degrees wider and
Select whether or not to allow a margin for the angle set narrower than the set value of the
Margin
Settings Navigator

as the Rotation Range. rotation range.

yyOFF
The tool window will search only
within the set rotation range.

yyHigh Accuracy
Position adjustment can be performed
with high accuracy. Misalignment
The algorithm used to search for the Position of the position adjustment can be
Search Algorithm Adjustment tool can be adjusted depending on the decreased. 4-89
inspection requirements.
yyHigh speed (default)
Position adjustment can be performed
faster than in high accuracy mode.

„„
Rotation Range

1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab. 4 Select whether to include the margin in the
rotation range.
2 Tap the [Rotation Range] button.

yySelect [ON] when the position adjustment

3 Set the rotation range of the Position Adjustment is not stable because of the angle of
rotation of the target.
tool.
The tool window will search with a range a
few degrees wider and narrower than the
setting value of the rotation range.
(The tool window will search ± a few
degrees even if the rotation range is set to
0°.)
yySelect [OFF] when detection of the target
should be performed according to the set
rotation angle of the target.

5 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

“Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20)

4-88 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Search Algorithm

1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab.

2 Tap the [Search Algorithm] button.

4
3 Select the type of search algorithm (High

Settings Navigator
Accuracy/High Speed).

yySelect [High Accuracy] when detection is

not stable because the position of the tool
window after position adjustment does not
match the target position.
yySelect [High Speed] to shorten the
processing time.

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-89

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Width tool

Setting items for the Width tool

Items Description Setting range

Specify the area to inspect with a rectangular

Select the window shape to specify
Edit Window window. Size, position, and angle of the window
the area of the target to inspect.
can be specified with the stylus.

Mask Specifies the area to mask the target with a

Adds a rectangular mask region in rectangular window. Size, position, and angle of
the tool window frame. The area the window can be specified with the stylus.
Add Mask inside the mask region is excluded yyClear

4
from the width detection target. Remove the section of mask that has been
applied.

Automatically adjust the sensitivity

Settings Navigator

that detects the edge that will

Edge Sensitivity Auto Adjustment --
become the standard of reference
for width extraction.

Manually adjust the sensitivity that

detects the edge that will become
(manual adjustment) 1 to 100 (default: 50)
the standard of reference for width
extraction.

The edge sensitivity can be adjusted

To Live Image --
from the Live image of the target.

Adjusts the threshold (matching 0-200

rate*) used in the OK/NG judgment. (if [Upper Limit] is [Enable])
During threshold adjustment, the (default: lower limit: 80, upper limit: 120)
Limit Adjustment
system turns to Test mode so that The settings range is different depending on the
the thresholds can be adjusted to the settings of [Upper Limit Settings] and [Scaling]
applicable value for operation. (Page 4-96).

Enables the upper limit of the yyEnable (default)

threshold. Activates [Upper Limit].
Enable when OK/NG judgment is
Upper Limit yyDisable
desired for a situation when the
target width is longer than the width OFF
extracted from the master image. Disables [Upper Limit].
Upper
Limit yy0 to 200 (default)
Settings Sets the upper and the lower limit of the
When the upper limit of the threshold threshold in a range within 0 to 200.
is ON, select the threshold scale
Scale yy0-999
according to the range of the
matching rate required for judgment. Sets the upper and the lower limit of the
threshold in a range within 0 to 999.
The slider movement unit is 5.

* A matching rate of 100 indicates that the target width is completely matched to the master image. The matching rate
becomes smaller with a narrower width and larger with a wider width. If the matching rate exceeds the upper limit of the
threshold range, the matching rate will display as the upper limit of the threshold range.

4-90 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Setting the Width tool 7 Perform the Edge Sensitivity Auto Adjustment as
needed.
“Edge Sensitivity Auto Adjustment” (Page 4-92)
1 Select the [Extra 1] tab, and add the [Width] tool.
“Adding a tool” (Page 4-48) 8 Tap the [Limit Adjustment] button.
Displays the Width tool direction selection screen.

2 Tap the [Horizontal Dir.]/[Vertical Dir.] button.

4
The sensor changes to Test mode.

Settings Navigator
9 Take an “OK” image and a “NG” image.
The main screen for [Width] opens. If [Trigger Options] is set to [External] or [Internal
Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to [Yes], input the
3 Tap the [Edit Window] button. external trigger.
If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the [Trigger
ON] button to take an image of the target using the
internal trigger.

10 Adjust the threshold for anomaly detection by

checking the matching rate.

Matching rate

Threshold
4 Set a position, size, and angle of the tool window (upper limit)
according to the target.
Threshold
(lower limit)

A target is detected as OK if the matching rate is

greater than the threshold, and detected as NG
if the matching rate is lower than the threshold.
“Selecting the Display Method of the
Detection Window/Tool Window” (Page 5-10)
Set a position, “Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20)
size, and “Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page
angle
6-16)

“Editing the Window” (Page 3-19)

11 Set [Upper Limit Settings] as needed.
5 Apply a mask as needed. “Upper Limit Settings” (Page 4-93)
Area inside the mask region is excluded from the width
detection target. 12 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
“Mask” (Page 4-92) The system returns to the main screen of [Width].

6 Tap the [OK] button. 13 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen of [Width].
The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-91

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Mask „„
Edge Sensitivity Auto Adjustment

1 Tap the [Mask] button 1 Tap the [Edge Sensitivity Auto Adjustment]
button.

4 2 Tap the [Add Mask] button. The edge sensitivity will be adjusted automatically
Settings Navigator

according to the target.

3 Set the position and size of the mask according

to the target.
yyThe edges that are options for width detection
are displayed as yellow. The distance between
the green edges is defined as matching rate
100 of the Width tool.
yyIf the distance between edges changes, tap
the green edge and adjust its position. The
yellow edges can be selected as the target
edges.
yyWhen adjusting the edge sensitivity manually,
refer to “Edge Sensitivity Manual
Set the mask Adjustment” (Page 4-95).
shape
2 Tap the [OK] button.
“Editing the Window” (Page 3-19) The system returns to the main screen of [Width].

yyOnly one mask can be set.

yyThe mask settings can be adjusted more than
once.

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

Area not to
be masked

Area to be
masked

Returns to the settings screen for “Edit window”.

4-92 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Upper Limit Settings

1 Tap the [Upper Limit Settings] button.

2 Set the upper limit settings. 4

Settings Navigator
zz
When changing the setting scale
Tap [0-999] for the setting scale, and tap the [OK]
button.
zz
When upper limit is disabled
Tap the [Disable] button of the upper limit, and tap the
[OK] button.
Adjust the threshold for anomaly detection by checking
the matching rate.
<Setting example>
If the matching rate of an “OK” image is higher than
90 and if the matching rate of a “NG” image is lower
than 40, set the threshold to 65, the value intermediate
between 40 and 90.

Matching rate

Threshold

A target is detected as OK if the matching rate is

greater than the threshold, and detected as NG
if the matching rate is lower than the threshold.
“Selecting the Display Method of the
Detection Window/Tool Window” (Page 5-10)
“Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20)
“Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page
6-16)

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-93

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Advanced settings for the width tool

Items Description Setting range Ref.

Manually adjust the sensitivity that

detects the edge that will become 1 to 100
Edge Sensitivity Manual Adjustment
the standard of reference for width (default: 50)
extraction.

The edge sensitivity can be adjusted

To Live Image -- 4-95
from the Live image of the target.

Automatically adjust the sensitivity

Edge Sensitivity that detects the edge that will become
--
Auto Adjustment the standard of reference for width

4
extraction.

yyMas. Wid. (default)

Detects the width which is similar
to the width registered in the
Settings Navigator

master image, and extracts its

width.
Select the method used to extract the
Width Extraction Method yyOutside 4-96
target width.
Extracts the outer-most width in
the tool window.
yyInside
Extracts the inner-most width in
the tool window.

yyON
Set when length is being used for Enable scaling.
Scaling anomaly detection instead of the
matching rate. yyOFF (default)
Disable scaling.
Scaling When scaling is enabled, input the 0.05 to 9999 4-96
Display Value display value in relation to matching (Maximum input digits: 4)
rate (*) 100. (default: 100.0)

When scaling is enabled, copy the

Copy Setting --
scaling settings from another tool.

A user-specified name, such as the

name of the target, can be set for the
Tool Name tool. Tool names can be checked on Up to 16 characters can be set. 4-97
the run screen.
“‌ 5 Running” (Page 5-1)

* A matching rate of 100 indicates that the target width is completely matched to the master image width. The matching
rate becomes smaller with a narrower width and larger with a wider width.

4-94 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Edge Sensitivity Manual Adjustment The edge intensity threshold indicates the ratio
of edge recognition taking the edge intensity
1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab. maximum value (where the contrasting density
is greatest) as 100%.
2 Tap the [Edge Sensitivity Manual Adjustment]
button.

Edge detection
Projection direction

4
wave
+255

Settings Navigator
Edge intensity Threshold for edge
3 Adjust the edge sensitivity threshold value used +255
wave sensitivity (%)
to extract a width by checking the edge intensity 100%
profile displayed on the image. 100% in-between
0 0%
(Illustration for edge
intensity wave)
Threshold for edge sensitivity 50% (2 edges to be
detected)
Sensitivity
threshold
50%

Threshold for edge sensitivity 30%

(4 edges to be detected)
Edge intensity profile

yySensitivity limit can be adjusted by touching

the red line. 30%
yyTap the [To Live Image] button to adjust
threshold value for edge sensitivity using the
target Live image.
yyTap the [Edge Sensitivity Auto Adjustment]
button to adjust the threshold for edge
sensitivity automatically.

4 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for Width tool
settings.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-95

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Width Extraction Method „„
Scaling

1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab. 1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab.
2 Tap the [Width Extract] button. 2 Tap the [Scaling] button.

4
3 Tap the [ON] button.
Settings Navigator

3 Select [Width Extraction Method].

yyIf scaling is ON, the display range and the

yyWhen extracting the width which is similar setting scale (x2 or x10) of the threshold
to the width registered in master image, adjustment will be automatically adjusted.
select [Mas. Wid.]. yyIf scaling is ON, the threshold can be
Performance during adjusted by 0.1 mm.
Master Image an operation

4 Set scaling.
zz
When the scaling settings are changed
Tap the [Edit] button.

Width to be measured
yyWhen extracting the outer-most width of
the tool window, select [Outside].

Width to be measured
yyWhen extracting the inner-most width of
the tool window, select [Inside].
Enter a display value and tap the [OK] button.
“Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20)
The scaling display value can be adjusted by
0.05 mm.

Width to be measured

4 Tap the [OK] button.

4-96 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

zz
When copying scaling settings „„
Tool Name
Tap the [Copy Setting] button.
If the display language (Page 7-33) is changed,
characters may become unreadable.

1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab.

2 Tap the [Tool Name] button.

4
Select the source tool.

Settings Navigator
3 Edit the tool name.
Up to 16 characters can be set.
“Inputting characters” (Page 3-21)

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

Tap the [Copy] button.

The confirmation screen opens.

5 Tap the [OK] button.

Return to the [Copy Setting] screen.

6 Tap the [OK] button.

Return to the [Scaling] setting screen.

7 Tap the [OK] button.

The confirmation screen opens.

8 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen of [Width].
If the scaling value of the source tool is
changed, copy the scaling settings again.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-97

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Diameter tool

Setting items for the Diameter tool

Items Description Setting range

Specify the area to inspect with a circular

Select the window shape to specify the
Edit Window window. Size and position of the window can
area of the target to inspect.
be specified with the stylus.

Mask Specifies the area to mask the target with

Adds a circular mask region in the tool a circular window. Size and position of the
window frame. window can be specified with the stylus.
The area inside the mask region is
Add Mask excluded from the diameter detection yyClear

4 target. Remove the section of the mask that has

been applied.

yyHigh
Settings Navigator

Makes it easier to extract the diameter

of an image with low contrast and low
roundness. Used when a diameter desired
for detection cannot be extracted.
Selects the sensitivity for diameter yyNormal (default)
Ext. Sens
extraction according to the target. Extracts the standard diameter.
Diameter
yyLow
Extraction
Reduces the extracted diameter volume.
Used when diameters other than the
desired diameter for inspection are
extracted.

The diameter used for inspection can

Change Specified Circle be changed when there are multiple --
circles of the extracted diameter.

Adjusts the threshold (matching rate*)

0-200 (if [Upper Limit] is [Enable])
used in the OK/NG judgment. During
(default: lower limit: 80, upper limit: 120)
threshold adjustment, the system turns
Limit Adjustment The settings range is different depending
to Test mode so that the thresholds
on the settings of [Upper Limit Settings] and
can be adjusted to the applicable value
[Scaling] (Page 4-104).
for operation.

Enables the upper limit of the yyEnable (default)

threshold. Activates [Upper Limit].
Enable when OK/NG judgment is
Upper Limit yyDisable
desired for a situation when the target
diameter is larger than the diameter OFF
extracted from the master image. Disables [Upper Limit].
Upper
Limit yy0 to 200 (default)
Settings Sets the upper and the lower limit of the
When the upper limit of the threshold threshold in a range within 0 to 200.
is ON, select the threshold scale
Scale yy0-999
according to the range of the matching
rate required for judgment. Sets the upper and the lower limit of the
threshold in a range within 0 to 999.
The slider movement unit is 5.

* A matching rate of 100 indicates that the target diameter is completely matched to the master image diameter. The
matching rate is a value proportional to the diameter used in the master image. If the matching rate exceeds the upper
limit of the threshold range, the matching rate will display as the upper limit of the threshold range.

4-98 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Setting the Diameter tool 7 Tap the [Limit Adjustment] button.

1 Select the [Extra 1] tab, and add the [Diameter]
tool.
“Adding a tool” (Page 4-48)
The main screen for [Diameter] opens.

2 Tap the [Edit Window] button.

The sensor changes to Test mode.

8 Take an “OK” image and a “NG” image.

If [Trigger Options] is set to [External] or [Internal
4
Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to [Yes], input the

Settings Navigator
external trigger.
If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the [Trigger
ON] button to take an image of the target using the
internal trigger.
3 Set the position and size of the tool window
according to the target. 9 Adjust the threshold for anomaly detection by
Place the center of the tool window inside the target. checking the matching rate.

Matching
rate
Set the tool
window Threshold
(upper limit)

Center of tool
Threshold
window
(lower limit)

“Editing the Window” (Page 3-19) Judged OK when the matching rate is within
Detects circles from the center of tool window threshold range, and NG when it is outside the
towards outside. range.
“Selecting the Display Method of the

4 Apply a mask as needed. Detection Window/Tool Window” (Page 5-10)

“Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20)
The area inside the mask region is excluded from a “Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page
diameter detection target. 6-16)
“Mask” (Page 4-100)

5 Tap the [OK] button. 10 Set [Upper Limit Settings] as needed.

The system returns to the main screen of [Diameter]. “Upper Limit Settings” (Page 4-101)

6 Perform diameter extraction as needed. 11 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
“Diameter Extraction” (Page 4-100) The system returns to the main screen of [Diameter].

12 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-99

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Mask „„
Diameter Extraction

1 Tap the [Mask] button 1 Tap the [Diameter Extract.] button.

4 2 Tap the [Add Mask] button. The Settings Navigator guide opens.
Tap the [OK] button.
Settings Navigator

2 Select [Ext. Sens] of a diameter.

3 Set the mask diameter size according to the target.

3 Tap the [◄Inside]/[Outside►] button of “Change
Specified Circle”, and select the circle with the
diameter to be used for inspection.

Set the mask The circle used for diameter extraction is

shape displayed in green color.
You can also tap the yellow candidate circle to
select the circle for diameter extraction.

4 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen of [Diameter].
“Editing the Window” (Page 3-19)
yyOnly one mask can be set.
yyThe mask settings can be adjusted more than
once.

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

Returns to the settings screen for “Edit window”.

Area not to
be masked

Area to be
masked

4-100 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Upper Limit Settings

1 Tap the [Upper Limit Settings] button.

2 Set the upper limit settings. 4

Settings Navigator
zz
When changing the setting scale
Tap [0-999] for the setting scale, and tap the [OK]
button.
zz
When upper limit is disabled
Tap the [Disable] button of the upper limit, and tap the
[OK] button.
Adjust the threshold for anomaly detection by checking
the matching rate.
<Setting example>
If the matching rate of an “OK” image is higher than
90 and if the matching rate of a “NG” image is lower
than 40, set the threshold to 65, the value intermediate
between 40 and 90.

Matching rate

Threshold

A target is detected as OK if the matching rate is

greater than the threshold, and detected as NG
if the matching rate is lower than the threshold.
“Selecting the Display Method of the
Detection Window/Tool Window” (Page 5-10)
“Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20)
“Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page
6-16)

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-101

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Advanced settings for the Diameter tool

Items Description Setting range Ref.

yySet Φ (default)
Extracts the circle whose diameter is
simialr to the diameter specified inside
the tool window.
Diameter Select the method used to extract the yyMax
Mode target diameter. Extracts the largest circle inside the tool
window.
yyMin
Extracts the smallest circle inside the
tool window.

4
Advanced
Diameter yyMaster Dir. (default) 4-100
Extraction Detects edges in same bright/dark
direction as master image.
Settings Navigator

yyBoth
Detects bright -> dark and dark -> bright
Bright/Dark Select the direction in which the tool edges.
Direction detects the target edge. yyBright -> Dark
Detects edges that change from bright
to dark.
yyDark -> Bright
Detects edges that change from dark to
bright.

yyON
Set when length is being used for Enable scaling.
Scaling anomaly detection instead of the
matching rate. yyOFF (default)
Disable scaling.
Scaling When scaling is enabled, input the 0.05 to 9999 4-104
Display Value display value in relation to matching (Maximum input digits: 4)
rate (*) 100. (default: 100.0)

When scaling is enabled, copy the

Copy Setting --
scaling settings from another tool.

A user-specified name, such as the

name of the target, can be set for the
Tool Name tool. Tool names can be checked on Up to 16 characters can be set. 4-104
the run screen.
“‌ 5 Running” (Page 5-1)

* A matching rate of 100 indicates that the target diameter is completely matched to the master image diameter. The
matching rate is a value proportional to the diameter used in the master image.

4-102 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Advanced Diameter Extraction 4 Select bright/dark direction.
1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab.
2 Tap the [Advanced Diameter Extraction] button.

4
yyWhen detecting edges in same bright/
dark direction as the master image, select
[Master Dir.].
yyWhen detecting both bright->dark and
3 Select the diameter mode.

Settings Navigator
dark->bright edges, select [Both].
yyWhen detecting edges that change from
bright to dark, select [Bright -> Dark].
yyWhen detecting edges that change from
dark to bright, select [Dark -> Bright].
Bright -> Dark Dark -> Bright

Tool window Tool window

Detects circles from the center of tool window

yyIf the circle desired is the one whose towards the outside.
diameter is similar to the circle specified
inside the tool window, select [Set Φ].
Performance during 5 Tap the [OK] button.
Master Image an operation The system returns to the main screen of [Diameter].

Diameter to be detected
yyWhen extracting the largest circle inside
the tool window, select [Max].
Performance during
Master Image an operation

Diameter to be detected
yyWhen extracting the smallest circle inside
the tool window, select [Min].
Performance during
Master Image an operation

Diameter to be detected

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-103

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Scaling zz
When copying scaling settings from another tool
Tap the [Copy Setting] button.
1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab.
2 Tap the [Scaling] button.

4
Select the source tool.
Settings Navigator

3 Tap the [ON] button.

Tap the [Copy] button.

yyIf scaling is enabled, the display range

and the setting scale (x2 or x10) of the
threshold adjustment will be automatically
adjusted.
yyIf the scaling is enabled, the threshold can
be adjusted by 0.1 mm.

4 Set scaling.
zz
When the scaling settings are changed The confirmation screen opens.
Tap the [Edit] button.
5 Tap the [OK] button.
Return to the [Copy Setting] screen.

6 Tap the [OK] button.

Return to the [Scaling] setting screen.

7 Tap the [OK] button.

The confirmation screen opens.

8 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen of [Diameter].
If the scaling value of the source tool is
Enter a display value and tap the [OK] button. changed, copy the scaling settings again.
“Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20)
The scaling display value can be adjusted by
0.05 mm.

4-104 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Tool Name
If the display language (Page 7-33) is changed,
characters may become unreadable.

1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab.

2 Tap the [Tool Name] button.

Settings Navigator
3 Edit the tool name.
Up to 16 characters can be set.
“Inputting characters” (Page 3-21)

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-105

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Edge tool

Setting items for Edge tool

Items Description Setting range

Specify the area to inspect with a

Select the window shape to specify the rectangular window. Size, position, and
Edit Window
area of the target to inspect. angle of the window can be specified with
the stylus.

Mask Specifies the area to mask the target with

a rectangular window. Size, position, and
angle of the window can be specified with

4
the stylus.
Adds a rectangular mask region in the yyClear
tool window frame. The area inside the Remove the section of mask that has
Add Mask mask region is excluded from the edge been applied.
Settings Navigator

detection target.
yyUndo
The previous operation can be cancelled.
yySetting counts
The mask can be applied up to 30 times.

Automatically adjust the sensitivity

Edge Sensitivity Auto Adjustment --
which detects the edge.

Manually adjust the sensitivity which 1 to 100

Man. Adj.
detects the edge. (default: 50)

The edge sensitivity can be adjusted

To Live Image --
using the Live image of the target.

Adjusts the threshold (matching rate*1)

used in the OK/NG judgment. During
threshold adjustment, the system turns 0-2 *1
Limit Adjustment
to Test mode so that the thresholds (When setting scale is 0 to 2)
can be adjusted to the applicable value
for operation.

Enables the upper limit of the yyEnable (default)

threshold. Activates [Upper Limit].
Set if OK/NG judgment is desired for
Upper Limit yyDisable
a target that has a number of target
edges larger than the number of edges OFF
of the master image. Disables [Upper Limit].
Upper Limit Select the upper limit and lower limit range
Settings When the upper limit of the threshold
is ON, select the threshold scale of the threshold from the following.
according to the range of the matching yy0-2
rate required for judgment. yy0-5
Scale
yy0-10
The default is automatically adjusted
yy0-20
according to the number of edges on
yy0-50
the registered master image. yy0-128

*1 The matching rate is the number of edges.

4-106 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Setting the Edge tool 7 Perform Edge Sensitivity Auto Adjustment as

needed.
“Edge Sensitivity Auto Adjustment” (Page 4-109)
1 Select the [Extra 1] tab, and add the [Edge] tool.
“Adding a tool” (Page 4-48) 8 Tap the [Limit Adjustment] button.
Displays the Edge tool direction selection screen.

2 Tap the [Horizontal Dir.]/[Vertical Dir.] button.

4
The sensor changes to Test mode.

Settings Navigator
9 Take an “OK” image and a “NG” image.
For [Horizontal Dir.], the edges are detected from If [Trigger Options] is set to [External] or [Internal
the left to the right side of the the tool window; Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to [Yes], input the
for [Vertical Dir.], the edges are detected from external trigger.
the top to the bottom. If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the [Trigger
ON] button to take an image of the target using the
The main screen for [Edge] opens. internal trigger.

3 Tap the [Edit Window] button. 10 Adjust the threshold for anomaly detection by
checking the number of edges.
<Setting example>
If the number of an “OK” image edges is 8, and if the
number of a “NG” image edges is other than 8, set the
threshold to 8.

Matching
rate

Threshold
(upper limit)
4 Set the position, size, and angle of tool window
in according to the target. Threshold
(lower limit)

A target is judged OK when the number of edges

is within a threshold range, and NG when it is
outside the range.
“Selecting the Display Method of the
Detection Window/Tool Window” (Page 5-10)
“Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20)
Set a position, “Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page
size, and 6-16)
angle

“Editing the Window” (Page 3-19) 11 Set [Upper Limit Settings] as needed.
“Upper Limit Settings” (Page 4-110)
5 Apply the mask as needed. 12 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
The area inside the mask region is excluded from an
edge detection target. The system returns to the main screen for [Edge].
“Mask” (Page 4-108)
13 Tap the [OK] button.
6 Tap the [OK] button. The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
The system returns to the main screen for [Edge].

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-107

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Mask 6 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
1 Tap the [Mask] button

Area not to
be masked

Area to be
masked

Returns to the settings screen for “Edit window”.

4 2 Tap the [Add Mask] button.

Settings Navigator

3 Set a position and size of the mask according to

the target.

Set the mask

shape

“Editing the Window” (Page 3-19)

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the screen to apply the mask.

5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 as needed to set the mask

region.

4-108 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Edge Sensitivity Auto Adjustment

1 Tap the [Edge Sensitivity Auto Adjustment]

button.

The edge sensitivity will be adjusted automatically

4

Settings Navigator
according to the target.

2 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for the Edge tool
settings.
The edge sensitivity can also be adjusted
manually as well.
“Edge Sensitivity Manual Adjustment” (Page
4-112)

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-109

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Upper Limit Settings zz
When changing the setting scale
Select the setting scale and tap the [OK] button.
1 Tap the [Upper Limit Settings] button. Adjust the threshold for anomaly detection by checking
the number of edges.
The target is judged OK when the number of
edges is within a threshold range, and NG when
it is outside the range.
“Selecting the Display Method of the
Detection Window/Tool Window” (Page 5-10)
“Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20)
“Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page
6-16)

4 2 Set the upper limit settings.

Settings Navigator

zz
When upper limit is disabled
Tap the [Disable] button of the upper limit, and tap the
[OK] button.
Adjust the threshold for anomaly detection by checking
the number of edges.

Matching rate

Threshold

The target is judged OK when the number of

edges is larger than the threshold value, and NG
when it is smaller.
“Selecting the Display Method of the
Detection Window/Tool Window” (Page 5-10)
“Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20)
“Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page
6-16)

4-110 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Advanced settings of the Edge tool

Items Description Setting range Ref.

Edge Sensitivity Manual Manually adjust the sensitivity

1 to 100 (default: 50)
Adjustment which detects the edge.

The edge sensitivity can be

To Live Image adjusted using the Live image of -- 4-112
the target.

Edge Sensitivity Automatically adjust the sensitivity

--
Auto Adjustment which detects the edge.

yyBoth (default)
Detects bright -> dark and dark ->

Bright/Dark
Select the bright/dark direction
for which the tool detects a target
bright edges.
yyBright -> Dark
Detects edges that change from bright 4-113
4
Direction
edge. to dark.

Settings Navigator
yyDark -> Bright
Edge
Detects edges that change from dark
Detection
to bright.

yyON
Detects narrow edges separately as
Set this when the space between different edges.
Fine Edge Mode
edges is narrow. yyOFF (default)
Detects edges with narrow spaces as
the same edge.

A user-specified name, such as

the name of the target, can be set
Tool Name for the tool. Tool names can be Up to 16 characters can be set. 4-113
checked on the run screen.
“‌ 5 Running” (Page 5-1)

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-111

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Edge Sensitivity Manual Adjustment The edge intensity threshold indicates the ratio
of edge recognition taking the edge intensity
1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab. maximum value (where the contrasting density
is greatest) as 100%.
2 Tap the [Edge Sensitivity Manual Adjustment]
button.

Edge detection
Projection direction

4
wave
+255

0
Settings Navigator

Edge intensity Threshold for edge

3 Adjust the edge sensitivity threshold value used +255
wave sensitivity (%)
to extract edges by checking the edge intensity 100%
profile displayed on the image. 100% in-between
0 0%
(Illustration for edge intensity
wave)
Threshold for edge sensitivity 50%
(2 edges to be detected)
Sensitivity
threshold
50%

Threshold for edge sensitivity 30%

(4 edges to be detected)
Edge intensity profile

yySensitivity limit can be adjusted by touching

the red line. 30%
yyTap the [To Live Image] button to adjust edge
sensitivity threshold value using the target Live
image.
yyTap the [Edge Sensitivity Auto Adjustment]
button to adjust the threshold for edge
sensitivity according to the target automatically.

4 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for the Edge tool
settings.

4-112 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Edge Detection „„
Tool Name

1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab. If the display language (Page 7-33) is changed,
characters may become unreadable.
2 Tap the [Edge Detection] button.
1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab.
2 Tap the [Tool Name] button.

4
The Settings Navigator guide opens.

Settings Navigator
Tap the [OK] button.

3 Select the edge detection method.

3 Edit the tool name.
Up to 16 characters can be set.
“Inputting characters” (Page 3-21)

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

zz
Bright/Dark Direction
yyWhen detecting both bright->dark and dark->bright
edges, select [Both].
yyWhen detecting edges that change from bright to
dark, select [Bright -> Dark].
yyWhen detecting edges that change from dark to
bright, select [Dark -> Bright].
Bright -> Dark Dark -> Bright

Tool window Tool window

For [Horizontal Dir.], the edges are detected from
the left to the right side of the the tool window;
for [Vertical Dir.], the edges are detected from
the top to the bottom.

zz
Fine Edge Mode
Select [ON] when edges can not be differentiated
because the space between the edges is too narrow.

4 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for [Edge].

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-113

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Pitch tool

Setting items for the Pitch tool

Items Description Setting range

Specify the area to inspect with a rectangular

Select the window shape to specify the
Edit Window window. Size, position, and angle of the
area of the target to inspect.
window can be specified with the stylus.

Mask Specifies the area to mask the target with a

rectangular window. Size, position, and angle
of the window can be specified with the stylus.
Adds a rectangular mask region in the yyClear

4 tool window frame. The area inside the Remove the section of mask that has been
mask region is excluded from the pitch applied.
Add Mask
detection target. yyUndo
The previous operation can be cancelled.
Settings Navigator

yySetting counts
The mask can be applied up to 30 times.

Automatically adjust the sensitivity

that detects the edge that will become
Edge Sensitivity Auto Adjustment --
the standard of reference for pitch
extraction.

Manually adjust the sensitivity that

detects the edge that will become
Man. Adj. 1 to 100 (default: 50)
the standard of reference for pitch
extraction.

The edge sensitivity can be adjusted

To Live Image --
using the Live image of the target.

Adjusts the threshold (matching rate*)

0-200
used in the OK/NG judgment. During
(default: lower limit: 80, upper limit: 120)
threshold adjustment, the system turns
Limit Adjustment The settings range is different depending
to Test mode so that the thresholds
on the settings of [Upper Limit Settings] and
can be adjusted to the applicable value
[Scaling] (Page 4-121).
for operation.

yy0 to 200 (default)

Sets the upper and the lower limit of the
Upper Select the scale for the threshold threshold in a range within 0 to 200.
Limit Scale according to the range of matching yy0-999
Settings rates requires for judgment. Sets the upper and the lower limit of the
threshold in a range within 0 to 999.
The slider movement unit is 5.

*The matching rate of 100 indicates that the average value of all pitches for the target is completely matched to the master
image. The value which deviates the most from the average value among all pitches becomes the matching rate. When
the number of pitches is different from the number for the master image, the matching rate is 0.

4-114 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Setting the Pitch tool 7 Perform the Edge Sensitivity Auto Adjustment as
needed.
“Edge Sensitivity Auto Adjustment” (Page 4-117)
1 Select the [Extra 1] tab, and add the [Pitch] tool.
“Adding a tool” (Page 4-48) 8 Tap the [Limit Adjustment] button.
Displays the Pitch tool direction selection screen.

2 Tap the [Horizontal Dir.]/[Vertical Dir.] button.

4
The sensor changes to Test mode.

Settings Navigator
9 Take an “OK” image and a “NG” image.
The main screen for [Pitch] opens. If [Trigger Options] is set to [External] or [Internal Trigger
Control with IN1 Input] is set to [Yes], input the external
3 Tap the [Edit Window] button. trigger.
If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the [Trigger
ON] button to take an image of the target using the
internal trigger.

10 Adjust the threshold for anomaly detection by

checking the matching rate.
Current number of pitches/number of registered pitches
in master image

4 Set the position, size, and angle of the tool

Matching
rate
window according to the target.
Threshold
(upper limit)

Threshold
(lower limit)

Status gauge
MAX matching rate (Upper)
MIN matching rate (Lower)

Set a position, The target is judged OK when the matching

size, and rate is within threshold range, and NG when it is
angle outside the range.
“Selecting the Display Method of the
“Editing the Window” (Page 3-19) Detection Window/Tool Window” (Page 5-10)
5 Adjust the mask settings as needed. “Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20)
“Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page 6-16)
The area inside the mask region is excluded from the
pitch detection target.
“Mask” (Page 4-116) 11 Set [Upper Limit Settings] as needed.
“Upper Limit Settings” (Page 4-117)
6 Tap the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for [Pitch]. 12 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for [Pitch].

13 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-115

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Mask 6 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
1 Tap the [Mask] button

Area not to
be masked

Area to be
masked

Returns to the settings screen for “Edit window”.

4 2 Tap the [Add Mask] button.

Settings Navigator

3 Set the position and size of the mask according

to the target.

Set the mask

shape

“Editing the Window” (Page 3-19)

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the screen to set the mask
region.

5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 as needed to set the mask region.

4-116 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Edge Sensitivity Auto Adjustment „„
Upper Limit Settings

1 Tap the [Edge Sensitivity Auto Adjustment] 1 Tap the [Upper Limit Settings] button.
button.

The edge sensitivity will be adjusted automatically

2 Change the setting scale and tap the [OK] button. 4

Settings Navigator
according to the target.

2 Tap the [OK] button.

3 Adjust the threshold for anomaly detection by

checking the matching rate.
The target is judged OK when the matching
The system returns to the main screen for Width tool rate is within threshold range, and NG when it is
settings. outside the range.
The edge sensitivity can also be adjusted “Selecting the Display Method of the
manually as well. Detection Window/Tool Window” (Page 5-10)
“Edge Sensitivity Manual Adjustment” (Page “Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20)
4-119) “Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page
6-16)

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-117

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Advanced settings of the Pitch tool

Items Description Setting range Ref.

Manually adjust the sensitivity that

detects the edge that will become
Edge Sensitivity Manual Adjustment 1 to 100 (default: 50)
the standard of reference for pitch
extraction.

The edge sensitivity can be adjusted

To Live Image -- 4-119
using the Live image of the target.

Automatically adjust the sensitivity

Edge Sensitivity that detects the edge that will become
--
Auto Adjustment the standard of reference for pitch

4
extraction.

yyBright (default)
Extracts the pitches between
Select the method to extract the target bright regions.
Settings Navigator

Bright/Dark Mode
pitch. yyDark
Extracts the pitches between
dark regions.

yyPin Pitch (default)

Pitch Extraction Measures the pitch between pins 4-120
Method Select the measuring method for the from the center point of the pin.
Meas. Mode
pitch extracted from a target.
yyPin Width
Measures the width of each pin.

yyON
Narrow Pitch Enables the narrow pitch mode.
Set when pitch width is narrow.
Mode yyOFF (default)
Disables the narrow pitch mode.

yyON
Set when a measurement value is to Enable scaling.
Scaling be used for anomaly detection instead
of the matching rate. yyOFF (default)
Disable scaling.
Scaling When scaling is enabled, input the 0.05 to 9999 4-121
Display Value display value in relation to matching (Maximum input digits: 4)
rate (*) 100. (default: 100.0)

When scaling is enabled, copy the

Copy Setting --
scaling settings from another tool.

A user-specified name, such as the

name of the target, can be set for the
Tool Name tool. Tool names can be checked on Up to 16 characters can be set. 4-121
the run screen.
“‌ 5 Running” (Page 5-1)

*A matching rate of 100 indicates that the average value of all pitches on the target is completely matched to the master
image. The value which deviates the most from average value among all pitches becomes the matching rate for the tool.
When the number of pitches is different from the number for the master image, the matching rate is 0.

4-118 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Edge Sensitivity Manual Adjustment The edge intensity threshold indicates the ratio
of edge recognition taking the edge intensity
1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab. maximum value (where the contrasting density
is greatest) as 100%.
2 Tap the [Edge Sensitivity Manual Adjustment]
button.

Edge detection
Projection direction

4
wave
+255

Settings Navigator
Edge intensity Threshold for edge

3 Adjust the edge sensitivity threshold value used +255

wave sensitivity (%)
100%
to extract pitches by checking the edge intensity
100% in-between
profile displayed on the image.
0 0%
(Illustration for edge
intensity wave)
Threshold for edge sensitivity 50%
(2 edges to be detected)
Sensitivity
threshold
50%

Threshold for edge sensitivity 30%

(4 edges to be detected)
Edge intensity profile

yySensitivity limit can be adjusted by touching

the red line. 30%
yyTap the [To Live Image] button to adjust edge
sensitivity threshold value using the target Live
image.
yyTap the [Edge Sensitivity Auto Adjustment]
button to adjust the threshold for edge
sensitivity according to the target automatically.

4 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for [Pitch].

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-119

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Pitch Extraction Method 4 Select a measurement mode.
1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab.
2 Tap the [Pitch Extract.] button.

4
yyExample of [Pin Pitch]

Number of pitches 2
Settings Navigator

3 Select [Bright/Dark Mode].

yyExample of [Pin Width]

Number of pitches 3

5 Set [Narrow Pitch Mode] as needed.

yyWhen extracting pitches between bright

regions, select [Bright].

Number of pitches 1

yyWhen extracting pitches between dark

regions, select [Dark].
If [ON] is selected, pitches can be extracted
even when the pitch width is narrow.
Number of pitches 2

6 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for Pitch tool
settings.

4-120 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Scaling zz
When copying scaling settings
Tap the [Copy Setting] button.
1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab.
2 Tap the [Scaling] button.

4
Select the source tool.

3 Tap the [ON] button.

Settings Navigator
Tap the [Copy] button.

yyIf scaling is enabled, the display range

and the setting scale (x2 or x10) of the
threshold adjustment will be automatically
adjusted.
yyIf the scaling is enabled, the threshold can
be adjusted by 0.1 mm.

4 Set scaling.
zz
When the scaling settings are changed The confirmation screen opens.
Tap the [Edit] button.
5 Tap the [OK] button.
Return to the [Copy Setting] screen.

6 Tap the [OK] button.

Return to the [Scaling] setting screen.

7 Tap the [OK] button.

The confirmation screen opens.

8 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for Pitch tool
settings.
Enter a display value and tap the [OK] button. If the scaling value of the source tool is
“Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20) changed, copy the scaling settings again.
The scaling display value can be adjusted by
0.05 mm.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-121

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Tool Name
If the display language (Page 7-33) is changed,
characters may become unreadable.

1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab.

2 Tap the [Tool Name] button.

4
Settings Navigator

3 Edit the tool name.

Up to 16 characters can be set.
“Inputting characters” (Page 3-21)

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

4-122 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Hi-Sp.Adj tool

Setting items for the Hi-Sp.Adj tool

„„
1-Ax. Adj
Items Description Setting range

Select the window shape to specify Specify the area of inspection with a rectangular window.
Edit Window
the area of the target to inspect. The window size and position can be specified with the stylus.

yyDetection direction: From left (default)

Detects edges from the left side of window to the right side.

Tool window
4

Settings Navigator
yyScan Direction: Right
Detects edges from the right side of window to the left side.

Tool window
Select the direction for which the
Scan Direction
tool detects the target edge. yyScan Direction: Top
Detects edges from the top of window to the bottom.

Tool window

yyScan Direction: Bottom

Detects edges from the bottom of window to the top.
Tool window

Edge Sensitivity Auto Automatically adjust the sensitivity

--
Adjustment for which the tool detects the edge.

Manually adjust the sensitivity for

Man. Adj. 1 to 100 (default: 50)
which the tool detects the edge.

The edge sensitivity can be

to Live Image adjusted using the Live image of --
the target.

Changes to Test mode, used to

Test Operation check that the position adjustment --
has been performed correctly.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-123

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
2-Ax. Adj
Items Description Setting range

Select the window shape to Specify the area of inspection with a rectangular window.
Edit Window specify the area of the target to The window size and position can be specified with the
inspect. stylus.

yyDetection direction: From left (default)

Detects edges from the left side of window to the right
side.

Tool window

4
Select the direction for which the
Scan Direction
tool detects the target edge. yyScan Direction: Right
Detects edges from the right side of window to the left
side.
X axis
Settings Navigator

Tool window

Automatically adjust the sensitivity

Edge Sensitivity
for which the tool detects the --
Auto Adjustment
edge.

Manually adjust the sensitivity for

Man. Adj. 1 to 100 (default: 50)
which the tool detects the edge.

The edge sensitivity can be

to Live
adjusted using the Live image of --
Image
the target.

Select the window shape to Specify the area of inspection with a rectangular window.
Edit Window specify the area of the target to The window size and position can be specified with the
inspect. stylus.

yyDetection direction: From top (default)

Detects edges from the top of window to the bottom.

Tool window
Select the direction for which the
Scan Direction
tool detects the target edge.
yyScan Direction: Bottom
Detects edges from the bottom of window to the top.
Y axis
Tool window

Automatically adjust the sensitivity

Edge Sensitivity
for which the target detects the --
Auto Adjustment
edge.

Manually adjust the sensitivity for

Man. Adj. 1 to 100 (default: 50)
which the target detects the edge.

to Live The edge sensitivity can be adjusted

--
Image using the Live image of the target.

Changes to Test mode, used to

Common Test Operation check that the position adjustment --
has been performed correctly.

4-124 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Setting the Hi-Sp.Adj tool 6 Perform Edge Sensitivity Auto Adjustment as

needed.
„„
1-Ax. Adj “Edge Sensitivity Auto Adjustment” (Page 4-127)

1 Select the [Extra 1] tab, and add the [Hi-Sp.Adj] 7 Tap the [Common] button, then tap the [Test]
tool. button.
“Adding a tool” (Page 4-48)

2 Select the [1-Ax. Adj] button. Tap the [Horizontal

Dir.] or [Vertical Dir.] button, and tap the [OK]
button.

Settings Navigator
The sensor changes to Test mode.
Position correction is performed, and the edge detection
process can be confirmed.

The main screen for [1-Ax. Adj] opens.

3 Tap the [Edit Window] button.

8 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for [1-Ax. Adj].

9 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
Tapping the tool window will enable the sensor
to proceed to the following procedure as well.

4 Select the detection direction, and set the

position and size of the tool window according to
the target.

Scan
Direction

Set a position, size, and angle

5 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for [1-Ax. Adj].

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-125

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
2-Ax. Adj 6 Tap the [Set Axis: Y] button, and perform steps 3
to 5 for the Y axis.
1 Select the [Extra 1] tab, and add the [Hi-Sp.Adj]
tool. 7 Perform Edge Sensitivity Auto Adjustment as
“Adding a tool” (Page 4-48)
needed.
“Edge Sensitivity Auto Adjustment” (Page 4-127)
2 Select the [2-Ax. Adj] button, and tap the [OK] 8 Tap the [Common] button, then tap the [Test]
button.
button.

4
Settings Navigator

The main screen for [2-Ax. Adj] opens.

The sensor changes to Test mode.
3 Tap the [X Axis] button, and tap the [Edit Position correction is performed, and the edge detection
Window] button.
process can be confirmed.

Tapping the tool window will enable the sensor

to proceed to the following procedure as well. 9 Tap the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for [2-Ax. Adj].

4 Select the detection direction, and set the 10 Tap the [OK] button.
position and size of the tool window according to
The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
the target.

Scan
Direction

Set a position and size

5 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for [2-Ax. Adj].

4-126 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Edge Sensitivity Auto Adjustment

1 For [2-Ax. Adj], select an axis to set.

2 Tap the [Edge Sensitivity Auto Adjustment]
button.

Settings Navigator
The edge sensitivity will be adjusted automatically
according to the target.

3 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for [1-Ax. Adj] or

[2-Ax. Adj].
The edge sensitivity can also be adjusted
manually as well.
“Edge Sensitivity Manual Adjustment” (Page
4-128)

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-127

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Advanced settings for the Hi-Sp.Adj tool

The contents that can be set in [1-Ax. Adj], [2-Ax. Adj (X Axis)], and [2-Ax. Adj (Y Axis)] are the same.
Items Description Setting range Ref.

Edge Sensitivity Manual Manually adjust the sensitivity for

1 to 100 (default: 50)
Adjustment which the sensor detects the edge.

The edge sensitivity can be adjusted

to Live Image --
using the Live image of the target. 4-128

Automatically adjust the sensitivity

Edge Sensitivity
for which the sensor detects the --
Auto Adjustment
edge.

yyMaster Dir. (default)

4 Detects edges in the same bright/dark direction

as master image.
yyBoth
Select the bright/dark direction
Settings Navigator

Edge Detection Detects bright -> dark and dark -> bright edges. 4-129
which detects a target edge.
yyBright -> Dark
Detects as edges change from bright to dark.
yyDark -> Bright
Detects as edges change from dark to bright.

„„
Edge Sensitivity Manual Adjustment

1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab. 4 Adjust the edge sensitivity threshold value used
to extract edges by checking the edge intensity
2 For [2-Ax. Adj], select an axis to set. profile displayed on the image.

3 Tap the [Edge Sensitivity Manual Adjustment]

button.

Sensitivity
threshold

Edge intensity profile

yySensitivity limit can be adjusted by touching

the red line.
yyTap the [To Live Image] button to adjust edge
sensitivity threshold value using the target Live
image.
yyTap the [Edge Sensitivity Auto Adjustment]
button to adjust the edge sensitivity threshold
according to the target automatically.

5 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for [Hi-Sp.Adj].

4-128 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

The edge intensity threshold indicates the ratio „„

Edge Detection
of edge recognition taking the edge intensity
maximum value (where the contrasting density
is greatest) as 100%.
1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab.
2 For [2-Ax. Adj], select an axis to set.
3 Tap the [Edge Detection] button.

Edge detection
Projection direction

4
wave
+255

Settings Navigator
Edge intensity Threshold for edge
wave sensitivity (%)
+255 100% 4 Select bright/dark direction.
100% in-between
0 0%
(Illustration for edge intensity
wave)
Threshold for edge sensitivity 50%
(2 edges to be detected)

50%

Threshold for edge sensitivity 30%

(4 edges to be detected)
yyWhen detecting edges in the same bright/
dark direction as master image, select
[Master Dir.].
yyWhen detecting both bright->dark and
30%
dark->bright edges, select [Both].
yyWhen detecting edges that change from
bright to dark, select [Bright -> Dark].
yyWhen detecting edges that change from
dark to bright, select [Dark -> Bright].
Bright -> Dark Dark -> Bright

Tool window Tool window

5 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for [Hi-Sp.Adj].

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-129

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

OCR Tool

Setting items for the OCR tool

The characters that can be recognized by the OCR tool are as follows.

Numbers 0123456789

Letters ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ (capital letters only)

Symbols . / - : ( ) # * (8 symbols)

Items Description Setting range

4
yyRect (default)
Add Mask Adds a rectangular/circular Specifies the area to mask the
mask region in the tool window target or remove from the mask
frame. The area inside the with a rectangular window. Size,
Settings Navigator

mask region is excluded from position, and angle of the window

Mask Shape the OCR examination target. can be specified with the stylus.
yyCircle
Edit Specifies the area to mask the
Mask
Window Cut Mask Adds a rectangular/circular target or remove from the mask
cutting region in the mask with a circular window. Size and
region. position of the window can be
Inside the mask cutting region, specified with the stylus.
the mask is disabled and it yySetting counts
Cut Shape becomes the target of the OCR Adding a mask or removing
extraction. sections of the mask can be
performed up to 20 times.

Character Reads the printed text. --

yyEnable (default)
Reads letters.
Letter reading Select whether to read letters. yyDisable
OFF
Does not read letters.

yyEnable (default)
Reads numbers.
Char. settings Number reading Select whether to read numbers. yyDisable
OFF
Reading Does not read numbers.
Settings yyEnable (default)
Reads symbols.
Symbol reading Select whether to read symbols. yyDisable
OFF
Does not read symbols.

Reads the printed text and

Date --
extracts the text as a date.

yyYYMMDD yyYYMM
Selects the date format for the (default) yyMMYY
Date settings Date format
object to be read. yyDDMMYY
yyMMDDYY
Up to 16 alphanumeric characters
Master text Edits the master text.
can be set as the master text.

yyEnable
Status conditions ON
(When the reading Performs OK/NG judgment on
Judges whether the number
target is set to the number of letters.
of characters on the target
[Character]) Judge char. num. only yyDisable (default)
matches the number of
Performs OK/NG judgment on
characters in the master text.
whether the character string is
the same as that of the master
text.

4-130 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Items Description Setting range

Up to 16 alphanumeric characters
Master date Edits the master date.
can be set as the master date.

yyEnable
ON
Sets the master date to the Enable date and time
Calendar sync current date and time on the synchronization.
sensor. yyDisable (default)
Disable date and time
synchronization.

Sets the number of days for

the master date to be offset in
Offset (Day) 0 to 9999 (default: 0)
relation to the current date and

4
Status conditions
(When the reading time on the sensor.
target is set to [Date]) Set this when delaying the time
Date Change that the master date changes. 00:00 to 23:59

Settings Navigator
Time The master date will change at (default: 00:00)
Sync “00.00” by default.
settings Sets the time error in minutes
Allowable error for dates to be judged as OK
0 to 99 (default: 0)
(min) both before and after the date
change is to occur.

yyON
Set to include a leading zero
0 in 10s pos of Includes a leading zero.
when the month and/or day in
mm/dd yyOFF (default)
the master date is a single digit.
Does not include a leading zero.

Switches to Test Run mode

to check the OK/NG judgment
status. Used to adjust the -
threshold (matching rate) used
in OK/NG judgment.
Test Operation
Adjusts the threshold
(matching rate) used in OK/
NG judgment when the shade 1 to 100 (default: 50)
contrast function for character
recognition is set to [Enable].

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-131

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Setting the OCR tool 7 Adjust the status conditions as necessary.

“Setting the status conditions” (Page 4-135)

1 Select the [Extra 2] tab, and add the [OCR] tool. 8 Tap the [Test run] button.
“Adding a tool” (Page 4-48)
The main settings screen for [OCR] opens.

2 Tap the [Edit Window] button.

4 The sensor changes to Test mode.

Settings Navigator

Tapping the tool window will proceed to step 3

as well.

3 Set a position, size, and angle of the tool window

according to the target text.
Select the target text with the tool window.

A character string is judged as OK if the string

matches the master text and NG if the string
does not match the master text.

9 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for [OCR].
Set a position,
size, and
angle
10 Tap the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
“Editing the Window” (Page 3-19)

4 Apply the mask as needed.

The area inside of the mask region is excluded from
character recognition.
“Mask” (Page 4-133)

5 Tap the [OK] button.

The character string that you selected to be the master
text is read and the system returns to the main screen
for [OCR].

6 Configure the reading settings.

“Reading Settings” (Page 4-134)

4-132 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Mask 5 Tap the [Cut Mask] button to remove a mask
region.
1 Tap the [Mask] button

2 Tap the [Add Mask] button. 6 Select the shape, position, size, and angle of the
region to be removed from the mask according
4
to the characters needed.

Settings Navigator
Set cut
shape
3 Set the mask shape, position, size, and angle
according to the target text. “Editing the Window” (Page 3-19)
“Editing the Window” (Page 3-19)
7 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
The system returns to the screen to set a mask region.

8 Repeat steps 2 to 7 as needed to set the mask

region.

9 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

Set the mask

shape
Area not to
4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button. be masked
The system returns to the screen to set a mask region.

Area to be
masked

The system returns to the main screen for [OCR].

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-133

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Reading Settings 5 Tap the [OK] button to read the character string
that will be set as the master text.
zz
To read text

1 Tap the [Reading Settings] button.

4 The character string that was selected to be the master

text is read and the system returns to the main screen
for [OCR].
2 Check that the reading target is set to [Character]
Settings Navigator

and tap the [Char. settings] button.

zz
To read the date

1 Tap the [Reading Settings] button.

3 Set whether to read letters, numbers, and/or

symbols.
2 Tap [Date].

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the screen to set [Reading Check that the reading target is set to [Date] and
Settings]. tap the [Date settings] button.

4-134 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

3 Set [Date Format] for the reading target. „„

Setting the status conditions
zz
To read text

1 Tap [Status Conditions].

4
Set the date format to the same as that of the
reading target.
Dates that differ from the set date format will
not be read.
2 Edit [Master text] if necessary.

Settings Navigator
4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
The system returns to the screen to set [Reading
Settings].

5 Tap the [OK] button and read the date that you
want to set as the master text.

“Inputting characters” (Page 3-21)

Configure this setting if you want to judge
text other than the text read with [Master
Registration].
You can set arbitrary characters (all letters,
numbers, and symbols) not included in the
specified letters, numbers, and symbols.
The date that was selected to be the master text is read ? : Judges all letters, numbers, and
and the system returns to the main screen for [OCR]. symbols as OK.
$ : Judges all letters as OK.
% : Judges all numbers as OK.
@ : Judges all symbols as OK.
[Arbitrary characters] usage example
yyMaster text: AB$DE
ABCDE : OK
ABFDE : OK
AB5DE : NG
yyMaster text: AB?DE
ABCDE : OK
ABFDE : OK
AB5DE : OK

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-135

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

3 Set [Judging number of characters only] if zz

To read the date
necessary.
If it is necessary to only judge if the number of 1 Tap [Status Conditions].
characters matches the master text, set [Judge char.
num. only] to [Enable].

4 2 Edit the master date if necessary.

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
Settings Navigator

The system returns to the main screen for the OCR tool
settings.

“Inputting characters” (Page 3-21)

Configure this setting if you want to change
the master date for the master image.
Even if you change the date, the master date
is updated without having to read the object
again.
Make sure that the format of the edited
master date is the same as [Date format] set
in [Reading settings].
If the master date format order for the
[Reading Settings] date format could not
be interpreted, the display format will be
unknown and the master date will not be set
correctly.

4-136 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

3 Set [Calendar sync] as necessary. zz

Allowable error (min)
Sets the time error (allowable error) in minutes for dates
The master date will synchronize with the sensor to be judged as OK both before and after the date
date and time.
changes.
Set this item to link the tool’s target date to the Allowable error (min)
date and time.
Select [Enable] for the calendar sync, and tap the [Sync
settings] button.

Day before Master date Day after

Master Date Master Date
Current master date set using
calendar sync
Range judged as OK
If the current master date is set within the [Allowable
4
error (min)] range by calendar synchronization, the set

Settings Navigator
time before or after the master date can be included in
the range to be judged as OK.
Set the [Sync settings] and tap the [OK] button. Set this item if the date may change after the date is
printed or before it is checked.
Example when the allowable error is set to 5
minutes
Allowable error (5 minutes)

C A
B
C A
23:55 0:05 23:55 0:05
December 14 December 15 December 16
zz
Offset (Day)
(A) If the current master date is between 0:00
Offsets the master date by the desired number of days
away from the current date on the sensor. and 0:05 using calendar synchronization,
the day before and the day set as the
zz
Date Change Time master date will be judged as OK.
Delays the time that the master date changes to a user- (B) If the current master date is between 0:06
specified time. The default time that the master date and 23:54 using calendar synchronization,
changes is “00.00”. only the day set as the master date will be
judged as OK.
When the Date Change Time is set to “06.00”, (C) If the current master date is between 23:55
operation will continue as the master date of the and 24:00 using calendar synchronization,
previous day between “00.00” to “06:00”. the day set as the master date and the next
The master text of the tool will advance to the day will be judged as OK.
next day at “06:00”.
zz
0 in 10s pos of mm/dd
Sets whether to add a leading [0] when the month and/
or day in the target date is a single digit.
Select this setting according to the date format of the
target date.

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for the OCR tool
settings.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-137

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Advanced settings for the OCR tool

Items Description Setting range Ref.

Evaluates the contrast of the target text yyEnable

or date. ON
Shade Contrast If the ink of the text or date is lighter than Enables [Shade Contrast]. 4-138
the master text, the matching rate will yyDisable (default)
decrease. Disables [Shade Contrast].

yyHigh speed (default)

Judges the text and date at high
OCR The detection mode of the OCR tool can speed.
4-139
Algorithm be selected. yyHigh Accuracy
Judges the text and date with high

4
accuracy.

yyDisable (default)
Disables the Dot Matrix Print
Select this when reading dot characters
Dot Matrix function.
Settings Navigator

such as those made by IJP (ink jet

OCR Print yyEnable
printers) that are not stable.
Algorithm ON
Enables the Dot Matrix Print function.

Selects the dot print type from the

combination of print color (Black
dot/White dot) and dot roughness
Set this when [Read Dot Printing] is
(MidSens/Coarse).
Print Type [Enable]. Selects the print type of the dot
yyBlack Dot Printing: MidSens (default)
matrix to be read.
yyBlack Dot Printing: Coarse
yyWhite Dot Printing: MidSens
yyWhite Dot Printing: Coarse
A user-specified name, such as the name
of the target, can be set for the tool.
Tool Name Tool names can be checked on the run Up to 16 characters can be set. 4-140
screen.
“‌ 5 Running” (Page 5-1)

„„
Shade Contrast

1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab. 3 Tap the [ON] button.

2 Tap the [Shade Contrast] button.

If you enable shade contrast, you can adjust

the threshold of anomaly detection (matching
rate) on the test check screen.
“Test run (when shade contrast is set to
[Enable])” (Page 4-139)

4 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for the OCR tool
settings.

4-138 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

zz
Test run (when shade contrast is set to [Enable]) „„
OCR Algorithm

1 Tap the [Settings] tab, then the [Test Operation] 1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab.
button.
2 Tap the [OCR Algorithm] button.

The sensor changes to Test mode.

4
3 Select the type of OCR algorithm (High Speed/

Settings Navigator
2 Capture an “OK” text or date that is printed High Accuracy).
clearly and a “NG” text and date that is not
printed clearly.
If [Trigger Options] is set to [External] or [Internal
Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to [Yes], input the
external trigger.
If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the [Trigger
ON] button to take an image of the target using the
internal trigger.

3 Adjust the threshold for anomaly detection by

checking the matching rate.
<Setup example>
If the matching rate of an “OK” image is higher than
90 and if the matching rate of a “NG” image is lower yyIf the target text or date cannot be correctly
than 40, set the threshold to 65, the value intermediate recognized, select [High Accuracy].
between 40 and 90. yySelect [High Speed] to shorten the
Master text/Text processing time.
read

4 After setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The character string that was selected to be the master
text is read and the system returns to the main screen
for the OCR tool settings.
Matching rate

Threshold

A target is judged OK when the matching rate

is within threshold range, and NG when it is
outside the range.
“Selecting the Display Method of the
Detection Window/Tool Window” (Page 5-10)
“Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20)
“Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page
6-16)

4 After setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for the OCR tool
settings.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-139

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Dot Matrix Print „„
Tool Name

1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab. If the display language (Page 7-33) is changed,
characters may become unreadable.
2 Tap the [OCR Algorithm] button.
1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab.
2 Tap the [Tool Name] button.

4
3 If dot matrix printing recognition is not stable,
Settings Navigator

set [Dot Matrix Print].

3 Edit the tool name.

Up to 16 characters can be set.
“Inputting characters” (Page 3-21)

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

Select [Enable] when dot characters such as

IJP (ink jet printer) characters cannot be read
accurately.
yySelect [Black Dot Printing] when the text
is darker than the background, or [White
Dot Printing] when it is brighter than the
background.
yySelect the dot roughness from [MidSens]
or [Coarse]. Select [Coarse] when the tool
is not stable in [MidSens].

4 After setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The character string was you selected to be the master
text is read and the system returns to the main screen
for the OCR tool settings.

4-140 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Color Prohibition/Brightness Prohibition Tool

Setting items for the Color Prohibition/Brightness Prohibition Tool

Items Description Setting range
yyRect (default)
Specify the area to inspect with a
rectangular window. Size, position, and
angle of the window can be specified with
the stylus.
Select the window shape yyCircle
Window Shape to specify the area of the Specify the area to inspect with a circular
target to prohibit. window. Size, position, and angle of the
window can be specified with the stylus.
yyEntire
The entire area (imaging area) of the image
4
displayed in the control panel becomes the

Settings Navigator
extraction target.
When the window shape
Reset Angle is set to [Rect], resets the -
angle of the window.

Adds a rectangular/circular
Edit Window mask region in the tool yyRect (default)
window frame. The area Specifies a rectangular mask region or
Add Mask
inside the mask region is mask cutting region. The desired size,
excluded from the area position, and angle can be specified.
extraction target. yyCircle
Specifies a circular mask region or mask
Removes a rectangular/ cutting region. The desired size and
circular region from the position can be specified.
mask region. Inside the yySetting counts
Mask Cut Mask region removed from the The mask region can be adjusted up to 20
mask, the mask is disabled times.
and the area extraction is
enabled.
The previous operation can
be cancelled.
Undo Up to 20 operations can be -
undone.
(UNDO)
Deletes a mask region
Clear -
which has been set.
Sets an extraction range yyExtract
by tapping the color to be Extract the tapped color.
Color Extraction
detected as a protrusion on yyExclude
(For color type)
the master image or Live Contracts the range of the color to be
image. extracted and narrows the extraction area.
yy[+]
Expands or reduces Expands the range of the color to be
automatically the extraction extracted and expands the extraction area.
Extraction Area Adjustment
area of the color extracted yy[-]
by tap. Contracts the range of the color to be
extracted and narrows the extraction area.
The previous operation can
Undo -
be canceled. (UNDO)
Cancels the selection of the
Clear -
extracted color.
The color range to be
To Live Image extracted can be set using -
the Live image of the target.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-141

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Items Description Setting range

Tap the brightness to yyBrightness Range
Brightness Extraction be extracted from the Sets the upper and the lower limit of
(For monochrome type) master image and set the brightness in a range within 0 to 255 with
extraction range. the tapped brightness as a reference.
The previous operation can
Undo -
be canceled. (UNDO)
Cancels the selection of the
Clear -
extracted brightness.
A brightness range to be
To Live Image extracted can be set using --
the Live image of the target.
Adjusts the threshold

4
0 to 100
Matching rate (matching rate*) used in the
(default: 95)
OK/NG judgment.
yyHi Sens (default)
Settings Navigator

Threshold/ If [1/600th of the total sensor view] area in

Sensitivity the tool window protrudes, the matching
Adjustment Selects the sensitivity for rate is 0%. The sensitivity to detect the
Sensitivity Adjustment which the matching rate of protrusion increases.
protrusion detection is 0%. yyLowSens
If [1/10th of the total sensor view] area in
the tool window protrudes, the matching
rate is 0%.
* The matching rate is indicated as 0 to 100. 100 indicates that there are no misalignments or protrusions. The matching rate
decreases the more the protruded and misaligned area (the area the target enters the protrusion prohibited area) increases.

4-142 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Setting the Color Prohibition/Brightness 4 Apply the mask as needed.

The area inside the mask region is excluded from being
Prohibition Tool a protrusion/deviation detection target.
“Mask” (Page 4-146)
1 Add the [Color Prohibition/Bright. Prohibit] tool. Using the tool in conjunction with mask
“Adding a tool” (Page 4-48) settings enables misalignments and
The main screen for [Color Prohibition/Bright. Prohibit] protrusions in various directions to be
opens. detected.

2 Tap the [Edit Window] button. Horizontal Vertical

Target
Mask
4
Tool window

Settings Navigator
Cross direction

Tapping the window will also allow for editing

of the window.
Target
Mask
3 Select the tool window shape, position, size, and Tool window
angle according to the desired target.
“Editing the Window” (Page 3-19) 5 Tap the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for [Protrusion/
Deviation].

Set the
position, size,
and angle

Rect Circle

When [Entire] is selected, the tool window will be

hidden.
The window angle can be reset by the [Angle
Reset].

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-143

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

6 Set the area to extract from the target. zz

For monochrome type
Tap the [Brightness Extraction] button.
zz
For color type
Tap the [Color Extraction] button.

4
The screen to select the brightness to be extracted
opens.
The screen to select a color to be extracted opens. Tap the brightness that will be used as the reference for
Tap the color that will be used as the reference for inspection.
Settings Navigator

detection.

The tapped brightness will be extracted.

The tapped color will be extracted. yyIf the areas of brightness that have not been extracted
yyIf the areas of color that have not been extracted are tapped repeatedly, the extraction range can be
are tapped repeatedly, the extraction range can be adjusted.
adjusted. yyAdjust the slider, and the range of the brightness to
yyTap the [Exclude] button to specify a color to exclude be extracted can be expanded/reduced.
from the extracted color. “Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20)
yyTap the [+]/[-] button of the extraction area yyWhen a brightness extraction is to be performed
adjustment, and the range of color to be extracted can again, tap the [Clear] button and then tap the
be expanded/reduced. brightness to be the reference for judgment.
yyWhen a color extraction is to be performed again, yyBy tapping the [To Live Image] button, the range of
tap the [Clear] button and then tap the color to be the the brightness to be extracted can be set using the
reference of judgment. Live image of the target.
yyBy tapping the [To Live Image] button, the range of
color to be extracted can be set using the Live image
of the target.

After setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for [Bright.
Prohibit].
After setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for [Color
Prohibition].

4-144 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

7 Tap the [Limit/Sensitivity Adjustment] button. 10 Adjust the threshold for anomaly detection by
checking the matching rate.
<Setting example>
Set the detection threshold for the matching rate of the
protrusion and misalignment that should be detected as
an OK target.

Match

Threshold
The sensor changes to Test mode.

8 Take an “OK” image and a “NG” image.

If [Trigger Options] is set to [External] or [Internal Trigger
4
Control with IN1 Input] is set to [Yes], input the external

Settings Navigator
trigger.
If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the [Trigger A target is detected as OK if the matching rate is
ON] button to take an image of the target using the greater than the threshold, and detected as NG
internal trigger. if the matching rate is lower than the threshold.
“Selecting the Display Method of the
9 Select a sensitivity for the matching rate. Detection Window/Tool Window” (Page 5-10)
“Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20)
“Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page
6-16)

11 After setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen for [Color
Prohibition/Bright. Prohibit].

Sensitivity
12 Tap the [OK] button.
The system returns to the main screen for tool settings.
Settings

zz
Hi Sens (default)
If “1/600th of the total sensor view” area in the tool
window protrudes, the matching rate is 0%. The
sensitivity to detect the protrusion increases.
Select this setting when you do not want to allow
protrusions or deviations.
zz
LowSens
If “1/10th of the total sensor view” area in the tool
window protrudes, the matching rate is 0%.
This setting enables protrusions and deviations to
be judged when they are allowed. Additionally, this
setting makes judgment resistant to individual target
differences and ambient light interference.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-145

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

„„
Mask 5 Tap the [Cut Mask] button to remove a region of
the mask.
1 Tap the [Mask] button

4 2 Tap the [Add Mask] button.

6 Select the shape, position, size, and angle of the
area to be cut from the mask according to the
target.
Settings Navigator

“Editing the Window” (Page 3-19)

Set cut
shape

3 Select the mask shape, position, size, and angle

according to the target.
“Editing the Window” (Page 3-19) 7 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
8 Repeat steps 2 to 7 as needed to set the mask
region.

9 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

Set the mask

shape Area not to
be masked

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the screen to set a mask region. Area to be
masked

The system returns to the main screen for [Protrusion/

Deviation].

4-146 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

Advanced Settings for the Color Prohibition/Brightness Prohibition Tool

Items Description Setting range Ref.
yyH (hue)
Advanced Color Extraction 0° to 359° (both starting point and
Settings yyColor type ending point)
(For color type) Specifies a color to be extracted using HSV (H: yyS (saturation)
Hue, S: Saturation, V: Brightness). 0 to 255
Adv. Brightness Extraction
yyV (Brightness) 4-147
Advanced Brightness
0 to 255
Extraction
(For monochrome type) yyMonochrome type
0 to 255
Specifies brightness value to be extracted.

4
Adjust in the Live A color or brightness range to detect protrusions
-
Screen can be set using the Live image of the target.
A user-specified name, such as the name of the
target, can be set for the tool. Tool names can

Settings Navigator
Tool Name Up to 16 characters can be set. 4-148
be checked on the run screen.
“‌ 5 Running” (Page 5-1)

„„
Advanced Color Extraction/Advanced 3 Specify the color or brightness of the extraction
Brightness Extraction target.

1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab. zz

For color type

2 Tap the [Advanced Color Extraction] button.

For monochrome type, tap the [Advanced Brightness
Extraction] button.

yyAdjust the value by slider while confirming the

color histogram. The values within the range
specified by the sliders will be used as the
color.
yyVertical axis indicates pixel count.
yyAmong the pixels of each color to be extracted,
the maximum pixel becomes the maximum
value of the vertical axis.
yyThe range and extraction rules of the color
extraction detail settings are as follows.

Set the upper limit and lower limit in the

range of 0 to 359.
yyLower limit ≤ Upper limit
The extraction range of a color is from
H the lower limit to the upper limit.
yyLower limit > Upper limit
The extraction range of a color is
from 0 to the upper limit, and from the
lower limit to 359.

S Set the upper limit and lower limit in the

range of 0 to 255.
The extraction range of a color is from
V the lower limit to the upper limit.

yyBy tapping the [To Live Image] button, the

range of color to be extracted can be set from
the Live image of the target.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-147

 3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of the Target of Standard Mode)

zz
For monochrome type „„
Tool Name
If the display language (Page 7-33) is changed,
characters may become unreadable.

1 Select the [Advanced Settings] tab.

2 Tap the [Tool Name] button.

yyAdjust the value by slider while confirming the

4 monochrome histogram.
The values within the range specified by the
sliders will be used as the brightness.
yyVertical axis indicates pixel count.
Settings Navigator

Among the extracted pixels of each brightness,

the one that has the most pixels becomes the
maximum value of vertical axis.
yyThe range and extraction rules in the
extraction detail settings are as follows. 3 Edit the tool name.
Up to 16 characters can be set.
Set the upper limit and lower limit in the “Inputting characters” (Page 3-21)
range of 0 to 255.
V
The extraction range of the brightness
is from the lower limit to the upper limit.
4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
yyBy tapping the [Adjust in the Live Screen]
button, the range of the brightness to be
extracted can be set with the Live image of the
target.

4 After setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

4-148 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)

4. Output Assignment
(Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)

Set the output items to be assigned to the output lines. Setting range of the Output Assignment
“Cables” (Page 2-11)
“10 Controlling with the Input/Output Line” (Page 10-1)
Setting range Description
Main screen for the Output Assignment Do not output.
OFF
Output will be constantly OFF.
(1) (2)
When the total status result of the tools
which have been set is OK, the output
turns ON. The total status condition can be
selected from the following:
(3)
yyAll Tools OK
Total Status
yyAny Tool OK
yyLogic 1
(4) yyLogic 2

4
yyLogic 3
yyLogic 4
(5) When the total status result is NG, the output
Tot.StatusNG

Settings Navigator
turns ON.

(6) (7) When the sensor is running and no system

RUN
error has occurred, the output turns ON.
(1) Navigation button The output turns ON in the following cases.
Moves steps in the Settings Navigator. yyJudgment process in progress (capture
(2) [Save] button process/image process)
Finishes the Settings Navigator and returns to the BUSY yySwitching programs
[Sensor Setup Menu] screen. yyRegistering the external master image
yyData transferring to an SD card (in the
(3) [Adv. Settings] tab case of settings enabled)
Displays the advanced settings menu for the output
assignment. The output turns ON when the trigger can be
Ready
“Advanced Settings for the Output Assignment” accepted.
(Page 4-151)
When the status result is updated, the output
(4) Output assignment button Strobe
turns ON.
Assigns an output item to each output line.
(5) [ON]/[OFF] button for the trigger error output The output turns ON when the following
errors occur.
Select whether to enable/disable the output for when
yySystem error
the trigger error occurs.
yyStartup memory readout error
“Error Messages” (Page A-9) yyProgram switching error
(6) [Back] button yyExternal master registration error
Returns to the learning settings screen, or tool settings yySD card access error
screen. Error yyField network warning
“3. Learning Settings (Setting the Judgment Method The following errors are output when settings
of the Target in Learning Mode)” (Page 4-24) are [Enable].
“3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method of yyTrigger Error
the Target of Standard Mode)” (Page 4-41) yyStrobe error
(7) [Complete] button yyFTP Error:
Finishes the Settings Navigator. yySD card transfer error
“Finishing the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-7) yySNTP sync error
The output turns ON when the following
errors occur.
SD card error yySD card access error
yySD card transfer error (when settings are
[Enable])

When the position adjustment process has

Pos. Adj.
occurred normally, the output turns ON.

When the specified detection window/tool

judgment is OK, the output turns ON.
Tool 01 to 16
Status results can be output for each
detection window/tool.

When the status result of the specified logic

Logic 1 to 4
is OK, the output turns ON.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-149

 4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)

„„
Default value Setting the Output Assignment
OUT1 Total Status OK (N.O.)

OUT2 BUSY (N.O.) 1 Tap the item name of an output line and select
the output item.
OUT3 Error (N.C.)

OUT4

OUT5

OUT6 OFF

OUT7

OUT8

4 Trigger Error

Strobe error
Disable
2 Finishes the Settings Navigator.
Settings Navigator

FTP Error:
OFF
SD card transfer error “Finishing the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-7)

SNTP sync error

yyThe output settings which determine N.O./N.C.

can be changed.
“Output Settings” (Page 7-16)
yyThe input cable assignment can be changed.
“Input Settings” (Page 7-14)

4-150 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)

Advanced Settings for the Output Assignment

Advanced settings items for the output assignment

Items Description Setting range Ref.

yyAll tools OK (default)

When the status results of all of the detection tools are
OK, the total status output turns ON.
Selects a condition for the total status
yyAny Tool OK
Total Status result.
When the status results of any of the detection tools are 4-152
Conditions The total status result is determined
OK, the total status output turns ON.
according to the selected condition.
yyLogic 1 to 4
When the status result for the set logic is OK, the total

4
status output turns ON.

yyUnused (default)
A logical operation can be performed The selected items are not used in a logical formula.

Settings Navigator
using the status results of selected yyUsed
detection tools and can be applied to The status results of the selected items must be OK for
Logic Settings
an output. the logic output to turn ON.
Up to 4 items, Logic 1 to 4, can be yyUsed (Inverse)
defined. The status results of the selected items must be NG for
the logic output to turn ON. 4-153

yyAND (default)
When the status results of all of the selected detection
Selects the operation method for the tools are OK, the Logic output turns ON.
Logic
logic settings. yyOR
When the status results of any of the selected detection
tools are OK, the logic output turns ON.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-151

 4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)

„„
Total Status Conditions zz
Logic 1 to 4
When the status result of the defined logic is OK, the
1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab. total status output turns ON.
“Main screen for the Output Assignment” (Page Logic OK
4-149) 1 to 4 NG

2 Select a total status condition. Total OK

Status NG

Image of total status output when the total

status condition is [Logic 1 to 4]

yyWhen the position adjustment is the status

result of each tool is NG.
yyIf the Area/Edge Pixel/Width/Diameter/Edge/

4 Pitch/OCR tool window protrudes from the

imaging area when position adjustment
succeeds, the tool cannot be judged and
the status result is NG.
Settings Navigator

The total status result is displayed according to the

selected condition.
zz
All Tools OK
When all of the detection tools are OK, the total status
output turns ON.
OK
Tool A
NG

OK
Tool B
NG

Total OK
Status NG

Image of total status output when the total

status condition is [All Tools OK]

zz
Any Tool OK
When any of the detection tools are OK, the total status
output turns ON.
OK
Tool A
NG

OK
Tool B
NG

Total OK
Status NG

Image of total status output when the total

status condition is [Any Tools OK]

For [Any Tools OK], the status result of the

position adjustment is not included in the
total status conditions.

4-152 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)

„„
Logic Settings 4 Select items to be integrated into the logic.
1 Select the [Adv. Settings] tab.
“Main screen for the Output Assignment” (Page
4-149)

2 Tap the number to which the logic judgement

condition is to be defined.

The status result of the logic is calculated from OK/NG

of all of the items which [Used] or [Used (Inverse)] has
been set. 4
yyItems where [Used] are selected will be

Settings Navigator
checked with red color.
yyItems where [Used (Inverse)] are selected
will be checked with blue color.
When an undefined detection tool has been
defined to a logic, [An undefined tool is
selected.] is displayed on the right side of the
logic number .
zz
Logic : AND
3 Select the operation method for the logic. Tool A

Tool B Logic 1 to 4
Tool C
(Inverse)

Image of logic output

when the Logic is [AND]

[Logic 1]
Tool A Tool B Tool C to [Logic
4]
OK OK OK NG
NG OK OK NG
yyWhen [AND] has been selected, the logic
output turns ON when the status results of all OK NG OK NG
of the selected detection tools are OK. NG NG OK NG
yyWhen [OR] has been selected, the logic output
turns ON when the status results of any of the OK OK NG OK
selected detection tools are OK.
NG OK NG NG
OK NG NG NG
NG NG NG NG

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 4-153

 4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)

zz
Logic : OR
Tool A

Tool B Logic 1 to 4
Tool C
(Inverse)

Image of logic output

when the Logic is [OR]

[Logic 1]
Tool A Tool B Tool C to [Logic
4]
OK OK OK OK

4 NG
OK
OK
NG
OK
OK
OK
OK
Settings Navigator

NG NG OK NG
OK OK NG OK
NG OK NG OK
OK NG NG OK
NG NG NG OK

yySelect either [Unused]/[Used]/[Used (Inverse)]

for each item (Position Adjustment/Tool 01 to
Tool 16/Logic 1 to Logic 4).
yyWhen the status results of the [Used] items
are OK, the status output for items in the logic
turns ON.
yyWhen the status results of the [Used (Inverse)]
items are NG, the status output for items in the
logic turns ON.
yyTo define a logic which has been set to
another logic, use the logic number which is
greater than the logic number which has been
set.
For example, use either of Logic 2 to Logic 4
in case of defining Logic 1 to another logic.

When the program number has been

changed or the sensor is put into [Run] from
[Sensor Setup Menu] after the the power is
turned ON, a judgment is not performed until
a trigger has been input. Until the trigger
is input, the judgment result of each tool is
OFF.

5 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the Logic Settings screen.

6 Tap the [Close] button.

The system returns to the main screen for the Output
Assignment.

4-154 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 5 This chapter explains the procedures for starting operation
and the names and functions of each section displayed on the
operation screen.
The chapter also explains useful functions when confirming
Running operation status.

Starting an Operation.............................................................5-2
Overview of the Operation Screen.........................................5-3
Names and Functions of the Operation Screen.....................5-4
Confirming the NG Occurrence Status of the Sensor
Connected (List of NG Sensor Occurrences Function) .......5-13
5

Running
Holding the Image of the Sensor on which NG Occurred
(NG Hold Function)..............................................................5-17
Confirming the Images Whose Judgment are NG
(Image History).....................................................................5-18

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 5-1

 Starting an Operation

Starting an Operation

Starts operation according to the program created with the Settings Navigator.
The sensor can be independently operated.

Turning on the power and starting Exiting the sensor settings and starting
operation operation

1 Turn on the power of the sensor and control 1 Exit any settings screens that are open on the
panel. sensor, such as the Settings Navigator.
When the power of the control panel is turned “ Finishing the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-7)
on for the first time, the initial settings screen
opens. 2 Tap the [RUN] button.
“ Operation when the Power is Turned on”
(Page 3-5)

2 Confirm that the operation screen opens on the

5 zz
control panel.
For a [Learning Mode] program
Running

The run screen opens and operation starts.

If the image or status result does not update,
refer to “Troubleshooting” (Page A-7).

zz
For a [Standard Mode] program

If the image or status result does not update,

refer to “Troubleshooting” (Page A-7).

5-2 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Overview of the Operation Screen

Overview of the Operation Screen

Additional Learning (Learning

mode only)
Perform additional learning of images.
“ Auto Adjustment by the Additional
Learning (Learning Mode Only)”
Run screen (Page 6-2)

5
Show/Hide of the menu display
Limit Adjustment
Adjusts the judgment threshold.
“ Adjusting Thresholds for
Judgment” (Page 6-16)

Running
Operation Information Display Switch
Displays the operation information. Switches the display method of the operation
“ Displaying the Operation screen.
Information” (Page 5-6) “ Display Method” (Page 5-8)

Histogram Simple display

Processing
time

List display

Count

All screen display

Output
monitor

A A

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 5-3

 Names and Functions of the Operation Screen

Names and Functions of the Operation Screen

In the operation screen, the displayed items will be different depending on the mode of the program used.

Run screen

zz
For a [Learning Mode] program zz
For a [Standard Mode] program
[Menu OFF] [Menu OFF]
(1) (2) (1) (2)
(9)
(10) (10)
(3) (11) (3) (11)
(4) (4)
(5) (5)

(6)
(6) (12) (12)
(7)

(8) (8)

5 (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17)
Running

[Menu ON] [Menu ON]

(1) OK/NG display No. Items Ref.

Displays the total status result.
The total status condition can be selected from [All Trigger type (trigger interval/trigger delay)
Tools OK] / [Any Tool OK] / [Logic 1] to [Logic 4]. yyFor the internal trigger: Displays the
(c) trigger interval in brackets. 4-9
yyFor the external trigger: Displays the
Displayed when the total status result is OK. trigger delay time in brackets.

Processing time
Displayed when the total status result is NG. Displays the time required for the sensor
to process an image and output the status
result. This is the time between receiving
Displayed when the total status result is NG (d) -
an external or internal trigger and
where the NG hold function is set to [ON]. outputting the status result.
Holds the screen when judged as NG. If the output setting is [One-Shot] (Page
7-16), the ON-delay time is not included.
OK/NG can be changed to user-defined such as
PASS/FAIL. Program number: Program name
7-2
(e) Displays the program number and
7-8
program name of the selected program.

Cap. Time
(2) Program information Displayed when the trigger accept timing
Displays the information set in the program. is set to [Send after READY Output ON]
(a) (e) (f) (Page 7-17). -
(b) Displays the shortest interval that the
(c) sensor can accept the external trigger or
(d) (f) internal trigger.

No. Items Ref. (3) Image tool bar

“Operation of the Image Tool Bar” (Page 3-18)
Device name of sensor
(a) 7-19 (4) Display method of the detection window/tool
Displays the device name of the sensor.
window
Number of learned images (Learning Selects the display method of the detection window/tool
mode only) window.
(b) Displays the number of learned images 6-8 “Selecting the Display Method of the Detection
and the number images not reflected by Window/Tool Window” (Page 5-10)
the learning algorithm.

5-4 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Names and Functions of the Operation Screen

(5) [Trigger] button No. Name/function Ref.

If [External] is selected for [Trigger Options] or [Internal
Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to [Yes], the yy[Sensor Switch/Disconnect]
[Trigger] button will be displayed. A trigger is issued When [Direct Connection (2 units or
with each tap of the button. This button is used when an more)] or [Network Connection] is
external trigger cannot be input. selected, the [Sensor Switch/Disconnect]
The button can be set to be displayed or hidden. button can be selected.
“Display Settings” (Page 7-32) The [Sensor Switch/Disconnect] button
is used to change the sensor to which
(6) Detection window/Tool window the control panel is connected. 3-14
Displays a detection window/tool region that has been (b)
In addition, the control panel and the 3-15
set. A detection window/tool region with a green frame sensor can be disconnected.
has a status result of OK and one with a red frame has a yy[Disconnect Sensor]
status result of NG. When [Direct Connection (1 unit)] is
The detection window/tool window selected can be selected, the [Disconnect Sensor] button
changed by tapping a different tool region. can be selected.
“Selecting the Display Method of the Detection The control panel and the sensor can be
Window/Tool Window” (Page 5-10) disconnected.
(7) Search Range [Panel Settings]

5
If the search range of the selected tool is set to [Partial], (c) 7-26
Opens the settings for the control panel.
the search range will be displayed with a light blue
frame. If a position adjustment is set, the search range [RUN/Learned Img. History]
5-18
after position adjustment will be displayed. (d) Displays the image history and learned

Running
6-10
“Selecting the Display Method of the Detection image history (learning mode only).
Window/Tool Window” (Page 5-10)
[External Media]
(8) Brightness correction region (e) Opens the menu for the USB memory and 8-1
When the brightness correction is set, the brightness SD card.
correction region will be displayed with a blue frame.
[Sensor Setup]
(9) [Additional learning] button ([Learning Mode] only) (f) The sensor exits Run Mode and the 4-1
Includes the image displayed on screen into the [Sensor Setup Menu] screen is displayed.
learning algorithm.
“Auto Adjustment by the Additional Learning If the password lock has been set on the sensor,
(Learning Mode Only)” (Page 6-2) the [Sensor Setup] button will be displayed as
(10) [Limit Adjust] button shown below.
Allows for the manual adjustment of the threshold of the
selected detection window/tool.
“Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment” (Page 6-16) “Touch Screen Lock” (Page 7-34)
(11) Selection button
Changes the selected detection window/tool window in (14) [HOLD Clear] button
the direction that was selected. When the [NG Hold Function] is [ON] and the screen
is held after the sensor detects a NG target, this button
(12) Detection window/tool list
releases the NG Hold.
Displays the detection window/tool list for the items set
“Holding the Image of the Sensor on which NG
in the program. The content that is displayed differs
Occurred (NG Hold Function)” (Page 5-17)
depending on the screen display method.
“Selecting the Display Method of the Detection (15) [NG List] button
Window/Tool Window” (Page 5-10) When the function [List of NG Sensor Occurrences]
is used and a sensor on which a NG has occurred is
(13) [Menu] button
registered on the list, the button will be displayed.
Opens the menu at the bottom of the screen.
The number of NG occurrences on the registered
sensor is displayed.
“Confirming the NG Occurrence Status of the Sensor
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Connected (List of NG Sensor Occurrences Function)”
(Page 5-13)
No. Name/function Ref. (16) [RUN Info.] button
[Close] Opens and displays the operation information of the
(a) - sensor in the lower right of the screen.
Closes the menu.
“Displaying the Operation Information” (Page 5-6)
(17) [Disp. Switch] button
Switches the display method of the operation screen.
“Display Method” (Page 5-8)

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 5-5

 Names and Functions of the Operation Screen

Displaying the Operation Information The processing time/capture Time/number of

triggers/histogram are reset under the following
The operation information (histogram/processing time conditions.
(maximum/minimum/average)/count/output monitor) can be yyWhen the [Reset] button is tapped.
displayed in the lower right of the control panel by tapping yyWhen the power of the sensor is turned OFF.
the [RUN Info.] button. yyWhen a tool is added/deleted/copied.
The display is switched each time you tap on the button. yyWhen the upper limit of the color area/area/edge
pixel/width/diameter/edge/pitch tool is enabled/
disabled or when the setting scale is changed by
the user.
yyWhen switching the scaling settings on the width/
diameter/pitch tool.
yyWhen the program is changed.
yyWhen settings in the menu of the [Program] tab in
the Sensor Advanced settings are changed.
yyWhen the sensor is initialized.

5 (No display)
Running

Histogram
(Page 5-7)

Processing
time
(Page 5-7)

Count
(Page 5-8)

Output monitor
(Page 5-8)

If the display method is “Simple Display” or

“All Screen Display”, the operation information
cannot be displayed.

5-6 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Names and Functions of the Operation Screen

Histogram Processing time

(1) (1)
(2)
(2)
(3)

(3)
(4) (5)

(1) [Reset] button (1) [Reset] button

Resets the histogram, processing time, and count. Resets the histogram, processing time and counts.
(2) Threshold (2) Processing time
Displays the threshold of the selected detection window/ Displays information related to the processing time.
tool with a vertical line (orange).

5
Processing Displays the processing time of the latest
Threshold is not displayed for the High-Speed time judgment process.
Position Adjustment tool.
Displays the maximum value of the
(3) Histogram MAX
processing time.

Running
Displays the histogram (frequency distribution) of the
selected detection window/tool. Displays the minimum value of the
MIN
The range for OK is displayed in green and NG is processing time.
displayed in red, having the threshold as the boundary.
Displays the average value of the
yyHorizontal  isplays the distribution of the matching
D AVE
processing time.
axis rate. The display of the range is fixed. It
cannot be adjusted by the user. (3) Capture Interval
yyVertical  isplays the number of occurrences of
D Displays the information related to the capture interval.
axis a matching rate. Adjusts automatically
according to the maximum value of the Capture Displays the time of the latest capture
frequency. It cannot be specified by the user. Interval process.

yy  isplays the matching rate of the latest

D Displays the maximum value of the
MAX
judgment process. capture interval.

yyThe upper limit of the histogram is 999999. Displays the minimum value of the
MIN
The values display stops updating when the capture interval.
upper limit is reached.
yyThe Pitch tool displays the histogram (frequency Displays the average value of the capture
AVE
distribution) of the number of pitches. interval.

(4) Judgment Record

Displays the judgment process counts for OK or NG targets.
yyThe upper limit of the judgment count display
is 999999. The values display stops updating
when the upper limit is reached.
yyIf the judgment threshold is changed, the
histogram is updated to account for the
updated threshold.
However, the judgment record retains the counts
judged based on the previous threshold. Therefore,
the judgment conditions on the histogram may be
different from the displayed judgment record.

(5) Matching rate information

Displays operating information related to the matching rate.
MAX Displays the maximum value of the matching rate.
MIN Displays the minimum value of the matching rate.
AVE Displays the average value of the matching rate.

yyBoth maximum (MAX) and minimum (MIN)

values of all pitches are displayed when using
the Pitch tool.
yyAVE is not displayed for the Edge tool and
High-Speed Position Adjustment tool.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 5-7

 Names and Functions of the Operation Screen

Count Display Method

By tapping the [Disp. Switch] button, the display method of
(1) the detection window/tool information on the right side of
the control panel can be switched.
The display is switched each time you tap on the button.

(2) Status gauge display (Page 5-9)

Selection
button

(1) Reset button

Resets the histogram, processing time and count.
(2) Output monitor
Displays information related to the number of triggers.

5
Displays the total number of successful
TrigNo triggers issued. This number does not
Simple display (Page 5-8)
include the number of trigger errors.
Running

Displays the number of triggers issued

OK
with the total status OK.

Displays the number of triggers issued

NG
with the total status NG.

Displays the number of triggers issued as

TrERR
error triggers.

Displays the number of triggers issued as

StERR
strobe errors.

List display (Page 5-7)

Output Monitor

(1)

(2)

(1) [Reset] button All screen display (Page 5-7)

Resets the histogram, processing time and count.
Touching the button does not reset [Output
Monitor].

(2) Output monitor

Displays the operating status of the items assigned in
[Output assignment] (Page 4-149) of [Sensor settings].

5-8 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Names and Functions of the Operation Screen

Status Gauge Display List display

Displays the status results of up to four detection windows/ Displays the status results of up to 16 detection windows/
tool windows set in the program with a bar graph indicating tool windows set in the program.
the matching rate. If the number of detection windows/
tool windows exceeds 4, the other results can be scrolled
through for display with the selection button.
Displays the window name/tool name, status results (OK/
NG), a line indicating the threshold, and the value of the
matching rate.
Threshold

Window name/
Judge is OK (green)
tool name
Threshold Match

Running
Judge is NG (red)
yyBoth maximum and minimum values of the
distances between all the pitches are displayed
in status gauge of the Pitch tool. Among all of
All screen display
the distances between pitches, the one which Enlarges the image on the sensor to the full screen size of
deviates the most from average value is displayed the control panel and displays the image.
as the matching rate. The device name of the sensor, program number/program
yyThreshold is not displayed for the High-Speed name, processing time, matching rate and status result of
Position Adjustment tool. the detection window/tool window, and the presence of the
yyIf the scaling function is used with the Width/ image tool bar can be selected to be hidden or shown.
Diameter/Pitch tool,unit of the scaling value is
displayed.
“Displaying and outputting the status result”
(Page A-4)
yyThe threshold is not displayed in the status
gauge of the OCR tool. When all character/date
is completely matching, the matching rate is
indicated with 100. If either the text or date does
not match, 0 is displayed.
yyIf [Shade Contrast] of the OCR tool is set to
[Enable], the threshold is displayed. The value of
the matching rate links with the shade contrast of
character/date.

Simple display
Displays the status results of up to eight detection windows/
tool windows set in the program.
If the number of detection windows/tool windows exceeds
8, the other results can be scrolled through for display with
the selection button.
Displays status results (OK/NG) and the value of the
matching rate.
Match: Judge is OK (green)

Window name/tool name

Match: Judge is NG (red)

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 5-9

 Names and Functions of the Operation Screen

Selecting the detection window/tool Selecting the Display Method of the

window Detection Window/Tool Window
The method for selecting the detection window/tool window The display method for the detection window/tool window
is as follows. can be selected by the display method drop-down on the
yyTapping to select the status result of the detection image tool bar.
window/tool window on the right side of the control panel (if
the display is not “All Screen”) 1 By tapping the display method drop-down, the
yyTapping to select the detection window/tool window display method can be selected.
displayed on the image of the sensor.

1 Tap the status result on the right side of the

control panel, or the detection window/tool
window displayed on the image of the sensor.

5
Running

The display method of the detection window/tool

window changes according to the mode of the program.
“Display Methods for Detection Windows (Learning
Mode)” (Page 5-11)
“Display Methods of Tools (Standard Mode)” (Page
Tap either one 5-12)
The selected detection window/tool window will be
highlighted.

5-10 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Names and Functions of the Operation Screen

Display Methods for Detection Windows zz

Process

(Learning Mode)
zz
OFF

Compared to when [Window] is selected, the following

is different.
€
€Selected Detection Window
All the detection windows and search ranges become yyDetection window: When the status result is OK
Displays the region with a high matching rate between

5
hidden.
the target and learned OK target (the region based
zz
Window on which the OK judgment was made) is displayed in
green. The higher the matching rate of the region is,

Running
the darker the green display becomes.
yyDetection window: When the status result is NG
Displays the region with a high matching rate between
the target and learned NG target (the region based
on which the NG judgment was made) is displayed in
red. The higher the matching rate of the region is, the
darker the red display becomes.
yyIf matching rate between the target and
learned OK target (or NG target) is low, it may
not be displayed.
yyThe display range/density is rough indication.
€
€Selected Detection Window It should be handled as reference information.
yyDisplays the frame of the detection window with a
thick line. If a mask region is set, the region where €
€Selected position adjustment window
the tool window and mask region are applied will be Indicates the recognized outline in green (OK) or red
displayed. (NG).
yyDisplays the frame of the search range in light blue. € brightness correction has been set
€If
€
€Non-selected detection window The inside of the window is displayed with the corrected
yyDisplays the frame of the detection window with a thin line. brightness when selected. (Only the window to be a
yyThe search range and the mask region will not be target of brightness correction)
displayed.
€
€Common
When the result of position adjustment and status results
are OK, the tool will be displayed in green. If one of the
status results is NG, the NG tool will be displayed in red.
Displays the brightness correction window in blue.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 5-11

 Names and Functions of the Operation Screen

Display Methods of Tools (Standard Mode) zz

Process

zz
OFF

Outside the
tool
window

Inside the
tool
window

Compared to when the [Window] is selected, the

following is different.
All the tool windows and search ranges become hidden. €
€Selected tool
yyOutline/edge pixels/width/diameter/edge/pitch tool/
zz
Window position adjustment

5 Indicates the recognized outline/edge in green (OK)

or red (NG).
Displays inside the tool window in monochrome, and
Running

outside the tool window in color if the sensor is the

color type.
yyColor area/area/color prohibition/brightness prohibition
tools
Displays the extracted region in green (OK) or red (NG).
yyOCR Tool
Displays the recognized text and date on a green (OK)
or red (NG) window.
yyColor average tool
€
€Selected tool Displays the master color ( ) and target color ( ) on
yyDisplays the frame of tool window with a thick line. the top left of the screen.
If the mask region is set in the color area/area/ yyBrightness average tool
edge pixel/color average/brightness average/width/ Displays the master brightness ( ) and target
diameter/edge/pitch/OCR/color prohibition/brightness brightness ( ) on the top left of the screen.
prohibition tools, the region where the tool window € brightness correction has been set
€If
and mask region are combined will be displayed. The inside of the tool window is displayed with the
yyDisplays the frame of the search range in light blue. corrected brightness when selected. (For tools subject
€
€Non selected tools to brightness correction only)
yyDisplays the frame of the tool window with a thin line.
yyThe search range and the mask region will not be
displayed.
€
€Common
When the result of position adjustment and status
results are OK, the tool will be displayed in green. If one
of the status results is NG, the NG tool will be displayed
in red.
Displays the brightness correction window in blue.

5-12 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Confirming the NG Occurrence Status of the Sensor Connected (List of NG Sensor Occurrences Function)

Confirming the NG Occurrence Status of the

Sensor Connected (List of NG Sensor Occurrences Function)
Overview of the List of NG Sensor zz
When 7 or fewer sensors are registered
(2) (3) (4)
Occurrences function
When direct connection (1 unit) is used, this function
cannot be used. (1)

By using the [List of NG Sensor Occurrences] function, the

[NG List] button blinks (red) when a NG occurs on a sensor
connected to the control panel while in Run mode.

(5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

zz
When 8 or more sensors are registered
(2) (3)

(1)
5

Running
[NG List] button
Tapping the [NG List] button displays the list of sensors
connected to the control panel and their NG statuses can
be confirmed.
yyOf the connected sensors, only sensors
registered as being monitored for an NG
occurrence are shown in the list.
yy[List of NG Sensor Occurrences] can only be
displayed while the system is running.
(5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
yyThe IV2 series and IV series can be mixed and
confirmed on the list.
(1) Sensor list
Displays the sensors registered to the control panel
on the [List of NG Sensor Occurrences]. The sensor
displayed on the control panel is highlighted in orange.
(2) Indicator light
Displays the status of the sensors registered on the
control panel on the [List of NG Sensor Occurrences].
Green (ON) No NG occurred.

Red (ON) A NG has occurred at least once.

The number of NG occurrences has

Red (Blink) increased after displaying the latest [List
of NG Sensor Occurrences].

The sensor is not connected due to a

connection error. Check connection with
Yellow
the sensor.
(lighting)
Blinks when confirming the [NG
Yellow
Monitoring Sensor Information] for the
(blinking)
first time. Lights up when the status has
been confirmed.

The sensor has not been registered, or

Gray the information of the sensor is being
acquired.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 5-13

 Confirming the NG Occurrence Status of the Sensor Connected (List of NG Sensor Occurrences Function)

(3) Status Setting [List of NG Sensor Occurrences]

Displays the status of the sensors registered on the
control panel on the [List of NG Sensor Occurrences].
The status of the sensor is displayed with characters. 1 Display the control panel menu, and tap the
[Panel Settings].
The NG count is displayed as a value
from 0 to 99999. The NG count is the
accumulated value after turning the
power on.
NG: (counts)
The maximum number of NGs that
can be displayed is 99999. After
99999 NGs have occurred, the
number will not increase.

The sensor for the corresponding

NOT SET
number has not been registered.

Error number 001 to 128 will be

displayed when an important or
SYS ERR (No.) fatal error occurs with the sensor. If

5 2 Select the [Adv. Panel Settings] tab, and tap the

multiple errors occur, the lowest error
number will be displayed.
[Display Settings] button.
CONNECTION
The sensor is not connected.
Running

ERROR

The information from the sensor

is being acquired. For example,
UPDATING UPDATING is displayed when the
information from the sensor has not
yet been acquired after startup.

To reset the NG count, perform one of the

operations below.
yyTap the [Clear] button.
yyTurn the power off.
yyInitialize the sensor.

(4) Device Name

3 Tap the [Settings] button.
Displays the device name assigned to the sensor.
(5) [Clear All] button.
Clears the NG occurrence status of all the sensors
registered on [List of NG Sensor Occurrences].
(6) [Clear] button.
Clears the NG occurrence status of the sensor selected
on [NG Monitoring Sensor Information].
(7) [Show Legends] button
Displays the legend for the indicator light.
(8) [Change] button
Connects to the selected sensor and displays the
sensor’s image on the control panel.
(9) [OK] button
Closes the [NG Monitoring Sensor Information]screen.

5-14 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Confirming the NG Occurrence Status of the Sensor Connected (List of NG Sensor Occurrences Function)

4 Register sensors on [List of NG Sensor zz

When registering by specifying the IP address of
Occurrences]. the sensor
Tap the [Edit] button.
zz
When searching for a sensor and registering it
Tap the [Search Sensor] button.

Enter the IP address of a sensor to be registered and

tap the [OK] button.
Searching starts and the search results will be

5
displayed.

Running
The sensor of the specified IP address will be registered
on the list.

The number displayed on the [List of NG Sensor

Occurrences] is automatically assigned.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 5-15

 Confirming the NG Occurrence Status of the Sensor Connected (List of NG Sensor Occurrences Function)

5 Tap the number of the sensor (default 8 To display the [List of NG Sensor Occurrences]
value: OFF) displayed on [List of NG Sensor screen at startup of the control panel, set [Display
Occurrences] and select number. on Startup] to [ON].
yyNumbers will be displayed on [List of NG
Sensor Occurrences] in the selected order.
yyIf the sensor was registered by specifying
the IP address, the number is automatically
assigned. Change the number as needed.

9 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

Returns to the [Panel Settings] screen.

5
The selected number will be registered.
Running

6 Repeat step 5 to register the number of sensors

for [List of NG Sensor Occurrences].

yyUp to 16 sensors can be registered on

[List of NG Sensor Occurrences]. Tap
the [▲]/[▼] button to select a sensor
detected.
yyTo initialize [List of NG Sensor
Occurrences], tap the [Clear] button.

7 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the Display Settings screen.

5-16 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Holding the Image of the Sensor on which NG Occurred (NG Hold Function)

Holding the Image of the Sensor on which NG

Occurred (NG Hold Function)
Overview of the NG Hold function Setting the NG Hold function
If the NG Hold function is used, the image of the sensor on

which NG occurred during Run mode is held and is

1 Display the menu of the control panel, and tap the
[Panel Settings] button.
displayed on the control panel.
The image when the NG occurred can be confirmed.

NG occurs during running.

2 Select the [Adv. Panel Settings] tab, and tap the
[Display Settings] button. 5

Running
“NG HOLD” is
displayed as
the total status
result and the
screen is held.

To release the image held, tap the [HOLD CLR] button.

3 Set [NG Hold Function] to [ON].

4 Tap the [OK] button.

yyIf another NG occurs during holding of an NG Returns to the [Panel Settings] screen.
image, the NG image will be updated.
yyThe NG hold status will be released with one
of the operations below.
- When run screen is changed to the [Sensor
Setup Menu] screen.
- When the program number is switched
- When the external master image
registration is performed.
- When the status output is reset with an
error clear external input.
- When the [HOLD CLR] button is tapped.
yyThe operation Information will be updated
during NG hold.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 5-17

 Confirming the Images Whose Judgment are NG (Image History)

Confirming the Images Whose Judgment are NG

(Image History)

The sensor has built-in memory for saving images used Displaying the [Running Image Hist.]
for judgment. According to the save condition, the sensor
automatically saves the latest images. The save conditions screen
are as follows. This section explains how to display the [Running Image
zz
NG images only (default value) Hist.] screen.
Saves only the images where the total status result was
NG. There are 2 methods for displaying the [Running
Image Hist.] screen.
zz
NG & near threshold OK The [Logging Settings] can only be set and
Saves the following images. adjusted from the [Sensor Setup Menu] screen.
yyLearning mode images where the judgment results
are OK but any of the detection windows have a
matching rate that is close to the threshold. Displaying from the run screen
yyThe images where the status results are NG
If saving OK images where the matching rates 1 Display the menu of the control panel.
are close to the threshold, you can inspect an “Display Method” (Page 5-8)
image where the target was meant to be judged
as NG but was judged mistakenly as OK. 2 Perform the following.
5 zz
All images
Saves all images that were judged.
zz
For learning mode
Tap the [RUN/Learned Img. History] button.
Running

The saved images are loaded into the control panel and
can be used for confirming the causes or trends of NG
results.
Up to 1000 images can be saved.
Since the memory of the image history is
volatile, all saved images are erased when the
power is turned OFF.
To save the images, batch back up the images
into USB memory.

Tap the [Running Image History] button.

zz
For standard mode
Tap the [Running Image History] button.

5-18 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Confirming the Images Whose Judgment are NG (Image History)

3 Select whether or not to stop logging while Displaying from the [Sensor Setup Menu]
running (image-updating of the image history).
screen

1 Perform the following.

zz
For learning mode
Tap the [RUN/Learned Img. History] button.

When operation is not paused

yyThe added or overwritten history image will
not be updated automatically. To update,

5
close the history image display and then
display it again.
yyWhen an image in the history is erased
by overwriting and the sensor is updated Tap the [Running Image History] button.

Running
while displaying the image on the control
panel, the image may not be displayed
again on the control panel.

The [Running Image Hist.] screen opens.

zz
For standard mode
Tap the [Running Image History] button.

The [Running Image Hist.] screen opens.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 5-19

 Confirming the Images Whose Judgment are NG (Image History)

Loading and confirming saved images (7) Image operation button

Displays the running image history in the sensor.

zz
[Image Detail] button
Zooms in on the selected image history.
1 Display the [Running Image Hist.] screen. (a) (e)
“Displaying the [Running Image Hist.] screen” (Page
5-18) (f)

(1) (2) (3)

(b) (g)
(4) (7)

(8)
(c) (h)
(d) (i)
(5) (5) (a) Image tool bar
“Operation of the Image Tool Bar” (Page 3-18)

5 (6) (9)
(b) History image
Displays the image saved in the sensor history. The
trigger number and save date is displayed on the
(10) (11)
image.
Running

(1) [Batch Backup] button (c) Operation buttons

Backs up the images in a batch. Moves to the previous page.
“Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a USB Moves to the previous history image.
Memory” (Page 8-3)
Moves to the next history image.
To back up the images in a batch from Moves to the next page.
the View screen, the save target will be
[Prog.+Image Hist.]. (d) [Save] button
The displayed history image is saved.
(2) [Clear History] button (e) Detail information
“Clearing the saved images” (Page 5-21) Displays the total status result, program number,
(3) [Logging Settings] button program name and processing time.
“Changing the logging conditions of the image An image displayed with red characters
history” (Page 5-22) requires processing with a setting different
(4) Detail Information than the current program.
Displays detailed information for the selected thumbnail
image. (f) Selection button
Displays the program number, program name, number Selects a detection window/tool window set in the
of triggers, save time, status results for the position program.
adjustment, and the status results for each tool, and the (g) Detection window list/tool list
processing time. Displays the detection windows/tools set in the
(5) Operation buttons program.
Selects a thumbnail image.
(h) [Learn Selected Image] button
Moves to the first page of the image history. (learning mode only)
“Additional Learning from the Running Image
Moves to the previous page.
History” (Page 6-5)
Moves to the previous history image. (i) [Back] button
Returns to the [Running Image Hist.] screen.
Moves to the last page of the image history.
Moves to the next page.

Moves to the next history image.

(6) Thumbnail images

Displays the total status result, the trigger number, and
thumbnail images.
When an image is tapped, the sensor zooms in on the
image.
“[Image Detail] button” (Page 5-20)
For details of the number of triggers, refer to
“Displaying the Operation Information” (Page 5-6).

5-20 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Confirming the Images Whose Judgment are NG (Image History)

zz
[Image to be Learned] button Clearing the saved images
(learning mode only)
Displays the images to be learned. Clears the history images saved in the sensor.
“Additional Learning from the Running Image
History” (Page 6-5) 1 Display the [Running Image Hist.] screen.
zz
[Learn Selected Image] button “Displaying the [Running Image Hist.] screen” (Page
(learning mode only) 5-18)
Perform the additional learning with the selected history
image. 2 Tap the [Clear History] button.
“Additional Learning from the Running Image
History” (Page 6-5)

(8) [Page] button

Allows the user to select the page of the image history
displayed.
(9) Page number
Indicates the currently displayed page number of the

5
image history.
(10) [Filter Settings] button
The [Filter Settings] screen opens.

3 Tap the [OK] button.

Running
The image history will be cleared and the system
returns to the run screen or the [Sensor Setup Menu]
screen.

zz
Display Image
Selects the type of images to be displayed on the
[Running Image Hist.] screen from the following.
“NG & near threshold OK” is selectable only in the
Learning mode.
yyAll
yyNG & near threshold OK
yyNG only
zz
Sort
Selects the order of images to be displayed on the
[Running Image Hist.] screen from the following.
yyMatch: From highest
yyMatch: From lowest
yyDate/Time: From newest
yyDate/Time: From oldest
zz
Target tool
Select the tool/window to be used when sorting by match.
zz
Period
Specifies the images to be displayed on the [Running
Image Hist.] screen by time period.
yyAll periods
Displays all images.
yyPage
Specifies the period for [Start] and [End], and
displays images. Tap the [Edit] button, and specify
the period for [Start] and [Finish].
“Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20)
Close the [Running Image History] screen
when resetting the filter.

(11) [Back] button

The system returns to the run screen or the [Sensor
Setup Menu] screen.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 5-21

 Confirming the Images Whose Judgment are NG (Image History)

Changing the logging conditions of the

image history
Sets the logging condition (storage condition) for the image
history.

1 Display the [Sensor Setup Menu] screen.

“Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen” (Page
7-2)

2 Display the [Running Image Hist.] screen.

“Displaying the [Running Image Hist.] screen” (Page
5-18)

3 Tap the [Logging Settings] button.

5
Running

4 Select the logging condition.

zz
All
Saves all the images to the image history regardless of
the status result.
zz
NG & near threshold OK
Saves the following images.
yyLearning mode images where the judgment results
are OK but any of the detection windows have a
matching rate that is close to the threshold.
yyThe images where the status results are NG
If saving OK images where the matching rates
are close to the threshold, you can inspect an
image where the target was meant to be judged
as NG but was judged mistakenly as OK.

zz
NG only (default value)
Only saves the images whose status result is NG to the
image history.

5 Tap the [OK] button.

Returns to the [Running Image Hist.] screen.

5-22 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 6 This chapter explains the adjustment method to make full use
of the judgment capacity of this unit.

Adjusting

Auto Adjustment by the Additional Learning

(Learning Mode Only).............................................................6-2
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment......................................6-16
Stabilizing the Judgment......................................................6-17
Shortening the Processing Time..........................................6-27

Adjusting

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 6-1

 Auto Adjustment by the Additional Learning (Learning Mode Only)

Auto Adjustment by the Additional Learning (Learning

Mode Only)

Additional Learning Settings Flow of Additional Learning Operation

The additional learning function allows for a user to stabilize Settings completed
the judgment of learning mode. (OK/NG target learning completed)
zz
When using the additional learning
Additional learning is used when there is a target whose Status that can be
judgment is not stable during operation or test operation OK NG judged
after setting the [3. Learning Settings] (Page 4-24)
during sensor setup.
A target whose judgment is not stable is the
target where the capture status is different
from the registration status of the learning
settings.
Target misalignment (shape, surface
condition, dirt, setting position) and the Operation (test operation)
change of ambient light or background can
influence the judgment status.

zz
Advantage of the additional learning
OK (90)
By imaging a target where the detection is not stable or
by using images from the history to learn, judgment can NG (5)

6
be adjusted automatically. By performing the additional
learning of multiple images, the stability is improved OK (60)
automatically.
OK (95)
Adjusting

Method for the additional learning Wants to judge as OK,

NG (5)

Additional learning can be executed by the following but low matching rate NG (45)
methods.
zz
Using the capture image while in operation Wants to judge as NG,
Image “OK images” and “NG images” to adjust but high matching rate
automatically the judgment of learning mode.
“Additional Learning by Taken Image” (Page 6-4)
Additional
zz
Using the image history Learning
Use “OK images” and “NG images” of the running image
history to adjust automatically the judgment of learning
mode. Additional Additional
“Additional Learning from the Running Image learning as OK learning as NG
History” (Page 6-5)
Optimizing the
zz
Using the learning image history OK NG judgment using
By using the learning image history and changing the
multiple images
status results (OK/NG) of the detection window, the
judgment of learning mode is adjusted automatically.
In addition, delete images that are not needed for
learning mode.
“Additional Learning from the Learning Image (multiple images)
History” (Page 6-10)
zz
Using images saved external media
RUN
Use a batch backup file (*.iv2a) or image capture file
(*.iv2p) stored in a USB memory to adjust automatically
the judgment of learning mode.
“Additional Learning from USB Memory” (Page
6-13)
OK (90)
If the batch backup file (*.iv2a) is used, you
NG (5)
can select the image to be imported from the
following. OK (90)
yyRunning Image
History OK (95)
yyMaster Image
yyOK/NG Registration Image NG (5)
All target judgments are
yyLearning Image History stabilized NG (5)

6-2 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Auto Adjustment by the Additional Learning (Learning Mode Only)

What should be done in the following case

Condition Remedy Ref.

When additional learning is performed but the Modify the learned image to the correct status result in the
6-10
wrong status result (OK or NG) is applied. [Learned Hist.] screen, and additional learning.

When you want to confirm the learned image. Confirm the image in the [Learned Hist.] screen. 6-7

When you want to delete the learned image. Delete the image in the [Learned Hist.] screen. 6-7

When you want to look automatically for an Perform additional learning of the “Image to be Learned” in the
6-5
image whose detection is not stable. [Running Image Hist.] screen.

When two copies of the same image are

captured mistakenly and additional learning is
Delete the unneeded image in the [Learned Hist.] screen. 6-7
performed so that one is OK and the other is
NG.

yyCapture images with a large difference between the OK and

NG inspections.
yySet the detection window only for the part where the difference
between OK and NG is clear. For images where the difference
When an inspection is not stable even though between OK and NG is small in the detection window, the
6-17

6
additional learning has been repeatedly detection may not be stable.
6-22
performed. yyWhen a positional deviation of the target occurs, adjust the
settings of the position adjustment. In addition, set the search
algorithm to the high accuracy.

Adjusting
yyPerform the additional learning using multiple images where
the judgments are not stable.

When changing the settings of the program,

The additional learning will be cleared. Perform additional
such as modifying/adding/deleting detection
learning as needed.
windows in “3. Learning Settings” of the
The registered image remains in [Learning Image History], 6-10
Settings Navigator or re-doing the learning
however, it will be in the state that is not reflected in the learning
operation by changing the settings for OK/NG
process (not reflected).
target learning.

When you want to perform additional learning

Use additional learning from an outside media source. 6-13
by using an image acquired by another sensor.

Perform additional learning of an image where the background is

When the sensor recognizes the background
captured.
(no target) as OK, but the status should be NG.
Register the status result as NG.

Perform additional learning of an image where the background is 6-4

When the sensor should judge the background
captured. 6-5
(no target) as OK.
Register the status result as OK. 6-13

There are multiple “targets the sensor should

Perform additional learning for all of the targets.
judge as OK” and “targets the sensor should
Register the status results as OK or NG per detection window.
judge as NG”.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 6-3

 Auto Adjustment by the Additional Learning (Learning Mode Only)

Additional Learning by Taken Image 5 Confirm the condition of the detection windows.
Change the status result as needed, then tap the
[Start Learning] button.
1 Display the operation screen.
“Starting an Operation” (Page 5-2)

2 Capture an image where the target is the object

desired for additional learning.

3 Tap the [Additional Learning] button.

When multiple detection windows are set,

confirm/change all status results for the
detection windows.

The confirmation screen opens.

6 Tap the [OK] button.

6 4 Tap the [OK] button. Learning will be performed.

7 After learning has been completed, tap the [OK]

Adjusting

button.

yyWhen tapping the [Cancel] button while

learning, learning can be canceled.
yyWhen a similar learned image is found, the
[Register From Running History] screen
opens.
“Confirming the Similar Images and
Additional Learning” (Page 6-15)
yyYou can edit/delete images where
additional learning of the wrong status
result is performed in the [Learned Hist.]
The operation will stop. screen.
“Additional Learning from the Learning
When the number of images used for
Image History” (Page 6-10)
additional learning has exceeded the upper
limit, the [Register From a Running History] Returns to the Test screen.
screen appears after operation stops.
“Operation When the Registered Number
Reaches the Upper Limit” (Page 6-15)

6-4 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Auto Adjustment by the Additional Learning (Learning Mode Only)

Additional Learning from the Running zz

When specifying an image for additional learning
Select the image to perform additional learning, and tap
Image History the [Learn Selected Image] button.

1 Display the [Running Image Hist.] screen.

Select the
image
“Displaying the [Running Image Hist.] screen” (Page Tap
5-18)

2 Select an image for the additional learning.

“Loading and confirming saved images” (Page 5-20)
When the number of images used for
additional learning has exceeded the upper
limit, the [Register From a Running History]
screen appears after operation stops.
“Operation When the Registered Number
Reaches the Upper Limit” (Page 6-15) The confirmation screen for stopping operation
during Run mode will be displayed. Tap the [OK]
button, and stop operation.
zz
When using the image to be learned
Tap the [Image to be Learned] button. The [Additional Learning] screen opens.

zz
When selecting from [Image Detail] screen
Select the screen to confirm the details, and tap the
[Image Detail] button. 6
Select the

Adjusting
image
Tap

Images which have high impact on the learning effects

are displayed automatically.
yyWhen an image to be learned is not found,
finish the additional learning process, or
perform additional learning with another The [Show Selected] screen opens.
method. Confirm the image, and tap the [Learn Image] button.
yyImages from both the running image history
and the learning image history may be
displayed.
Confirm the image, and tap the [OK] button.

The confirmation screen for stopping operation

during Run mode will be displayed. Tap the [OK]
button, and stop operation.
The [Additional Learning] screen opens.
The confirmation screen for stopping operation
during Run mode will be displayed. Tap the [OK]
button, and stop operation.
The [Additional Learning] screen opens.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 6-5

 Auto Adjustment by the Additional Learning (Learning Mode Only)

3 Confirm the condition of the detection windows.

Change the status result as needed, then tap the
[Start Learning] button.

yyWhen multiple detection windows are set,

confirm/change all status results for the
detection windows.
yyImages processed using different settings
from the current program settings are
changed to NG. Check/change the status

6 result.

The confirmation screen opens.

4 Tap the [OK] button.

Adjusting

Learning will be performed.

5 After learning has been completed, tap the [OK]

button.

yyWhen tapping the [Cancel] button while

learning, learning can be canceled.
yyWhen a similar learned image is found, the
[Register From a Running History] screen
opens.
“Confirming the Similar Images and
Additional Learning” (Page 6-15)
yyYou can edit/delete images where
additional learning of the wrong status
result is performed in the [Learned Hist.]
screen.
“Additional Learning from the Learning
Image History” (Page 6-10)

The system returns to the run screen or the [Sensor

Setup Menu] screen.

6-6 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Auto Adjustment by the Additional Learning (Learning Mode Only)

Displaying the [Learned Hist.] screen Displaying from the [Sensor Setup Menu]
The [Learned Hist.] screen is the screen that can confirm/ screen
edit images registered in the OK/NG target learning or
additional learning.
“Learning OK/NG Targets” (Page 4-35)
1 Tap the [Learning/Running Image History] button
on the [Sensor Setup Menu] screen.
“Auto Adjustment by the Additional Learning (Learning
Mode Only)” (Page 6-2)
This section explains how to display the [Learned Hist.]
screen.
yyThe [Learned Hist.] screen can be displayed
when using a program in learning mode.
yyThere are two methods for displaying the
[Learned Hist.] screen.

Displaying from the run screen

1 Display the control panel menu, and tap the [RUN/

Learned Img. History] button. 2 Tap the [Learning Image History] button.

Adjusting
The [Learned Hist.] screen opens.
2 Tap the [Learning Image History] button.

When an image where an error occurs is

The confirmation dialog for the operation stop opens. included in the learning image history, a

3 Tap the [OK] button on the confirmation screen. confirmation dialog opens.
“ (7) Thumbnail images” (Page 6-8)
The [Learned Hist.] screen opens.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 6-7

 Auto Adjustment by the Additional Learning (Learning Mode Only)

(7) Thumbnail images

Confirming Learning Image History Displays the image status, image number, thumbnail
Confirm the learning image history in the program. image.

1 Display the [Learned Hist.] screen. Image status Image number

“Displaying the [Learned Hist.] screen” (Page 6-7)

Thumbnail
(5) images
(1)

Type Description
(2) (6)
The image acquired when [Brightness
Change Function] is [ON].
Images (OK target: 8 images, NG target 8
(3) (3) images) where the brightness is different
are saved.
(4) (7) Images with high learning effect.
Since the influence on judgment is large,
(8) (9) (10) the judgment capacity of the sensor
may change when editing or deleting to
(1) Detail Information perform additional learning.
Displays the detailed information for the selected

6 thumbnail image.
Displays the program number, program name and
image number.
Images which no longer apply to the
learning algorithm because the settings
were changed.
Since changing the settings of the
(2) Image operation button
Adjusting

detection window or position adjustment

zz
[Image Detail] button after image registration remove these
Zooms in on the selected image. images from learning, these images adopt
“Image Detail Screen of the Learning Image History” the status of [Not Reflected].
(Page 6-9) No error occurred. Delete or perform
additional learning as needed.
zz
[Edit] button
Select this when editing the status result (OK/NG) of the An image on which an error has occurred.
selected image to redo learning. yyError in which the judgment is not
“Editing the Status Result of a Detection Window to selected
be Learned” (Page 6-10) Images where the detection window
was added after registration by
zz
[Delete] button additional learning. There is no
Deletes the selected image. judgment information (OK/NG) for the
“Deleting the Learned Images” (Page 6-12) added detection window. Select the
status result for additional learning.
zz
[Clear] button. yyPos. Adj. Error
Delete all learning image histories saved in the There is a detection window protruded
program. out of the view range as the result of the
(3) Operation buttons position adjustment. Additional learning
Selects a thumbnail image. cannot be performed for this image.
Moves to the top page.
(8) [Display OK/NG target image] button
Moves to the previous page. Displays “OK/NG target Image” registered in the
program.
Selects the previous image. “Learning OK/NG Targets” (Page 4-35)
(9) No. of learned images
Moves to the last page. Display the number of learned images and number of
Moves to the next page. not reflected images.
yyThe total number of registered images is up to 88.
Moves to the next image. (including the brightness change function: 16).
yyIf the first OK and NG have been learned,
(4) Page number “+2” is displayed. The first image can not be
Displays the page number of the learning image history. viewed in the [Learned Hist.] screen. Use
(5) Registered status result [Display OK/NG target image] to view the
Displays the registered status result (OK/NG) of the first image.
detection windows of the selected thumbnail image.
(10) [Back] button
(6) [Page] button The system returns to the run screen or the [Sensor
Specifies the learning image history page to which to Setup Menu] screen.
move.

6-8 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Auto Adjustment by the Additional Learning (Learning Mode Only)

Image Detail Screen of the Learning Image Edit screen of the learning image history
History
(1)
(1) (4)
(4)

(5)
(2)
(2) (5)

(6)
(7)
(3) (8)
(6)
(3) (7)
(9) (10) (11)
(8) (9) (10)
(1) Image tool bar
(1) Image tool bar “Operation of the Image Tool Bar” (Page 3-18)
“Operation of the Image Tool Bar” (Page 3-18)
(2) History image
(2) History image Displays the image and detection window for editing.
Displays the learning image history saved in the sensor. The selected detection window is highlighted.

6
The image number is displayed.
(3) Operation buttons
(3) Operation buttons Moves to the previous page.
Moves to the previous page. Moves to the previous history image.

Adjusting
Moves to the previous history image. Moves to the next history image.
Moves to the next history image. Moves to the next page.
Moves to the next page.
(4) Selection button
(4) Selection button Selects the detection window.
Selects the detection window.
(5) Detection window list
(5) Detection window list Displays the list of the detection windows. The status
Displays the list of the detection windows. result (OK/NG) can be edited.
(6) [Edit] button (6) Change Waiting Display
Select this when editing the status result (OK/NG) of the The status result of the detection window has been
detection window. changed. The detection window is waiting for the
“Editing the Status Result of a Detection Window to changed contents to be reflected.
be Learned” (Page 6-10)
(7) [Clear] button.
(7) [Delete] button Returns the status result (OK/NG) edited in the
Deletes the learning image history. detection window list to the state before editing.
“Deleting the Learned Images” (Page 6-12)
(8) [Add to Learning] button
(8) [Display OK/NG target image] button Displayed when the image is not reflected in the
Displays [OK/NG Work Image] registered in the learning process.
program. Tapping the button adds the images in display to the
learning process.
(9) [Save] button
Saves the displayed image to USB memory. (9) [Save] button
Saves the displayed image to USB memory.
(10) [Back] button
Returns to the [Learned Hist.] screen. (10) [Cancel] button
Cancels the edit, and returns to the previous screen.
(11) [Learn Changes] button
Performs additional learning based on the changed
contents.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 6-9

 Auto Adjustment by the Additional Learning (Learning Mode Only)

Additional Learning from the Learning 3 Confirm the status result of the selected
detection window. Change the status result as
Image History
needed.

Editing the Status Result of a Detection

zz
Image reflected in the learning

Window to be Learned
The status result of the images registered as the
OK/NG targets cannot be edited.
Confirm the status result of the selected detection
window. Change the status result as needed.
1 Display the [Learned Hist.] screen.
“Displaying the [Learned Hist.] screen” (Page 6-7)

2 Select an image on which to edit the status Change

result. status result
zz
When selecting in the [Learned Hist.] screen
Select the image on which to edit the status result, and
tap the [Edit] button.
Select the
image

6 Tap
zz
Image not reflected to the learning (no error)
Adjusting

Since after registering this image the settings, such as

the detection window settings, have changed, confirm
the contents of the detection window and the state of
zz
When selecting in the details screen the status result. When the target judgment can be
Select the screen to confirm the details, and tap the performed normally using the image, select the desired
[Image Detail] button. status result and tap the [Add to Learning] button.
If there is a possibility that the image may judge the
target mistakenly, such as the in the case that the
settings of the detection window are not appropriate, do
not add the image to the learning.

Change
status result

Confirm the image, and tap the [Edit] button.

Select the
image

Tap

The image can be selected with the operation

buttons as well.

6-10 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Auto Adjustment by the Additional Learning (Learning Mode Only)

zz
Image not reflected in the learning (with errors) 4 When learning multiple images in a batch,
change the selected image with the operation
buttons, and repeat step 3.

Select image
€
€Error because the judgment is not selected to change
There is a detection window whose status result is not status result
selected.
When judgment of the target can be made normally
using the image, select the status result and tap the [Add
to Learning] button. If there is a possibility for the image
to judge the target mistakenly, do not add to learning.

Select status
result
5 Tap the [Learn Changes] button.

6
€ Adj. Error

Adjusting
€Pos.
As a result of the position adjustment, there is a
detection window that protrudes out of the view range.
Additional learning cannot be performed for this image.
Check the position adjustment, or delete the image in
The confirmation screen opens.
the [Learned Hist.] screen.
6 Tap the [OK] button.
Learning will be performed.

7 After learning has been completed, tap the [OK]

button.
The system returns to the run screen or the [Sensor
Setup Menu] screen.
yyWhen tapping the [Cancel] button while
learning, learning can be canceled.
yyYou can edit/delete images where
additional learning of the wrong status
result is performed in the [Learned Hist.]
For a changed detection window, the change screen.
waiting display (Page 6-9) opens. “Additional Learning from the Learning
Image History” (Page 6-10)

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 6-11

 Auto Adjustment by the Additional Learning (Learning Mode Only)

Deleting the Learned Images 3 Tap the [OK] button.

The image will be deleted.
When deleting images from the learning image Deleting an image cannot be undone.
history, learning will be executed automatically
to adjust the judgment process.
4 Tap the [Back] button.
1 Display the [Learned Hist.] screen.
“Displaying the [Learned Hist.] screen” (Page 6-7)

2 Select an image to be deleted.

zz
When selecting in the [Learned Hist.] screen
Select the image to be deleted, and tap the [Delete]
button.
Select the
image
Tap

Learning is automatically using the remaining images.

5 After learning has been completed, tap the [OK]

6
button.
The system returns to the run screen or the [Sensor
Setup Menu] screen.
Adjusting

zz
When selecting in the details screen
Tap the [Image Detail] button.

Select the image with the operation buttons, and tap the
[Delete] button.
Select the
image

Tap

The confirmation screen opens.

6-12 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Auto Adjustment by the Additional Learning (Learning Mode Only)

Additional Learning from USB Memory 5 If a batch backup file (*.iv2a) is selected, select
the image type to be imported from the following.
yyRunning Image History
1 Connect the USB memory on which the batch yyMaster Image
backup files (*.iv2a) or image capture files (*.iv2p) yyOK/NG Registration Image
are saved to the control panel. yyLearning Image History
“Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a USB
Memory” (Page 8-3)

2 Display the [USB Memory] screen.

“Displaying the USB Memory screen” (Page 8-3)

3 Tap the [Additional Learning from USB Memory]

button.

Select the image to be used for additional learning.

6 Select the image to be used for additional

learning, and tap the [OK] button.
6
Select the

Adjusting
image

4 Select a batch backup file (*.iv2a) or image

capture file (*.iv2p) and tap the [OK] button.

Tap
The confirmation screen for stopping operation during
Run mode will be displayed. Tap the [OK] button, and
stop operation.
When the maximum number of images for
additional learning have been registered, the
[Register From a Running History] screen
appears after operation stops.
“Selecting the File/Folder in the USB Memory” (Page “Operation When the Registered Number
3-22) Reaches the Upper Limit” (Page 6-15)

The [Additional Learning] screen opens.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 6-13

 Auto Adjustment by the Additional Learning (Learning Mode Only)

7 Confirm the condition of the selected status

result. Change the status result as needed, then
tap the [Start Learning] button.

When multiple detection windows are set,

confirm/change all status results of the
detection window.

The confirmation screen opens.

8 Tap the [OK] button.

6 Learning will be performed.

9 After learning has been completed, tap the [OK]

Adjusting

button.

yyWhen tapping the [Cancel] button while

learning, learning can be canceled.
yyWhen a similar learned image is found, the
[Register From a Running History] screen
opens.
“Confirming the Similar Images and
Additional Learning” (Page 6-15)
yyYou can edit/delete images where
additional learning of the wrong status
result is performed in the [Learned Hist.]
screen.
“Additional Learning from the Learning
Image History” (Page 6-10)

10 Tap the [Back] button.

The system returns to the run screen or the [Sensor

Setup Menu] screen.

6-14 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Auto Adjustment by the Additional Learning (Learning Mode Only)

Operation When the Registered Number Confirming the Similar Images and
Reaches the Upper Limit Additional Learning
The number of images that can be registered to the When images which have similar features to images for
additional learning is as follows. additional learning have been registered with different
yyTotal number of additional registration images of OK/NG status results, the [Register from a Running History] screen
target learning and registered images of the additional opens.
learning: 72 images Confirm the status result for each image.

If additional learning is performed once the upper limit of 1 The [Register From Running History] screen
images has been reached, the [Register From a Running opens.
History] screen opens.
Confirm the images recommended to be deleted, and
delete them.

1 The [Register From a Running History] screen

opens.

6
2 Select the registration method.

Adjusting
zz
Continue Learning with Both OK
Performs the additional learning regarding both status
results of [Registered Image] and [Last Registered
Image] as OK.
2 When deleting the displayed images, tap the [OK] zz
Continue Learning with Both NG
button. When not deleting them, tap the [Cancel] Performs the additional learning regarding both status
button. results of [Registered Image] and [Last Registered
yyWhen tapping the [OK] button, the images will be Image] as NG.
deleted, and additional learning can be performed. zz
Continue Learning
yyWhen tapping the [Cancel] button, additional learning Performs the additional learning without changing
will finish. the status results of [Registered Image] and [Last
Registered Image].
When not deleting the images recommended
to be deleted, select images from the
learning image history to delete.
3 Tap [OK].
“Deleting the Learned Images” (Page 6-12)
Learning will be performed.
When performing learning on a similar image
with a different status result, stability of the
judgment process can be decreased.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 6-15

 Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment

Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment

Below is the method for manually adjusting the threshold

while in Test mode.
6 Adjust the threshold by checking the matching
rate.
For learning mode, threshold adjustment is not <Setting example>
needed since the target match is automatically If the matching rate of an “OK” image is higher than
adjusted by learning. Use threshold adjustment 90 and if the matching rate of a “NG” image is lower
if additional learning cannot be made or when than 40, set the threshold to 65, the value intermediate
it is determined to be needed after additional between 40 and 90.
learning.
“ Auto Adjustment by the Additional Learning
(Learning Mode Only)” (Page 6-2)
Match rate
Threshold adjustment can be started using the [Limit
Adjust] button in the [Tool Settings] of the Settings
Navigator as well.
Threshold

1 Display the operation screen.

“Starting an Operation” (Page 5-2)

2 Select the tool to adjust the threshold when

multiple detection windows/tools are set in the yyA target is detected as OK if the matching rate
program. is greater than the threshold, and detected

6
as NG if the matching rate is lower than the
threshold.
yyThe display color of the tool changes
according to the status result of the tool.
Adjusting

“Selecting the Display Method of the

Detection Window/Tool Window” (Page
5-10)
yyThe threshold can be changed by using the
slider or by inputting values.
“ Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20)
yyAfter the threshold is changed, a target
is judged using the new threshold for the
judgment process.

3 Tap the [Limit Adjust] button. 7 After adjustment is completed, tap the [Complete]
button.
Returns to the Test screen.

The confirmation screen opens.

4 Tap the [Yes] button.

The operation stops and turns to “Test Operation”.

5 Image an “OK” or “NG” image to be the reference

of judgment.
If [Trigger Options] is set to [External] or [Internal
Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to [Yes], input the
external trigger.
If an external trigger cannot be input, tap the [Trigger
ON] button to take an image of the target using the
internal trigger.

6-16 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Stabilizing the Judgment

Stabilizing the Judgment

This section explains how to adjust the device when the Stabilizing the judgment process by
judgment is not stable.
To stabilize judgment, it is necessary to take a clear image taking a clear image of the target
of the target and adjust the detection tool such that it Adjust the imaging conditions so that the sensor can take
functions in a stable manner. images with which the detection tools can clearly recognize
yyStabilizing the judgment process by taking a clear image differences between an “OK” and “NG” image.
of the target (Page 6-17)
- Adjust the installation distance to take a large image of Make the target large in the field of view
the target
- Make the image bright enough The judgment stabilizes by taking a large image of the
- Achieve good focus target within the field of view.
- Reduce the image blur
- Reduce the shininess of the glossy or metal surface „„
Adjusting the installed distance (WD)
Install the sensor close to the target.
- Adjust the color tint (for color type only)
Install the sensor at the appropriate distance from the
- Reduce the effect of lighting variation
target upon checking the field of view and the installed
yyStabilizing Learning Mode (Page 6-20)
distance of the sensor.
yyStabilizing by correcting the misaligned target position
“‌ Checking the Field of View and installed distance”
(Page 6-22)
(Page 2-2)
yyStabilizing the position adjustment (Page 6-22)
yyStabilizing the High-Speed Position Adjustment (Page 6-23) ¡: Adequate × : Inadequate
yyStabilizing the Outline tool (Page 6-23)
yyStabilizing the Color Area/Area/Color Average/Brightness
Average/Color Prohibition/Brightness Prohibition Tool
(Page 6-24)
yyStabilizing the EdgePixels tool (Page 6-25)
6
yyStabilizing the Width/Edge/Pitch tool (Page 6-25)

Adjusting
yyStabilizing the Diameter tool (Page 6-26)
yyStabilizing the OCR tool (Page 6-26)
If judgment is adjusted to stabilize the
inspection, the processing time may become
longer, depending on the settings changed.
Adjust the judgment process while balancing
the required processing time.

„„
Using the digital zoom function
The target can be imaged larger using the digital zoom
function.
“Digital Zoom” (Page 4-16)

„„
Using the spread lens attachment
For IV2-G150MA, you can use the spread lens
attachment (OP-87902) to expand the view.
“Using the polarizing filter attachment (OP‑87899/
OP-87900/OP-87901) or spread lens attachment
(OP-87902)” (Page 2-6)

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 6-17

 Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment

Achieving adequate image brightness Achieving good focus

If the image is too dark, the judgment process for an “OK” Adjusting the focus is required to capture a clear image
and “NG” image becomes unstable due to poor contrast. of the target. Focus can be adjusted easily with the Auto
Also, if the image is too bright, the judgment process may Focus Adjustment.
become unstable. Brightness can be adjusted in Auto “Focus Adjustment” (Page 4-12)
Brightness Adjustment.
“Auto Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-12)
„„
If good focus cannot be achieved by the
Auto Focus Adjustment
„„
If the brightness cannot be properly The focusing position may not be adjusted correctly
adjusted in Auto Brightness Adjustment if the image is too dark or too bright. Adjust to an
Finer adjustment of the brightness can be made in applicable brightness with Auto Brightness Adjustment
Advanced Brightness Adjustment. (Page 4-12) and then perform auto focus adjustment.
“Advanced Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-15) If the focus still cannot be properly adjusted, adjust the
focus manually.
“When the focusing position is to be adjusted manually”
(Page 4-13)

6
Adjusting

zz
Adjusting automatically by tapping the target
If you touch on the target screen, the brightness around
the touched position will be adjusted to be optimal
automatically. Adjust the focus position by tapping the [+] or [-] button.
Used when the adjustment results of the [Auto
Brightness Adjustment] button are too bright or dark
due to the influence brightness on the image other than
that of the target.
zz
Imaging Mode
When [HighGain] is selected, the brightness
amplification factor increases and the screen becomes
brighter.
zz
Brightness
Setting a higher value gives a longer exposure time,
resulting in a brighter screen.

„„
If the brightness cannot be properly
adjusted due to uneven brightness
Refer to “Reducing the shininess of a glossy or
metal surface” (Page 6-19).

6-18 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment

Reducing the image blur Reducing the shininess of a glossy or metal

If the image is blurred while imaging a moving target, the surface
image blurring can be corrected by shortening the exposure Glossy and/or metal surfaces may reflect the built-in light
time (shutter time). Adjust the exposure time with the back into the camera. Since mirror reflection has a high-
advanced brightness adjustment. light intensity, the amount of light received will be saturated
“Advanced Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-15) and the surface will shine. This section explains how to
reduce the glare.

„„
Using the Auto Brightness Adjustment
If glare is present on the target, the HDR function is
enabled automatically and glare can be reduced by
using the auto brightness adjustment.
The HDR (High Dynamic Range) function prevents light
saturation in the area with glare by imaging the target
with a wider dynamic range. The HDR function can also
Exposure
be enabled manually.
Time “Auto Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-12)
“Advanced Brightness Adjustment” (Page 4-15)
zz
Imaging Mode
„„
Using the dome attachment
yyBy selecting [HighGain], the brightness gain becomes
Use the dome attachment.

6
higher. The screen becomes brighter so that the
The dome attachment emits even diffused light from the
exposure time can be shortened and the image
entire circumference to the target, so that the contrast
blurring can be reduced. Image noise may increase.
becomes less and the glare on the target’s surface is
yyThe exposure time may be shortened if [HDR] is
reduced.

Adjusting
selected.
This is effective for targets of all shapes.
zz
Brightness “Using the Dome Attachment (IV2‑GD05/IV2‑GD10)
When the value is reduced, the exposure time becomes for IV2 series” (Page 2-4)
shorter, resulting in a less blurry image.
Unmounting a dome attachment or polarizing
filter attachment can increase the brightness Dome attachment
of the image. By unmounting the attachments,
image blurring can be reduced as the exposure
time can be shortened.
Diffusion
light

Target

„„
Using the polarizing filter attachment
Use the polarizing filter attachment. The optical
characteristics of the polarizing filter attachment cut off
the mirror reflection and reduce the glare on the target’s
surface.
“Using the polarizing filter attachment (OP‑87899/
OP-87900/OP-87901) or spread lens attachment
(OP-87902)” (Page 2-6)

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 6-19

 Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment

„„
Installing the sensor at an angle Stabilizing Learning Mode
The built-in lighting will not reflected back into the
camera, so the glare on the target’s surface can be
reduced. Optimizing the Size of the Detection Window
This is effective for flat-surface targets.
To enhance the learning effect, the detection window
When the sensor is When the sensor is should be set to a size where the difference between
installed in front of installed at an angle an “OK” and “NG” image is clear. When the difference
the target from the target between an “OK” and “NG” target in the detection window
is small, judgment may not be stable since the differences
cannot be recognized.
When the misalignment of the position of the target is large,
set a position adjustment window.

„„
Setting according to the image target
difference to be judged
Usage example: Detection of the presence of a part
yyBefore..... Setting a detection window that is much
larger than the target.
yyAfter........ Setting a detection window that fits to the
size of the target.
The mirror reflection of The mirror reflection of
the built-in light reflects the built-in light does not Before improvement After improvement

6
into the camera and reflect into the camera so OK target OK target
causes the surface to no surface glare occurs.
have glare.
Adjusting

Adjusting the color tint (for color type only)

Adjust the white balance if the color tint of the color type
image is different from that of the target.
“White Balance (for color type only)” (Page 7-12) NG target NG target

Reducing the affect of illumination variation

If detection is not stable due to the ambient light from the
surroundings where the sensor is installed, the effect of the
illumination variation can be reduced using the brightness
Detection window Detection window
correction function.
(size of window dilutes (optimization for the
If detection cannot be stabilized with the brightness the difference) target difference)
correction function, use shielding around the sensor to
prevent influence from the ambient light.
“Brightness correction” (Page 4-22)

6-20 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment

„„
Setting by dividing into multiple detection Learning Multiple Images for Stability
windows
Usage example: Detection of the presence of four Target misalignment (shape, surface condition, dirt, setting
targets (less than 3 is NG). position) or changes of ambient light or background may
yyBefore..... Setting one detection window for the four influence the inspection. In these cases, registering to
targets in a batch learn multiple images that are different in capture status will
yyAfter........ Setting four detection windows, one for automatically improve judgment stability.
each target. The methods of registering to learn multiple images are
“Learning OK/NG Targets” and “Additional Learning”.
Before improvement After improvement
“Learning OK/NG Targets” (Page 4-35)
OK target NG target
”Additional Learning” (Page 6-2)
The following indicates examples of images that are
different in capture status. Perform learning to register
multiple images as OK or NG.
zz
Example 1: Registering multiple images with
position misalignment
The capture status (what is seen) changes due to target
misalignment. If it is the case, multiple images with
OK target NG target
different capture statuses are registered.

Adjusting
Detection window x1 Detection window x4 Detection window
(size of window dilutes (optimization for the
the difference) target difference) zz
Example 2: Registering multiple images for
changes of the target
„„
Settings the position adjustment window
Usage example: Detection of the presence of targets Dirt/flaw Deformation Color tint
whose positions are misaligned.
yyBefore..... Setting one large detection window
yyAfter........ Setting the position adjustment window and
detection window optimized for the targets
Before improvement After improvement
OK target NG target
Detection window

zz
Example 3: Registering multiple images for
changes of the background

OK target NG target

Detection window

zz
Example 4: Registering multiple images for
changes of the ambient light
Shininess/shadow/ambient light change
Detection window Detection window

Position adjustment
window
“Stabilizing by correcting for misaligned target position”
(Page 6-22)
“Stabilizing the position adjustment” (Page 6-22)
Detection window
By turning ON [Brightness Change Function] to
perform the OK/NG target learning, the influence
from the ambient light becomes small.
“Registration of Taken Image” (Page 4-38)

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 6-21

 Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment

Stabilizing by correcting for misaligned Stabilizing the position adjustment

target position This section explains how to adjust when the position
If there is variation (misalignment) in the positioning of the adjustment is not stable.
target, the target to be judged may also be removed from “Procedure to Add the Position Adjustment Window”
the tool window and cannot be judged correctly. (Page 4-31)
Detection can be stabilized by using the position adjusting “Position Adjustment tool” (Page 4-84)
function.
“Procedure to Add the Position Adjustment Window” „„
If the target tilts and the position adjustment
(Page 4-31) becomes unstable
Search Range
“Position Adjustment tool” (Page 4-84)
Rotation Range

„„
Tool settings
Master Image

zz
Rotation Range
yyBroaden the rotation range if the tilt of the target

6 Tool window
Position adjustment window
exceeds the rotation range (default value: ± 20°).
“Rotation Range” (Page 4-88)
yyTo stabilize the position adjustment, the tool window will
search with the range ± a few degrees wider than the set
Adjusting

value of the rotation range. (The tool window will search ±

„„
Processing during an operation
a few degrees even if the rotation range is set to 0°.)
Position adjustment process
Set the Margin to [OFF] when you would like to detect
the target according to the set rotation angle of the
target.
“Margin” (Page 4-88)
zz
Search Range
Broaden the search range if the variation in the position of
the target exceeds the region to be searched.
“Search Range Settings” (Page 4-86)

Tool window
„„
If the position adjustment becomes unstable
due to the effect of the unwanted outlines
Position adjustment window
yyThe outline disabling function can disable unwanted
Search range of the tool window outlines.
“Settings for disabling outlines” (Page 4-86)
yySet the extraction sensitivity to [Low].
“Setting the sensitivity” (Page 4-87)
„„
If the outline of the reference target cannot
be detected
yyIf the contrast of the target is low, the outline may not
be extracted. Set the extraction sensitivity to [High].
“Setting the sensitivity” (Page 4-87)
If the process remains unstable even after setting the
extraction sensitivity to [High], it may be necessary to
adjust the exposure condition for the target.
“Stabilizing the judgment process by taking a clear
image of the target” (Page 6-17)
yyFor the color type, the outline extraction may become
stable by using the color filter.
“Color Filters (color type only)” (Page 4-17)
„„
When the window position after position
correction is misaligned and not stable
Set the search algorithm to [High Accuracy] when
the detection is not stable because the position of
the detection window/tool window after the position
adjustment does not match the target position.
“Search Algorithm” (Page 4-34)
“Search Algorithm” (Page 4-89)

6-22 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment

Stabilizing the High-Speed Position Stabilizing the Outline tool

Adjustment This section explains how to adjust the outline tool when
This section explains how to adjust when the High-Speed the judgment for an “OK” and “NG” image is not stable.
Position Adjustment is not stable. “Outline tool” (Page 4-51)
“Hi-Sp.Adj tool” (Page 4-123)
„„
If the outline cannot be detected when the
„„
If the detection becomes unstable due to target goes out of position
the effect of unwanted edges other than the Adjust the search region. Broaden the search area if the
target variation in the position of the target exceeds the area
yyRaise the threshold for edge sensitivity so that to be searched.
unwanted edges are not extracted. “Search Range Settings” (Page 4-53)
“Edge Sensitivity Manual Adjustment” (Page 4-128)
yyChange to an image with no unwanted edges by „„
If the detection becomes unstable due to the
making the target background plain, etc. effect of unwanted outlines other than the
target
yyThe outline disabling function can disable unwanted
„„
If the edge of a target cannot be detected
outlines.
yySet the window size as the same as the size of the
target. “Settings for disabling outlines” (Page 4-53)
If the judgment direction is horizontal (X axis in case yySet the extraction sensitivity to [Low].
of 2-Axis Adjustment), set the height of the tool

6
“Setting the sensitivity” (Page 4-54)
window the same as the height of the target.
yySet the search area so that non-target images
yyDecrease the threshold for edge sensitivity.
If the edge cannot be detected even after decreasing containing unwanted outlines are not searched.
the threshold for edge sensitivity, it may be necessary “Search Range Settings” (Page 4-53)

Adjusting
to adjust the exposure for the target. Adjust the yySet the search algorithm to [High Accuracy].
exposure so that shade on the target does not appear. “Search Algorithm” (Page 6-16)
“Edge Sensitivity Manual Adjustment” (Page 4-128) yyMake an image with no unwanted outlines by making
the target background plain, etc.
If the Edge Emphasis (Filter) of digital zoom
is set to [ON], unnecessary outlines may be
detected.

„„
If the target tilts and the outline cannot be
detected
yyAdjust the rotation range. Broaden the rotation range
if the tilt of the target exceeds the rotation range
(default value: ± 20°).
“Rotation Range” (Page 4-56)
yyTo stabilize the detection, the tool window will search
with the range ± a few degrees wider than the setting
value of the rotation range. (The tool window will
search ± a few degrees even if the rotation range is
set to 0°.)
Set the Margin to [OFF] when you would like to detect
the target according to the set rotation angle of the
target.
“Margin” (Page 4-55)
„„
If the matching rate difference between an
“OK” and “NG” image is small
Adjust the search algorithm.
If there is no difference between the matching rate for
an “OK” and “NG” image, select [MidSens] or [High
Accuracy]. [High Accuracy] improves judgment accuracy
more than [MidSens]. However, the processing time
becomes longer.
“Search Algorithm” (Page 4-56)

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 6-23

 Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment

„„
If the outline of the target cannot be detected Stabilizing the Color Area/Area/Color
yyIf the contrast of the target is low, the outline may not
be extracted. Set the extraction sensitivity to [High].
Average/Brightness Average/Color
“Setting the sensitivity” (Page 4-54) Prohibition/Brightness Prohibition Tool
If the process remains unstable even after setting the
This section explains how to adjust the Color Area/Area/
extraction sensitivity to [High], it may be necessary to
Color Average/Brightness Average/Color Prohibition/
adjust the exposure condition for the target.
Brightness Prohibition tool when the judgment for an “OK”
“Stabilizing the judgment process by taking a clear
and “NG” image is not stable.
image of the target” (Page 6-17)
“Color Area/Area tool” (Page 4-63)
yyFor the color type, the outline extraction may become
“Color/Brightness Average Tool” (Page 4-74)
stable by using the color filter.
“Color Prohibition/Brightness Prohibition Tool” (Page 4-141)
“Color Filters (color type only)” (Page 4-17)

„„
If the color you wish to judge cannot be
extracted
yyTap and extract the color or the brightness to be the
reference for judgment.
yyBy repeatedly tapping the un-extracted color or
brightness, the extraction range can be added.
yyAdjust the extraction range with the extraction range
zoom in/zoom out ([+]/[-] buttons). Tap the [+] button
to expand the color or brightness range currently

6
being extracted. Tap the [-] button to reduce the
range.
yyFor the Color Area/Color Average/ Color Prohibition
tool, isolate the desired color for inspection using
Adjusting

the [Exclude], and then tap the unnecessary color

extracted to exclude it.
“‌ Setting the Color Area/Area tool” (Page 4-65)
“‌ Setting the Color/Brightness Average Tool” (Page 4-75)
“‌ Setting of the Position Adjustment Tool” (Page 4-85)
yySet the [Fixed Reference Area] to [Enable (Large/
Small)].
“‌ Advanced Settings of the Color Area/Area Tool”
(Page 4-71)
yyIf color difference detection does not stabilize when
using the color average tool, adjust [Color ID Sens.]
and [Threshold]. Use the Live screen (capture the
target) for adjustment. The sensitivity threshold can
be adjusted while comparing the difference between
the master color and target color on the Live screen.
“‌ Color Range/Brightness Range” (Page 4-79)

„„
If the area search becomes unstable due to
unwanted colors being extracted
yyFor the Color Area/Color Average/Color Prohibition
tool, select the [Exclude] button, and then tap the
color that was unnecessarily extracted to exclude it.
“‌ Setting the Color Area/Area tool” (Page 4-65)
“‌ Setting the Color/Brightness Average Tool” (Page 4-75)
“‌ Setting of the Position Adjustment Tool” (Page 4-85)
yyAdjust with the mask function. The region in which
unwanted colors are extracted can be disabled.
“Mask” (Page 4-67)
yyFor the color/brightness average tool, adjust the
position and size of the window. Set so that the region
with unwanted colors is not included in the window.
“‌ Setting the Color/Brightness Average Tool” (Page
4-75)

6-24 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment

Stabilizing the EdgePixels tool Stabilizing the Width/Edge/Pitch tool

This section explains how to adjust the EdgePixels tool This section explains how to adjust the Width/Edge/Pitch
when the judgment for an “OK” and “NG” image is not tool when the judgment for an “OK” and “NG” image is not
stable. stable.
“EdgePixels tool” (Page 4-58) “Width tool” (Page 4-90)
“Edge tool” (Page 4-106)
“Pitch tool” (Page 4-114)
„„
If the target edge pixels cannot be extracted
yyIf the contrast of the target is low, the edge pixels may
not be extracted. „„
If detection becomes unstable due to the
Set the edge extraction sensitivity to [High]. effect of unwanted edges other than the
If the process remains unstable even after setting target
the edge extraction sensitivity to [High], it may be yyAdjust with the mask function. Mask the region in
necessary to adjust the exposure for the target. which unwanted edges have been extracted.
“Edge Sensitivity Adjustment” (Page 4-61) “Mask” (Page 4-92)
yyWhen the number of the target’s edge pixels is low, “Mask” (Page 4-108)
capture a bigger target and increase the pixels of the “Mask” (Page 4-116)
edge to be extracted. yyRaise the threshold for the edge sensitivity so that the
unwanted edges are not extracted.
„„
If it becomes unstable due to unwanted edge “Edge Sensitivity Manual Adjustment” (Page 4-95)
pixels being extracted “Edge Sensitivity Manual Adjustment” (Page 4-112)

6
Adjust with the mask function. Mask the region in which “Edge Sensitivity Manual Adjustment” (Page 4-119)
unwanted edge pixels have been extracted. yyChange to an image with no unwanted edges by
“Mask” (Page 4-60) making the target background plain, etc.

Adjusting
„„
If the edge of a target cannot be detected
yyAlign the rotation angle of tool window with the edge
angle.
yyDo not protrude from the tool window the side of the
target that is not in the judgment direction of the tool
window.
If the judgment direction is horizontal, change the
height of the tool window to be shorter than the height
of the target.
yyDecrease the threshold for edge sensitivity.
If the edge cannot be detected even after decreasing
the threshold for the edge sensitivity, it may be
necessary to adjust the exposure for the target. Adjust
the exposure so that shade on the target does not
appear.
“Edge Sensitivity Manual Adjustment” (Page 4-95)
“Edge Sensitivity Manual Adjustment” (Page 4-112)
“Edge Sensitivity Manual Adjustment” (Page 4-119)

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 6-25

 Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment

Stabilizing the Diameter tool Stabilizing the OCR tool

This section explains how to adjust the diameter tool when This section explains how to adjust the OCR tool when the
the judgment for an “OK” and “NG” image is not stable. judgment for an “OK” and “NG” image is not stable.
“Diameter tool” (Page 4-98) “OCR Tool” (Page 4-130)

„„
If the detection becomes unstable due to „„
When the text or date on the object cannot
the effect of unwanted circles other than the be read
target yyIf the text or date on the object are not clear, reading
yyAdjust with the mask function. may fail.
“Mask” (Page 4-100) Adjust the target image capture conditions to clearly
yySet the edge sensitivity to low so that the unwanted display the text or date.
circles will not be detected. “Stabilizing the judgment process by taking a clear
“Diameter Extraction” (Page 4-100) image of the target” (Page 6-17)
yyChoose an image with no unwanted edges by making yySet the OCR algorithm to [High Accuracy].
the target background plain, etc. “OCR Algorithm” (Page 4-139)

„„
If the target circle cannot be detected „„
When unwanted text or date are read
yySet the detection direction for the diameter to detect Adjust with the mask function.
both bright and dark directions. Mask the region that contains the unwanted text or
“Advanced Diameter Extraction” (Page 4-103) date.

6 yySet the edge sensitivity to [High]. “Mask” (Page 4-133)

If the diameter can not be detected even after setting
the edge sensitivity to [High], it may be necessary to
adjust the exposure for the target. Adjust the exposure
„„
When reading dot characters from an IJP (ink
jet printer) is not stable
Adjusting

so that shade on the target does not appear.

“Diameter Extraction” (Page 4-100) zz
Read Dot Printing
When reading dot characters as such from an IJP
(ink jet printer) and the inspection is not stable due to
the influence of misalignment of the dot position, set
[Enable]. Select [Print Type] according to the print to be
read.
“Dot Matrix Print” (Page 4-138)

6-26 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Shortening the Processing Time

Shortening the Processing Time

This section explains how to adjust the device to shorten For the processing time
the processing time.
To shorten the processing time, perform adjustments to The processing time is the period of time from when an
shorten the processing times of the imaging process and external or internal trigger is received until the status result
the detection tools. is finalized.
yyShortening the imaging processing time (Page 6-29) The processing time is displayed on the run screen or the
yyShortening the processing time of each tool (Page 6-30) test screen.
yyShortening the processing time of the Outline tool (Page
6-30)
Processing time/
yyShortening the processing time of the Color Area/Area/ Capture interval
Edge Pixels/Color Average/Brightness Average/Width/
Diameter/Edge/Pitch/Color Prohibition/Brightness
Prohibition tool (Page 6-30)
yyShortening the processing time of the OCR tool (Page
6-31)
yyShortening the processing time of the position adjustment
(Page 6-31)
If the processing time is shortened, the stability
of judgment may decrease. The processing time „„
Flow of the internal process
should therefore be adjusted while maintaining
Trigger input
balance with the stability of the judgment
process.

(Trigger delay)/imaging
Capture
6
process

Adjusting
Image transfer

(Brightness)/
(Position Correction)
Processing
time
Detection window 1 process/
Tool 1 process
Image
process
Detection window 2 process/
Tool 2 process

Detection window n process/

Tool n process

Status output

(SD data transfer)

Methods to shorten the processing time are as follows.

yyShortening the imaging processing time.
yyShortening the processing time of the detection
window/each tool.
yyDo not use position/brightness adjustment.
yyDo not use the position adjustment.
yyDo not use the FTP client function.
yyDo not use the SD data transfer function.
yyDo not use a field network.

Methods to shorten takt time with the same processing

time are as follows.
yyControlling the trigger using the ready output.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 6-27

 Shortening the Processing Time

About the Pre-capture Function zz

Send after BUSY Output OFF
Trigger interval
This unit adopts the internal processing structure with
multiple buffers. Therefore, the next trigger can be input Processing
before the previous trigger input judgment process is time
finished and the status result is output.
As the results, the judgment takt time can be shortened. Trigger input
The processing time and the capture interval can be
confirmed in the run screen.
“Run screen” (Page 5-4) BUSY output
“Trigger Accept Timing” (Page 7-17)
“Controlling timing using BUSY output” (Page 10-2)
“Controlling timing using ready output” (Page 10-3) Status result
output

This control method does not use the pre-capture

function.
Synchronize with the busy output to control the trigger.
The processing time should become almost equal to the
trigger interval (shortest takt time).
zz
Send after READY Output ON

6
Trigger interval

Processing
time
Adjusting

Processing
time

Trigger input

Ready output

Status result
output

This control method uses the pre-capture function.

Synchronize with the ready output to control the trigger.
The ready output turns ON when the trigger can be
received.
The sensor processes in two steps, “Capture and Transfer”
and “Process image and Output”.
The processing time is longer than [Send after BUSY
Output OFF] in some cases, but the trigger interval can
be shortened since the next trigger can be input after
completing “Capture and Transfer”.
The capture interval should become almost equal to the
trigger interval (shortest takt time).
Synchronize status result output timing with strobe
output and import.
yyTo shorten the process time as much as
possible and control the trigger, select [Link
with BUSY Output]. To shorten takt time
and control the trigger, select [Send after
BUSY Output OFF].
yyWhen "Capture processing time >> Image
processing time" or "Capture processing
time << Image processing time", the
shortening effect of the takt time is
reduced.

6-28 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Shortening the Processing Time

Shortening the imaging processing time Selecting the detection mode/tool

yyThe processing time is shorter in [Standard Mode] than in
zz
Imaging Area
[Learning Mode].
The processing time can be shortened by adjusting the
yyThe processing time will be shorter when using Color
imaging area.
Area/Area/Edge Pixel/Width/Diameter/Edge/Pitch tool
Entire imaging area (default value) than when using Outline tool. Select a Color Area/Area/
Reduce the imaging area Edge Pixel/Width/Diameter/Edge/Pitch tool if the target
can be adjusted using the Color Area/Area/Edge Pixel/
Width/Diameter/Edge/Pitch tool.
yyThe processing time will be shorter for the High-Speed
Position Adjustment tool than the normal position
adjustment tool. If the High-Speed Position Adjustment
tool can be used, select the High-Speed Position
Adjustment tool.

Non-imaged area
Reduce the imaging area by setting the imaging area
from Entire (default value) to Partial. The processing
time is shortened by not including the sections in the
non-imaged area. The importing time for the image will

6
be shortened more by narrowing the vertical size of the
image (V).
“Imaging Area (Standard Mode Only)” (Page 4-15)

Adjusting
zz
Exposure Time
The processing time can be shortened by shortening
the exposure time (Page 4-15). A longer exposure time
makes the processing time longer, as it takes longer to
take the image.
Unmounting a dome attachment or
polarizing filter attachment can increase the
brightness of the image. By unmounting the
attachments, image blurring can be reduced
as the exposure time can be shortened.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 6-29

 Shortening the Processing Time

Shortening the processing time of each Shortening the processing time of the Color
tool Area/Area/Edge Pixels/Color Average/
Brightness Average/Width/Diameter/
Shortening the processing time of the Edge/Pitch/Color Prohibition/Brightness
Outline tool Prohibition tool
The processing time can be shortened by adjusting the The processing time can be shortened by adjusting the
settings for the search range, rotation range, and search window shape settings.
algorithm.
Window Shape
Search Range
Rotation Range

zz zz
Window Shape

6
Search Range If the current window shape is [Entire], change and
The time for searching for a target in the field of view reduce the window size by modifying the window shape
can be shortened by reducing the search range and setting to [Rect] or [Circle].
setting the search region from [Entire] (default value) to The processing time can be shortened by reducing the
Adjusting

[Partial]. size of the window.

Make sure that the range of the positions for the target “Setting the Color Area/Area tool” (Page 4-65)
does not exceed the search region. “Setting the EdgePixels tool” (Page 4-59)
“Search Range Settings” (Page 4-53) “Setting the Width tool” (Page 4-91)
zz
Rotation Range “Setting the Diameter tool” (Page 4-99)
The search time for a target that is rotated in relation “Setting the Edge tool” (Page 4-107)
to the master image can be shortened by reducing the “Setting the Pitch tool” (Page 4-115)
rotation range. (default value: ± 20°). “Setting items for the Color Prohibition/Brightness
Make sure that the range of installation angles for the Prohibition Tool” (Page 4-141)
target does not exceed the rotation range.
“Rotation Range” (Page 4-56)
zz
Window orientation
zz
Search Algorithm For the Width/Edge/Pitch tool, do not rotate the tool
Select [High Speed]. This will decrease judgment window (secure the orientation horizontally or vertically)
accuracy, but the processing time will be shorter. to reduce processing time.
“Search Algorithm” (Page 4-56)
zz
Producing an image with less unwanted outlines
The processing time becomes longer for images
with multiple unwanted outlines other than the target
outlines.
yyMake an image with no unwanted outlines by making
the target background plain, etc.
yySet the search area so that non-target images
containing unwanted outlines are not searched.
“Search Range Settings” (Page 4-53)

6-30 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Shortening the Processing Time

Shortening the processing time of the OCR tool Shortening the processing time of the
If you are using the OCR tool, you can shorten the position adjustment
processing time by clearly displaying the object text and When position adjustment is performed, the processing
date. time can be shortened by adjusting the search range
yyMake an image with no unwanted background information settings or rotation range settings.
by making the target background plain, etc.
Search Range
yyAdjust the image capture conditions and clearly display
the text and date. Rotation Range

zz
Search Range
The time for search for a target can be shortened by
reducing the search range and setting the search region
from [Entire] (default value) to [Partial].
Note that when the search region is reduced in size, the
range of target positions that the position adjustment
tool can correct for becomes narrower.
6
“Search Range Settings” (Page 4-86)

Adjusting
zz
Rotation Range
The search time for a target that is rotated in relation
to the master image can be shortened by reducing the
rotation range. (default value: ± 20°).
Note that the range of target angles that the position
adjustment function can correct for becomes narrower
when reducing the rotation range.
“Rotation Range” (Page 4-88)
zz
Search Algorithm
Select [High Speed]. This will decrease the positioning
accuracy, but the processing time will be shorter.
“Search Algorithm” (Page 4-89)
zz
Producing an image with less unwanted outlines
The processing time becomes longer for images
with multiple unwanted outlines other than the target
outlines.
yyMake an image with no unwanted outlines by making
the target background plain, etc.
yySet the search area so that non-target areas
containing unwanted outlines are not searched.
“Search Range Settings” (Page 4-86)
zz
Using High-Speed Position Adjustment tool
Compared with the normal position adjustment tool,
the High-Speed Position Adjustment tool has a faster
processing time.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 6-31

 Shortening the Processing Time

MEMO

6
Adjusting

6-32 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 7 In this section the [Sensor Setup Menu] screen, the [Sensor
Advanced] screen, and the [Panel Settings] screen are
explained.

Various Functions

Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen............................7-2

Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)......................7-3
Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor.....................7-11
Setting Advanced Control Panel Information.......................7-26

Various Functions

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 7-1

 Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen

Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen

This section explains the [Sensor Setup Menu] screen, (5) Trigger type (trigger interval)
which is displayed by tapping the [Setup] button when the Displays the trigger type and interval for the currently
menu display of the control panel is ON. selected program.
(6) Master image
1 Display the menu on the control panel and tap Displays the master image registered to the currently
the [Sensor Setup] button. selected program.
If no master image is registered, [No Master Image] will
be displayed.
(7) Program
Displays the program number of the selected program.
The program can be switched from the drop-down
menu.
“Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)”
(Page 7-3)
(8) [Detail Information] button
By tapping the button, the [Program Details] screen
opens. The master image can be confirmed and the
program name can be edited.
“Displaying the [Program Details] screen” (Page
2 Tap the [OK] button. 7-8)
(9) Mode
Displays the currently selected program mode (Learning
Mode/Standard Mode).
(10) [Change Mode] button
Changes the selected program mode (Learning Mode/

7 Standard Mode).
“Starting the Settings Navigator” (Page 4-4)
(11) [Sensor Setup] button
Various Functions

Start the Settings Navigator.

“4 Settings Navigator” (Page 4-1)
(12) [Sensor Advanced] button
The [Sensor Setup Menu] screen opens. Configures the advanced settings for the sensor.
The displayed items are as follows. “Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor” (Page
7-11)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(13) [Sensor Switch/Disconnect] button
Changes the sensor displayed on the control panel.
“Switching and Terminating the Sensor to be
(7) Connected” (Page 3-14)
(8)
(9)
(14) [Panel Settings] button
(10) Configures the control panel settings.
“Setting Advanced Control Panel Information” (Page
(6)
(11) 7-26)
(12)
(15) [RUN/Learned Img. History] button
Displays the running image and learning image history
(learning mode only).
“Confirming the Images Whose Judgment are NG
(Image History)” (Page 5-18)
(13) (14) (15) (16) (17) “Displaying the [Learned Hist.] screen” (Page 6-7)
(1) Image type (16) [External Media] button
Displays the image type (Master). Displays the settings menu for the USB memory and
(2) Sensor device name SD card.
Displays the sensor device name. “8 External Media” (Page 8-1)
“Device name” (Page 7-19) (17) [RUN] button
(3) Program number and name Starts the sensor in RUN mode.
Displays the number (Page 7-4) and name (Page “Exiting the sensor settings and starting operation”
7-8) of the selected program. (Page 5-2)
(4) Number of learned images (learning mode only)
Displays the number of learned images and images not
applied if a learning mode program is selected.
“Confirming Learning Image History” (Page 6-8)

7-2 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)

Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)

Overview of the program functions Operations that can be performed with

The sensor can save the judgment conditions set in the the program functions
Settings Navigator as program files. Up to 32 programs can yySaves 128 types (128 products) of judgment conditions
be saved in the sensor, representing 32 types of target (32 (programs).
products). “4 Settings Navigator” (Page 4-1)
Additionally, if the transfer program settings for the SD card
(Page 8-13) are set to [Enable], up to 128 programs can yyReads and operates the saved program.
be saved, representing 128 types of targets (128 products). “Using the program functions (changing over)” (Page
By reading the judgment condition which has been saved 7-5)
according to each product, target changeover can be done
easily. yySelects the reading method of the program.
“Program Switching Method” (Page 7-14)
Sensor
yyImports programs from a batch backup file.
No SD card expansion “Importing a program” (Page 7-9)
(32 types)
yyAppends any name, such as the manufactured product
name, to the judgment conditions (programs).
P127: Product ZZ “Editing a program name” (Page 7-8)
•••
yyCopies and uses the judgment conditions (programs) for
P032: Product YY another program number.
“Copying a program” (Page 7-10)
P031: Product XX
yyReturns the judgment conditions (programs) to the status
••• before setting.
“Initializing a program” (Page 7-10)

7
P002: Product C
P001: Product B
P000: Product A

Various Functions
Settings Navigator
yyLearning Mode/Standard
Mode
*1
yyImaging Settings
yyMaster Image
yyLearning Settings/Tool
Settings*2
yyOutput Assignment

SD card expansion
(128 types)
Sensor Advanced
yyI/O Settings
yyDevice Settings
yyUtility

Learned Image History

*1 Includes the focusing position.

*2 Includes the threshold of each tool/detection
window.
The [Transfer Program Settings] function creates 96
setting types (P. 032 to P. 127) on the SD card.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 7-3

 Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen

Preparing the program functions Preparing the SD card

Registers the judgment condition for each product to the To use the program function to changeover between 33
program before running. and 128 types of targets, insert an SD card (CA-SD16G/
CA-SD4G) into this device and set [Transfer Program
Preparation flow Settings] for the SD card to [Enable].

(1) Prepare the SD card 1 Insert the SD card into SD card slot on the
If there will be changeover with between 33 to 128 sensor amplifier.
different types or programs, set [Transfer Program “Inserting/Removing the SD card” (Page 8-10)
Settings] for the SD card to [Enable].
“SD Card Access” (Page 8-13)
This setting is not required if there are 32 or fewer
2 Set [Transfer Program Settings] for the SD card
to [Enable].
changeover types. “SD card programs” (Page 8-12)
(2) Select the program number
Transfer program settings information is created on the
Select a program number to register a judgment
SD card.
condition from P000 to P031.
Select a program number from P000 to P127 if the
transfer program settings for the SD card are enabled. Preparation procedures
(3) Set the judgment conditions in the Settings
Navigator 1 Display the [Sensor Setup Menu] screen.
Set the judgment condition for a product in the Settings “Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen” (Page
Navigator. 7-2)
(4) Select a program switch method
Select the method to switch the program. 2 Select a program number to register the
judgment conditions for a product.

7
yySwitch from an external input line
yyTap the control panel to switch
yySwitch from a field network PLC
The following functions can be used to prepare
Various Functions

programs for changeover.

yyPrograms can be imported from a batch backup Select the
file. program
“Importing a program” (Page 7-9)
yyThe product name can be registered to the
program.
“Editing a program name” (Page 7-8)
yyTo register a similar product, the program can be
copied, and then the settings can be edited.
“Copying a program” (Page 7-10)
yyInitializes and returns the judgment condition The program can also be selected from the
registered in the program to the status before [Detail Information] button (Page 7-2).
setting.
“Initializing a program” (Page 7-10) 3 Set the judgment conditions in the Settings
Navigator.

“4 Settings Navigator” (Page 4-1)

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to register programs for the

number of products that are to be changed over.

7-4 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen

5 If necessary, set the program switching method. Using the program functions (changing
“Program Switching Method” (Page 7-14)
over)

zz
Precautions when [Transfer Program Settings]
for the SD card is set to [Enable]
yyDo not open the SD card slot cover or
remove the SD card while the device is
running. Also do not perform the procedure
to remove the SD card (Page 8-11).
yyIf you perform any of the following
operations, a program switch error will
occur:
- Switching to a program saved on the SD
card while the device is running when an
zz
External Input SD Card is not recognized.
Use this setting to switch programs by inputting signals - When operation stops because the SD
from an external device to the input line of the sensor card is not recognized while running a
program on the SD card.
zz
Panel/PC/Network
- After the power is turned off with a
Use this setting to switch programs by tapping the program in the SD card selected, as the
control panel or by switching from a field network PLC. SD card is not recognized by the sensor
6 If [Program Switching Method] is set to [External during startup.
- Switching to a program on the SD
Input], set [Input Assignment]. card when [SD card Access] is set to
“Input Assignment” (Page 7-14) [Disable].
The bits that are required to be set will differ depending yyResolving a program switch error:
on the number of programs to be registered.
Product numbers to
bit to be assigned to the input
- Stop operation. When the error is
canceled, the settings screen opens.
yyA program switch error in RUN mode can
7
be registered be assigned to an external output line and
line

Various Functions
(Program numbers) output to an external device. It can also be
obtained using a field network PLC.
2 bit0
yyTo back up the sensor settings or copy
3 to 4 bit0/bit1 settings to different sensors, use the batch
backup function (Page 8-4). The settings
5 to 8 bit0/bit1/bit2 cannot be correctly saved by only copying
data on the SD card.
9 to 16 bit0/bit1/bit2/bit3 yyPrecautions when using the transfer
program settings in combination with the
17 to 32 bit0/bit1/bit2/bit3/bit4
function to transfer data to the SD card:
33 to 64 bit0/bit1/bit2/bit3/bit4/bit5 - Export data on the SD card when the
device is not running.
65 to 128 bit0/bit1/bit2/bit3/bit4/bit5/bit6 - After inserting the SD card, the data
transfer function will automatically be
Setting the transfer program settings for the restored when operation starts or the
SD card (Page 8-13) to [Enable] allows 33 or power is turned on.
more programs (maximum of 128) to be set.
zz
How to clear a program switching error
Setup example Clear the error messages by operation of the control
When 7 programs are to be registered, bit0, bit1, panel or PC (IV2-Navigator).
and bit2 are assigned to arbitrary IN terminals. The error will be canceled and the settings screen will
bit3 to bit6 are not assigned. appear. An Error clear input will not clear the Program
Switching error. After a program switching error,
perform the following:
yyWhen using [SD card Access], re-read the SD card
that the correct advanced program is saved on.
yyWhen not using [SD card Access], set the [SD card
Access] to [Disable].

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 7-5

 Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen

When [Program Switching Method] is set to When [Program Switching Method] is set to
[Panel/PC/Networks] [External Input]
zz
To switch programs with the control panel
1 Start RUN mode.
1 Display the [Sensor Setup Menu] screen. “Starting an Operation” (Page 5-2)
“Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen” (Page
7-2)
2 Select the program number to which the product
to be judged is registered using the input lines.
2 Select the program number to which the product yyChange the status of the input lines IN2 to IN8
on which bit0 to bit6 are assigned to in the input
to be judged is registered.
assignment (Page 7-14) to change the program
number. Once the program has been changed, save
the settings. Start RUN mode with the new program
number.
For details, refer to the following.
Select the 
“Assignment of program numbers using bit0 to bit4
program (when [SD Card Access] is set to [Disable])” (Page
7-6)

“Assignment of program numbers using bit0 to bit6
(when [SD Card Access] is set to [Enable])” (Page 7-7)
yyThe ON/OFF state of the input lines corresponding to
the sensor polarity is as follows.
Polarity ON OFF
The program number can also be selected while
NPN The state shorted with 0 V line Open

7
confirming the master image by tapping the
[Detail Information] button (Page 7-8). PNP The state that voltage is applied Open

3 Tap the [RUN] button and the new program will For details of the controlling method and the timing
Various Functions

chart, refer to “Changing Over” (Page 10-9).

start in RUN mode.
zz
Assignment of program numbers using bit0 to bit4
(when [SD Card Access] is set to [Disable])
Program number bit4 (MSB) bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 (LSB)
P000 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
P001 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
P002 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
P003 OFF OFF OFF ON ON
P004 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
P005 OFF OFF ON OFF ON
P006 OFF OFF ON ON OFF
P007 OFF OFF ON ON ON
P008 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
P009 OFF ON OFF OFF ON
zz
To switch a program from a field network P010 OFF ON OFF ON OFF
For details of how to switch programs using a field P011 OFF ON OFF ON ON
network PLC, refer to “IV2 Series User’s Manual (Field P012 OFF ON ON OFF OFF
Network).” P013 OFF ON ON OFF ON
P014 OFF ON ON ON OFF
Program numbers switched from Field Network/ P015 OFF ON ON ON ON
Communication Unit (DL) are deleted when the P016 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
power is turned off.
P017 ON OFF OFF OFF ON
P018 ON OFF OFF ON OFF
P019 ON OFF OFF ON ON
P020 ON OFF ON OFF OFF
P021 ON OFF ON OFF ON
P022 ON OFF ON ON OFF
P023 ON OFF ON ON ON
P024 ON ON OFF OFF OFF
P025 ON ON OFF OFF ON
P026 ON ON OFF ON OFF
P027 ON ON OFF ON ON
P028 ON ON ON OFF OFF
P029 ON ON ON OFF ON
P030 ON ON ON ON OFF
P031 ON ON ON ON ON

7-6 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen

zz
Assignment of program numbers using bit0 to bit6 (when [SD Card Access] is set to [Enable])
Program bit6 bit0 Program bit6 bit0
bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1
number (MSB) (LSB) number (MSB) (LSB)
P000 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF P064 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
P001 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON P065 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
P002 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF P066 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
P003 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON P067 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON
P004 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF P068 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
P005 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON P069 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON
P006 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF P070 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF
P007 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON P071 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON
P008 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF P072 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
P009 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON P073 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON
P010 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF P074 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF
P011 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON P075 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON
P012 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF P076 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF
P013 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON P077 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON
P014 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF P078 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
P015 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON P079 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
P016 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF P080 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
P017 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON P081 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON
P018 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF P082 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF
P019 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON P083 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON
P020 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF P084 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF
P021 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON P085 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
P022 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF P086 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF

7
P023 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON P087 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON ON
P024 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF P088 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF
P025 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON P089 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON
P026 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF P090 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF

Various Functions
P027 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON P091 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON
P028 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF P092 ON OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF
P029 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF ON P093 ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON
P030 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF P094 ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF
P031 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON P095 ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON
P032 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF P096 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
P033 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON P097 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
P034 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF P098 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
P035 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON P099 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON
P036 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF P100 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
P037 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON P101 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON
P038 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF P102 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF
P039 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON ON P103 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON
P040 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF P104 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
P041 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON P105 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON
P042 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF P106 ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
P043 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON P107 ON ON OFF ON OFF ON ON
P044 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF P108 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF
P045 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON P109 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON
P046 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF P110 ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF
P047 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON P111 ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON
P048 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF P112 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
P049 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON P113 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON
P050 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF P114 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF
P051 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON P115 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
P052 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF P116 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF
P053 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON P117 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF ON
P054 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF P118 ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF
P055 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON P119 ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON
P056 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF P120 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF
P057 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF ON P121 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON
P058 OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF P122 ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF
P059 OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON P123 ON ON ON ON OFF ON ON
P060 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF P124 ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF
P061 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON P125 ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON
P062 OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF P126 ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF
P063 OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON P127 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 7-7

 Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen

Displaying the [Program Details] screen Editing a program name

Tap the [Detail Information] button on the [Sensor Setup Edits the program name.
Menu] screen to display the [Program Details] screen.
1 Display the [Program Details] screen.
1 Display the [Sensor Setup Menu] screen. “Displaying the [Program Details] screen” (Page
“Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen” (Page 7-8)
7-2)
2 Select the program on which to change the name
2 Tap the [Detail Information] button. and tap the [Edit] button.
Select the
program

The [Program Details] screen opens. The screen to edit the program name opens.

3 Enter the user-defined program name and tap the

7
[OK] button.
You can enter up to 16 alphanumeric characters.
“Inputting characters” (Page 3-21)
Various Functions

If the display language (Page 7-33) is changed,

the program name might be replaced and
displayed as hyphens (-).

Moves to the previous page.

Selects the previous program.
Selects the next program.
Moves to the next page.

3 Configure the program settings.

“Editing a program name” (Page 7-8)
“Importing a program” (Page 7-9)
“Copying a program” (Page 7-10)
“Initializing a program” (Page 7-10)

4 After setting is completed, tap the [Close] button.

7-8 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen

Importing a program 5 Select the number of the source program and the
number of the destination program, and tap the
Imports one program from an individual program backup [OK] button.
file (*.iv2a) or a batch backup file (*.iv2a). Re-uses the
imported program settings to create a new program.
“Backing up in a batch” (Page 8-4)
“Saving the program individually” (Page 8-5)

1 Connect the USB memory on which the batch

backup file (*.iv2a) or individual program backup
file (*.iv2a) is saved to the control panel.

Programs cannot be imported from the SD

card.

2 Display the [Program Details] screen. The source program is copied to the destination
“Displaying the [Program Details] screen” (Page program.
7-8)

3 Tap the [From a File] button.

Imported
programs

Various Functions
4 Select a batch backup file (*.iv2a) or an individual
backup file (*.iv2a) and tap the [OK] button.

“Selecting the File/Folder in the USB Memory” (Page

3-22)

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 7-9

 Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen

Copying a program Initializing a program

Copies an already complete program to another program Initializes settings in the program and resets the program to
number. Re-uses the set items and creates a new program. the default.

1 Display the [Program Details] screen. 1 Display the [Program Details] screen.
“Displaying the [Program Details] screen” (Page “Displaying the [Program Details] screen” (Page
7-8) 7-8)

2 Select the program to be copied and tap the 2 Select the program to be initialized and tap the
[Copy] button. [Initialize] button.

Select Select the

source program

3 Select the program number to be the copy The confirmation screen opens.
destination and tap the [Go] button.
3 Tap the [OK] button.
7 The system returns to the [Program Details] screen.
The initialized program will display [No Master Image].
Various Functions

Select the
program
number

The source program is copied to the destination.

Copied
program

7-10 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

Sensor advanced settings [I/O Settings] tab

The section explains the [Sensor Advanced] screen
displayed by tapping [Sensor Advanced] on the [Sensor
Setup Menu] screen.

zz
Input Settings
Sets the sensor I/O assignment, program switching
method, and input options.
“Input Settings” (Page 7-14)
zz
Output Settings
Sets the timing for the sensor output and the output
type.
“Output Settings” (Page 7-16)
zz
Trigger Control Settings
Sets the method to control the sensor trigger.

7
“Trigger Control Settings” (Page 7-17)
zz
Polarity
Sets the sensor polarity.
“Polarity” (Page 7-18)

Various Functions
zz
I/O Monitor
Used for confirming the proper operation and wiring of
the I/O lines.
“I/O Monitor” (Page 7-18)

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 7-11

 Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

[Device Settings] tab [Utility] tab

zz
Device Name zz
Data transfer (FTP/SD Card)
Sets the sensor name. Sets the FTP client function settings for the sensor.
“Device name” (Page 7-19) “Saving Judgment Results and Judged Images to an
FTP Server” (Page 9-2)
zz
Security
Sets the sensor security settings. zz
FieldNet/Comm Unit(DL)
“Security” (Page 7-19) Sets the field network settings for the sensor and the
settings for when the system is connected to the DL
zz
Network Settings
series communication unit.
Sets the network settings of the sensor.
“Connecting to a Field Network” (Page 9-13)
“Network Settings (Sensor)” (Page 7-21)
zz
Sensor Date Settings zz
SNTP

7
Sets the automatic time adjustment settings for the
Confirms or changes the date and time set in the
sensor.
sensor.
“Connecting to the SNTP Server to Set the Time”
“Sensor Date Settings” (Page 7-22)
(Page 9-9)
zz
Rotate image 180°
Various Functions

Rotates the control panel display image by 180°.

“Rotate image 180°” (Page 7-23)
zz
Auto Focus Adj Pos
Set to make the focal position for the auto focus
common to all programs.
“Auto Focus Adj Pos” (Page 7-24)
zz
White Balance (for color type only)
Adjusts the white balance for the image displayed on
the control panel.
“White Balance (for color type only)” (Page 7-25)

7-12 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

[Initialize/Update] tab [Sensor Information] button

zz
Sensor Initialization Displays the device information for the sensor and
Initializes the information set in the sensor. amplifier.
“Initializing the sensor” (Page 3-16)
zz
Updating the sensor
Updates the operation software of the sensor.
For details, refer to KEYENCE homepage.
URL : http://www.keyence.com/

Various Functions
The control panel information (Page 7-27) can
be confirmed by tapping the [Panel Information]
button at the lower left of the screen.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 7-13

 Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

Input Settings €
€IN2 to IN8
Sets the roles for input lines IN2 to IN8.
Set the input settings for the sensor. yyOFF (default)
Disregards the input.
1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button on the [Sensor yyProgram bit0 to bit6
Setup Menu] screen. Specifies the number for switching programs.
“Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen” (Page “Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)”
7-2) (Page 7-3)
“Sensor advanced settings” (Page 7-11) yyClear Error
Used to clear error outputs.
2 Tap the [Input Settings] button on the [I/O “Clearing Errors” (Page 10-12)
Settings] tab. yyExt. Master Save
Registers a new master image using the external
input.
“Registering the Master Image” (Page 10-10)
yySD card save stop
Stops data transfer to the SD card and access to
the extended programs. The SD card indicator light
turns off.
“Behavior When the Sensor Power is Turned On
or Off” (Page 10-13)
zz
Program Switching Method
Sets the method for switching the program number.
“ Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)”
(Page 7-3)
3 Set the input settings for the sensor.
7
yyPanel/PC/Network (default)
The program number can be switched from the
control panel, PC (IV2-Navigator), or field network.
yyExternal Input
Various Functions

The program number can be switched by external

input.
If [External Input] is set, one of the program
bits bit0 to bit6 must be assigned to one of
IN2 to IN8 in [Input Assignment].
“Input Assignment” (Page 7-14)

zz
Write ROM when using Ext. Master Save
yyYes
zz
Input Assignment Writes data to the ROM of the sensor when master
€
€IN1 image registration is performed using the external
Sets the detection timing of the trigger input for IN1 input or field network.
input line. “ Registering the Master Image” (Page 10-10)
yyExt. Trigger (Rising) (Default) yyNo (default)
Sets the sensor so that the trigger input is received Does not write to ROM.
with the rising edge of the external trigger.
The target programs that write to ROM are P000
yyExt. Trigger (Falling)
to P031.
Sets the sensor so that the trigger input is received
with the falling edge of the external trigger.

7-14 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

zz
Internal Trigger Control with IN1 Input
yyYes
Imaging and judgment will be performed at the
intervals of the internal trigger while the input to IN1
is ON.
“Setting the Trigger Options” (Page 4-9)
yyNo (default)
Does not control the internal trigger with input to
IN1.
yy[Internal Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is
the common setting for programs. It cannot
be set for each program.
yyIf [Trigger Options] is set to [External
Trigger], IN1 input will be accepted as an
external trigger.
yyThis setting is disabled when
communicating via a field network.

zz
Reset Status Output on Clear Error Execution
yyYes
Resets status output when clear error is input.
Judgment-related outputs and errors will be turned
off until the judgment result by the next trigger input
is output.
yyNo (default)
Does not reset status output when clear error is
input.
Judgment output cannot be reset via the field
7
network.

Various Functions
4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 7-15

 Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

Output Settings 3 Set the Output Settings of the sensor.

Set the Output Settings of the sensor.

1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button on the [Sensor

Setup Menu] screen.
“Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen” (Page
7-2)
“Sensor advanced settings” (Page 7-11)

2 Tap the [Output Settings] button on the [I/O

Settings] tab.

zz
Output Type (OUT1 to OUT8)
Specifies the output format of the output line with [N.O]
or [N.C].
zz
Common Output Settings
The screen to select the output type opens by tapping
the [Settings] button.
“Changing the timing of status outputs” (Page 10-8)
€
€[Latching] (default)
Outputs the result simultaneously with the judgment
condition of the sensor.
€
€[One-Shot]

7 Outputs the result as a one-shot. The one-shot time and

ON delay time for the one-shot output can be set.
“Editing Numbers” (Page 3-20)
Various Functions

yyOne-Shot ON Time
Specifies the length of time for which the one-shot
will be active within 1 to 1000 msec.
(Default value: 100 ms)
yyON-Delay Time
Specifies the delay before the one-shot turns on
within 0 to 5000 msec.
(Default value: 100 ms)
Follow “Trigger Control Settings” (Page 7-11)
to set [Strobe Output One-Shot ON Time].

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

7-16 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

Trigger Control Settings zz

BUSY Output Settings
€
€Until Judgment is Complete (default)
Sets the method to control the sensor trigger.
The BUSY output turns on when the trigger is input and
1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button on the [Sensor turns off when the judgment results are updated.
Setup Menu] screen. Trigger input
“Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen” (Page 7-2)
“Sensor advanced settings” (Page 7-11)

2 Tap the [Trigger Control Settings] button on the [I/ BUSY output

O Settings] tab.
Status result
output

Data transfer
(SD card)

€
€Until Data Transfer is Complete
The BUSY output turns on when the trigger is input
and turns off when data transfer is complete, after the
judgment results are updated. This setting prevents a
trigger input while data is being transferred when using
the function to transfer data to the SD card.

3 Configure the trigger control settings. Trigger input

BUSY output
7

Various Functions
Status result
output

Data transfer
(SD card)

yyThis setting is not valid for data transfer

(FTP). BUSY output does not turn on during
zz
Trigger Accept Timing FTP data transfer.
For details about trigger accept timing, refer to “About yy“Processing time” (Page 5-4) is not
the Pre-capture Function” (Page 6-28). included in the data transfer time.
€
€Send after BUSY Output OFF (default)
When the BUSY output is turned off, triggers can be zz
Strobe Output Settings
accepted. Control can be performed with just trigger €
€One-Shot ON Time
input and BUSY output.
Specifies the amount of time that the strobe output is
Use this setting to shorten the processing time.
active from between 0.5 and 50 msec. (Default value: 1
€
€Send after READY Output ON ms)
When ready output is turned on, triggers can be €
€Strobe Error Output
accepted. The pre-capture function is enabled. Control
yyEnable
is done using the trigger input, the ready output, and the
An error is output when duplicate strobe output
strobe output.
errors occur.
Use this setting when you want to shorten the program
yyDisable (default)
takt time.
The error will not be output.
Follow “Output Settings” (Page 7-11) to set
[One-Shot ON Time] for judgment output.

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 7-17

 Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

Polarity I/O Monitor

Sets the sensor polarity. Use the I/O monitor to confirm the correct function and
correct wiring for the I/O lines
1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button on the [Sensor
Setup Menu] screen. 1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button on the [Sensor
“Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen” (Page Setup Menu] screen.
7-2) “Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen” (Page
“Sensor advanced settings” (Page 7-11) 7-2)
“Sensor advanced settings” (Page 7-11)
2 Tap the [Polarity] button on the [I/O Settings] tab.
2 Tap the [I/O Monitor] button on the [I/O Settings]
tab.

3 Select [NPN] or [PNP] under Polarity.

7 3 Configure the I/O control panel settings.
Various Functions

yyNPN
Output circuit .... NPN open collector
Input circuit ....... No-voltage input zz
Input
yyPNP Displays the input status of external input in real time.
Output circuit .... PNP open collector Whether or not the ON/OFF output from the external
Input circuit ....... Voltage input input is being correctly input can be confirmed.
“ Cables” (Page 2-11)
zz
Output
4 Tap the [OK] button. Tap the [ON] button to turn ON each OUT output. Tap
the [OFF] button to turn them OFF.
The confirmation screen opens.
Confirm that the output destination is correctly receiving
5 Tap the [OK] button. the output.

4 After setting is completed, tap the [Close] button.

7-18 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

Device name Security

The name of the sensor can be defined by the user. Sets a password on the sensor to prevent incorrect
operation.
1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button on the [Sensor Correctly use the password lock of the sensor
Setup Menu] screen.
and the touch screen lock on the control panel
“Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen” (Page (Page 7-34).
7-2)
“Sensor advanced settings” (Page 7-11) yyAfter setting a password, the run screen is locked with a
password.
2 Tap the [Device Name] button on the [Device yyTo disable, input the password when the input dialog for
Settings] tab. the password opens.
yyDuring the password lock, editing sensor settings is
prevented ([Sensor Setup] button/[Trigger] button on the
run screen, threshold adjustment, image history view (if
unable to log in), clearing the image history, Transfer
Program Settings).
yyIf the password lock is temporarily canceled in the control
panel menu (Page 5-3), the lock is canceled until the
system displays the hide menu screen (Page 5-3).

1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button on the [Sensor

Setup Menu] screen.
“Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen” (Page
7-2)
3 Enter any name and tap the [OK] button.
7
“Sensor advanced settings” (Page 7-11)

2 Tap the [Security] button on the [Device Settings]

tab.

Various Functions
Up to 16 alphanumeric characters can be set.
“Inputting characters” (Page 3-21)

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button. 3 Select [Enable] and tap the [Edit] button.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 7-19

 Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

4 Set an user-defined password and tap the [OK]

button.

Up to 8 characters can be set.

Default: None (blank)
“Inputting characters” (Page 3-21)

5 Confirm the password that was set in step 4 and

tap the [OK] button.

7
Various Functions

6 Tap the [OK] button.

The password will be changed and the system returns
to the [Sensor Advanced] screen.

7-20 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

Network Settings (Sensor) 3 Set the network address of the sensor.

Sets the network settings of the sensor.
yyFor details about the network settings for
the control panel, refer to “Panel Network
Settings” (Page 7-32).
yyNetwork settings are not required for direct
connection.
yyHow to use the network setting
yyThe IP address of the sensor connected to
the network can be changed.
yyThe network settings of the sensor can be
initialized.
The settings can also be initialized using the
IP reset switch (Page A-30) of the sensor. zz
MAC Address
yySet the IP address of the sensor before Displays the MAC address of the sensor. The MAC
connecting to a network by connecting the address cannot be changed.
control panel and the sensor directly.
zz
IP Address/Subnet Mask/Default Gateway
Displays the address for each network.
1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button on the [Sensor Tapping the [Edit] button opens the screen to edit the
address.
Setup Menu] screen.
Set the desired address and tap the [OK] button.
“Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen” (Page
7-2) Change the port number from the [IP Address]
“Sensor advanced settings” (Page 7-11) editing screen.

2 Tap the [Network Settings] button on the [Device

7
zz
[Reset] button
Settings] tab. Tapping the [Reset] button resets the IP Address /
Subnet Mask / Default Gateway.
“Empty” will be displayed after the reset.

Various Functions
4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
yyIf connected directly, the system returns to the [Sensor
Advanced] screen.
yyIf connected on the network, terminate the connection
to the sensor and reconnect it. If reconnection is
successful, the [Sensor Setup Menu] screen will be
displayed. If reconnection fails, the [Panel Settings]
screen opens.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 7-21

 Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

Sensor Date Settings

1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button on the [Sensor

Setup Menu] screen.
“Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen” (Page
7-2)
“Sensor advanced settings” (Page 7-11)

2 Tap the [Sensor Date Settings] button on the

[Device Settings] tab.

3 Set the sensor date settings.

7
Various Functions

yy Move to the item to be set with the / buttons

and enter the numbers.
yyTap the [Delete] button to reset the display of the
selected item.

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

7-22 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

Rotate image 180° 1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button on the [Sensor
Setup Menu] screen.
Due to the installation restrictions of the sensor or the
“Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen” (Page
target, the image may be rotated.
7-2)
Using [Rotate image 180°] enables the image to be rotated
“Sensor advanced settings” (Page 7-11)
180°.
2 Tap the [Rotate image 180°] button on the [Device
Settings] tab.

Target 3 Tap the [Rotate 180°] button and tap the [OK]
button.

Various Functions
Before 180° rotation After 180° rotation

If you changed [Image Display Direction], a

message prompting you to re-register the
master image opens.
Re-register the master image after the [OK]
button is tapped.
“2. Master Registration (Registering an
Image as a Reference)” (Page 4-18)

If the quality of the taken image displayed on the 4 Tap the [Back] button.
control panel is poor, adjust the captured image
in the sensor menu. Rotates the image 180° to display it on the control
“4 Settings Navigator” (Page 4-1) panel.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 7-23

 Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

Auto Focus Adj Pos 4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
Sets whether or not to make the focal position for the auto When [Auto Focus Adj Pos] is changed, a
focus common to all programs. message recommending re-registration of
the master image opens.
1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button on the [Sensor Re-register the master image after the [OK]
button is tapped.
Setup Menu] screen. “2. Master Registration (Registering an
“Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen” (Page Image as a Reference)” (Page 4-18)
7-2)
“Sensor advanced settings” (Page 7-11)

2 Tap the [Auto Focus Adj Pos.] button on the

[Device Settings] tab.

7 3 Set [Auto Focus Adj Pos].

Various Functions

zz
Individual
Sets the focus adjustment position in each program.
Select this when the focus position is different for each
target registered in each program. Re-adjusts the
focusing position when the program number is switched.
Switching programs takes longer with this option due to
the time needed to adjust the focusing position.
zz
Common
Sets the focus adjustment position common to all
programs. Select this when the focus position of the
target registered in each program is the same. The
program can be quickly switched because re-adjustment
of the focusing position will not be performed when the
program number is switched.
The life-span for the operation of the
focusing function (program switch count)
is 100,000 times. If the focusing position
does not need to change for each program,
set [Auto Focus Adj Pos] to [Common] to
extend the life-span of the sensor

7-24 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor

White Balance (for color type only) 4 Image a white-colored target and tap the [Go]
button.
Adjusts the white balance (color tint) of the built-in camera
of the sensor. If the captured image displayed on the
control panel is not suitable for adjusting the
The white balance is adjusted by default. white balance, tap the [Image Settings] tab to
adjust the captured image.
1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button on the [Sensor If the white balance setting has been set to
[Enable], the image will be displayed with the
Setup Menu] screen. white balance adjustment applied.
“Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen” (Page The following adjustments can be made.
7-2) yy “Auto Brightness Adjustment” (Page
“Sensor advanced settings” (Page 7-11) 4-12)
yy “Focus Adjustment” (Page 4-12)
2 Tap the [White Balance] button on the [Device yy “Lighting” (Page 4-17)
Settings] tab. yy “Digital Zoom” (Page 4-16)

7
3 Set white balance adjustment to [Enable] and tap When adjustment is completed, the message, “White

Various Functions
the [Settings] button. balance adjustment has been completed.” opens.

5 Tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the White Balance screen.

6 Tap the [OK] button.

After changing the white balance, a message
prompting you to re-register the master
image opens.
Re-register the master image after the [OK]
button is tapped.
“2. Master Registration (Registering an
Image as a Reference)” (Page 4-18)

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 7-25

 Setting Advanced Control Panel Information

Setting Advanced Control Panel Information

Control panel settings [Sensor Connection Settings] tab

This section explains the [Panel Settings] screen that is
displayed by tapping the [Panel Settings] button when the
control panel menu is displayed.

zz
Configuration
Sets the method for connecting with the sensor.
“Connection method” (Page 7-28)
zz
Panel Network Settings
Configures the control panel network settings.
“Panel Network Settings” (Page 7-32)

7
Various Functions

The [Panel Settings] screen can also be

displayed by tapping the [Panel Settings] button
on the [Sensor Setup Menu] screen.

7-26 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Setting Advanced Control Panel Information

[Adv. Panel Settings] tab [Initialize/Update] tab

zz
Display Settings
zz
Initialize Panel
Configures the settings for the screens and buttons Initializes the information set on the control panel.
displayed on the control panel. “Initialization of the Control Panel” (Page 3-17)
“Display Settings” (Page 7-32)
zz
Language
zz
Update Panel
Update the operation software for the control panel.
Select the language to be displayed on the control For details, refer to KEYENCE homepage.
panel. URL : http://www.keyence.com/
“Language” (Page 7-33)
zz
Backlight
zz
IV-M30 Mode
Switch the control panel to IV-M30 mode.
Configures the control panel backlight settings. In IV-M30 mode, the control panel can be connected

7
“Backlight” (Page 7-33) with the IV-series sensors.
zz
Panel Date/Time
Confirms or changes the time set on the control panel. [Panel Information] button
“Panel Date/Time” (Page 7-34)

Various Functions
zz
Touch Screen Lock
Configures settings to prevent the control panel being
incorrectly operated.
“Touch Screen Lock” (Page 7-34)
zz
Touch Panel Calibration
Adjusts the control panel touch position.
“Touch Panel Calibration” (Page 7-35)
zz
Judgment Notation
Sets the notation (OK/NG) of the status results to an
user-defined notation.
“Judgment Notation Settings” (Page 7-36)
Displays the information set on the control panel.

The sensor information (Page 7-13) can be

confirmed by tapping the [Sensor Information]
button at the lower left of the screen.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 7-27

 Setting Advanced Control Panel Information

Connection method 3 Tap the [1 unit] button and tap the [OK] button.
Sets the method to connect to the sensor.
Operation when connecting to an IV series
sensor
yyThe control panel restarts in IV-M30 mode.
yyFor details when connecting an IV-HG/IV-H
series sensor, refer to ”IV-HG/IV-H Series
User’s Manual (Monitor)”.
yyFor details when connecting an IV-G/IV series
sensor, refer to ”IV- G/IV Series User's
Manual (Monitor).”

The confirmation screen opens.

When directly connecting with a sensor (1
unit) 4 Tap the [OK] button.
The control panel restarts.
1 Display the control panel menu and tap the [Panel After the restart, the run screen or the [Sensor Setup
Menu] screen opens.
Settings] button.
“Control panel settings” (Page 7-26) yyIf the control panel cannot connect correctly
to the sensor, refer to ”Remedy when direct
2 Tap the [Direct/Network] button on the [Sensor connection (1 unit) is unavailable” (Page A-17).
Connection Settings] tab. yyFor direct connection, the IP address of the
sensor is automatically set.
yyIf the sensor is directly connected with the

7 control panel when the PROFINET function is

being used, the PROFINET function will stop.
To use the PROFINET function again, restart
the sensor.
Various Functions

yyIf the control panel and sensor have been

connected directly (1 unit), the following
screen will appear.

yyPerform the procedure from step 3 only

if an IP address is displayed (network
connected).

7-28 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Setting Advanced Control Panel Information

When directly connecting with multiple 4 Tap the [OK] button.

The control panel restarts.
sensors (2 units or more)
5 Tap the [Search Sensor] button.
1 Display the control panel menu and tap the [Panel
Settings] button.
“Control panel settings” (Page 7-26)

2 Tap the [Direct/Network] button on the [Sensor

Connection Settings] tab.

The search results will be displayed

6 Select the sensor to be connected and tap the

[Connect] button.

If the control panel and sensor have been

connected directly (2 units), the following

7
screen will appear.

Various Functions
yyBy tapping the [LED Blinking] button, the
indicator light of the selected device operates
as described below. Use this function for
checking the sensor to be used.
yyThe indicator light on the sensor head blinks
alternately (green and red).
yyThe indicator light on the sensor amplifier
3 Tap the [2 units or more] button and tap the [OK] blinks (orange).
button. yyBy tapping the [Device Name Setting] button,
the screen for entering the device name will
open.
“Device name” (Page 7-19)
yyBy tapping the [Search Sensor] button, the
system will search for sensors again.
The run screen or the [Sensor Setup Menu] screen
opens.
yyIf the control panel cannot connect
correctly to the sensor, refer to “Remedy
when direct connection (2 units or more) is
unavailable” (Page A-18).
yyFor direct connection (2 units or more), the
The confirmation screen opens. IP address is automatically set.
yyA sensor using the PROFINET function
cannot be a target of the search function.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 7-29

 Setting Advanced Control Panel Information

When connecting to the sensor via network 4 Tap the [OK] button.
The control panel restarts.
connection After it restarts, the [Sensor Connection Settings]
screen opens.
1 Display the control panel menu and tap the [Panel 5 Specify the sensor to connect to.
Settings] button.
“Control panel settings” (Page 7-26) zz
Searching for and connecting to sensors on the
network
2 Tap the [Direct/Network] button on the [Sensor Tap the [Search Sensor] button.
Connection Settings] tab.

The searched result will be displayed.

If the Control Panel and sensor connect via Select the sensor to be connected using or
the network, the following screen will appear.

7
and tap the [Connect] button.
Various Functions

3 Tap the [Network Connection] button and tap the

[OK] button.

The confirmation screen opens.

In the following cases, select [Network
Connection].
yyTo use the FTP client function
yyTo use the SNTP client function
yySet the protocol to [EtherNet/IP(TM)],
[PROFINET], or [Nonprocedural command].

7-30 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Setting Advanced Control Panel Information

After connecting, the run screen or the [Sensor Setup zz

Specifying the IP address of and connecting to
Menu] screen opens. the sensor
Tap the [Edit] button.
When a sensor without a set IP address is
selected and the [Connect] button is tapped,
the confirmation dialog opens.
The information dialog opens when the
[OK] button is tapped. The screen to set the
sensor network settings opens when the [OK]
button is tapped.
Tap the [Edit] button, set the IP address, the
subnet mask, and the default gateway, and
then tap the [Connect] button.

Enter the IP address of the sensor to be connected and

tap the [Connect] button.

7
yyBOOTP is used for assigning the IP address to
the sensor.
“Settings after initialization” (Page A-30)
yyThe search time is about 10 seconds.
yySearching range and retrievable number of

Various Functions
units are as follows. yyWhen [Ping Test] is tapped after the IP
yySensor with no IP address (default): address is input, you can confirm whether or
A maximum of 8 units can be retrieved not a sensor with the specified IP address
within a range that the BOOTP packet from exists on the network.
the sensor reaches (Page A-30). yySet a port number using the [PORT] button.
yySensor with IP address :
A maximum of 16 units can be retrieved on After connecting, the run screen or the [Sensor Setup
the local network to which the control panel Menu] screen opens.
is connected.
If the control panel cannot connect correctly
to the sensor, refer to “Remedy when
connection via a network is unavailable” (Page
A-20).

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 7-31

 Setting Advanced Control Panel Information

Panel Network Settings Display Settings

Configures the network address settings for the control Sets the display method of the screens or messages to be
panel. displayed on the control panel.

1 Display the control panel menu and tap the [Panel 1 Display the control panel menu and tap the [Panel
Settings] button. Settings] button.
“Control panel settings” (Page 7-26) “Control panel settings” (Page 7-26)

2 Tap the [Settings] button on the [Sensor 2 Tap the [Sensor Connection Settings] button on
Connection Settings] tab. the [Adv. Panel Settings] tab.

3 Configure the network address settings for the 3 Set the individual display item.
control panel.
7
Various Functions

zz
Manual Trigger
Sets to enable/disable the [Trigger] button in the RUN
zz
MAC Address
screen when the Trigger Options are set to [External] or
Display the MAC address for the control panel. The
when the [Internal Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set
MAC address cannot be changed.
to [Yes].
zz
IP Address/Subnet Mask/Default Gateway “Names and Functions of the Operation Screen”
Tapping the [Edit] button opens the screen to edit the (Page 5-4)
address.
The [Trigger] button displayed in the settings
Set the desired address and tap the [OK] button.
screen cannot be set to hidden.
4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button. zz
NG Hold Function
The message, “Control panel will be restarted to apply
the settings.” opens. Set to enable/disable the NG hold function.
“Holding the Image of the Sensor on which NG
5 Tap the [OK] button. Occurred (NG Hold Function)” (Page 5-17)
The control panel restarts. zz
List of NG Sensor Occurrences
After the restart, the run screen opens. Adjust settings for the List of NG Sensor Occurrences.
“Confirming the NG Occurrence Status of the
Sensor Connected (List of NG Sensor Occurrences
Function)” (Page 5-13)
zz
Display at panel Startup
Adjust the settings of whether to display the “List of NG
Sensor Occurrences” ON/OFF when starting up the
control panel.
“ Setting [List of NG Sensor Occurrences]” (Page
5-14)
4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
7-32 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)
 Setting Advanced Control Panel Information

Language Backlight
Select the language to be displayed on the control panel. Configures the control panel backlight.

1 Display the control panel menu and tap the [Panel The monitor exists from dim mode when the touch
panel is operated or when an error occurs
Settings] button.
“Control panel settings” (Page 7-26)
1 Display the control panel menu and tap the [Panel
2 Tap the [Language] button on the [Adv. Panel Settings] button.
Settings] tab. “Control panel settings” (Page 7-26)

2 Tap the [Backlight] button on the [Adv. Panel

Settings] tab.

3 Select the button for the language to be

displayed on the control panel and tap the [OK]

7
button.
3 Configures the control panel backlight settings.

Various Functions
4 Tap the [OK] button. zz
Backlight Brightness
The control panel restarts. Adjusts the brightness of the backlight.
After the restart, the display language will be switched The brightness can be adjusted between level 1 to 7
to the selected language and the RUN screen opens. (default : 5).
About the display of the characters in device zz
Auto OFF Function
names (Page 7-19) and program names (Page Selects the [Enable]/[Disable] for the Auto Off function.
7-8) when changing the display language
yyCharacters which cannot be displayed with the
zz
Time to Dimming
This is available when the [Enable] is selected for the
language after the change are replaced and
displayed as hyphens (-).
Auto Off function. Sets the time until the control panel is
yyIf the device or program name has not been dimmed. After 30 minutes of the monitor being dimmed,
changed after you changed a language, those the monitor screen will turn off.
names can be displayed as they were in the Options: 3 0 sec/1 min (default value)/5 min/10 min/30
previous language once you change back to min
the previous language.
yyIf the device or program name has been
4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
changed after the language change, the name
will remain replaced by hyphens (-) and the
former information will be erased when the
language is changed back to the previous
language.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 7-33

 Setting Advanced Control Panel Information

Panel Date/Time Touch Screen Lock

Sets the time and date on the control panel. Sets the password on the control panel to prevent
misoperation of the touch screen.
yyThis setting is adjusted by default.
yyClosing the menu on the RUN screen (Page 5-3) will
yyThe date and time information are used for saving
files into the USB memory. enable the touch screen lock.
yyTo disable the touch screen lock, tap the [Menu] button
and input the password.
1 Display the control panel menu and tap the [Panel yyWhen the touch screen is locked, operations other than
Settings] button. detection window/tool selection and image capture will be
“Control panel settings” (Page 7-26) locked.

2 Tap the [Time] button on the [Adv. Panel 1 Display the control panel menu and tap the [Panel
Settings] tab. Settings] button.
“Control panel settings” (Page 7-26)

2 Tap the [Sensor Connection Settings] button on

the [Adv. Panel Settings] tab.

7 3 Sets the time and date on the control panel.

Various Functions

3 Select [Enable] and tap the [Edit] button.

yy Move to the item to be set with the / buttons

and enter the numbers.
yyTap the [Delete] button to reset the display of the
selected item.

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button. 4 Set a user-defined password in the password
settings screen.
Up to 8 characters can be set.
Default: None (blank)
“Inputting characters” (Page 3-21)

5 Tap the [OK] button.

The password confirmation dialog opens.

6 Enter the password set in step 4 and tap the [OK]

button.
The system returns to the Touch Screen Lock screen.

7 Tap the [OK] button.

7-34 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Setting Advanced Control Panel Information

To efficiently use [Touch Screen Lock] and Touch Panel Calibration

[Security] (Page 7-19)
yy[Touch Screen Lock] locks the touch Adjusts the position of the screen operated when touched
screen operation of the control panel to on the touch screen.
prevent misoperations of the control panel
This setting is adjusted by default.
and the sensor connected to control panel.
yy[Security] locks the sensor settings. It does
not lock the operations and settings of the
control panel.
1 Display the control panel menu and tap the [Panel
Settings] button.
yyTo lock editing of the sensor settings when
using multiple control panels or the IV2- “Control panel settings” (Page 7-26)
Navigator (IV-H2), use [Security]. This
function cannot protect from misoperations 2 Tap the [Touch Panel Calibration] button on the
by a control panel or IV2-Navigator (IV-H2) [Adv. Panel Settings] tab.
for which [Touch Screen Lock] is not set.
“Security” (Page 7-19)

The confirmation screen opens.

3 Tap the [OK] button. 7

4 Follow the instructions displayed on the control

Various Functions
panel and tap the centers of the cross mark ( )
in order.

After the adjustment for the positions to be tapped

is completed, the message “Touch panel calibration
completed. Touch the screen.” opens.

5 Tap the control panel.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 7-35

 Setting Advanced Control Panel Information

Judgment Notation Settings

Sets the notation (OK/NG) of the total status results on the
run screen to a user-defined notation.

1 Display the control panel menu and tap the [Panel

Settings] button.
“Control panel settings” (Page 7-26)

2 Tap the [Judgment Notation Settings] button on

the [Environmental] tab.

3 Select the [User Settings] button. Tap the [Edit]

button for [PASS notation] and [FAIL notation] to
7 set the desired notation.
Various Functions

zz
Notation selection
€
€OK/NG
[OK] is displayed if the total status result is good and
[NG] if it is bad.
€
€User settings
You can set any desired character string.
(Up to 8 characters)
If User Settings was selected, input character strings for
both good and bad products.
“Inputting characters” (Page 3-21)
4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
You can only change the displayed characters
for the total status results on the RUN screen.
This setting will not be applied to other screens
or output information.

7-36 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 8 This chapter explains how to use and set up external media
(USB memory and SD cards).

External Media

Overview of External Media...................................................8-2

Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a USB Memory...8-3
Setting Up the SD Card........................................................8-10
Transferring Judgment Results or Judged Images to an
SD Card................................................................................8-15

External Media

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 8-1

 Overview of External Media

Overview of External Media

This device can use external media (USB memory and SD cards).
yyUSB memory can be used by inserting it into the control panel.
yyAn SD card can be used by inserting it into the sensor amplifier.
Control panel

USB memory Sensor Amplifier

SD Card

Functions that can use external media

USB memory
What can be performed Function Ref.

All Batch backup 8-4

Saving device settings on USB memory
Individual programs Individual Program Backup 8-5

8 Saving “Running Image History” on USB

memory
All

Individual programs
Batch backup

Individual Program Backup

8-4

8-5
External Media

Importing settings backed up on USB memory (all programs in a batch) to

Transfer Program Settings 8-7
the device

Importing individual programs from setting files backed up on USB

Program Details Function 7-9
memory to the device

Capturing an image of the control panel screen and saving it to external

Screen Capture Function 8-8
media

Capturing images shot by the sensor and saving them to external media Screen Capture Function 8-8

Additional Learning
Additional Learning 6-13
(Learning Mode)
Using images saved on external media to set
up the device Master Registration Master Registration 4-20

Color Extraction Color Area tool 4-65

Sensor Update Sensor 7-13

Updating operating software
Control panel Update Panel 7-27

SD Card
What can be performed Function Ref.

Transferring image data and status results to external media Data transfer (FTP/SD Card) 8-15

Increasing the number of programs to be changed over

Transfer Program Function 8-13
(Expanding the number of programs to 128)

8-2 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a USB Memory

Saving the Sensor Settings and Images to a USB

Memory
Connect the USB memory to the control panel so that the Displaying the USB Memory screen
data backup, settings data transfer, and screen capture can
be performed. This section explains how to display the USB Memory screen.
There are two methods for displaying the USB
Inserting/Removing the USB memory Memory screen.
The items that can be set are the same for the two
methods.
Inserting the USB memory
Displaying from the RUN screen
1 Open the cover of the USB connector on the 1 Display the control panel menu and tap the
control panel.
[External Media] button.
“Control panel” (Page 1-15)

2 Connect the USB memory to the USB connector.

USB memory

Supported formats : FAT (FAT16) / FAT32

Removing the USB memory 2 Select the [USB Memory] tab.

The USB memory can be removed at any
time, except while a progress bar or a dialog

8
indicating that a saving process is in progress is
being displayed.

1 Remove the USB memory from the USB

External Media
connecting connector.

The following buttons and function are enabled

when USB memory is inserted into the control
panel:
yy[Batch Backup] button
yy[Individual Program Backup] button
yy[Transfer Program Settings] button
yyAdditional Learning from Outside Media

Displaying the external media screen from

the [Sensor Setup Menu] screen
1 Tap the [External Media] button on the [Sensor
Setup Menu] screen.

The [External Media] screen opens.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 8-3

 Overview of External Media

Saving the sensor settings or the image zz

Save Destination Folder
Displays the name of the folder to be created on USB
history memory. “Device name_Last 24bit of the MAC address”
is the default name of the folder.
Tapping the [Specify Folder] button also enables the
Backing up in a batch save folder to be changed.
Backs up the data saved in the sensor into the USB “Selecting the File/Folder in the USB Memory” (Page
memory in a batch. 3-22)
When multiple sensors are to be used, the settings can be
copied based on the batch backup data. zz
File Name
Displays the name of the backup file. Tap the [Edit]
The image history of the batch backup data can be
button and the name can be edited to a user-defined
confirmed by the simulation function of IV2‑Navigator.
name.
yyIt is recommended to perform a batch backup “Inputting characters” (Page 3-21)
of the data saved in the sensor in case of zz
Save
malfunction of the product. Selects the backup target.
yySaving time increases when this is performed yyProgram Only
from the RUN screen. It is recommended to
Backs up the sensor settings (the Sensor Setup
perform batch backup from the [Sensor Setup
(Settings Navigator) and Sensor Advanced settings
Menu] screen.
yyIf [Transfer Program Settings] is set to [Enable],
of all programs).
the program data saved on the SD card is also yySettings/Running Image History
backed up. Backs up all the images in the image history as well
as the sensor settings.

1 Connect the USB memory to the USB connector When the image history has been saved
while in RUN mode, the images saved may
on the control panel.
be updated and deleted during batch backup.
“‌ Inserting the USB memory” (Page 8-3) A deleted image is not saved. Because of
this, saving while in the [Sensor Setup Menu]
2 Display the USB memory screen. is recommended.
“Displaying the USB Memory screen” (Page 8-3)

8 3 Tap the [Batch Backup] button. zz

Filter
This setting can be set when [Settings/Running Image
History] is selected.
External Media

[All] or [NG Only] can be selected for the image history

to be saved.
zz
Number of cases saved in the history
This setting can be set when [Settings/Running Image
History] is selected.
[1000], [300] or [100] can be selected for the number of
images to be saved.
zz
File Size
Displays the expected of the backup file and the free
space on the USB memory.

4 Configure the Batch Backup settings. If the file size exceeds 1GB, you can not back
up to USB memory.
Use IV2-Navigator to save the backup file on
the PC.

5 After setting is completed, tap the [Go] button.

6 Confirm the backup result and tap the [OK]
button.
The system returns to the run screen or the [Sensor
Setup Menu] screen.

8-4 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Overview of External Media

Saving the program individually zz

Save
Selects the backup target.
Backs up the setting data saved in the sensor into the USB yyProgram Only
memory for each individual program. Backs up the sensor settings (the Sensor Setup
(Settings Navigator) and Sensor Advanced settings
The time to save increases when this of the selected programs).
is performed from the RUN screen. It is
yySettings/Running Image History
recommended to save the programs from the
Backs up the image history for the selected program
[Sensor Setup Menu] screen.
in addition to the sensor settings.

1 Connect the USB memory to the USB connector When the image history has been saved
while in RUN mode, the images saved may
on the control panel. be updated and deleted during the batch
“‌ Inserting the USB memory” (Page 8-3) backup. A deleted image is not saved.
Because of this, saving while on the [Sensor
2 Display the USB memory screen. Setup Menu] screen is recommended.
“Displaying the USB Memory screen” (Page 8-3)
zz
Filter
3 Tap the [Individ. Program Backup] button. This setting can be set when [Settings/Running Image
History] is selected for [Save].
[All] or [NG Only] can be selected for the image history
to be saved.
zz
Number of cases saved in the history
This setting can be set when [Settings/Running Image
History] is selected.
[1000], [300] or [100] can be selected for the number of
images to be saved.
zz
File Size
Displays the expected size of the backup file and the

8
free space of the USB memory.

4 Configure the individual program backup 5 After setting is completed, tap the [Go] button.
settings.
6 Confirm the backup result and tap the [OK]

External Media
button.

The program number of the sensor setting

data saved using the individual program
backup will be P000.

The system returns to the run screen or the [Sensor

Setup Menu] screen.

zz
Save Destination Folder
Displays the name of the folder to be created on USB
memory. “Device name_Last 24bit of the MAC address”
is the default name of the folder.
Tapping the [Specify Folder] button also enables the
save folder to be changed.
“Selecting the File/Folder in the USB Memory” (Page
3-22)
zz
File Name
Displays the name of the backup file. Tap the [Edit]
button and the name can be edited to a user-defined
name.
“Inputting characters” (Page 3-21)
zz
Select Program
Specifies the program number which is to be individually
backed up.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 8-5

 Overview of External Media

Saving images from the running image Saving images from the learning image
history individually history individually
Saves the image detail screen of the running image history Saves the image detail screen of the learning image history
as a screen capture and saves it to USB memory. as a screen capture and saves it to USB memory.

1 Connect the USB memory to the USB connector 1 Connect the USB memory to the USB connector
on the control panel. on the control panel.
“‌ Inserting the USB memory” (Page 8-3) “‌ Inserting the USB memory” (Page 8-3)

2 Display Image Detail screen of the running image 2 Display Image Detail screen of the learning image
history. history.

“Loading and confirming saved images” (Page 
“Image Detail Screen of the Learning Image
5-20) History” (Page 6-9)

3 Tap the [Save] button. 3 Tap the [Save] button.

The screen capture of the image history is saved to The screen capture of the learning history is saved

8 USB memory and the system returns to the Image

Detail screen of the running image history.
to USB memory and the system returns to the image
detail screen of the learning image history.
External Media

8-6 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Overview of External Media

Transferring the settings backed up in the 5 Select the batch backup file to be transferred
(*.iv2a), and tap the [OK] button.
USB memory to the sensor
Transfers the setting data (batch backup file) saved in the
USB memory to the sensor.
“Backing up in a batch” (Page 8-4)
“Saving the program individually” (Page 8-5)
To transfer one program individually and leave
programs that are in use, refer to ”Importing a
program” (Page 7-9)

yyOperation cannot be cancelled during

transmission of the settings data.
yyIt is recommended to batch back up the data
saved in the sensor beforehand. “Selecting the File/Folder in the USB Memory” (Page 3-22)

“Saving the sensor settings or the image
history” (Page 8-4)
yyThe image data in the image history of the
6 If it is necessary to transfer the I/O polarity (NPN/
PNP) and the network settings, tap the [Option]
batch backup file will not be transferred. button.
yyA settings file of a different model than the
current sensor head cannot be transferred.
yyAn IV2-G30F settings file cannot be transferred
to IV2-G30. However, an IV2-G30 settings file
can be transferred to IV2-G30F.
yyWhen directly connecting the sensor, A setting
file of the sensor with the following functions
enabled cannot be transferred:
yyFTP client
yyTime Sync (SNTP Client)
yyField Network (other than DL)

8
yyWhen the following functions are enabled,
setting data cannot be transferred to the
sensor while the device is running.
yyFTP client function Select [Enable] in [Transfer All Settings] and tap the [OK]

External Media
yyTime Sync (SNTP Client) button.
yyPROFINET or no protocol command

1 Connect the USB memory to the USB connector

on the control panel.
“‌ Inserting the USB memory” (Page 8-3)

2 Display the USB memory screen.

“Displaying the USB Memory screen” (Page 8-3)

3 Tap the [Transfer Program Settings] button.

The setting for [Transfer All Settings] is
reset to [Disable] after the setting data is
transferred or when the setting is canceled.

7 Confirm the information of the settings file to be

transferred and tap the [Go] button.
After the settings data is transferred, the transmission
result will be displayed on the control panel.
When the protocol setting has been changed,
the connection is terminated and the sensor
4 Tap the [OK] button on the confirmation screen. restarts.

8 Confirm the transmission result and tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the [External Media] screen.
When [Transfer All Settings] has been set
to [Enable], the system returns to the [Panel
Settings] screen.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 8-7

 Overview of External Media

Capturing the control panel screen and Capturing the screen

saving it to USB memory
Save the run screen or settings screen of the control panel 1 Enable the screen capture function.
in the USB memory as an image file (BMP). “Enabling the screen capture function” (Page 8-8)
The saved image files can be imported into the PC and
used images for creating reports. 2 Display the screen to be captured and tap the
title area at the upper part of the screen (any part
other than a button) for about one second.
Enabling the screen capture function

1 Connect the USB memory to the USB connector

on the control panel.
“‌ Inserting the USB memory” (Page 8-3)

2 Display the USB memory screen.

“Displaying the USB Memory screen” (Page 8-3)

3 Tap the [Screen Capture Settings] button.

Capture will be executed and the completion message

appears for a few seconds.
yyAny setup screen can be captured by tapping the
title area.
yyWhen the screen that displays the taken image
is captured, three types of files (screen capture
(.bmp), raw image (.bmp), and image capture
(.iv2p) files) are saved at the same time.

8 4 Select the [Enable] and tap the [OK] button.

yyFor details of the saved folder or file name, refer
to “USB memory folder composition and file
naming rules” (Page 8-9).
yyIn some cases, such as when choice items of a
External Media

pulldown menu are being displayed or during file

processing, screens cannot be captured.

The system returns to the [External Media] screen.

8-8 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Overview of External Media

USB memory folder composition and file naming rules

Data type Storage Rule Description Ref.

\(Device name of the sensor)_(Last Batch saves all the settings in the
Storage folder
24bit of the MAC address) sensor.
Batch backup [Program (Controller) or [Prog. 8-4
File name YYYYMMDD_hhmmss*1
(Controller) + Image Hist.] can be
Extension iv2a selected.

\(Device name of the sensor)_(Last

Storage folder Save the settings inside the sensor by
24bit of the MAC address)
Individual program individual program.
8-5
backup File name YYYYMMDD_hhmmss*1 [Program Only] or [Prog.+Image Hist.]
can be selected.
Extension iv2a

\(Device name of the sensor)_(Last

Storage folder
24bit of the MAC address)\IMAGE
Captured .bmp image files and
Screen capture File name YYYYMMDD_hhmmss*1 files designated for IV2 series are 8-8
(with taken images)
bmp simultaneously saved.
Extension
iv2p

yyWhen the sensor is connected

\(Device name of the sensor)_
(Last 24bit of the MAC
Storage folder address)\SCREEN
Saves an image, including the title
yyWhen the sensor is not
Screen capture area and the buttons, of the currently 8-8
connected

8
displayed screen.
¥IV2-CP50

File name YYYYMMDD_hhmmss*1

Extension bmp

External Media
*1 YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Day, hh: Hour, mm: Minute, ss: Second
When saving the batch backup and individual program backup, the file name can be changed to any name and
saved.
yyThe numbers of files to be saved in each folder must be 100 files or less.
If there are more than 100 files in a folder, files may not be saved correctly.
For a folder with a number of files over 100 files, delete unnecessary files or change the folder used.
yyThe total numbers of sub folders and files in each folder (iv2a files or iv2p files) that can be displayed on the
screen to select a file (Page 3-22) is 128.
yyIf characters which cannot be displayed correctly with the current display language (Page 7-33) are included
in the folder or file names, the folders or files will be saved with those characters replaced by hyphens (-).

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 8-9

 Setting Up the SD Card

Setting Up the SD Card

Insert the SD card into the sensor amplifier to configure Inserting/Removing the SD card
various settings such as transferring data and expanding
the number of programs.
yyUsable SD cards : CA-SD16G (16GB) Inserting the SD card
CA-SD4G (4GB)
yySupported formats : FAT32
1 Open the SD card slot cover on the sensor
yyUse the KEYENCE recommended product amplifier.
for the SD card.
yyClose the SD card slot cover while the
device is in use. 2 Insert the SD card into the SD card slot.
yyWhen removing the SD card, always perform yyMake sure the notch on the SD card is
the [Remove SD Card] procedure before facing downwards and insert it until you
removing the card. hear a clicking sound.
yyDo not remove the SD card while it is being yyUnlock the SD card before use.
accessed. Also do not turn off the system
power while the SD card is being accessed.
Otherwise, all or part of the setting data may
SD card indicator
be lost or damage may occur to the memory.
light

When formatting the SD card on the PC, SD card

configure the settings below. If the format is SD Card slot
different, the SD card may not be recognized.
yyFile system: FAT32
yyAllocation unit size: Standard or 8 kB or more

Cover

8 3 Close the cover.

Notch

The SD card indicator light turns on (green).

External Media

After inserting the SD card, make sure to

close the cover. If the cover is left open, the
sensor amplifier cannot recognize the SD
card.

8-10 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Setting Up the SD Card

Removing an SD card
yyAlways perform the [Remove SD Card]
procedure before removing the SD card.
yyIf you do not perform the [Remove SD Card]
procedure and you open the SD card cover,
the device will stop accessing the SD. This
may corrupt data or settings that are being
written to the card. Also, the control panel may
restart.
yyTo re-recognize an SD card after performing
the [Remove SD Card] removal procedure,
remove the SD card from the SD card slot, re-
insert the card, and then close the cover.

1 Display the control panel menu and tap the

[External Media] button.

2 Select the [SD Card] tab and tap the [Remove SD

Card] button.
8

External Media

3 Tap the [OK] button on the confirmation screen.

4 Tap the [OK] button.
5 Check that the SD card indicator light has turned
off and open the cover.

6 Press the SD card inward to release and remove

the card.

When the lock is disengaged, it will make a

clicking sound and the SD card can now be
removed.

7 Close the cover.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 8-11

 Setting Up the SD Card

Displaying the SD card screen zz

Data transfer (FTP/SD Card)
Automatically transfers the image data and status result
This section explains how to display the SD card screen. information saved in the sensor memory to an SD card.
“Transferring Judgment Results or Judged Images
The [SD Card] screen can also be displayed to an SD Card” (Page 8-15)
by tapping the [External Media] button on the
[Sensor Setup Menu] screen. zz
SD card programs
Expands the number of available programs on the
sensor to a maximum of 128.
1 Display the control panel menu and tap the “SD Card Access” (Page 8-13)
[External Media] button.
zz
SD card capacity
Displays the amount of memory available on the SD
card.

2 Select the [SD Card] tab.

zz
SD card removal
Enables the SD card to be removed.
“Removing an SD card” (Page 8-11)
zz
SD card format

8 Formats the SD card.

“SD card format” (Page 8-14)
zz
Slot cover open/close detection
External Media

Use this button if the SD card slot cover breaks.

“Slot cover open/close detection” (Page 8-14)

The following buttons are enabled when the SD

card is inserted:
yy[Transfer Program Settings] button
yy[SD card programs] button
yy[SD card removal] button
yy[SD card format] button

A message appears on the lower left of the

screen if the sensor amplifier could not
recognize the SD card.
Tap the [Reading] button to recognize the SD
card.

8-12 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Setting Up the SD Card

SD Card Access 5 Tap the [OK] button.

1 Display the [SD Card] screen.
“Displaying the SD card screen” (Page 8-12)

2 Tap the [SD card programs] button.

The transfer program settings are enabled and up to

128 programs can be set.

3 Tap the [Create a setting file] button.

yyIf the expansion file is found on the SD

8
card, [SD Card Access] is automatically
enabled.
yyTo set [SD Card Access] to [Disable],
remove the SD card or tap the [Delete a

External Media
setting file] button.
4 Tap the [Yes] button on the confirmation screen. yyExpansion files created with a different
Once transfer program settings file is created, the file sensor model cannot be recognized.
information screen opens. yyExpansion files created on the IV2-G30 can
be recognized on the IV2-G30F. Expansion
files created on the IV2-G30F cannot be
recognized on the IV2-G30.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 8-13

 Setting Up the SD Card

SD card format Slot cover open/close detection

If the SD card slot cover or open/close detection switch
If “SD Card Access” (Page 8-13) is set to breaks, the device the SD card is used on will no longer
[Enable] and you perform the [SD card format] run.
procedure, the transfer program settings will be
[Slot cover open/close detection] is a function that enables
disabled.
the device to temporarily run by temporarily disabling
cover open/close detection (a protective function that stops
1 Display the [SD Card] screen. access to the SD card). Handle the SD card with care.
“Displaying the SD card screen” (Page 8-12) In most situations, use the device with this

2 Tap the [SD card format] button. function set to [Enable] (default).
Re-enable the function once the device has been
repaired.

1 Display the [SD Card] screen.

“Displaying the SD card screen” (Page 8-12)

2 Tap the [Slot cover open/close detection] button.

3 Tap the [OK] button.

8
3 To disable the function that detects that the SD
External Media

card slot cover is open or closed, tap the [Disable]

button.

4 Once formatting is complete, tap the [OK] button.

The SD card will be formatted with the following
settings:
yyFile system: FAT32
yyAllocation unit size: 32 kB

zz
Enable (default)
Detects whether the SD card slot cover is open or
closed.
If the cover is open, the device will stop accessing the
SD card.
zz
Disable
Does not detect whether the SD card slot cover is open
or closed.
Even if the cover is open, the device can access the SD
card.

4 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

8-14 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Transferring Judgment Results or Judged Images to an SD Card

Transferring Judgment Results or Judged Images

to an SD Card
Overview of the SD card data transfer 5 Configure the SD card data transfer settings.
“Setting the transfer conditions” (Page 8-16)
function
“Setting the transfer destination folder and file names”
Automatically transfers the image data and status result (Page 8-17)
information saved in the sensor memory to an SD card.
6 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
7 Start run mode.
Once the target is judged, the specified data file is
automatically transferred to the SD card.
yyWhen the transfer condition is set to [All],
adjust the processing time so that all the
images can be transferred.
SD Card yySetting the BUSY output timing (Page
7-17) to [Until Data Transfer is Complete]
and controlling the trigger with the BUSY
“Setting Up the SD Card” (Page 8-10) output prevents data from being lost while
being transferred.
yyWhen the transfer could not be done on
time, data is saved in the internal buffer.
Setting up the SD card data transfer The internal buffer can save up to 50
images.
function yyImage data is transferred in the sequence
that the images have been saved to the
1 Insert the SD card into the sensor amplifier. internal buffer.
yyWhen the remaining capacity of the
“Inserting the SD card” (Page 8-10) internal buffer is insufficient, the image
data transfer fails. The transfer fails can
2 Display the [SD Card] screen. be output using an SD card transfer error
“Displaying the SD card screen” (Page 8-12) (Page 8-16).

8
yyWhen the transfer condition is set to [All],
3 Tap the [Data transfer (FTP/SD Card)] button. confirm that there is sufficient storage on
the SD card.

4 Tap the [SD Card] button for [Transfer External Media

Destination].

yyYou can select [FTP] or [SD Card] as the

transfer destination.
You cannot transfer data to both at the
same time.
yyWhen you change the transfer destination
from [SD Card], the [Index Upper Limit] and
[Create Subfolder] settings are initialized.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 8-15

 Transferring Judgment Results or Judged Images to an SD Card

Setting the transfer conditions zz

File Format
Selects the file saving format for image data.
(IV2P, IV2P/BMP, JPEG, IV2P/JPEG)
1 Tap the [Settings] button in the “Transfer €
€IV2P
Condition”.
Transfers the image data as the format which can
be opened by IV2-Navigator. Operation results can
be confirmed in the simulator function by using the
transferred image data.
Moreover, the image data can be converted to BMP by
using the IV2P-Converter.
€
€BMP
Transfers the image data as the format which can be
opened by other applications.
€
€JPEG
Transfers the image data as the format which can be
opened by other applications.
The Transfer Condition screen opens. The file size of these images is smaller than a BMP
image. Additionally, the transfer time is also shorter.
2 Set the file transfer conditions. However, the image quality will slightly decrease.
zz
Transfer Judgment Results
To transfer judgment results in a text file simultaneously
with the image data, select [ON].
Judgement results are transferred as a tab delimited
text.
The example for displaying the saved results file
with Microsoft Excel is as follows.

8
External Media

zz
Transfer Condition
Selects the transfer condition of image data.
€
€NG zz
SD card transfer error
Transfers all the images whose total status results are To turn ON the error output and SD card error output
NG. function for when an SD card transfer error occurs,
select [ON].
€
€All
Transfers all the images that are judged. The behavior when file transfer fails is as
follows:
€
€NG & near threshold OK yyAn error message opens.
The following images will be transferred: - SD card access error
yyThe learning mode images whose matching rates of - SD card transfer error (Transfer failure)
the detection window is close to the threshold, among - SD card transfer error (insufficient data
images where the judgment results are OK buffer)
yyThe images whose status results are NG yyThe error output and SD card error output
function turns ON.
If saving the OK images whose matching rates - SD card access error output is always
are close to the threshold, you can search an enabled.
image where the target you wish to judge as NG - To output an SD card transfer error
is judged mistakenly as OK. (Transfer failure/insufficient data buffer),
set this setting to [ON].
yyTo import SD card errors individually, use
SD card error output.
yyThe sensor indicator light blinks (red).
yyIf an error occurs while the device is
running, the error condition will continue
until the error is cleared.
“Clearing Errors” (Page 10-12)

8-16 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Transferring Judgment Results or Judged Images to an SD Card

zz
OK/NG Criteria Info Addition
Setting the transfer destination folder and
Tap the [ON] button to add the tool window (frame),
total status results (OK/NG), and capture date file names
information to the image data to be transferred to an SD
card. zz
Details of the transfer destination folder
The setting can be made only when BMP or JPEG are Root folder ......................(1)
set as the file format.
Folder ................ (2)
Example of the image to be transferred
YYYYMMDD (YYMMDD folder) .......... (3)

Pnnn (program number folder) ....(4)

IVmmmmm (subfolder) ....(5)

0000
0001 .............. (6)
Total Status OK Total Status NG 0002

yyIf the imaging area is set to ‘Width: 64 pixel IVmmmmm (subfolder) ....(5)
or less” or “Height: 48 pixel or less”, OK/
NG will not be displayed on the image to be 0000
transferred. While if the imaging area is set 0001 .............. (6)
to “Width: 320 pixel or less” or “Height: 240
pixel or less”, the OK/NG display will become
smaller.
yyIf the imaging area is set to “Width: 320 pixel (1) Root folder
or less” or “Height: 240 pixel or less”, the This is the root folder for the SD card.
capture date information will not be displayed If [Folder] is not set and [Create Subfolder] is set to
on the image to be transferred. [Subfolder only], files will be transferred to the root
yyThe judgment notation settings (Page 7-36) folder.
are not applied. (2) Folder

8
A folder specified in [File Name] (Page 8-16) will be
3 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button. created.
If [Create Subfolder] is set to [Subfolder only], files will
The system returns to the main screen of Data transfer
(FTP/SD Card). be transferred to this folder. If no folder has been set, a

External Media
folder will not be created.
(3) YYMMDD folder
If [Create Subfolder] is set to [Date], [Program/Date], or
[Date/Program], a YYMMDD folder is created and files
can be sorted.
(4) Program number folder
If [Create Subfolder] is set to [Program], [Program/
Date], or [Date/Program], a program number folder is
created and files can be sorted.
nnn: 000 to 127
(5) Subfolder
If [Create Subfolder] is set to a value other than
[Subfolder only], this folder will be created.
Files will be transferred to sequentially numbered
folders (6) created directly under this folder.
mmmmm is a sequential number created every time the
sensor is restarted or the SD card settings are changed.
Default value: IV00001
(6) Sequentially numbered folder
If [Create Subfolder] is set to a value other than
[Subfolder only], this folder will be created. The
sequential numbers are “0000” to “9999”.
When the number of transferred files reaches the index
upper limit (Page 8-16), a new folder with the next
sequential number will be created.
yyYou can create any YYMMDD folder and
program number folder. You can also select any
hierarchical order.
yyYou cannot transfer files to program number
folders.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 8-17

 Transferring Judgment Results or Judged Images to an SD Card

zz
Details of the file name
Settings
File name that is created Extension
Fixed file name File name Index Upper Limit

Not set Other than 0

bbbbb_ccc_dd_YYYYMMDD_hhmmss
(Blank) 0
Disabled
Other than 0
Set aaaa_bbbbb_ccc_dd_YYYYMMDD_hhmmss bmp
0 jpeg
Other than 0 bbbbb iv2p
Not set txt
(Blank) 0 bbbbb (00000 fixed)
Enabled
Other than 0 aaaa_bbbbb
Set
0 aaaa

€
€Explanation of file names €
€Extension
yyaaaa..................Set file name (Page 8-16). If this yybmp...................Image file (no compression)
setting is blank, a name will not be yyjpeg...................Image file (compressed)
appended. yyiv2p...................File format especially for the IV2
yybbbbb................The sequential number every time a Series
file is transferred. This number has a yytxt......................A text file with the status result
fixed 5 digits when zero suppression
is not used. The default value is
00000. If the index upper limit (Page
8-16) is reached, the number will
return to “00000”.

8
yyccc.....................The program number. This number
has a fixed 3 digits when zero
suppression is not used.
yydd......................The total status result (OK or NG).
External Media

yyYYYYMMDD.....The date (year, month, and day) the

file is transferred.
yyhhmmss............The time (hour, minutes, and
seconds) the file is transferred.

yyThe conditions to overwrite files with the same name in the same folder every time a file is transferred are as
follows:
yyIndex Upper Limit: 0
yyFixed File Name: ON
yyCreate Subfolder: Subfolder only
yyThe settings to save only the most recent desired number of files (e.g., 100) are as follows:
yyIndex Upper Limit: 99
yyFixed File Name: ON
yyCreate Subfolder: Subfolder only

8-18 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Transferring Judgment Results or Judged Images to an SD Card

1 Tap the [Settings] button in the “Transfer zz

Folder
Specifies the transfer destination folder of the SD card.
Destination Folder”.
(Default: Not set (blank))
Up to 16 characters can be set for the desired folder
name.
“Inputting characters” (Page 3-21)
yyInput is not necessary if the image data is to be
transferred to the root folder.
yyTo specify a subfolder, break the name with “/” (slash).
yyIf the specified folder does not exist, a new folder will
be created.
When the [Edit] button is tapped, the “Folder” screen
opens.
Set a user-defined folder name and tap the [OK] button.

The Transfer Destination Folder screen opens. yy“/” (slash), “.” (point) and “ “ (space)
cannot be used as the first nor last letter of
2 Specify the transfer destination folder and file the folder name.
yy“/” (slash) cannot be used multiple times in a
name on the SD card.
row.

zz
File Name
Sets the file name of the transfer files.
(Default: Not set (blank))
Tap the [Edit] button to change the file name to any
desired name up to 16 characters in length.
“Inputting characters” (Page 3-21)

yyIf there is a file with the same name at

the transfer destination, that file will be

8
overwritten. When you transfer image data
from multiple IV2 series devices, specify
different transfer destinations so that the
image data is not overwritten accidentally.

External Media
yyIf the transfer destination folder is read
only or is open, the image data transfer will
fail.

zz
Index Upper Limit
Sets the upper limit of the number of image data that
can be transferred to the transfer destination folder to a
number between 0 and 3999.
(Default value: 499)
When the file index quantity has reached the index
upper limit, the following occurs.
yyWhen the [Create Subfolder] is set to any setting other
than [No Sorting with Folders], the folder of the next
sequence number is created in the same subfolder
(4-digit number). The file index value returns to [0].
yyWhen the [Create Subfolder] is set to [No Sorting
with Folders], the file index quantity returns to “0”.
If there is a file with the same name, that file will be
overwritten.
When you change the transfer destination to
FTP, the settings are initialized.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 8-19

 Transferring Judgment Results or Judged Images to an SD Card

zz
Fixed File Name
The file name of the image data to be transferred can
be fixed.
If [Enable] is selected, the program number, total status
results, date, and time will not be appended to the file
name.
zz
Create Subfolder
Select this setting to create a subfolder and sort files.
€ Sorting with Folders
€No
A subfolder, program number folder, and YYMMDD
folder will not be created.
This can be selected when [Fixed File Name]
is [Enable].

€
€Subfolder only (default value)
Only a subfolder will be created.
A program number folder and YYMMDD folder will not
be created.
€
€Program
A program number folder/subfolder will be created.
€
€Date
A YYMMDD folder/subfolder will be created.
€
€Program/Date
A program number folder/YYMMDD folder/subfolder will
be created.
€
€Date/Program

8 A YYMMDD folder/program number folder/subfolder will

be created.
yyThe default of subfolders is “IV00001”.
External Media

yyThe upper limit is “IV99999”. When the

upper limit has been reached, the count
continues by returning to “IV00000”.
yyThe subfolder name cannot be initialized.
yyThe upper limit of the count number of
folders in the subfolder is “9999”. When the
number is over the upper limit, the transfer
stops.

3 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen of Data transfer
(FTP/SD Card).

8-20 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 9 This chapter explains the procedures to connect this device to
a network.

Connecting to
a Network

Saving Judgment Results and Judged Images to an FTP

Server.....................................................................................9-2
Connecting to the SNTP Server to Set the Time....................9-9
Connecting to a Field Network.............................................9-13
Web Monitor.........................................................................9-15

Connecting to a Network

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 9-1

 Saving Judgment Results and Judged Images to an FTP Server

Saving Judgment Results and Judged Images to

an FTP Server
Overview of the FTP data transfer 4 Tap the [FTP] button for [Transfer Destination].
function
Automatically transfers the image data and status result
information saved in the sensor memory to an FTP server.
LAN
Data transfer via FTP

yyYou can select [FTP] or [SD Card] as the

FTP server
transfer destination.
FTP client You cannot transfer data to both at the
same time.
yyWhen you change the transfer destination
from [SD Card], the [Index Upper Limit] and
Required environment [Create Subfolder] settings are initialized.

zz
Hardware
5 Configure the FTP data transfer settings.
FTP Server
(A PC/NAS/PLC or the like that runs FTP server “Setting the connection destination” (Page 9-3)
software) “Setting the transfer conditions” (Page 9-3)
“Setting the transfer destination folder and file names”
(Page 9-5)
“Testing data transfer via FTP” (Page 9-8)
Setting up the FTP data transfer function 6 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
The system returns to the [Sensor Advanced] screen.
1 Configure the network settings for the sensor.
7 Start run mode.
Set the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway

9
Once the target is judged, the specified data file is
for the sensor.
automatically transferred to the FTP server.
Use [Network Connection] for the control panel and
sensor connections. yyWhen the transfer condition is set to [All],
“Network Settings (Sensor)” (Page 7-21) adjust the processing time so that all the
Connecting to a Network

“When connecting to the sensor via network images can be transferred.

connection” (Page 7-30) yyWhen the transfer could not be done on
time, the data is saved in the internal
2 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button on the [Sensor buffer. The internal buffer can save up to
Setup Menu] screen. 50 images.
“Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen” (Page yyImage data is transferred in the sequence
7-2) that the images have been saved to the
“Sensor advanced settings” (Page 7-11) internal buffer.
yyWhen the remaining capacity of the internal
3 Tap the [Data transfer (FTP/SD Card)] button on buffer is insufficient, the image data
transfer fails.
the [Utility] tab.
yyWhen the transfer condition is set to [All],
confirm that there is sufficient storage on
the FTP server.

9-2 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Saving Judgment Results and Judged Images to an FTP Server

Setting the connection destination Setting the transfer conditions

You only need to configure these settings if the
transfer destination is set to [FTP]. 1 Tap the [Settings] button for “Transfer
Condition”.

1 Tap the [Settings] button in the “FTP

Destination”.

The Transfer Condition screen opens.

2 Set the file transfer conditions.

2 Set the network address of the FTP server.

9
zz
Transfer Condition
Selects the transfer condition of image data.
zz
IP Address
€
€NG
Displays the IP address of the FTP server.
Transfers all images whose total status results are NG.

Connecting to a Network
Tap the [Edit] button to set the desired address.
yySet the port number on the IP address edit €
€All
screen. Transfers all images that are judged.
yyDefault port number : 21 €
€NG & near threshold OK
The following images will be transferred:
zz
User Name
yyThe learning mode images where the matching rates
Input the user name for logging in to the FTP server.
of the detection window is close to the threshold,
(Default: Not set (blank))
among the images where the judgment results are OK
Tap the [Edit] button to set the desired user name.
yyThe images whose status results are NG
“Inputting characters” (Page 3-21)
If saving OK images where the matching rates
zz
Password
are close to the threshold, the images that
Input the password for logging in to the FTP server.
should be judged as NG which have been
(Default: Not set (blank)) mistakenly judged as OK can be searched.
Tap the [Edit] button to set the desired password.
“Inputting characters” (Page 3-21)
zz
Passive Mode
To use the passive mode, select [Enable].

3 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen of [Data transfer
(FTP/SD)].

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 9-3

 Saving Judgment Results and Judged Images to an FTP Server

zz
File Format zz
OK/NG Criteria Info Addition
Selects the file saving format for the image data. Tap the [ON] button to add the tool window (frame), total
(IV2P, IV2P/BMP, JPEG, IV2P/JPEG) status results (OK/NG), and capture date information to
the image data to be transferred to the FTP server.
€
€IV2P
The setting can be made only when BMP or JPEG are
Transfers the image data as the format which can set as the file format.
be opened by IV2-Navigator. Operation results can Example of the image to be transferred
be confirmed in the simulator function by using the
transferred image data.
Moreover, the image data can be converted to BMP by
using the IV2P-Converter.
€
€BMP
Transfers the image data as the format which can be
opened by other applications.
Total Status OK Total Status NG
€
€JPEG
Transfers the image data as the format which can be yyIf the imaging area is set to “Width: 64 pixel
opened by other applications. or less” or “Height: 48 pixel or less”, OK/
The file size of these images is smaller than a BMP NG will not be displayed on the image to be
image. Additionally, the transfer time is also shorter. transferred. While if the imaging area is set
However, the image quality will slightly decrease. to “Width: 320 pixel or less” or “Height: 240
pixel or less”, the OK/NG display will become
zz
Transfer Judgment Results smaller.
To transfer judgment results in a text file simultaneously yyIf the imaging area is set to “Width: 320 pixel
with the image data, select [ON]. or less” or “Height: 240 pixel or less”, the
Judgement results are transferred as a tab delimited capture date information will not be displayed
text. on the image to be transferred.
yyThe judgment notation settings (Page 7-36)
The example for displaying the saved results file
are not applied.
with Microsoft Excel is as follows.

3 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the main screen of Data transfer
(FTP/SD Card).

9 zz
FTP Error
To turn ON the error output function for when a file
Connecting to a Network

transfer failed, select [ON].

When this item is set to [ON], the following
occurs if a file transfer fails.
yyThe following error messages are displayed
in response to the causes of failure.
- FTP Connection Error
- FTP Transfer Error (Transfer Failed)
- FTP Transfer Error (Insufficient Data
Buffer)
“Remedy when data transfer via FTP is
unavailable” (Page A-29)
yyThe error output function turns ON.
yyThe indicator light of the sensor blinks in
red.
yyIf “FTP Transfer Error” has occurred while
the sensor is running, the error condition
will continue until the error is cleared.
“Clearing Errors” (Page 10-12)

9-4 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Saving Judgment Results and Judged Images to an FTP Server

Setting the transfer destination folder and

file names
zz
Details of the transfer destination folder
Root folder ......................(1) (1) Root folder
This is the root folder for the FTP server.
Folder ................ (2) If [Folder] is not set and [Create Subfolder] is set to [No
YYYYMMDD (YYMMDD folder) .......... (3) Sorting with Folders], files will be transferred to the root
folder.
Pnnn (program number folder) ....(4)

IVmmmmm (subfolder) ....(5) (2) Folder

A folder specified in [Folder] (Page 9-7) will be
0000 created.
0001 .............. (6) If [Create Subfolder] is set to [No Sorting with Folders],
files will be transferred to this folder. If no folder has
0002 been set, a folder will not be created.
IVmmmmm (subfolder) ....(5)
(3) YYMMDD folder
0000 If [Create Subfolder] is set to [Date], [Program/Date], or
0001 .............. (6) [Date/Program], a YYMMDD folder is created and files
can be sorted.

(4) Program number folder

If [Create Subfolder] is set to [Program], [Program/
Date], or [Date/Program], a program number folder is
created and files can be sorted.
nnn: 000 to 127

(5) Subfolder
If [Create Subfolder] is set to a value other than [No
Sorting with Folders], this folder will be created.
Files will be transferred to sequentially numbered
folders (6) created directly under this folder.
mmmmm is a sequential number created every time the
sensor is restarted or the FTP settings are changed.
Default value: IV00001
9

Connecting to a Network
(6) Sequentially numbered folder
If [Create Subfolder] is set to a value other than [No
Sorting with Folders], this folder will be created. The
sequential numbers are “0000” to “9999”.
When the number of transferred files reaches the index
upper limit (Page 9-9), a new folder with the next
sequential number will be created.
yy“/” (slash), “.” (point) and “ “ (space) cannot
be used as the first nor last letter of the folder
name.
yy“/” (slash) cannot be used multiple times in a row.

yyYou can create any YYMMDD folder and

program number folder. You can also select any
hierarchical order.
yyYou cannot transfer files to program number
folders.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 9-5

 Saving Judgment Results and Judged Images to an FTP Server

zz
Details of the file name
Settings
File name that is created Extension
Fixed file name File name Index Upper Limit

Not set Other than 0

bbbbb_ccc_dd_YYYYMMDD_hhmmss
(Blank) 0
Disabled
Other than 0
Set aaaa_bbbbb_ccc_dd_YYYYMMDD_hhmmss bmp
0 jpeg
Other than 0 bbbbb iv2p
Not set txt
(Blank) 0 bbbbb (00000 fixed)
Enabled
Other than 0 aaaa_bbbbb
Set
0 aaaa

€
€Explanation of file names €
€Extension
yyaaaa..................Set file name (Page 9-9). If this yybmp...................Image file (no compression)
setting is blank, a name will not be yyjpeg...................Image file (compressed)
appended. yyiv2p...................File format especially for the IV2
yybbbbb................The sequential number every time Series
a file is transferred. The number yytxt......................A text file with the status result
will use a fixed 5 digits when zero
suppression is not used. The default
value is 00000. If the index upper limit
(Page 9-9) is reached, the number
will return to “00000”.
yyccc.....................The program number. The number
will use a fixed 3 digits when zero
suppression is not used.
yydd......................The total status result (OK or NG).

9 yyYYYYMMDD.....The date (year, month, and day) the

file is transferred.
yyhhmmss............The time (hour, minutes, and
seconds) the file is transferred.
Connecting to a Network

yyThe settings to overwrite files with the same name in the same folder every time a file is transferred are as
follows:
yyIndex Upper Limit: 0
yyFixed File Name: ON
yyCreate Subfolder: No Sorting with Folders
yyThe settings to save only the most recent desired number of files (e.g., 100) are as follows:
yyIndex Upper Limit: 99
yyFixed File Name: ON
yyCreate Subfolder: No Sorting with Folders

9-6 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Saving Judgment Results and Judged Images to an FTP Server

1 Tap the [Settings] button in the “Transfer zz

Folder
Specify the transfer destination folder of the FTP server.
Destination Folder”.
(Default: Not set (blank))
Up to 128 characters can be set for the desired folder
name.
“Inputting characters” (Page 3-21)
yyInput is not necessary if the image data is to be
transferred to the root folder.
yyTo specify a subfolder, break the folder name with “/”
(slash).
yyIf the specified folder does not exist, a new folder will
be created.
When the [Edit] button is tapped, the “Folder” screen
opens.
Set a user-defined folder name and tap the [OK] button.
The Transfer Destination Folder screen opens.
yy“/” (slash), “.” (point) and “ “ (space)
2 Specify the transfer destination folder and file cannot be used as the first nor last letter of
name on the FTP server. the folder name.
yy“/” (slash) cannot be used multiple times in a
row.

zz
File Name
Sets the file name of the transfer files.
(Default: Not set (blank))
Tap the [Edit] button to change the file name to any
desired name up to 64 characters in length.
“Inputting characters” (Page 3-21)

yyIf there is a file with the same name at

the transfer destination, that file will be
overwritten. When you transfer image data
from multiple IV2 series devices, specify
different transfer destinations so that the

9
image data is not overwritten accidentally.
yyIf the transfer destination folder is read
only or is open, the image data transfer will
fail.

Connecting to a Network
zz
Index Upper Limit
Sets the upper limit of the number of image data that
can be transferred to the transfer destination folder to a
number between 0 and 65535.
(Default value: 499)
When the file index quantity has reached the index
upper limit, the following occurs.
yyWhen [Create Subfolder] is set to any setting other
than [No Sorting with Folders], a folder of the next
sequence number is created in the same subfolder
(4-digit number). The file index value returns to [0].
yyWhen [Create Subfolder] is set to [No Sorting with
Folders], the file index quantity returns to “0”. If
there is a file with the same name, that file will be
overwritten.
zz
Fixed File Name
The file name of the image data to be transferred can
be fixed.
If [ON] is selected, the program number, total status
results, date, and time will not be appended to the file
name.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 9-7

 Saving Judgment Results and Judged Images to an FTP Server

zz
Create Subfolder
Testing data transfer via FTP
Select this setting to create a subfolder and sort files.
€ Sorting with Folders
€No
A subfolder, program number folder, and YYMMDD
1 Tap the [Settings] button in the “FTP
Destination”.
folder will not be created.
€
€Subfolder only (default value)
Only a subfolder will be created.
A program number folder and YYMMDD folder will not
be created.
€
€Program
A program number folder/subfolder will be created.
€
€Date
A YYMMDD folder/subfolder will be created.
€
€Program/Date
A program number folder/YYMMDD folder/subfolder will
be created.
2 Tap the [Connection Test] button to test the
€
€Date/Program connection with the connection destination.
A YYMMDD folder/program number folder/subfolder will
be created.
yyThe default for subfolders is “IV00001”.
yyThe upper limit is “IV99999”. When the
upper limit has been reached, the count
continues by returning to “IV00000”.
yyThe subfolder name cannot be initialized.
yyThe upper limit of the count number of
folders in the subfolder is “9999”. When
the number exceeds the upper limit, the
transfer stops.

3 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button. The connection test is performed and the result window

9 The system returns to the main screen of the FTP

Settings.
opens.
Connecting to a Network

yyIf “Successfully connected.” is displayed, setting is

completed.
yyThe folder “IV2_Series_FTP_Test” is created in the
folder specified for [Folder] on the FTP server and the
file “IV2_Series_FTP_Test.txt” is transferred.
When the test is executed, the connection with
the FTP server, the ability to create folders at
the transfer destination, and the ability to create
data files are tested.

If data is not transferred properly with the

FTP client, refer to “Remedy when data
transfer via FTP is unavailable” (Page A-29).

9-8 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Connecting to the SNTP Server to Set the Time

Connecting to the SNTP Server to Set the Time

Overview of the SNTP time Configuring the SNTP time sync settings
synchronization function
You can access the SNTP server on the network to 1 Configure the network settings for the sensor.
automatically adjust the time on the internal sensor Set the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway
amplifier clock. This eliminates the need to regularly check for the sensor.
the time. Use [Network Connection] for the control panel and
sensor connections.
yyAutomatic adjustment for Daylight Saving “Network Settings (Sensor)” (Page 7-21)
Time (DST) is not supported. “When connecting to the sensor via network
yyAdjustment of the internal control panel clock connection” (Page 7-30)
is not supported.
2 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button on the [Sensor
LAN Setup Menu] screen.
Synchronizing
with an SNTP “Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen” (Page
server to set the 7-2)
time “Sensor advanced settings” (Page 7-11)

3 Tap the [SNTP] button on the [Utility] tab.

SNTP server
SNTP client

Required environment
zz
Hardware
An SNTP server (a PC that runs SNTP server software)
or an SNTP device
4 Tap the [Enable] button for [Time Sync (SNTP
Client)].
9

Connecting to a Network

5 Configure the SNTP time synchronize settings.

“Sync Destination (SNTP server) Settings” (Page 9-10)
“Sync settings” (Page 9-11)
“Time zone Settings (Time offset)” (Page 9-12)

6 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

The system returns to the [Sensor Advanced] screen.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 9-9

 Connecting to the SNTP Server to Set the Time

Sync Destination (SNTP server) Settings 3 Tap the [Connection Test] button to test the
connection with the connection destination.

1 Tap the [Settings] button for [Sync Destination

(SNTP server) Settings].

The connection test is performed and the result window

opens.
If “Successfully connected.” is displayed, setting is
completed.
2 Configure the sync destination (SNTP server)
settings. 4 Tap the [OK] button.
The system returns to the [Sync Destination (SNTP
zz
To specify the sync destination with an IP
Server) Settings] screen.
address
5 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

9 yyMethod to Specify the Destination

Select [IP Address].
Connecting to a Network

yyIP Address
Tap the [Edit] button to set the IP address and port
number for the sync destination (SNTP server).
zz
To specify the sync destination with a host name

yyMethod to Specify the Destination

Select [Host Name].
yyHost Name
Tap the [Edit] button to set the host name for the
sync destination (SNTP server).
yyDNS server
Tap the [Edit] button to set the IP address for the
DNS server.

9-10 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Connecting to the SNTP Server to Set the Time

Sync settings zz
Sync Error Output
To output an error when time synchronization fails, tap
[Enable].
1 Tap the [Settings] button for [Sync settings].

When this setting is set to [Enable], the

2 Configure the sync cycle settings. following occurs if time synchronization
fails:
zz
To specify a cycle yyAn error message opens.
yyThe error output function turns ON.
yyThe error output can be turned OFF by the
clear error input.

yySync Timing Specification Method

9
Select [Specify Cycle].
yySync Cycle (unit: minutes)
Tap the [Edit] button to specify the sync cycle in
minutes. You can set the cycle in the range of 1 to

Connecting to a Network
1440 minutes.
(Default value: 60 minutes)
zz
To specify a time

yySync Timing Specification Method

Select the number of times to sync per day from
[Specify Time (Once)] or [Specify Time (Twice)].
yySync Time 1/ Sync Time 2
Tap the [Edit] button to specify the sync time
(hour:minutes).

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 9-11

 Connecting to the SNTP Server to Set the Time

Time zone Settings (Time offset)

Correctly set the time zone settings (time offset)
according to the region the device is used in.

1 Tap the [Settings] button for [Time zone

settings].

2 Set the time difference of the sync destination

from the standard time (GMT/UTC).

9
yyGMT: Greenwich Mean Time
Connecting to a Network

yyUTC: Coordinated Universal Time

yyTo support daylight saving time (DST), set the
time offset taking DST into account.
yyTime difference of major cities.
Chicago -6:00 Jakarta +7:00

Mexico City -6:00 Hanoi +7:00

Toronto -5:00 Bangkok +7:00

São Paulo -3:00 Shanghai +8:00

London 0:00 Hong Kong +8:00

Frankfurt +1:00 Singapore +8:00

Bruxelles +1:00 Manila +8:00

Paris +1:00 Kuala Lumpur +8:00

Milan +1:00 Taipei +8:00

Chennai +6:30 Seoul +9:00

Tokyo +9:00

yyFactory default: 0:00

3 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.

9-12 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Connecting to a Field Network

Connecting to a Field Network

Field network 1 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button on the [Sensor

Setup Menu] screen.
Communicates with a PLC via a field network and
“Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen” (Page
the status result, etc., can be input to the PLC as
7-2)
communication data.
“Sensor advanced settings” (Page 7-11)
You can select the following communications protocol:
yyEtherNet/IP™
yyPROFINET
2 Tap the [FieldNet/Comm. Unit (DL)] button on the
[Utility] tab.
yyTCP/IP no protocol communications
yyCommunication unit (DL)
Host device (PLC etc.)

3 Select the protocol.

Other connection devices

Sensor Amplifier

Communication unit (DL)

yyTo use the network communication function

of the sensor amplifier, select [Network
Connection] for the connection setting of the
sensor. [Direct Connection] cannot be used.
9
yyTo use the network communication function of

Connecting to a Network
the communication unit (DL), select [Network
Connection] or [Direct Connection] for the
connection setting of the sensor.
yyWhen the protocol setting has been changed,
connection is terminated and the sensor
restarts.
yyFor details of the field network function,
refer to “IV2 Series User’s Manual (Field
Network)”.
yyFor details of the communication unit (DL)
function, refer to the DL Series User’s Manual.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 9-13

 Connecting to a Field Network

4 Configure the communications settings. zz

Communication unit (DL)
The settings differ according to the selected protocol. €
€Byte swap
You can change the order characters read by the OCR
tool are stored in PLC data memory. Set the order
according to the PLC specifications.
yyDisable: Last > First (default)
yyEnable: First > Last
€
€Comm.Unit (DL) Valid Tools (DL)
Select the maximum number of tools available when
using the communication unit (DL).
yy7 tools (default)
Select this setting to communicate with the detection
window/tool 01 to 06 and position adjustment tool.
yy14 tool
zz
EtherNet/IP(TM) or PROFINET Select this setting to communicate with the detection
€
€Handshake Control window/tool 01 to 13 and position adjustment tool.
yyDisable (default) The number of detection window/tool that
Select if the trigger interval is greater than the send can communicate with the DL series is 13 or
cycle (RPI). less.
A status result can be obtained in real time. In most
situations, select [Disable].
yyEnable 5 When setting is completed, tap the [OK] button.
Select if the trigger interval is less than the send The sensor restarts and the run screen opens.
cycle (RPI) and the trigger count is 10 or less.
If the status result is not be picked up due to the
trigger interval being faster than the send cycle, the
status result can be saved up to ten times in the
buffer.
€
€Byte swap
You can change the order characters read by the OCR
tool are stored in PLC data memory. Set the order
according to the PLC specifications.

9 yyDisable: Last > First (default)

yyEnable: First > Last
zz
Nonprocedural command
Connecting to a Network

€
€Port
Default value: 8500
Set the port number for the TCP/IP no protocol
communications function on the device. In most
circumstances, you do not have to change the settings.
The port number assigned to IV2-CP50/IV2-Navigator
(default: 63000) cannot be used.

9-14 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Web Monitor

Web Monitor

Overview of the Web monitor function Connection method

Use a Web browser (Google Chrome or a similar browser)
on a device such as a computer connected to the network 1 Configure the network settings for the sensor.
to check the image capture and operation history of the Set the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway
sensor. for the sensor.
Use [Network Connection] for the control panel and
Operations cannot be performed and settings
sensor connections.
cannot be changed.
“Network Settings (Sensor)” (Page 7-21)
“When connecting to the sensor via network
Access with Web browser connection” (Page 7-30)

Smartphone 2 Start the Web browser.

Tablet
3 Input “http://(IP_address_set_for_sensor_
amplifier)/iv2-wm.html” into the address bar.
If the IP address for the sensor amplifier is
Wireless LAN 192.168.10.10:
access point http://192.168.10.10/iv2-wm.html
If connection is successful, the [IV2 Web Monitor]
screen appears.

LAN

Sensor amplifier

Required environment
9

Connecting to a Network
yyGoogle Chrome 61 or later
Supported Web yyInternet Explorer 11 or later
browsers yyMicrosoft Edge 44 or later
yySafari 11 or later
Max. no. of
simultaneous 5 unit
connections

Languages English

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 9-15

 Web Monitor

Monitoring screen (1) Monitor

Displays the operation information.
Select a screen to monitor information from the sensor.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

zz
Running Information
Displays the program number, trigger type, and
processing time.
zz
Image
Displays the image and the window frame. The
yyFor details of the displayed information, see processing screen cannot be displayed. Select the
“Names and Functions of the Operation Screen” image to zoom in.
(Page 5-4). An image cannot be displayed during setup (No Image).
yyTo reset statistical information, use the IV2-CP50
or IV2-Navigator.
yyResponsive Web design is supported. The screen
changes in accordance with the displayed device.
Select the screen to be displayed on the menu
button.
Menu
button

9
Connecting to a Network

zz
Summary
Displays the number of triggers, judgment count for
OK and NG, number of trigger errors, number of strobe
errors, and OK judgment ratio.
zz
Status result
Displays the total status result and detection window/
tool status result.

9-16 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Web Monitor

(2) Histogram (3) History

Check the status results for the detection window/tool. Check the operation result history.
Use the [UpdateView] button to refresh the display.
yyFor details of the displayed information, see
“Displaying the Operation Information” Automatic update will not be performed
(Page 5-6). regardless of the update frequency setting.
yyTo reset statistical information, use the IV2- Use the [UpdateView] button to refresh the
CP50 or IV2-Navigator. display.

zz
Tool
Selects the detection window/tool to be checked.
zz
Summary
Displays the judgment count for OK and NG. zz
Recent History
Displays up to 10 latest status result histories.
zz
Statistics
The image can be checked with the [Img] button ( ).
Displays the information for the matching rate.
zz
Histogram
Displays the histogram of the selected detection
window/tool.

Connecting to a Network
zz
Recent NG
Displays up to 10 histories of the latest status results
that were NG.
The image can be checked with the [Img] button ( ).

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 9-17

 Web Monitor

(4) info
Displays the information set in the sensor.

(5) Update frequency

Sets the frequency to refresh the displayed information.

Automatically updates the information once a

second.

Automatically updates the information once

every five seconds.

Stops updates. Use the browser refresh

button to update information.

(6) Communication timeout

Displayed when a communication timeout occurs.

Check the connection with the sensor amplifier.

9
Connecting to a Network

9-18 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 10 This chapter explains how the input / output terminal controls
each operation.

Controlling with
the Input/Output Line

Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers......................10-2

Importing the Status Output.................................................10-6
Changing Over.....................................................................10-9
Registering the Master Image............................................10-10
Clearing Errors...................................................................10-12
Behavior When the Sensor Power is Turned On or Off......10-13
Input Response Time.........................................................10-15

10

Controlling with Input/Output Line

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 10-1

 Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers

Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers

For details about triggers, refer to “Setting the Trigger Options” (Page 4-9).

External triggers
When the [Trigger Options] is set to [External], imaging and judgment are performed when inputting the external trigger
input.
There are two ways to control the timing of the external trigger and status output: Using the BUSY output or using the
ready and strobe outputs.

Controlling timing using BUSY output

This control method synchronizes timing with the BUSY output and outputs captured images and the status output.
Select [Send after BUSY Output OFF] for “Trigger Accept Timing” (Page 7-17).
Trigger 1 Trigger 2 Trigger 3 Trigger 4

Min
100 µs Min 1.2 ms
ON
External trigger input (1) (5)
OFF

Processing time
ON
BUSY output (2)
OFF
Max 2 ms

Captured image/image (3)

processing (internal)

Trigger delay
Min 0.3 ms
Total status output
Status output of each tool ON
Previous result Result from Trigger 1 Result from Trigger 2 Result from Trigger 4
Position adjustment output
OFF
Output of each logic (4)
Max 2 ms
ON
Trigger error output
OFF

(1) Position the target and input external trigger. The shortest input time for the input to be recognized as ON is 100 us. The shortest
possible interval between trigger inputs (where input is OFF) is 1.2ms.
(2) BUSY output turns ON. Processing time differs depending on the settings.

10
(3) After the trigger delay time (Page 4-9) elapses, the target is imaged and the judgment process is performed.
(4) After the judgment process is completed, the status output is updated and the BUSY output is turned OFF. “BUSY Output Settings”
(Page 7-17) If [Until Data Transfer is Complete] is set “BUSY output timing”, the BUSY output is turned OFF after data is transferred
to the SD card. Confirms that the BUSY output is turned OFF, then imports the status output.
Controlling with Input/Output Line

(5) If the external trigger is input while BUSY is being output, the input is ignored and a trigger error occurs. Trigger 3 is not judged. To
output the trigger error, set trigger error in the Output Assignment (Page 4-149) under the Settings Navigator to [ON].
yyUse external trigger input and BUSY output to control the timing.
yyThe ON status of each output is as follows.
When Output Settings (Page 7-11) are [N.O.]: S  tatus with NPN or PNP open collector ON.
When Output Settings (Page 7-11) are [N.C.]: S  tatus with NPN or PNP open collector OFF.
yyThe ON status of each input indicates the input line is shorted when the Polarity (Page 7-11) is NPN, and indicates that voltage is
applied within the input line when the Polarity is PNP.
yyThe edge used for activating or deactivating timing can be set in the external trigger input settings.
“Input Settings” (Page 7-11)
yyThe trigger error output function turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when the error is cleared, when the program is switched,
or when the system moves to the settings screen.
yyWhen the output mode of status output (Page 7-16) is set to [Latching]. For [One-Shot], see ”Changing the timing of status outputs”
(Page 10-8).

10-2 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers

Controlling timing using ready output

This control method synchronizes timing with ready output to capture images and synchronizes with the strobe output to
output the status.
Select [Send after READY Output ON] for “Trigger Accept Timing” (Page 7-17)
As external triggers can be input after image capture processing is completed, you can decrease detection takt time.
However, the required number of control lines increases.
Trigger 1 Trigger 2 Trigger 3 Trigger 4 Trigger 5

Min 100 µs Min 1.2 ms

ON (6)
External trigger input (1) (5)
OFF
Trigger interval

Processing time
ON
Ready output (2)
OFF
Max 2 ms

ON
BUSY output (7)
OFF
Max 2 ms

(3)
Imaging processing (internal)

Image processing (internal)

Trigger delay

ON
Strobe output (4)
OFF
Min 0.3 ms
Total status output
ON
Status output of each tool
Previous result Result from Trigger 1 Result from Trigger 2 Result from Trigger 3 Result from Trigger 5
Position adjustment output OFF
Output of each logic Max 2 ms
ON
Trigger error output
OFF

(1) Position the target and input external trigger. The shortest input time for the input to be recognized as ON is 100 us. The shortest
possible interval between trigger inputs (where input is OFF) is 1.2ms.
(2) Ready output is turned off. Processing time differs depending on the settings.
(3) After the trigger delay time (Page 4-9) elapses, the target is imaged and the judgment process is performed. 10
(4) After the judgment process is completed, the status output updates and the strobe output is turned ON. Synchronize timing with the

Controlling with Input/Output Line

strobe output and import the status. You can change the one-shot time for strobe output (Page 7-17).
(5) After capture processing completes, ready output turns ON. External triggers can be input to the sensor when the ready output is
ON.
(6) If an external trigger is input when ready output is OFF, the input is ignored and a trigger error occurs. Trigger 4 is not judged. To
output the trigger error, set trigger error in the Output Assignment (Page 4-149) under the Settings Navigator to [ON].
(7) BUSY output turns ON during internal processing. If the trigger interval is shorter than the processing time, BUSY output will always
be ON, so it cannot be used to control the status output.

yyExternal trigger input, ready, and strobe outputs are used to control timing.
yyThe ON status of each output is as follows.
When Output Settings (Page 7-11) are [N.O.]: S  tatus with NPN or PNP open collector ON.
When Output Settings (Page 7-11) are [N.C.]: S  tatus with NPN or PNP open collector OFF.
yyThe ON status of each input indicates the input line is shorted when the Polarity (Page 7-11) is NPN, and indicates that voltage is
applied within the input line when the Polarity is PNP.
yyThe edge trigger for activating timing or in deactivating timing can be set for the external trigger input.
“Input Settings” (Page 7-11)
yyThe trigger error output turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when the error is cleared, when the program is switched, or when
the system moves to the settings screen.
yyThe one-shot time for the strobe output should be about half the capture interval displayed on the run screen (50% of the duty cycle
during the shortest cycle). If the one-shot time is long, status output may not be correctly output due to duplication of the strobe output.
To output a strobe output error, set [Strobe Error Output] to [ON]. Strobe error output turns OFF when the next strobe output is not
duplicated, when the error is cleared, when the program is switched, or when the system moves to the settings screen.
yyWhen the output mode of status output (Page 7-16) is set to [Latching]. For [One-Shot], see ”Changing the timing of status outputs”
(Page 10-8).

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 10-3

 Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers

Internal trigger
When the [Trigger Options] is set to [Internal], imaging and judgment are performed at the timing of the set trigger interval.
There are two ways to identify the status of the status output: Using BUSY output and using strobe output.

Controlling timing using BUSY output

This control method synchronizes timing with BUSY output and imports status output.
Select [Send after BUSY Output OFF] for “Trigger Accept Timing” (Page 7-17)
Internal trigger Trigger 1 Trigger 2 Trigger 3 Trigger 4 Trigger 5 Trigger 6

Trigger interval Trigger interval Trigger interval Trigger interval Trigger interval
(1)
Processing
time
(5) (6)
ON
BUSY output (2)
OFF

Captured image/image (3)

processing (internal)

Min 0.3 ms
Total status output
ON
Status output of each tool
Previous result Result from Trigger 1 Result from Trigger 2 Result from Trigger 4 Result from Trigger 5
Position adjustment output OFF
Output of each logic (4)

ON
Trigger error output
OFF

Max. (trigger interval) + 1 ms Max 1 ms

Internal Trigger Control with ON (6)

IN1 Input OFF

(1) Inputs internal trigger at the trigger interval set.

(2) BUSY output turns ON when the internal trigger occurs. Processing time differs depending on the settings.
(3) The target is imaged and judged. No trigger delay settings.
(4) After the judgment process is completed, the status output updates and the BUSY output is turned OFF. If “BUSY output timing” (Page
7-17) is set to [Until Data Transfer is Complete], BUSY output is turned OFF after data is transferred to the SD card. Confirm that the
BUSY output is turned OFF, then import the status output.

10 (5) If the internal trigger is input while BUSY is being output, the input is ignored and a trigger error occurs. Trigger 3 is not judged. To
output the trigger error, set trigger error in the Output Assignment (Page 4-149) under the Settings Navigator to [ON].
(6) If [Internal Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to [Yes] (dotted line), the internal trigger stops when IN1 is OFF. BUSY output does
Controlling with Input/Output Line

not turn ON for Trigger 6 (dotted line). Additionally, judgment processing is not performed (dotted line). If it is set to [No], the internal
trigger is always on.

yyThe ON status of each output is as follows.

When Output Settings (Page 7-11) are [N.O.]: S  tatus with NPN or PNP open collector ON.
When Output Settings (Page 7-11) are [N.C.]: S  tatus with NPN or PNP open collector OFF.
yyThe trigger error output turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when the error is cleared, when the program is switched, or when
the system moves to the settings screen.
yyWhen the output mode of status output (Page 7-16) is set to [Latching]. For [One-Shot], see ”Changing the timing of status outputs”
(Page 10-8).
yyWhen [Internal Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to [Yes], the minimum input ON time is 1 ms and the minimum input OFF time is 1.2
ms.
The actual interval from IN1 input to an internal trigger output is within “set trigger interval + 1 ms”.

Set the trigger interval longer than the processing time. If the trigger interval is shorter than the processing time, the
internal trigger will be input during the processing time, so the trigger error will occur.

10-4 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers

Controlling timing using ready output

As internal triggers occur after image capture processing is completed, you can decrease detection takt time compared to
the method that uses the BUSY output. Status output can be synchronized with the strobe output.
Select [Send after READY Output ON] for “Trigger Accept Timing” (Page 7-17)
Internal trigger Trigger 1 Trigger 2 Trigger 3 Trigger 4 Trigger 5 Trigger 6 Trigger 7

Trigger interval Trigger interval Trigger interval Trigger interval Trigger interval Trigger interval
(1)
Processing time
(7)
ON
Ready output (2) (5)
OFF

ON
BUSY output (6)
OFF

Imaging processing (3)

(internal)

Image processing (internal)

ON
Strobe output
OFF
Min 0.3 ms
Total status output
Status output of each tool ON
Position adjustment output OFF Previous result Result from Trigger 1 Result from Trigger 2 Result from Trigger 3 Result from Trigger 5
Output of each logic (4)

ON
Trigger error output
OFF
Max. (trigger interval) + 1 ms Max 1 ms

Internal Trigger Control with ON

(7)
IN1 Input OFF

(1) Inputs internal trigger in the trigger interval being set.

(2) Ready output turns OFF at the timing that internal trigger occurred. Processing time differs depending on the settings.
(3) The target is imaged and judged. No trigger delay settings.
(4) After the judgment process is completed, the status output is updated and the strobe output is turned ON. Synchronize timing with
strobe output and import status output. You can change the one-shot time for strobe output (Page 7-17).
(5) If the internal trigger is input when ready output is OFF, the trigger is ignored and a trigger error occurs. Trigger 4 is not judged. To
output the trigger error, set trigger error in the Output Assignment (Page 4-149) under the Settings Navigator to [ON].
(6) BUSY output turns ON during internal processing. If the trigger interval is shorter than the processing time, BUSY output will always
be ON, so it cannot be used to import status output.
(7) If [Internal Trigger Control with IN1 Input] is set to [Yes] (dotted line), the internal trigger stops when IN1 input is OFF. Ready output
10

Controlling with Input/Output Line

does not turn OFF for Trigger 7 (dotted line). Additionally, judgment processing is not performed (dotted line). If it is set to [No], the
internal trigger always activates.

yyThe ON status of each output is as follows.

When Output Settings (Page 7-11) are [N.O.]: S  tatus with NPN or PNP open collector ON.
When Output Settings (Page 7-11) are [N.C.]: S  tatus with NPN or PNP open collector OFF.
yyThe trigger error output function turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when the error is cleared, when the program is switched,
or when the system moves to the settings screen.
yyThe one-shot time for strobe output should be about half the capture interval displayed on the run screen (50% of the duty cycle during
the shortest cycle). If the one-shot time is long, status output may not be correctly imported due to duplication of strobe output. To output
a strobe output error, set [Strobe Error Output] to [ON]. Strobe error output turns OFF when the next strobe output is not duplicated,
when the error is cleared, when the program is switched, or when the system moves to the settings screen.
yyWhen the output mode of status output (Page 7-16) is set to [Latching]. For [One-Shot], see ”Changing the timing of status outputs”
(Page 10-8).

Set the trigger interval longer than the capture interval displayed on the run screen. If the trigger interval is shorter
than the capture interval, the internal trigger will be input during the processing time, so the trigger error will occur.

Operating in the shortest cycle

To input the internal trigger in the shortest cycle and perform the judgment process, set the trigger interval to 1 ms.
Set the trigger error in the Output Assignment (Page 4-149) in Settings Navigator to [OFF] and disregard the trigger error.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 10-5

 Importing the Status Output

Importing the Status Output

Imports the status output assigned to output line of power I/O cable. For details about assigning to output lines, refer to “4.
Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-149).

Importing the total status OK/total status NG output

Total status results of multiple detection tools and the position adjustment for the examined target can be checked.
Operations when controlling timing with BUSY, ready, and strobe outputs are as shown below.
External trigger/Internal trigger Trigger

Controlling timing with BUSY output

Processing time

ON
OUT2 Assign the BUSY output
OFF

Controlling timing with ready output

ON
OUT2 Strobe output is assigned
OFF

Min 0.3 ms
OUT1
ON
Total status OK/total status NG is assigned
OFF

IN2
If reset status output is set to [Enable]: ON
Clear error input is assigned OFF

yyThis is an example operation when the output mode of status output (Page 7-16) is set to [Latching]. For [One-Shot], refer to
”Changing the timing of status outputs” (Page 10-8).
yyThe total status output turns ON when the total status results were OK. The total status NG output turns ON when the total status results
were NG.
The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4].
yy[All Tools OK]
When all of the status results of the detection tools and the adjustment result of the position adjustment result were OK,
the total status result is OK.
yy[Any Tool OK]
When any of the status results of the detection tools except that of the position adjustment was OK, the total status result
is OK.
yyLogic
When the logical operation result of the set detection tools was OK, the total status result is OK.
yyThe status result will be kept until the next status result output. However, the output function turns OFF when the program number is
switched or an external master image is registered.

10 yyThe ON status of each output is as follows.

When Output Settings (Page 7-11) are [N.O.]: S
 tatus with NPN or PNP open collector ON.
When Output Settings (Page 7-11) are [N.C.]: S
 tatus with NPN or PNP open collector OFF.
yyWhen [Reset Status Output on Clear Error Execution] is set to [Yes], the status output can be reset with the clear error input.
Controlling with Input/Output Line

10-6 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Importing the Status Output

Importing the individual status output of each detection window/tool/logic

The individual status result of the detection tool and position adjustment for the examined target can be checked.
Operations when controlling timing with BUSY, ready, and strobe outputs are as shown below.
External trigger/Internal trigger Trigger

Controlling timing with BUSY output

Processing time

ON
OUT1 Assign the BUSY output
OFF

Controlling timing with ready output

ON
OUT1 Strobe output is assigned
OFF

Min 0.3 ms
ON
OUT2 Tool 1 is assigned Previous result Status result of Tool 1
OFF

ON
OUT3 Tool 2 is assigned Previous result Status result of Tool 2
OFF

ON
OUT4 Logic 1 is assigned Previous result Status result of Logic 1
OFF

IN2
If reset status output is set to [Enable]: ON
Clear error input is assigned OFF

yyThis is an example operation when the output mode of status output (Page 7-16) is set to [Latching]. For [One-Shot], refer to
”Changing the timing of status outputs” (Page 10-8).
yyThis is an example when the status results of Tool 1, Tool 2, and Logic 1 are to be checked individually.
yyThe status output turns ON when the status result of each tool/logic was OK. Turns OFF when the result was NG or --.
yyThe ON status of each output is as follows.
When Output Settings (Page 7-11) are [N.O.]: S  tatus with NPN or PNP open collector ON.
When Output Settings (Page 7-11) are [N.C.]: S  tatus with NPN or PNP open collector OFF.
yyThe status result will be kept until the next status result output. However, the output function turns OFF when the program number is
switched or an external master image is registered.
yyThis is an example when the status results of Tool 1, Tool 2, and Logic 1 are to be checked individually. In Learning Mode, Detection
Window 1 and 2 take the place of Tool 1 and Tool 2.
yyWhen [Reset Status Output on Clear Error Execution] is set to [Yes], the status output can be reset with the clear error input.

10

Controlling with Input/Output Line

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 10-7

 Importing the Status Output

Changing the timing of status outputs

The timing of status outputs can be selected from [Latching] which links to judgment and [One-Shot] which outputs for a
certain time. For details of how to configure the settings, refer to “Output Settings” (Page 7-11).
External trigger/Internal trigger Trigger 1 Trigger 2

ON
BUSY output
OFF

Min 0.3 ms

Status output ON
Previous status result Status result of Trigger 1 Status result of Trigger 2
(Latching output) OFF

Status output ON
Status result of Trigger 1 Status result of Trigger 2
(One-Shot output) OFF
Delay
time One-Shot ON time Delay time One-Shot ON Time

yyIn case of [Latching], updates the output by linking with judgment.

yyIn case of [One-Shot], outputs for a set amount of time after the set delay time is passed.
yyWhen the program number is switched or the external master image is registered, the status output turns OFF.

Cancelling One-Shot output

To use the One-Shot output function, the following condition needs to be met.
Trigger input interval (trigger interval) > Maximum value of processing time or capture interval > One-Shot ON
Time
If the above condition is not met, the One-Shot output that follows the current One-Shot output is canceled will not be
output.
External trigger/Internal trigger Trigger 1 Trigger 2

Trigger input interval

(1)

ON
BUSY output
OFF

ON
Internal process of Trigger 1 (2) Status result of Trigger 1 (internal)

10
OFF

Delay time One-Shot ON Time

ON
Controlling with Input/Output Line

Internal process of Trigger 2 (3) Status result of Trigger 2 (internal)

OFF
Delay
time One-Shot ON Time

ON
Judgment process Status result of Trigger 1
OFF

Delay time One-Shot ON Time

(1) This is an example of what happens when the trigger input interval is shorter than the One-Shot ON Time.
(2) Since the previous One-Shot output has been completed, the status result of Trigger 1 can be output as a One-Shot normally.
(3) 
Since the previous One-Shot output has not been completed, the status result of Trigger 2 cannot be output as a One-Shot and will be
canceled.

10-8 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Changing Over

Changing Over

The program set in the sensor can easily by changed by referencing the previously-saved judgment condition (program)
with the input lines. For details about program functions, refer to “Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)” (Page
7-3).

Error Error
occurred canceled
Trigger 1 Trigger 2 Trigger 3

Stopping operation Setting

Min 10 ms
(1) (5) (6) (7) (8)
ON
Program bit0 to bit6 input P000 P001 P002 P099
OFF
Switching time
(T1) Switching time

ON
BUSY output (2)
OFF
T2 (4)

Program number P000 P001 P002 P000

Min 0 ms
Program switch
Total status output
ON failed
Status output of each tool
Previous result Result from Trigger 1
Position adjustment output OFF
Output of each logic (3)

ON
Error output
OFF

Trigger error Program switch error

ON
RUN output
OFF

(1) Switch the current program by inputting Program bit0 to bit6 and keeping the line active. Minimum input time is 10 ms.
“When [Program Switching Method] is set to [External Input]” (Page 7-6)
(2) BUSY output turns ON while switching the programs. Switching time depends on the settings.
(3) The output status (Latching output and One-Shot output) turns OFF before the program switching process has completed.
(4) If the program number is switched during a judgment process, the system cancels the judgment process (result of Trigger 2 is not
output). The program switching process is delayed because the judgment must be canceled. Delay time depends on the settings.
(5) If a trigger occurs while switching programs (during the BUSY output), the trigger is ignored and a trigger error occurs. To output the
trigger error, set trigger error in the Output Assignment (Page 4-149) under the Settings Navigator to [ON]. In the case of a manual

10
trigger, the trigger is processed after the program switching process has completed.

yyFor details about T1 and T2, refer to ”Input Response Time” (Page 10-15).
yyUse this function during operation. Programs cannot be switched with the external input during setup.

Controlling with Input/Output Line

yyThe trigger error output function turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when the error is cleared, when the program is switched,
or when the system moves to the settings screen.
yyIf the switched program is set to [Internal], the time for inputting the trigger after switching the program fluctuates. A delay of one trigger
interval may occur.
yyDo not use with the external master registration input at the same time. The sequence for switching programs and the external master
registration process will vary.
yyThe response of the image displayed on the control panel might be delayed until after switching programs (BUSY output OFF).
Program switch error
If using the program expansion function for the SD card (page 8-12), a program switch error occurs when the advanced program
information cannot be read from the SD card.
(6) For example, bit0 to bit6 input changes and switches to P099 when the SD card is removed.
(7) A program switch error occurs. BUSY output turns OFF and error output turns ON.
Run output turns OFF and operation stops. The previous program number will be retained but the device cannot run. Clear error input
is disabled. The PWR/ERR indicator light on the sensor amplifier turns ON (red). The sensor head operation indicator light blinks (red).
(8) Connecting the control panel or IV2-Navigator (IV2-H1) and clearing the error messages cancels the errors and the device changes
to the settings screen. Error output turns off. The program number changes to “P000”.
For details about how to clear the program switch error, refer to “How to clear a program switching error” (Page 7-5).

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 10-9

 Registering the Master Image

Registering the Master Image

The external master registration function can register the master image with using the input line.
For details, refer to “2. Master Registration (Registering an Image as a Reference)” (Page 4-18).
External trigger/Internal
(1) Trigger 1 (7) Trigger 2
trigger
Min 2 ms
(Min 2 ms)
External master registration ON
(2)
input OFF
Master image registration time (T3)
ON
BUSY output (3)
OFF
T4

Judgment process ON
Image of Trigger 1
(internal) OFF
(5)

ON
Master image (internal) Previous master image Image of Trigger 1
OFF
Total status output (4)
Status output of each tool ON
Previous result Result from Trigger 1 Result from Trigger 2
Position adjustment output OFF
Output of each logic
ON
Error output (6) In case of failure
OFF

(1) Takes an image to be registered as a master image by the external trigger or internal trigger.
(2) If the BUSY output is OFF, the external master registration input will be input. Minimum ON/OFF input time is 2 ms.
(3) The BUSY output turns ON and master registration starts. The master registration time depends on the settings.
(4) The status output (Latching output and One-Shot output) turns OFF before master image registration is completed.
(5) The image imaged in Trigger 1 will be registered as a master image.
(6) If the external master image registration fails, the error output turns ON. Check that the external master image registration succeeded
with the error output. In case of failure, the image will not be updated from the previous master image. The error output turns OFF
when the external master image registration succeeds or by the clear error input.
(7) After master image registration is completed, the judgment process is performed with the new master image. Trigger 2 judges the
target using the image of Trigger 1 as a master image.

yyFor details about T3 and T4, refer to ”Input Response Time” (Page 10-15).
yyUse this function during operation. External master image registration cannot be performed during setup.
yyIf a trigger occurs while registering the master image (during BUSY output), the trigger is ignored and a trigger error occurs. The trigger

10
error output turns OFF when the next trigger is activated, when the program is switched, or when the error is cleared. To output the
trigger error, set trigger error in the Output Assignment (Page 4-149) under the Settings Navigator to [ON].
yyIf the external master registration input is input during the imaging process (BUSY) by the trigger, the system cancels the judgment
process (taken image will not be registered). After the process is canceled, the image taken before cancellation is registered as a
Controlling with Input/Output Line

master image. The master image registration process is delayed by the cancelling process. Delay time depends on the settings.
yyDo not change over the programs at the same time that the external master registration input is being performed. The sequence of the
external master registration and program switching process will vary.
yyExternal master image registration is not available in learning mode.

10-10 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Registering the Master Image

zz
Saving a program (P000 to P031) on the internal sensor ROM
yyIf the external master image registration is to be performed frequently, set [Write ROM when using “Ext.
Master Save”?] of the input option to [No] to protect the nonvolatile memory of the sensor. For details of how
to configure the settings, refer to “Input Settings” (Page 7-11).

Number of times that external

Master image is registered externally when power
ROM writing settings master image registration can
is turned OFF
perform (duration)

The master image is not deleted.

Yes The image can be used as a master image after 100,000 times
starting up the device next time.

The master image is deleted.

No External master image registration needs to be No limit
performed after starting up the device.

yyIf the setting for writing to ROM is set to [No], the image is written to ROM when the system is in the settings
mode. The master image is not deleted once the system is put in the settings mode before the power is
turned OFF.
yyIf the setting is set to [Yes], do not turn OFF the power during the master registration time (T3). Otherwise, all
or part of the setting data may be lost.

zz
Saving a program (P032 to P127) on an SD card
yyRegardless of the [Write ROM when using Ext. Master Save] settings, programs will not be written to an SD
card. Master images registered externally are deleted when the power is turned OFF. External master image
registration needs to be performed after starting up the device.
yyThe image is written to an SD card when the system is in settings mode. The master image is not deleted
once the system is put in the settings mode before the power is turned OFF.

10

Controlling with Input/Output Line

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 10-11

 Clearing Errors

Clearing Errors

If an error occurs, the error that is output can be turned OFF using the clear error input.

Error
SD card access SD card transfer failure/
occurred
error occurs transfer buffer insufficient
(Min 2 ms) Min 2 ms
ON (2)
Clear error input
OFF

T5 T5 T5
ON (1)
Error output
OFF

ON (4) (5)
SD card error output
OFF

If SD card transfer
(3) Access error error is on
If reset status output is set to ON
Previous result
[Enable], status is output OFF

(1) If an error occurred, the error output turns ON.

(2) The error output can be turned OFF by the clear error input. Minimum ON/OFF input time is 2 ms.
(3) When [Reset Status Output on Clear Error Execution] is set to [Yes], the status output is reset.
(4) SD card access errors can be output to error output and SD card error output.
(5) If [SD card transfer error] for the SD card data transfer function is set to [Enable], errors can be output to error output and SD card
error output when the SD card cannot be recognized or the transfer buffer is insufficient.
yyFor details about T5, refer to “Input Response Time” (Page 10-15).

Error types that can be output

Error output
Error type Clear error input Reference
ON/OFF

System error
ON Cannot be cleared “Error Messages” (Page A-9)
Startup memory readout error

Program switch error while “Changeover for a Target (Program Functions)”

ON Cannot be cleared
running (Page 7-3)
“Changing Over” (Page 10-9)

10
Program switch error at startup OFF - “SD Card Access” (Page 8-13)

External master registration error “Registering the Master Image” (Page 10-10)
ON Can be cleared
SD card access error
Controlling with Input/Output Line

“4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting

to Output Line)” (Page 4-149)
Trigger error
“Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers” (Page
10-2)

“Trigger Control Settings” (Page 7-17)

Strobe error OFF (default)/ “Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers” (Page
Can be cleared
ON 10-2)

FTP error “FTP Error” (Page 9-4)

SD card transfer error “SD card transfer error” (Page 8-16)

SNTP sync error “Sync Error Output” (Page 9-11)

Field network warning ON Can be cleared

10-12 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Behavior When the Sensor Power is Turned On or Off

Behavior When the Sensor Power is Turned On or

Off
The device behavior when the power is turned on or off is as follows. Check activation of the BUSY output when starting
operation.

Power turns Power turns

on BUSY off
20 ms or longer
Initializing System
2 seconds or longer Running Setting Running error Running

ON
Power (DC24V)
OFF
(1)
Determine the
I/O settings

(2)
Program number

Trigger Trigger
(3)
ON
BUSY output (4)
OFF

(5)
ON
Error output
OFF

(6)
ON
RUN output
OFF
Min 0 ms

Total status output

Status output of each tool ON
Position adjustment output OFF
Output of each logic
Min 2 ms (7)

ON
“SD card save stop” input
OFF

(1) After the power is turned ON, the I/O Settings (NPN or PNP and N.O. or N.C.) will be determined.
“Operation for initial startup of the sensor” (Page 3-12)
“Polarity” (Page 7-11)

10
“Output Settings” (Page 7-11)
(2) The program number will be determined. If [Switch Program by External Input] (Page 7-14) is set to [External Input], the program
number is determined according to the condition of the input lines.
(3) BUSY output turns ON.

Controlling with Input/Output Line

yyIn case of N.O. output, the transistor turns from OFF to ON.
yyIn case of N.C. output, the transistor turns from OFF to OFF, so no changes occur.
(4) The BUSY output turns OFF and the system starts to operate.
yyIn case of N.O. output, the transistor turns from ON to OFF.
yyIn case of N.C. output, the transistor turns from OFF to ON.
By checking the activation of the BUSY output, operation in N.O./N.C. can be checked.
(5) If the startup error has occurred, the error output turns ON during the BUSY status.
(6) The RUN output turns ON when the sensor is running with no system error occurring.
(7) About power off when using [Data transfer (SD card)]
yySet [BUSY Output Settings] to [Until Data Transfer is Complete].
yyIn the case of the “External trigger”, turn off the power after confirming that the busy output is “OFF” by the input of the “SD card
save stop” input.
yyIn the case of the “Internal trigger”, wait approximately 5 seconds after the “SD card save stop” is input, and then turn off the power.
yyAfter transfer of the image being transferred is completed, transfer to the SD card is stopped. Images in the transfer buffer are
discarded.
yyThe “SD card save stop” input is valid only during operation.
Do not turn off the system power while the SD card is being accessed. Otherwise, all or part of the setting data
may be lost or the memory may be damaged.

yyThe ON status of each output is as follows.

When Output Settings (Page 7-11) are [N.O.]: S
 tatus with NPN or PNP open collector ON.
When Output Settings (Page 7-11) are [N.C.]: S
 tatus with NPN or PNP open collector OFF.
yyThe RUN output, BUSY output and error output will be output from the output line assigned in output assignment (Page 4-149) for
program numbers determined after the power is turned ON. If the outputs are not being assigned, it will not be output.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 10-13

 Clearing Errors

Program switch error when the power is turned on

Behavior in the case that a program switch error occurs when the power is turned on is as follows.

Power turns
Error occurred Error canceled
on

Initializing BUSY Operation stops Setting

(2) (3)

ON
Power (DC24V)
OFF

(1)

Program number P099 P000

ON
BUSY output
OFF

ON
Error output
OFF

ON
Run output/status output
OFF

If using the program expansion function for the SD card (Page 8-13), a program switch error occurs when the advanced program
information cannot be read from the SD card.
(1) For example, the power is turned on when the SD card is removed and P099 is selected.
(2) A program switch error occurs. The open collector output (OUT1 to OUT8) does not operate and is OFF regardless of [NO] and [NC].
(3) Clear the error message and error output with the control panel or IV2-Navigator (IV2-H1).
If [Switch Program by External Input] is set to [Yes], the system changes to settings mode. P000 is selected as the program number.
In the case of the panel/PC/communications, you can select to continue operating the device with P000 or change the system to the
settings screen when you clear the error message.

10 yyFor details about how to clear the program switch error, refer to
yyThe ON status of each output is as follows.
When Output Settings (Page 7-11) are [N.O.]: S
“How to clear a program switching error” (Page 7-5).

 tatus with NPN or PNP open collector ON.

When Output Settings (Page 7-11) are [N.C.]: S
 tatus with NPN or PNP open collector OFF.
Controlling with Input/Output Line

10-14 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 Input Response Time

Input Response Time

The following response times are the typical examples (typ.). The response times may differ depending
on the settings or the image processing condition. Control by confirming “BUSY output” or “ready
output and strobe output” to prevent impact from different response times.

Response time for the switch program input

T1 (Switch program time) = A + B + C + 160 [ms] (typ.)
T2 = 10 [ms] (typ.)

Response time for the external master registration input

T3 (Master registration time) = A + B + D + 100 [ms] (typ.)
T4 = 5 [ms] (typ.)

Response time for the error clear input

T5 = 5 [ms] (typ.)

Description for symbols

Symbols Description Time

400 [ms] + Trigger delay time (0 to 10000) [ms] (typ.)

Added when a program switching input or external master registration input is
A Judgment process cancelling time input during the judgment process.
The “Trigger delay time” is added only when the [External] (Page 4-9) is
selected for trigger type.

Tool/window registration time × total number of set tools + 130 ms*1 + 50 ms*2
(typ.)

Tool/window registration time

yyOutline/position adjustment: 90 ms (typ.)
yyEdge pixel/color area/area/color average/brightness average/protrusion or
B Tool/window registration time
misalignment: 15 ms (typ.)

10
yyWidth/diameter/edge/pitch/high-speed position adjustment: 1 ms or less
yyOCR/learning mode window: 20 ms (typ.)

*1 This is added when the OCR tool is included.

*2 This is added for learning mode.

Controlling with Input/Output Line

Auto focus position adjustment 860 [ms] (typ.)
C
time Added only when the [Auto Focus Adj Pos] (Page 7-12) is set to [Individual].

3,000 [ms] (typ.)

The time is only added when the following conditions are met:
D Nonvolatile memory saving time
yy[Write ROM when using Ext. Master Save] (Page 7-14) is set to [Yes].
yyA program (P000 to P031) saved on the internal sensor ROM is in use.

IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel) 10-15

 Input Response Time

MEMO

10
Controlling with Input/Output Line

10-16 IV2 Series User's Manual (Control Panel)

 11 This chapter explains the specifications and dimensions of the
sensor and control panel.

Specifications

Specifications.......................................................................11-2
Dimensions...........................................................................11-5

11
Specifications

IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel) 11-1

 Specifications

Specifications

Sensor Head
Model IV2-G500CA IV2-G500MA IV2-G150MA IV2-G300CA IV2-G600MA

Type Standard type Narrow view type Wide view type

Reference distance 20 to 500mm 40 to 150mm 40 to 300mm 40 to 600mm

Installed distance 20 mm : Installed distance 40 mm : Installed distance 40 mm : Installed distance 40 mm :

10 (H) × 7.5 (V) mm 8 (H) × 6 (V) mm 42 (H) × 31 (V) mm 42 (H) × 31 (V) mm
View to to to to
Installed distance 500 mm : Installed distance 150 mm : Installed distance 300 mm : Installed distance 600 mm :
200 (H) × 150 (V) mm 32 (H) × 24 (V) mm *1 275 (H) × 206 (V) mm 550 (H) × 412 (V) mm

1/3 inch monochrome 1/3 inch monochrome 1/3 inch monochrome

Image sensor 1/3 inch color CMOS 1/3 inch color CMOS
CMOS CMOS CMOS

Pixel 752 (H) x 480 (V)

Focus adjustment Auto *2

Exposure time 1/10 to 1/50,000 1/20 to 1/50,000 1/25 to 1/50,000 1/50 to 1/50,000

Amplifier type White LED Infrared LED

Light
Lighting method Pulse lighting/DC lighting is switchable. Pulse lighting

Indicators 2 (indicate the same status)

Ambient
0 to +50°C (No freezing)
temperature

Relative
35 to 85% RH (No condensation)
humidity
Environmental
Vibration *3 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude, 2 hours each for X, Y, and Z axes
resistance
Shock
500 m/s2 6 different directions in 3 times
resistance *3

Enclosure
IP67
rating *4

Material Body: zinc diecast, front cover: acrylic (hard coating), indicator cover: TPU

Weight Approx. 75 g

*1 When using the Spread lens attachment (OP-87902),

this changes to “Installed distance 18 mm : 4 (H) x 3 (V) mm to Installed distance 27 mm : 7 (H) x 5.2 (V) mm”.
*2 The focus position can be automatically adjusted at the time of installation. Disabled during RUN. The focus position can be registered
by program.
*3 Except when the dome attachment (IV2-GD05/IV2-GD10) is mounted.
*4 Except when the polarizing filter attachment (OP-87899/OP-87900/OP-87901) or the Spread lens attachment (OP-87902) is mounted.

11 Sensor Amplifier
Model IV2-G30F IV2-G30
Specifications

Type Learning/Standard type Standard type

Available mode Learning mode/Standard mode Standard Mode
Outline, Color area *1, Area *2, Edge Pixel, Color average *1, Brightness average *2, Width, Diameter, Edge, Pitch,
Tool with standard
Tool OCR, Color Prohibition *1, Brightness Prohibition *2, Position adjustment, High-speed Position Adjustment (1-Axis
mode
Edge/2-Axis Edge)
Number *3 Detection tools : 16 tools, Position adjustment tool : 1 tool

Switch settings (programs) 128 programs (with SD card) /32 programs (without SD card)
Numbers 1000 images
Image history *4
Condition NG only / NG and OK near the threshold *5 / All is selectable
Transfer
SD card/FTP server is selectable
Destination
Image data
transfer Transfer format bmp/jpeg/iv2p/txt is selectable
Transfer Condition NG only / NG and OK near the threshold *5 / All is selectable
Display Switch List by tools (judge results, matching rate, matching bar display)
OFF/Histogram/Processing time/Count/Output monitor is switchable
Analysis Histogram : Histogram, matching rate (MAX, MIN, AVE), numbers of OKs, numbers of NGs
information *6 Processing time : Processing time (latest value, MAX, MIN, AVE), Imaging interval (latest value, MAX, MIN, AVE)
Run information
Count : Trigger numbers, numbers of OKs, numbers of NGs, numbers of trigger errors,
numbers of strobe errors
Output monitor : ON / OFF status for each output

11-2 IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel)

 Specifications

Model IV2-G30F IV2-G30

Image buffer, Imaging area, Digital Zoom (x2, x4), HDR, High Gain, Color Filters *1,
Imaging function
White balance *1, Brightness correction
Other Learning Mode : Additional learning
functions Tool functions Standard mode : Remove Outline, Mask function, Color extraction/Color exclusion *1,
Color histogram function *1, Monochrome histogram function *2, Scaling function
Utility List of NG Sensor Occurrences, NG Hold Function, Test run, I/O monitor, Security settings, Simulator *7
Indicators PWR/ERR, OUT, TRIG, STATUS, LINK/ACT, SD
No-voltage input/voltage input is switchable
For no-voltage input : ON voltage 2 V or lower, OFF current 0.1 mA or lower, ON current 2 mA (short circuit)
Input
For voltage input : Maximum input rating 26.4 V, ON voltage 18 V or higher, OFF current 0.2 mA or lower,
ON current 2 mA (for 24 V)
Inputs 8 inputs (IN1 to IN8)
IN1 : External trigger, IN2 to IN8 : Enable by assigning the optional functions
Function
Assignable functions : Program switching, Clear error, External master image registration, Stop saving for SD card
Open collector output NPN/PNP is switchable, N.O./N.C. is switchable
Output For open collector NPN output : Maximum rating 26.4 V 50 mA, remaining voltage 1.5 V or lower
For open collector PNP output : Maximum rating 26.4 V 50 mA, remaining voltage 2 V or lower
Outputs 8 outputs (OUT1 to OUT8)
Enable by assigning the optional functions
Function Assignable functions : Total judgment (OK/NG), RUN, BUSY, READY, Strobe, Position adjustment result,
Judge result of each tool, Logical operation result of each tool, Error, SD card error
Standard 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
Ethernet
Connector RJ45 8pin connector
Network function FTP client, SNTP client

Supported Built-in Ethernet EtherNet/IP™, PROFINET, TCP/IP non-procedural communications

interface Communication unit *8 EtherCAT, CC-Link, DeviceNet, PROFIBUS, RS-232C
Expanded memory SD card (SD/SDHC) *9
Power voltage DC 24 V ± 10% (including ripple)
Rating Consumption
1.8 A or less (including a communication unit and output load)
current
Ambient
Environmental 0 to +50°C (No freezing)
temperature
resistance
Relative humidity 35 to 85% RH (No condensation)
Main unit case: PC Power connector: PA, POM
I/O connector: PA Sensor head connection connector: Zinc + Ni plating, PA
Material
Ethernet connector: Copper alloy + Ni plating Radiator plate on rear of the main unit : Aluminum
DIN rail tab on rear of the main unit : POM Nameplate: PC

11
Weight Approx. 330g

*1 Color type only.

*2 Monochrome type only.
*3 Tools can be installed by program. Specifications
*4 Save to the memory in the sensor amplifier. The images saved in the sensor amplifier can be backed up to the USB memory
connected to the control panel (IV2-CP50) or to the PC by the PC software for IV2 series (IV2-H1).
*5 Learning mode only.
*6 This can be displayed on the control panel (IV2-CP50) or on the PC software for IV2 series (IV2-H1).
*7 This can be used on the PC software for IV2 series (IV2-H1).
*8 When connecting the communication unit (DL Series)
*9 Use a KEYENCE recommended product.

IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel) 11-3

 Specifications

Control panel

Model IV2-CP50

Compatible sensor IV2 series, IV series

Display 5.7" TFT color LCD 640 x 480 (VGA)

Method White LED

Backlight
Duration Approx. 50,000 hours (25 ˚C)

Method Analog resistive

Touch panel
Actuating force 0.8 N or lower

Indicators PWR, SENSOR

Standard 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
Ethernet *1
Connector M12 4pin connector

Japanese / English / German / Chinese (Simplified) / Chinese (Traditional) / Korean /

Languages *2
Italian / French / Spanish / Portuguese / Czech / Hungarian / Polish / Thai

Expanded memory USB memory*3

Power voltage DC 24 ± 10% (including ripple)

Rating Consumption
0.3A or less
current

Ambient
0 to +50°C (No freezing)
temperature

Relative humidity *4 35 to 85% RH (No condensation)

Environmental
Vibration 10 to 55 Hz, 0.7 mm double amplitude, 2 hours each for X, Y, and Z axes
resistance
Drop impact
1.3 m over the concrete (2 times each in the arbitrary direction)
resistance

Enclosure rating IP40

Main unit case: PC Power connector: brass + Ni coat
Ethernet connector: Zinc + Ni coat, PA USB connector cover: EPDM
Material Pen holder: PC Hook for adapter: POM
LED lamp cover: PC Mounting adapter: PC,

11 Weight
Stylus: POM
Control panel : Approx. 450 g
A mounted with the wall mounting adapter and the stylus : Approx. 485 g
Specifications

*1 This is dedicated for connection with the IV2 series and IV series.
*2 When connected to the IV2 series. When the IV series is connected, the language supported by the IV-M30 is used.
*3 Use the KEYENCE recommended product.
*4 If the ambient temperature is over 40˚C, use it in an absolute humidity of 40˚C 85% RH or lower.

11-4 IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel)

 Dimensions

Dimensions

Sensor Head
yyIV2-G150MA yyIV2-G500CA yyIV2-G500MA yyIV2-G300CA yyIV2-G600MA

2xM4 Depth 3.5 2xM4 Depth 3.5 2xφ3.2 Plate through

Indicator mounting hole
31 24

3.1
2.9 Indicator
12

17.4

(44.3)
38.1

44.3

46.3
51.8

(104.7)
Center of light reception
(31)

38.4±1.2
φ12
17.9

24
29.6

35.6

(31)
44.3

φ4.8

Min. 20

34.7 Min. 20
38.4±1.2
Sensor head/amplifier cable
(93.1) for IV2 series
2m/5m/10m

yyWith vertical mounting bracket for IV2 series yyWith transverse mounting bracket for IV2 series
(OP-87908) (OP-87909)
37.9

40

24.5
8.5
(95.2)

5.2
(30.9)

11
75.2
.2
R2

45
Center of 9
light reception 24
2
φ20

2.
32.5

R
14.2

Specifications
16.3

14.3
R

38.1
48.1

30°
2.
2.1

45
Center of light reception
(30.9)
86.6

R2
(106.6)

.2
8
Min. 20
7.9
Min. 20
51.1

19.9
53
33.7

21.5
9.5
6.8

IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel) 11-5

 Dimensions

yyWith adjustable bracket for IV2 series (OP-87910) yyWith spread lens attachment for IV2-G150MA
(OP-87902)

2
φ1
16
14.9
17

29.8
41.8
* Strut φ12 is not supplied 35.2
61.3 with the OP-87910 24 7.2
4.3

5.3
19.6
4.3

46.5
Center of
light reception
22.2

24.1
4.8

4.5
24.1

Center of
light reception
yyWith dome attachment for IV2 series (IV2-GD05)

WD reference surface
82.6

Distance from
Min. 20

40.1
57 27.3
(φ84.3)
71
43

3
4.
φ8

28
yyWith polarizing filter attachment for IV2 series
(OP-87899)/

(84.5)
polarizing filter attachment for IV2-G300CA

56.5
(OP-87900)/
polarizing filter attachment for IV2-G600MA
(OP-87901)
Center of light reception

yyWith dome attachment for IV2 series (IV2-GD05) and

vertical mounting bracket for IV2 series (OP-87908)

(32.8)
(78.9)

(4.8)
1.9 30°
32.5
φ20

24 (5.2)
(133.2)
WD reference surface
18.4

4.1

Distance from

54.3

11
40.1
46.3
(49.3)

Center of
light reception 27.4
69.5 14.7
(φ84.3)
Specifications

Min. 20
(84.5)
76

53
33.7

Center of
light reception
8.5

11-6 IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel)

 Dimensions

yyWith dome attachment for IV2 series (IV2-GD05) and yyWith dome attachment for IV2 series (IV2-GD10)
transverse mounting bracket for IV2 series (OP-87909)

WD reference surface
Distance from
(101.6)
(8)

61.6
(129.6)

43.1
14.3
38.1
82.4 52.7
(135.1) 92.5
28 64.5
5

34
26.9 φ1

53.3
69 15.2
(84.3)

(135.1)
WD reference surface

81.8
78
Distance from
40.1

Center of
light reception

yyWith dome attachment for IV2 series (IV2-GD10) and

vertical mounting bracket for IV2 series (OP-87908)

(78.9)
Center of 30°
Min. 20

32.5
φ20
light reception (5.2)
Distance from WD reference surface

(154.7)
yyWith dome attachment for IV2 series (IV2-GD05) and
75.8
61.6

adjustable bracket for IV2 series (OP-87910)

19.5
27.4
φ12

94.9 40.2
(135.1)
16
WD reference surface
Distance from

(71)
55
40.1

Min. 20
101.3

32.7 * Strut φ12 is not supplied

74.8 9.4 with the OP-87910
(135.1)

(φ84.3)

53
(94.3)
33.7
33.9

11
47.1

47.1

Center of
light reception
4.8
4.8

(84.5)
(129.6)

37.4

Specifications
(82.6)

Min. 20
(82.6)

Center of
light reception

IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel) 11-7

 Dimensions

yyWith dome attachment for IV2 series (IV2-GD10) and Sensor Amplifier
transverse mounting bracket for IV2 series (OP-87909)
yyIV2-G30F/IV2-G30

(101.6)
(8)
(154.9)

43.1
14.3
38.1
5
53.3
83.9
50 82

26.9
94.4 40.7
(135.1)

(109.7)
95
WD reference surface

99.5
Distance from
61.6

21.3
Min. 20

(160.8) When using an Ethernet cable

20.3

Center of
light reception
(141.6)

50 86.8

yyWith dome attachment for IV2 series (IV2-GD10) and

adjustable bracket for IV2 series (OP-87910)

(61.5)
2
φ1

DIN rail
16
WD reference surface

(92.5)
Distance from

(48.2)
76.5
61.6

11 100.2
32.7

(135.1)
34.9
* Strut φ12 is not supplied
with the OP-87910
Specifications

I/O cable
LAN cable or
Ethernet cable Sensor head/amplifier cable
72.3
4.8
(135.1)
(154.9)

62.8
(82.6)

Min. 20

Center of
light reception

11-8 IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel)

 Dimensions

Option With polarizing filter attachment for IV2 series

(OP-87899)/
Dome attachment for IV2 series polarizing filter attachment for IV2-G300CA
yyIV2-GD05 (OP-87900)/
)
polarizing filter attachment for IV2-G600MA
4.3
(φ8
(OP‑87901)
.3
φ3

13.7
WD reference surface

23.8 7.9
Distance from

54.6
40.1

43

18.4
84.3 84.5

yyIV2-GD10

46.3
Center of
light reception
34
φ1

16.9

Spread lens attachment for IV2-G150MA

(OP-87902)
WD reference surface

10.4
Distance from

23.8 4.3
76.1

64.5
61.6

19.6

135.1 135.1
44.4

Center of
light reception

Sensor head/amplifier cable for IV2 series

yyOP-87903 (2 m) yyOP-87904 (5 m) yyOP-87905 (10 m)
11
2000 (OP-87903)
Specifications
5000 (OP-87904)
(φ12)

38.4 ±1.2 10000 (OP-87905) (38.4)

φ12

φ4.8

IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel) 11-9

 Dimensions

I/O cable for IV2 series Adjustable bracket for IV2 series
yyOP-87906 yyOP-87910
19.1 48.1
36.9 38.1 4.5

φ4
.4
19.5
27.8

(25)

5
12
φ27

32
3000

3.3
8.1

2
7

.4
φ1
35

φ4
4.4 Material : A5052
t = 3.0

Vertical mounting bracket for IV2 series

yyOP-87908
21

Bracket
Material : Zinc die-casting
53 Material : A5052
t = 3.0 * Strut φ12 is not supplied
with the OP-87910

48 12.5
30°
R
2.

38.1
2

.2
R2
φ20
5

10°
32.5

4°

R2
.2
5.2
12.5

Transverse mounting bracket for IV2 series

yyOP-87909
38.1
2
2.
R

Material : A5052

11
t = 3.0
12

38.1 2
2.
R
Specifications

10°

40
35

10°

R2
9

.2

48.1 21

11-10 IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel)

 Dimensions

Control panel for IV2 series

IV2-CP50

160.1

(16.4)
117
(Display area) L-shaped Ethernet cable

(Display area)
125
88.2

USB port

(39)
30.1
(52)

0
R2 (Excluding the (5)
convexed surface) R5
(110)

0
0
R5

Using the wall mounting adapter (OP-88349)

50
6
Mounting hole dimension
8

50

4xM3
136.9

90
90
16.7

4xφ3.5

11
34.1

Specifications

IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel) 11-11

 Dimensions

Using the control board mounting adapter (OP-88350)

177
170.5 Panel cutting dimensions
168 4 26.8 4xφ3.5
168

138.5

146
139 +10
146
155

171+10
4xM3 0 Panel thickness
R2
(36)

Screw depth 1 to 4mm

(94)

0
R5

Control panel options for IV2 series

Panel/monitor power cable Stylus (OP-88352)

124.7
yyOP-87443 (2 m) yyOP-87444 (5 m) yyOP-87445 (10 m)
φ3.7

φ7.6

φ5.6
φ9.5

26.7 Wall mounting adapter (OP-88349)

2000
5000 4
10000

11 Touch panel protection sheet (OP-88351)

120.1
135

116.1
Specifications

87.3

80
9.4

t=0.2
5

11-12 IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel)

 Dimensions

Control board mounting adapter (OP-88350)

155
177 21.3

Communication cables

Ethernet cable
yyOP-87907 (1 m) yyOP-87457 (2 m)
yyOP-87458 (5 m) yyOP-87459 (10 m)
φ6.4

17.1
φ14.8

1000
2000
5000
47.3 10000 44.7

L type Ethernet cable

yyOP-88042 (1 m) yyOP-88043 (2 m)
yyOP-88044 (5 m) yyOP-88045 (10 m)
35
17.1 33.1
13.4

32.5

1000
φ6.4

2000

11
8°

5000
44.7 10000
φ15

Specifications
LAN cable
yyOP-87950 (1 m) yyOP-87951 (3 m)
yyOP-87952 (5 m) yyOP-87953 (10 m)
1000 (OP-87950)
3000 (OP-87951)
5000 (OP-87952)
15.5

10000 (OP-87953)
15.5

13.6 44.2 44.2 13.6

φ6.2

IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel) 11-13

 Dimensions

MEMO

11
Specifications

11-14 IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel)

Appendices

Status Table.......................................................................... A-2

Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position
Adjustment Tool.................................................................... A-6
Troubleshooting..................................................................... A-7
Error Messages..................................................................... A-9
Remedy when data transfer to the SD card
is unavailable....................................................................... A-16
Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected with
the Sensor........................................................................... A-17
Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch).............. A-30
Maintenance........................................................................ A-31
Index.................................................................................... A-32
Copyright notice.................................................................. A-38
STLport................................................................................ A-39

IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel) A-1

 Status Table

Status Table

Status Table

Sensor amplifier indicator light

Status Screen type

PWR/ERR OUT TRIG

Waiting for a trigger OFF

*3
Judgment processing *5
Running *2 RUN Lighting (green)
Switching programs
*9 OFF
Registering the external master image
Limit Adjustment TEST
*5
Trigger Options, Master Registration, etc.
Automatically adjusting the brightness LIVE *13
Setting Blink (green) OFF
Setup Adjustment *14
I/O Monitor
- OFF
Others
Running RUN
Trigger Error
Setting LIVE Blink (red) Same as normal
Error External master registration error
System error -
Lighting (red) OFF OFF
Startup memory readout error
ü/x indicates enable/disable of the input.
ON/OFF indicates the following status. The operation differs according to the output setting (N.O./N.C).
yyWhen N.O. ON: Indicates ON for an NPN or PNP open collector output.
OFF: Indicates OFF for an NPN or PNP open collector output.
yyWhen N.C. ON: Indicates OFF for an NPN or PNP open collector output.
OFF: Indicates ON for an NPN or PNP open collector output.
*1 Turns ON if the judgment is OK. Turns OFF if it is NG.
When the total status result is OK, the total status output turns ON.
When the total status result is NG, the total status NG output turns ON.
The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4].
“Total Status Conditions” (Page 4-152)
When the position adjustment is NG, the status of each tool becomes NG.
*2 The sensor continues running even during the operation of the [Panel Settings]/[RUN/Learned Img. History]/[External
Media] screen in the run screen.

A
*3 Indicates the overall status result of the previous judgment process. OK: Lighting (green), NG: Lighting (red)
*4 Outputs the status result of the previous judgment process.
*5 Lights (one-shot) according to the input of a trigger (external/internal).
When a trigger delay has been set, it lights before the delay.
*6 Disregards the input. A trigger error occurs.
*7 Stops the judgment process and switches over.
*8 Stops the judgment process and registers the previously taken image as a master image.
*9 Turns off the light before the process is completed. Until the light turns off, the previous status result will be displayed.
*10 After the current process is completed, a new input begins.
*11 Do not use. The processing order becomes indeterminate.
*12 Turns OFF before the process is completed. Outputs the previous status result until this turns OFF.
*13 The internal trigger is issued automatically and the image is updated. The Busy output operates.
*14 The internal trigger is issued automatically and the image is updated.
*15 While the I/O monitor function is used, only the operation of the I/O lines is confirmed. The assigned functions will not
operate.
*16 The NPN open collector output turns OFF regardless of the output settings (N.O./N.C.) and the polarity (NPN/PNP)
settings.

Additionally, refer to “10 Controlling with the Input/Output Line” (Page 10-1).

A-2 IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel)

 Status Table

Input Output
External Total Status / Total Status NG
Program
Ext. Trigger Master Image Clear Error BUSY / Each Tool / Each Logic / Pos. RUN Error
Switching
Registration Adj. *1
ü ü ü OFF
*4
*7 *8
x ON OFF
*6 *10 *11 ON
*12
*11 *10

Same as
ü
while running
x x x OFF OFF
*13
x OFF
OFF
*15 ← ← ← ← ← ←
x x x x OFF OFF OFF

Same as normal ü Same as normal

ON

OFF OFF
x x x x OFF
*16 *16 *16

IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel) A-3

 Status Table

Displaying and outputting the status result

Status of Detection Window/Tool Total Status *2

Status
Display Total Status Total Status
Output Display
Judgment Matching rate *1 OK Output NG Output

Waiting for a trigger

-- --- OFF -- OFF OFF
(Not judged) *3

Judge is OK OK 0 to 100 ON OK ON OFF

Judge is NG NG 0 to 100 OFF NG OFF ON

Unable to judge *4 -- --- OFF NG OFF ON

*1  When the setting scale is changed for the Color Area/Area tool, 0 to 200/0 to 999 can be selected.
yyWhen the setting scale is changed for the Width/Diameter/Pitch tool, 0 to 100/0 to 999 can be selected.
yyThe matching rate of the Edge tool is the number of detected edges. Selectable scales are as follows:
0 to 2/0 to 5/0 to 10/0 to 20/0 to 50
yyThe matching rate when the scaling function is used with the Width/Diameter/Pitch tool is based on the scaling
settings.
yyThe cut-off process (Page A-6) may be performed for the Outline tool and Position Adjustment tool.
yyIf all the text and date matches, the matching rate for the OCR tool will be displayed as 100. If either the text or date
does not match, 0 is displayed. If you set shade contrast to [Enable], the matching rate is linked to the text and date
shading.
*2 The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4].
“Total Status Conditions” (Page 4-152)
*3 In this status, there has been no trigger input after the power turned ON, after the program number has changed, after
the master image registered, after the status output reset, or after a shift from the setting mode to the run mode.
*4 At the time of using the position adjustment/High-Speed Position Adjustment tool, when the judgment of each tool
cannot be determined, the tool becomes “Unable to judge”. For details, refer to “Displaying and outputting the
status result at the time of position adjustment” (Page A-5).

A-4 IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel)

 Status Table

Displaying and outputting the status result at the time of position adjustment
Status of Detection Window/Tool
Learning Mode/
Position Color Area/
Window Display/ Total Total
adjustment Pos. Adj./ Area/
protrusion*1 output Outline Status *2 Status NG
result Hi-Sp.Adj EdgePixels/
Width/Diameter/
Edge/Pitch/OCR
View judgment OK OK\NG OK/NG
*3
Status output ON ON/OFF ON/OFF *4
No
View matching
0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 *5
rate
Succeeded
View judgment OK OK\NG -- *6
*3
Status output ON ON/OFF OFF *4
Yes
View matching
0 to 100 0 to 100 *7 --- *6
rate

View judgment NG -- -- NG

Status output OFF OFF OFF OFF ON

Failed
View matching
0 to 100 --- ---
rate

*1 This is an operation for if the adjusted position of the tool window is protruded from the imaging area (Page 4-15) at
the time that position adjustment succeeded.
*2 The total status conditions can be selected from [All Tools OK], [Any Tool OK] and [Logic 1] to [Logic 4].
“Total Status Conditions” (Page 4-152)
*3 When the total status result is OK, the total status OK output turns ON.
*4 When the total status result is NG, the total status NG output turns ON.
*5 Setting scale can be changed.
The scales shown below are selectable.
yyColor Area/Area/EdgePixels/Width/Diameter/Pitch: 0 to 100/0 to 200/0 to 999
yyEdge: 0 to 2/0 to 5/0 to 10/0 to 20/0 to 50
yyOCR (when shade contrast is [Enable]): 0 to 100
When the scaling function is used with the Width/Diameter/Pitch tool, the matching rate is based on the scaling
settings.
*6 The judgment cannot be determined if the adjusted position of the tool window is protruded from the imaging area.
*7 For details on the target’s outline which is protruded from the search region, refer to “Matching rate at the time of
protrusion” (Page A-6).

IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel) A-5

 Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment Tool

Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position

Adjustment Tool
Matching rate at the time of protrusion Cut-off process of the matching rate
The cut-off process means the process where the outline
zz
When the matching rate decreases in proportion
detection process is ended when no outline exceeding a
to the protrusion amount
certain matching rate (cut-off value) below the threshold
yyWith the [Search Range] of the Outline tool set to value is found.
[Entire] A matching rate which has been cut off becomes 0.
yyWith the [Search Range] of the Position Adjustment Because the cut-off value is linked to the threshold, the cut-
set to [Entire] and with the [Search Algorithm] set to off value is also changed when the threshold is changed.
[High Speed]
(Cut-off value)
When the target outline protrudes from the imaging
Threshold
area, the protruding outline is excluded from the target
in regards to calculating the matching rate.
The matching rate decreases in proportion to the
protrusion amount. Matching
If the target is being protruded from the imaging area, rate
the matching rate will decrease depending on how
much the target is protruded from the imaging area. Current
matching rate
Tool window Cut-off processing range
(Range where the matching rate becomes 0)
Protruding outline
(excluded from the target for
calculating the matching rate)

Outline to be targeted for

calculating the matching
rate

Imaging Area

zz
When searching for outline within a partial
search area.
yyWith the [Search Range] of the Outline tool set to
[Partial]
yyWith the [Search Range] of the Position Adjustment
set to [Partial] and with the [Search Algorithm] set to
[High Speed]
yyWith the [Search Range] of the Position Adjustment
set to [High Accuracy]
The sensor searches the outline of the target that is in
the search range. The matching rate of the target being

A out of search range will be “0”.

When the tool window after position adjustment
is protruded from the imaging area, the judgment
display of the Color Area/Area/Edge Pixels/Width/
Diameter/Edge/Pitch tool becomes -- (Unable to
judge) and the status output turns OFF.

A-6 IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel)

 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Symptom Check point Remedy Ref.

The PWR/ERR indicator light of Refer to “Error Message”.

An error has occurred. Check the
the sensor amplifier or the PWR
errors indicated by the lighting or A-9
indicator light of the control panel is
blinking.
lighting or blinking in red.

An error message is displayed on Check the details of the error Refer to “Error Message”.
A-9
the control panel. message.

Is the power cable correctly Connect the power cable correctly.

2-11
The power of the sensor or control connected?
panel does not turn on. Does the voltage or capacity of the Use a power source of the correct
11-2
power source meet the specification? rating.

Place a target at the correct installed

Is the installed distance of the target
distance. The installed distance 2-3
correct?
depends on the sensor type.

Place the sensor in such a way that

Is the sensor view correct? the sensor view matches the target 2-3
size.

Adjust the focusing position (focus) of

Is the focus adjustment correct? 4-12
the sensor.
An image is not displayed on the
monitor, or the image is abnormal. Is the brightness adjustment correct? Adjust the brightness of the sensor. 4-12

Is the target or the sensor vibrating? Implement anti-vibration measures etc. -

Use brightness correction. 4-22

Does ambient light affect the image? Implement a shield to prevent the
-
incident of ambient light.

Clean the front cover. If it is damaged,

Is the front cover dirty or damaged? -
contact your nearest KEYENCE office.

yyStart run mode

Is the system in the setting mode? yyTurn on the power of the sensor 5-2
again.

If a target is to be imaged using an

external trigger, input the external
trigger. When the NPN is selected
The image or the status result is not in the Polarity, the circuit becomes a
Is the trigger correctly input? 4-9
updated. non-voltage input circuit. When PNP
is selected in the Polarity, the circuit
becomes a voltage input circuit. Check
the cables.

All or part of the settings necessary Complete the settings in Settings

for running have not been completed. Navigator.
4-1 A
The NG Hold function is used. Set [NG Hold Function] to [OFF]. 5-17

The network may be affected by the

Image update is slow. Is the network connected to the in- traffic in the in-plant LAN. Configure a
-
(during operation/setting) plant LAN? local network and confirm the network
connection only for the IV2 Series.

The touch screen lock of the control

Is the input screen for the unlock 7-19
panel or the security of the sensor is
password displayed? 7-34
enabled. Input the unlock password.
The monitor cannot be operated using
The password is lost and cannot Contact your nearest KEYENCE
the touch panel.
unlock. office.
-
Is there any damage or cracks on
the touch screen?

IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel) A-7

 Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position Adjustment Tool

Symptom Check point Remedy Ref.

Is the output line correctly Correctly connect to the external

2-11
connected? devices.

Set the output line and output settings

Is the output setting correctly set? 4-149
correctly in the Settings Navigator.

Is the system in the setting mode? Start run mode 5-2

Is the threshold correctly set? Set the threshold correctly. 6-16

The status result is not output. yySet the detection window and
judgment tool correctly. 4-24
Is the tool correctly set?
yySet the position adjustment tool 4-41
correctly.

Set NPN or PNP according to the

Is the Polarity correctly set? 7-18
circuits of the external devices.

Set N.O. (normally open) or N.C.

Are the N.O. and N.C. correctly set? (normally closed) according to the 7-16
circuits of the external devices.

Is the trigger condition set to Select [External] in Trigger Options.

4-9
[External]?

Correctly connect to the external

Is the input line correctly connected? 2-11
devices.

Has the input setting been made Adjust the input line and input settings
An external trigger cannot be input. 7-14
correctly? correctly in [Input Settings].

When NPN is selected in the Polarity,

the circuit becomes a non-voltage
Is the Polarity correctly set? input circuit. When PNP is selected 7-18
in the Polarity, the circuit becomes a
voltage input circuit. Check the cables.

Has the switching method for the Set the [Program Switching Method]
7-14
programs been correctly set? to [External Input].

Correctly connect to the external

Is the input line correctly connected? 2-11
devices.

Has the input setting been made Adjust the input line and input settings
7-14
correctly? correctly in [Input Settings].

The program number cannot be When NPN is selected in the Polarity,

changed with the input line. the circuit becomes a non-voltage
Is the Polarity correctly set? input circuit. When PNP is selected 7-18

A
in the Polarity, the circuit becomes a
voltage input circuit. Check the cables.

When using P032 to P127, is the SD Insert the SD card correctly and close
8-10
card correctly inserted? the cover.

Is the program expansion function Set the [Transfer Program Settings] to

8-13
correctly set? [Enable].

Refer to “Remedy when the Monitor

The control panel and the sensor
Check the cables and settings. cannot be Connected with the Sensor” A-17
cannot be connected.
(Page A-16).

Image data cannot be transferred via Refer to “Remedy when data transfer
Check the cables and settings. A-29
FTP. via FTP is unavailable”

Image data cannot be transferred to Check if the settings are correct and Refer to “Remedy when data transfer
A-16
the SD card. if the SD card is correctly inserted. to the SD card is unavailable”

A-8 IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel)

 Error Messages

Error Messages

Checking errors by observing the PWR/ERR indicator light

The causes of and remedies for an error can be checked by observing the indicator light.
PWR/ERR
indicator light

The indicator light on the sensor head blinks (red) when the light on the sensor amplifier is ON (red) or blinking (red).
PWR/ERR
indicator Cause Remedy
status

ON In operation. -

Setting in progress.
Green Operation stopped.
Blink The sensor head model has been changed. (PWR/ -
ERR, OUT and TRIG blink (green) at the same
time.)

yyCycle the power of this device.

A system error occurred. yyIf the same error occurs, contact your nearest
KEYENCE office.

A startup memory read error occurred.

ON yyInitialize the settings.
yyA data abnormality occurred due to noise or
yyIf the same error occurs, contact your nearest
because the power switched OFF while writing
KEYENCE office.
was in progress.

An error occurred in switching the advanced For details, refer to “Checking error message on the
program at the time of startup or during operation. control panel” (Page A-11).

yyA trigger error can be fixed using one of the following

procedures.
yyNext normal trigger input
yyClear Error input
yySwitching the program number

A
yyProceeding to the settings screen of the sensor
yyInput an external trigger in the following cases:
A trigger error occurred. The judgment process is
Red - The [Trigger Accept Timing] is set to [Send after
not performed.
BUSY Output OFF] and busy output is OFF
An external trigger is input when the [Trigger
- The [Trigger Accept Timing] is set to [Send after
Accept Timing] is set to [Send after BUSY Output
READY Output ON] and ready output is ON
OFF] and the busy output is ON or when ready
yySet the trigger interval of the internal trigger to a value
output is OFF and [Send after READY Output ON]
that is longer than the processing time when [Trigger
Blink in active. Otherwise, the internal trigger interval is
Accept Timing] is set to [Send after BUSY Output OFF]
faster than the processing time.
(calculate the data transfer time when [BUSY Output
Settings] are set to [Until Judgment is Complete]).
Increase the capture interval when [Send after READY
Output ON] is set.
yyAn error will not occur if the trigger error is set to
[OFF] described in output assignment for the Settings
Navigator (Page 4-149).

For details, refer to “Checking error message on the

A strobe error occurred.
control panel” (Page A-11).

An error occurred in switching the advanced For details, refer to “Checking error message on the
program during setup. control panel” (Page A-11).

IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel) A-9

 Error Messages

PWR/ERR
indicator Cause Remedy
status

yyAn external master image registration error can be

fixed using one of the following procedures.
An external master image registration error (with
yySuccessful in next external master image registration
no registered master image) occurred. The master
yyClear Error input
image is not updated.
yySwitching the program number
yyThe image to be registered as a master image
yyProceeding to the settings screen of the sensor
was not imaged.
yyTaking an image to be registered as a master image
yyThe work memory is insufficient.
and registering it as an external master image.
yyDeleting one or more detection tools.
An external master image registration error (with
registered master image) occurred. The following
errors occurred even though the image was yyAn external master image registration error can be
updated and registered as a master image. fixed using one of the following procedures.
yyFor the new master image, the outline cannot be yySuccessful in next external master image registration
extracted with the outline tool. yyClear Error input
yyFor the new master image, the area cannot be yySwitching the program number
extracted with the Color Area/Area tool. yyProceeding to the settings screen of the sensor
Red Blink yyFor the new master image, the edge cannot be yyChecking that the image to be registered and the
extracted with the Edge Pixel/Width/Diameter/ detection tools/position adjustment settings are
Edge/Pitch tool. applicable.
yyIn Learning mode, an external master image
registration can not be used.

An SD card error occurred. The following errors For details, refer to “Remedy when data transfer to the
occurred. SD card is unavailable” (Page A-16).
yyAccessing the SD card has failed.
yyTransfer to the SD card failed.
An FTP error occurred. The following errors
An FTP error can be fixed using one of the following
occurred.
procedures.
yyConnection with the FTP server failed.
yyClick the [OK] button on the Error screen.
yyTranfer to the transfer destination folder failed.
yyClear Error input.
yyThe transfer speed could not catch up to the
yyResolve the causes of transfer failure.
sensor processing speed.

For details, refer to “Checking error message on the

An SNTP synchronization error occurred.
control panel” (Page A-11).

Power is not supplied to this device. yyConnect the power cable correctly.
OFF
yyUse a power source of the correct rating.

Errors in a state that the PWR/ERR indicator light lights in red or blinks in red turn the error output ON.
“Cables” (Page 2-11)
“4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to Output Line)” (Page 4-149)

A-10 IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel)

 Error Messages

Checking error message on the control panel

Output/
Message Cause Remedy
Indicator
Sensor system error happens. A system error occurred in the yyTurn on the power of the sensor
sensor. again.
Turn on sensor. yyIt is possible that a fault occurred yyIf the same error occurs, contact *1
If not turned on, contact local service inside the sensor. your nearest KEYENCE office.
center.
Sensor internal memory reading has failed. A memory read error occurred when yyInitialize the settings following the
the sensor started. instructions on the screen.
Turn on the power of the sensor again or yyA data error occurred. yyTurn on the power of the sensor
initialize sensor. yyIt is possible that the power was again.
*1
After this message is closed, [Initialize] switched OFF during writing, or yyDo not turn OFF the power while
button will be displayed. noise was picked up. saving the settings.
yyIf the same error occurs, contact
your nearest KEYENCE office.
Sensor program xx is damaged. A memory read error occurred when yyInitialize the settings following the
Initialization is necessary. the sensor started. instructions on the screen.
yyA data error occurred during the yyTurn on the power of the sensor
After this message is closed, the [Initialize] execution of program number xx. again.
*1
button for the program xx will be displayed. yyIt is possible that the power was yyDo not turn OFF the power while
switched OFF during writing, or saving the settings.
noise was picked up. yyIf the same error occurs, contact
your nearest KEYENCE office.
Trigger error A trigger error occurred. Judgment yyA trigger error can be fixed using
processing has not been executed. one of the following procedures.
yyIf a target is to be imaged using yyNext normal trigger input
an external trigger, the external yyInput of Clear Error
trigger was input during a BUSY yySwitching the program number
status. yyProceeding to the settings
yyIf a target is to be imaged using an screen of the sensor
internal trigger, the trigger interval yyDo not input the external trigger
was shorter than the processing during a BUSY status. *2
time. yySet the trigger interval of the
internal trigger to a value that is
longer than the processing time.
yyAn error will not occur if the
trigger error setting is set to [OFF]
described in output assignment
for the Settings Navigator (Page
4-149).

IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel) A-11

 Error Messages

Output/
Message Cause Remedy
Indicator
Some tools can not correctly judged An external master image yyAn external master image
because of insufficient outline extraction registration error (with registered registration error can be fixed
amount master image) occurred. The using one of the following
as a result of “Ext. Master Save”. following errors occurred even procedures.
(Matching rate is 0.) though the image was updated and yySuccessful in next external
Check tool configuration. registered as a master image. master image registration
yyFor the new master image, the yyInput of Clear Error
Some tools can not correctly judged outline cannot be extracted with yySwitching the program number
because area is 0 as a result of “Ext. the outline tool. yyProceeding to the settings
Master Save”. yyFor the new master image, the screen of the sensor
(Matching rate is 0.) area cannot be extracted with the yyChecking that the image to be
Check tool configuration. Color Area/Area tool. registered and the detection tools/
yyFor the new master image, the position adjustment settings are
edge cannot be extracted with the applicable. *2
Some tools can not correctly judged Edge Pixel/Width/Diameter/Edge/ yyAdjusting the brightness of the
because the edge extraction amount as Pitch tool. image to be registered properly.
a result of the “Ext. Master Save” is not yyThe brightness correction cannot
sufficient. be performed correctly for the new
(Matching rate is 0.) master image.
Check tool configuration. yyIn Learning mode, an external
Brightness adjustment area is not master image registration can not
adjustable as a result of “Ext. Master Save”. be used.
Check configuration of brightness
adjustment.
While in learning mode, the external master
image failed to register.
External master registration failed because An external master image yyAn external master image
image had not been captured. registration error (with no registered registration error can be fixed
master image) occurred. The using one of the following
master image is not updated. procedures.
yyThe image to be registered as a yySuccessful in next external
master image was not imaged. master image registration
yyThe work memory is insufficient. yyInput of Clear Error
External master registration fails because yySwitching the program number *2
of lack of work memory. yyProceeding to the settings
screen of the sensor
yyTaking an image to be registered
as a master image and registering
it as an external master image.
yyDeleting one or more detection
tools.
Monitor fatal error (XXX) occurred. A system error occurred in the yyTurn on the power of the control
Contact your nearest KEYENCE control panel. panel again.

A
office. yyIt is possible that a fault occurred yyIf the same error occurs, contact
inside the control panel. your nearest KEYENCE office.
Monitor system error happens. *3
Turn on monitor.
If not turned on, contact local service
center.
Connecting to sensor… Connection is not possible because For details, refer to “Remedy when
there is no response from the the Monitor cannot be Connected
sensor. with the Sensor” (Page A-17).
Connecting to sensor (XXX.XXX.XXX. Connection is not possible because
XXX)… there is no response from the
sensor with the specified IP
address. *4
Communication timeout to sensor occurred. Connection is not possible because
there is no response from the
sensor.
Data transfer to sensor failed. Connection is not possible because
data transmission to the sensor has
failed.

A-12 IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel)

 Error Messages

Output/
Message Cause Remedy
Indicator
Specified sensor is being connected to Connection is not possible because Disconnect the presently connected
other PC or panel. the specified sensor is connected control panel or PC and then re-
to a different control panel or a connect the sensor.
different PC. *4
Only one control panel or PC can
be connected to a sensor at the
same time.
Writing in file fails. File saving to the USB memory Replace the USB memory.
failed.
Access to file or folder failed. Access to the USB memory failed. yyFormat the USB memory.
Data saving has failed. The USB memory is broken. yyReplace the USB memory.
If it happens repeatedly:
Replace USB memory.
Format USB memory.
Disk space is insufficient. Saving is not possible because the Increase the amount of free space
amount of free space of the USB by deleting files in the USB memory
memory is insufficient. or by formatting.
There is not enough space to perform Saving is not possible because the Increase the amount of free space
individual program backup. amount of free space of the USB by deleting files in the USB memory
memory is insufficient. or by formatting.
This file configuration data is for xxxx. The setting files for a different Read the setting files of a sensor of
This file is not readable. model of sensor cannot be read. the same model.
FTP Connection Error Connection with the FTP server For details, refer to “Remedy
failed. when data transfer via FTP is
FTP Transfer Error (Transfer Failed) Data transfer to the transfer unavailable” (Page A-29).
destination folder failed.
*2
FTP Transfer Error (Insufficient Data Buffer) Data which is larger than the
remaining storage of the FTP buffer
has been created and the transfer
failed.
Sensor head and amplifier are not A sensor head of the IV series has Connect the sensor head of IV2
compatible with each other. Connect been connected with the sensor Series.
correct sensor head and amplifier together. amplifier of the IV2 series.
No sensor head is connected to the sensor The sensor head is not connected. Connect the sensor head.
amplifier.
Connect a sensor head to the sensor
amplifier, and then turn on power again.
If not turned on, contact local service
center.
A connection cannot be established with Connection with the sensor failed. Check the following items.
number **.
Check the following items.
- The sensor’s IP address
yySpecify the correct IP address of
the sensor.
yyPower supply for the sensor.
A
- The sensor’s power supply yyNetwork connection
- The network wiring yyNetwork settings of the control
- The network settings of the panel. panel
Return to the sensor settings menu An error occurred in switching to the Clear the error message. The error
because the program file selected by the advanced program (external input) is cleared and the system moves
external input is not found. at the time of startup. to the setting screen. Then perform
the following:
*The program number will be switched to yyMake the system recognize the
P000. SD card again that stores the *5
To start operation, correct advanced program.
set the destination of the program to a valid yySelect between P000 and P031.
program number,
or change the method of switching the
program.

IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel) A-13

 Error Messages

Output/
Message Cause Remedy
Indicator
The program number will switch to P000 An error occurred in switching Clear the error message. The error
because the previously selected program the advanced program (panel/ is cleared and the system moves to
file is not found. PC/communication) at the time of the setting screen or RUN screen.
Do you wish to start operation? startup. Then perform the following:
[Yes] yyMake the system recognize again
Operation will start. the SD card that stores the correct
*5
[No] advanced program.
Return to the sensor settings menu. yySelect between P000 and P031.
yyWhen clearing the error message,
operation can be selected to
continue with P000 or move to the
setting screen..
Return to the sensor settings menu An error occurred in switching the Clear the error message. The error
because the program file selected by the advanced program (external input) is cleared and the system moves
external input is not found. during operation. to the setting screen. Then perform
the following:
*The program number will be switched to yyMake the system recognize again
*1
P000. the SD card that stores the correct
To start operation, advanced program.
set the switching destination of the program yySelect between P000 and P031.
to a valid program number,
or change how to switch the program.
The program number will switch to P000 A setup error of the advanced Make the system recognize again
because the previously selected program program occurred during setup. the SD card that stores the correct *2
file is not found. advanced program.
Strobe error Strobe output duplicated because yyThe one-shot ON time of the
the one-shot ON time of the strobe strobe output should be 1/2 (duty
output is too long for the trigger factor in the shortest cycle is
interval. 50%) of the capture interval that is
displayed on the operation screen.
yyA strobe error can be fixed using
one of the following procedure.
yyWhen the next strobe output
*2
does not duplicate
yyClear Error input.
yySwitching the program number
yyProceeding to the settings
screen of the sensor
yyAn error will not occur if “Strobe
Error Output” (Page 7-17) is set
to [OFF].
SNTP synchronization error Connection with the SNTP server Check the settings for the
failed. connection with the following SNTP

A
server.
yyWhen connecting using an IP
address: IP address
yyWhen connecting using a host
name: Host name, DNS server
yyCheck if the SNTP server is
*2
correctly operating.
yyConnect the sensor via a network
and correctly make network
settings (IP address, subnet
mask, and default gateway).
yyAn error will not occur if the Sync
Error Output (Page 9-11) is set to
[OFF].

A-14 IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel)

 Error Messages

Output/
Message Cause Remedy
Indicator
Accessing the data in the SD card failed. Accessing the data in the SD card For details, refer to “Remedy when
failed. data transfer to the SD card is
unavailable” (Page A-16).
SD card transfer error Data transfer to the transfer
(Transfer failure) destination folder failed.
*2
SD card transfer error Data which is larger than the
(Insufficient Data Buffer) remaining storage of the transfer
buffer has been created and the
transfer failed.
*1 Error output from the sensor: ON, PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor: Lighting (red), PWR indicator light of the
control panel: Lighting (red)
*2 Error output from the sensor: ON, PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor: Blinking (red), PWR indicator light of the
control panel: Blinking (red)
*3 PWR indicator light of the control panel: Lighting (red)
*4 SENSOR indicator light of the control panel: Off
*5 Error output from the sensor: does not work, PWR/ERR indicator light of the sensor: Lighting (red),
PWR indicator light of the control panel: Lighting (red)

IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel) A-15

 Remedy when data transfer to the SD card is unavailable

Remedy when data transfer to the SD card is

unavailable
Status Remedy

yyDo not remove the SD card while it is being accessed.

yyFormat the SD card.
yyReplace the SD card.
yyThere may be influence from noise.

Accessing the data in the SD card failed.

yyCheck the amount of free space.

yyRemove the SD card from the SD card slot, install it again and close the
cover. Make sure that the SD card indicator lights.

Data transfer to the transfer destination folder

failed.

yyIncrease the trigger cycle of the sensor.

“Setting the Trigger Options” (Page 4-11)
yyControl the trigger using the busy output. In doing do, set the timing of busy
output to “Until Data Transfer is Complete.”
“BUSY Output Settings” (Page 7-17)

A
Data which is larger than the remaining
storage of the transfer buffer has been created
and the transfer failed.

A-16 IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel)

 Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected with the Sensor

Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected

with the Sensor
Remedy when direct connection (1 unit) is unavailable

Status Remedy

yySupply power to the sensor.

yyConnect the sensor and the control panel correctly and directly.
“Connecting directly (1 unit)” (Page 2-17)
yyAfter a correct connection is established as a result of a retry, the run screen
opens automatically.
yyThe Sensor Connect screen opens when the [Cancel] button or [OK] button
is tapped. Tap the [Start Connection] button after a correct connection has
established.

Retries occur repeatedly because connection

is not possible.
The status is as shown below.
yyConnection is not possible after power ON.
yyConnection is not possible using the
[Connect] button of the sensor connection
setup screen.

If the problem is not solved using one of the above remedies, reset (initialize)
the sensor network settings.
“Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)” (Page A-30)

yyAn error (381) “Data transfer to sensor fails.”

may also be displayed.
yyConnection became impossible after
connection was established.

yyConnect the sensor and the control panel correctly and directly.
“Connecting directly (1 unit)” (Page 2-17)
yyTap the [OK] button and close the message.
yyIn the case of network connection, change the configuration to network

A
connection.
“When connecting to the sensor via network connection” (Page 7-30)

The network is connected to other network

devices such as multiple sensors or
computers.

IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel) A-17

 Remedy when data transfer to the SD card is unavailable

Remedy when direct connection (2 units or more) is unavailable

Status Remedy
yySupply power to the sensor.
yyConnect the sensor and the control panel correctly.
yyAfter a correct connection is established as a result of a retry, the run screen
opens automatically.
yyThe Sensor Connect screen opens when the [Cancel] button or [OK] button
is tapped. Tap the [Start Connection] button after a correct connection has
established.

Retries occur repeatedly because connection is

not possible.
The status is as shown below.
yyConnection is not possible after power ON.
yyConnection is not possible using the [Connect]
button of the sensor connection setup screen.

If the problem is not solved using one of the above remedies, reset (initialize)
the sensor network settings.
“Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)” (Page A-30)

Connection became impossible after connection

was established.
yySupply power to the sensor.
yyConnect the sensor and the control panel correctly.
“Connecting via Network (Direct Connection (2 units or more)/Network
Connection)” (Page 2-18)

If the problem is not solved using one of the above remedies, reset (initialize)
the sensor network settings.
“Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)” (Page A-30)

A
When the connected sensors were searched
for, the sensors connected to the control panel
were not listed.

A-18 IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel)

 Remedy when data transfer to the SD card is unavailable

Status Remedy
yy[Protocol] for the field network is [PROFINET]. Set [Protocol] for the field
network to [Disable]. Network connection is required to set to [Disable].
yyTo use PROFINET, use the network connection.
“When connecting to the sensor via network connection” (Page 7-30)

When the connected sensors were searched

for, the sensors connected to the control panel
were not listed.

IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel) A-19

 Remedy when data transfer to the SD card is unavailable

Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable

Status Remedy

yySupply power to the sensor and the network equipment.

yyCorrectly connect with the sensor and the network equipment.
yyAfter a correct connection is established as a result of a retry, the run screen
opens automatically.

The Sensor Connect screen opens when the [Cancel] button or [OK] button is
tapped.

Retries occur repeatedly because connection

is not possible after the power is turned on.

yyTap the [Connect] button after a correct connection has been established.
yyTap the [Search Sensor] button to search for the sensor.
“Searching for and connecting to sensors on the network” (Page 7-30)
If unable to connect, refer to “When the connection cannot be established
by searching for the sensor” (Page A-20).
yyTap the [Specify Sensor] button to connect the sensor.
“Specifying the IP address of and connecting to the sensor” (Page 7-31)
If unable to connect, refer to “When the connection cannot be established
by specifying the sensor” (Page A-21).

yyAn error (381) “Data transfer to sensor fails.”

may also be displayed.
yyConnection became impossible after
connection was established.

When the connection cannot be established by searching for the sensor

yySupply power to the sensor and the network equipment.

A
yyCorrectly connect with the sensor and the network equipment.
“Connecting via Network (Direct Connection (2 units or more)/Network
Connection)” (Page 2-18)
yyConfirm that the IP address of the control panel does not coincide with that
of the sensor or another device. Also, correctly set the subnet mask and the
default gateway.
“Confirming/Setting the IP address of the control panel” (Page A-26)
yyChange to direct connection (“1 unit” or “2 units or more”) and confirm that
the IP address of the sensor does not coincide with that of the control panel
or another device. Also, reset (initialize) the network setting for the sensor.
The sensor was not found using the [Search “When directly connecting with a sensor (1 unit)” (Page 7-28)
Sensor] button on the Sensor Connect screen. “When directly connecting with multiple sensors (2 units or more)” (Page
7-29)
“Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor” (Page A-27)
“Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)” (Page A-30)
yyThe following conditions are required for a successful sensor search.
yyThe subnet masks of the sensor and control panel are matched.
yyThe sensor network setting is not set or the IP address is not duplicated.

A-20 IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel)

 Remedy when data transfer to the SD card is unavailable

Status Remedy

When the connection cannot be established by specifying the sensor

yySupply power to the sensor and the network equipment.
yyCorrectly connect with the sensor and the network equipment.
“Connecting via Network (Direct Connection (2 units or more)/Network
Connection)” (Page 2-18)
yySpecify the correct IP address of the sensor.
yyIf the sensor IP address has not been set, establish a connection using the
[Search Sensor] button.
“Searching for and connecting to sensors on the network” (Page 7-30)
yyConfirm that the IP address of the control panel does not coincide with that
of the sensor or another device. Also, correctly set the subnet mask and the
Connection is not possible using the [Specify default gateway.
Sensor] button or the [Connect] button on the “Confirming/Setting the IP address of the control panel” (Page A-26)
Sensor Connect screen. yyChange to direct connection (“1 unit” or “2 units or more”) and confirm
that the IP address of the sensor does not coincide with that of the control
panel or another device. Also, correctly set the subnet mask and the default
gateway.
Also, reset (initialize) the network setting for the sensor.
“When directly connecting with a sensor (1 unit)” (Page 7-28)
“When directly connecting with multiple sensors (2 units or more)” (Page
7-29)
“Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor” (Page A-27)
“Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)” (Page A-30)

yyTap the [Search Sensor] button to search for the sensor.

“Searching for and connecting to sensors on the network” (Page 7-30)
If unable to connect, refer to “When the connection cannot be established
by searching for the sensor” (Page A-20).
yyTo make connection by specifying the IP address, tap the [Edit] button and
display the [IP Address] screen. Input the IP address of the sensor and tap
the [Start Connection] button.
“Specifying the IP address of and connecting to the sensor” (Page 7-31)
If unable to connect, refer to “When the connection cannot be established
by specifying the sensor” (Page A-21).
First connection after purchasing, or
connection after the initialization of the control
panel.

IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel) A-21

 Remedy when data transfer to the SD card is unavailable

Confirming the status by observing the indicator light of the sensor

LINK/ACT (link/activity) indicator light

Displays the link status with the network.
PWR/ERR
indicator light

Status of the
LINK/ACT Status Remedy
indicator light

Correct link with the control panel or the

ON
Ethernet switch. Link is normal.
Green Correct link with the control panel or the When connection with the control panel is not possible, check
Blink Ethernet switch. the STATUS indicator light.
Data is being sent and received.

Incorrect link with the control panel or the

yySupply power to the sensor.
Ethernet switch.
yySupply power to the control panel or the Ethernet switch of the
OFF yyPower is not supplied to this unit or the
connection target.
connection target.
yyConnect the cable correctly.
yyThe cable is not connected correctly.

A-22 IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel)

 Remedy when data transfer to the SD card is unavailable

STATUS indicator light

Indicates the connection status with the control panel.
Confirm that the LINK/ACT indicator light is green (lighting) or green (blinking) and then check the STATUS indicator light.
STATUS indicator
light

STATUS
Status of the Status Remedy
indicator light

Confirm that the IP address does not coincide with that of

The IP address is a duplicate. another device.
ON
Detecting a network loop. Confirm the connection to the network.
Red Restart the sensor after removing the problem.

Timeout has occurred at the

Blink communication with EtherNet/IP Check the connection with the scanner.
communication scanner.

Connected normally to the control panel.

The connection with the control panel
ON -
has been established by acquiring the IP
address.

For direct connection (1 unit)

“Remedy when direct connection (1 unit) is unavailable”
Green The sensor is not connected to the control (Page A-17)
panel. For direct connection (2 units or more)
Blink The IP address of the sensor has been “Remedy when direct connection (2 units or more) is
acquired, but connection with the control unavailable” (Page A-18)
panel has not been established. For network connection
“Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable” (Page
A-20)

For direct connection (1 unit)

“Remedy when direct connection (1 unit) is unavailable”
(Page A-17)
For direct connection (2 units or more)
A
Connected incorrectly to the control panel.
OFF The IP address of the sensor has not been “Remedy when direct connection (2 units or more) is
acquired. unavailable” (Page A-18)
For network connection
“Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable” (Page
A-20)

yyThe communication timeout time is 1 minute.

yyDuring the timeout interval after an error has occurred, the screen of the control panel may fail to be updated while
the STATUS indicator light is on, or the control panel may not accept an operation.
yyDuring the timeout interval, devices other than the previously connected control panel cannot be connected.

IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel) A-23

 Remedy when data transfer to the SD card is unavailable

Confirming the status by observing the SENSOR indicator light of the control panel
The causes of an unavailable connection and countermeasures can be confirmed by checking the SENSOR indicator light of the
control panel.
SENSOR
indicator light

SENSOR
Status of the Status Remedy
indicator light

ON Connected normally to the sensor. -

For direct connection (1 unit)

“Remedy when direct connection (1 unit) is unavailable”
(Page A-17)
No correct connection with the sensor.
Green For direct connection (2 units or more)
The link with the sensor or the Ethernet
Blink “Remedy when direct connection (2 units or more) is
switch has been established, but connection
unavailable” (Page A-18)
with the sensor has not been established.
For network connection
“Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable” (Page
A-20)

No correct connection with the sensor. yySupply power to the control panel.
The link with the sensor or the Ethernet yySupply power to the sensor or the Ethernet switch of the
OFF
switch has not been established. connection target.
yyConnect the cable correctly.

yyThe communication timeout time is 1 minute.

yyDuring the timeout interval after an error has occurred, the screen may fail to be updated while the SENSOR indicator
light is on, or the control panel may not accept an operation.

A-24 IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel)

 Remedy when data transfer to the SD card is unavailable

Other methods of confirming a network 3 Input the IP address of the sensor whose
existence is to be confirmed and tap the [Ping
connection
Test] button.

Confirming the existence of the sensor from

the control panel
Whether or not the sensor is correctly connected can be
confirmed by performing test communication from the control
panel to the sensor to be connected.

1 Display the [Sensor Connection Settings] screen.

The confirmation result will be displayed on the control

panel.
zz
When the confirmation result is “OK”

zz
When the confirmation result is “NG”

zz
When the control panel starts for the first time or
after the initialization of the control panel „„
If the displayed confirmation result is “NG”
“Operation for Initial Startup of the Control Panel Confirm the following.
(Network Connection)” (Page 3-8) yySupply power to the sensor and the network
equipment.
zz
If not connected with the sensor via network yyCorrectly connect with the sensor and the network
connection. equipment.
After the power turned on, the [Sensor Connection “Connecting via Network (Direct Connection (2 units or
Settings] screen opens automatically. more)/Network Connection)” (Page 2-18)
yyCorrectly set the IP address, the subnet mask, and
zz
If connected with the sensor via network the default gateway of the control panel and sensor.
connection “Searching for a sensor to be connected” (Page
“When connecting to the sensor via network 3-10)
connection” (Page 7-30) “Confirming/Setting the IP address of the control
When the control panel and the sensor are panel” (Page A-26)
connected via network, [Network Connection] “Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor”
will be displayed and the IP address of the (Page A-27)
connected sensor will be displayed.
The existence confirmation function utilizes
the ping command. Note that even when this
2 Tap the [Edit] button. is executed for devices other than a sensor,
confirmation will succeed if there is a response
to the ping command. A

IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel) A-25

 Remedy when data transfer to the SD card is unavailable

Confirming/Setting the IP address of the 5 Tap the [OK] button if the setting has been
changed.
control panel The control panel will re-start.

1 Display the [Panel Settings] screen and tap the zz

If the monitor could be connected with the
sensor
[Sensor Connection Settings] tab.
The run screen opens.
zz
If not connected with the sensor via network
connection zz
If the monitor could not be connected with the
After the power turned on, the [Sensor Connection sensor
Settings] screen opens automatically. The Sensor Connect screen opens. Set the connection
method etc. and connect the monitor with the sensor.
zz
If connected with the sensor via network “Connection method” (Page 7-28)
connection
“Control panel settings” (Page 7-26)
For detail on how to make connection after the
2 Tap the [Settings] button. control panel starts for the first time or after
initialization (Page 3-17) of the control panel, refer
to “Operation for Initial Startup of the Control
Panel (Network Connection)” (Page 3-8).

The network setup screen of the control panel opens.

3 Check the IP address of the control panel

A
To change the settings, tap the [Edit] button to display
the editing screen. Set the desired address and tap the
[OK] button.

4 After confirmation/setting is completed, tap the

[OK] button.
yyIf the setting has not been changed, system returns to
the [Panel Settings] screen.
yyIf the setting has been changed, the message “Monitor
will be restarted.” opens.

A-26 IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel)

 Remedy when data transfer to the SD card is unavailable

Confirming/Setting the IP address of the 5 Confirm the IP address of the sensor.

sensor
Directly connect (1 unit) the sensor and control panel, and
confirm the IP address of the sensor.
After returning to network connection, set the confirmed IP
address of the sensor, and then confirm whether or not the
sensor connects to the control panel.

1 Directly connect (1 unit) the control panel and

the sensor of the confirmation/setting target.
“Connecting directly (1 unit)” (Page 2-17)
“When directly connecting with a sensor (1 unit)” yyTapping the [Edit] button opens the screen to edit the
(Page 7-28)
address. Set the desired address and tap the [OK]
2 Display the Sensor Setup Menu screen. button.
“Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen” (Page 7-2) yyWhen the [Reset] button is tapped, the setup values

3 Tap the [Sensor Advanced] button. for the [IP Address], [Subnet Mask], and [Default
Gateway] will be reset and nothing will be set. Again,
set a user-defined address.

6 After confirmation/setting is completed, tap the

[OK] button and exit from the network settings.

7 Turn OFF the power and connect the sensor and

control panel via network connection.
“Connecting via Network (Direct Connection (2 units
or more)/Network Connection)” (Page 2-18)

8 Turn on the power.

4 Select the [Device Settings] tab and tap the zz
If the monitor could be connected with the
sensor
[Network Settings] button.
The run screen opens.

zz
If the monitor could not be connected with the
sensor
The Sensor connect screen opens. Set the connection
method etc. and connect the control panel with the
sensor.
“Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable”
(Page A-20)

IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel) A-27

 Remedy when data transfer to the SD card is unavailable

Confirming the router settings

When a router is used, confirm that the following port is
opened.
Sensor : 63000 (default value)
For the method to set the sensor port number, refer
to the following.
“ Network Settings (Sensor)” (Page 7-21)
yyBOOTP is fixed as 67 or 68.
yyThe FTP port number can be changed on the
server. It is generally 20 or 21.
yyThe SNTP port number can be changed on the
server. It is generally 123.

A-28 IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel)

 Remedy when data transfer to the SD card is unavailable

Remedy when data transfer via FTP is unavailable

Status Remedy

yyConfirm the IP address of the FTP server and set it correctly.

yyConfirm the port number of the FTP server and set it correctly. Moreover,
confirm the firewall software on the PC whether the port is available or not.
yyConfirm the user name for logging in to the FTP server and set it correctly.
yyConfirm the password for logging in to the FTP server and set it correctly.

Connection with the FTP server failed.

“Setting the connection destination” (Page 9-3)

yyAuthorization for accessing the transfer destination folder is not granted.

Acquire the access authorization of the transfer destination folder and
perform the operation again.
yyConfirm that there is no file with the same name as the transfer destination
folder name which has been set. If a file with the same name exists, change
the file name or change the transfer destination folder.
“Setting the transfer destination folder and file names” (Page 9-5)
yyWhen the control panel was switched from the [Run] screen to the [Program]
screen, the screen is switched to the [Program] screen after the transfer of
data has finished.

Data transfer to the transfer destination folder

failed.

If you click the [Cancel] button during the transfer, the transfer will be forcibly
A
finished and the Error screen will appear.

yyChange the trigger cycle of the sensor.

“Setting the Trigger Options” (Page 4-11)
yyConfirm the stress status of the network.

Data which is larger than the remaining

storage of the FTP buffer has been created
and the transfer failed.

IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel) A-29

 Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)

Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch)

The network settings such as the IP address can be yyDo not connect multiple sensor amplifiers
initialized to the factory default by means of the IP reset to the same network and initialize them
switch of the sensor. A fixed IP address can also be simultaneously. Doing so will result in
assigned. duplicate IP addresses.
yyCheck that no devices connected to the same
yyThe IP reset switch is used when joining a network have the IP address 192.168.10.10.
sensor used in another network to a new Doing so will result in duplicate IP addresses.
network, or when trouble occurs during
connection.
yyDo not initialize a correctly connected sensor.
The connection will be interrupted.
Initializing the network settings

Settings after initialization

1 Use a long and thin pin (1 to 2 mm in diameter) to
hold down the IP reset switch with the power on.

zz
Factory default settings
Initialize the settings to the factory defaults. Normally
initialize the settings to the factory defaults. The BOOTP
client is enabled.
Setting Items Settings after initialization
STATUS
100/10 Mbps indicator
Communication speed
Automatically switches light

BOOTP
IP address setting method
(Bootstrap Protocol)

IP Address 0.0.0.01, *2

Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0*2

Long and thin pin
Default Gateway 0.0.0.0*2

*1 If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, only the BOOTP client zz

Factory default settings
function can be used. Press and hold the switch for about 3 seconds. The
Do not assign an IP address from a BOOTP server STATUS indicator light will blink twice (orange) and
or DHCP server except the control panel to be then turn off. The settings are initialized to the factory
defaults.
connected.
*2 In the Network Settings screen of the sensor, [Empty] is zz
Fixed IP address
displayed. Press and hold the switch for about 10 seconds.
Continue pressing the switch after the settings are
”Network Settings (Sensor)” (Page 7-21)
initialized to the factory defaults after about 3 seconds.
zz
Fixed IP address After about 10 seconds, the STATUS indicator light will
Assign a fixed IP address (192.168.10.10). Selection blink twice (orange) and then blink (green). A fixed IP
is not necessary when connecting to the control panel address (192.168.10.10) is assigned.
(IV2-CP50).

A Setting Items

Communication speed
Settings after initialization

100/10 Mbps
Automatically switches

IP Address 192.168.10.10

Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

yySet the IP address of the control panel (IV2-

CP50) to connect to an IP address on the same
network. (Example: 192.168.10.50)
yyTo assign an arbitrary IP address, initialize
to the fixed IP address (192.168.10.10), then
connect the control panel and change to the
arbitrary IP address.
 Network Settings (Sensor)” (Page 7-21)

A-30 IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel)

 Maintenance

Maintenance

Attaching the protection sheet

A protection sheet (OP-88351) can be attached to protect
the LCD panel.

1 Remove the backing film (transparent) from the

back side of the protection sheet.

Backing film (back)

Adhesive side
(back of the protection
sheet)

Protection sheet

2 Apply the protection sheet on the control panel’s

display with the tab at the lower right.

Tab

Protection sheet

Apply the protection film while making sure

that no debris is on the screen.
A

IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel) A-31

 Index

Index

Numerics B
1-Ax. Adj . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123, 4-125 Backing up in a batch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
1. Image Optimization (Clearly Image a Target) . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
2-Ax. Adj . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124, 4-126 Basic Configurations of IV2 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
2. Master Registration Basic Operation Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
(Registering an Image as a Reference) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Basic operation of the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3. Learning Settings (Setting the Judgment Method Basic Operation of the Settings Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
of the Target in Learning Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 Basic Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
3. Tool Settings (Setting the Judgment Method Behavior When the Sensor Power is Turned On or Off . . 10-13
of the Target of Standard Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 Brightness correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4. Output Assignment (Setting Details of Outputting to
Output Line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149 C
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
A Cancelling One-Shot output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
About Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Capturing the control panel screen and saving it to USB
About the Pre-capture Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Achieving adequate image brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 Capturing the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Achieving good focus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 Changeover for a Target (Program Functions) . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Adding a tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48 Changing Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Adding/Editing/Copying/Deleting a Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48 Changing the logging conditions of the image history . . . . 5-22
Additional Learning by Taken Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Changing the timing of status outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Additional Learning from the Learning Image History . . . . 6-10 Checking error message on the control panel . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Additional Learning from the Running Image History . . . . . 6-5 Checking errors by observing the PWR/ERR
Additional Learning from USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Additional Learning Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Checking the Field of View and installed distance . . . . . . . 2-2
Adjustable bracket for IV2 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9, 11-10 Checking the Package Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Adjusting in the LIVE Screen (Color Area Tool Only) . . . . 4-68 Clearing Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Adjusting the color tint (for color type only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20 Clearing the saved images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Adjusting the installed distance (WD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 Color Area/Area tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Adjusting Thresholds for Judgment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 Color/Brightness Average Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Advanced Brightness Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Color Filters (color type only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Advanced Color Extraction/Advanced Brightness Color Prohibition/Brightness Prohibition Tool . . . . . . . . . 4-141
Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72, 4-147 Color Range/Brightness Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Advanced Diameter Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103 Communication cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 11-13
Advanced Settings for Image Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Configuration of IV2 series network function . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Advanced Settings for the Color Prohibition/Brightness Configuring the SNTP time sync settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Prohibition Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147 Confirming Learning Image History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Advanced settings for the Diameter tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102 Confirming/Setting the IP address of the control panel . . . A-26
Advanced settings for the EdgePixels tool . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62 Confirming/Setting the IP address of the sensor . . . . . . . . A-27
Advanced settings for the Hi-Sp.Adj tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128 Confirming the existence of the sensor from the control
Advanced settings for the OCR tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138 panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25

A
Advanced Settings for the Outline Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55 Confirming the Images Whose Judgment are NG
Advanced Settings for the Output Assignment . . . . . . . . 4-151 (Image History) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Advanced Settings for the Position Adjustment Tool . . . . . 4-88 Confirming the NG Occurrence Status of the Sensor
Advanced settings for the width tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94 Connected (List of NG Sensor Occurrences Function) . . . 5-13
Advanced settings items for the output assignment . . . . 4-151 Confirming the router settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28
Advanced Settings of the Color Area/Area Tool . . . . . . . . 4-71 Confirming the Similar Images and Additional Learning . . 6-15
Advanced settings of the Color/Brightness Average tool . 4-78 Confirming the status by observing the indicator light of
Advanced settings of the Edge tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111 the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
Advanced settings of the Pitch tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118 Confirming the status by observing the SENSOR
Advanced settings of the position adjustment window . . . 4-34 indicator light of the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
Advanced Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44 Connecting directly (1 unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Adv. Panel Settings tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27 Connecting the cable to the sensor amplifier . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
All screen display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Connecting the Control Panel with Multiple Sensors . . . . . . 1-3
Attaching the optional mounting bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Connecting the Ethernet cable or LAN cable . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Attaching the protection sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-31 Connecting the I/O Cable for IV2 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Auto Adjustment by the Additional Learning (Learning Connecting the power cable of the control panel . . . . . . . 2-16
Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Connecting the sensor head/amplifier cable for the IV2
Auto Brightness Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 series and sensor amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Auto Focus Adj Pos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24

A-32 IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel)

 Index

Connecting the sensor head/amplifier cable for the IV2

E
series and sensor head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Connecting the Sensor with the Control Panel . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Edge Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113, 4-129
Connecting to a Field Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 EdgePixels tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Connecting to the SNTP Server to Set the Time . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Edge Sensitivity Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Connecting via Network (Direct Connection (2 units or Edge Sensitivity Auto Adjustment . . 4-92, 4-109, 4-117, 4-127
more)/Network Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Edge Sensitivity
Connection and Disconnection with the Sensor . . . . . . . . 3-15 Manual Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95, 4-112, 4-119, 4-128
Connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Edge tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
Connection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28, 9-15 Editing a program name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Control board mounting adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Editing a tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Control board mounting adapter (OP-88350) . . . . . . . . . 11-13 Editing Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Controlling Timing of Judgment with Triggers . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Editing the Status Result of a Detection Window
Controlling timing using BUSY output . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2, 10-4 to be Learned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Controlling timing using ready output . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3, 10-5 Editing the Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15, 11-4 Edit screen of the learning image history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Control panel for IV2 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10, 11-11 Edit Window Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Control panel options for IV2 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 Enabling the screen capture function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Control panel settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Copying a program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Ethernet cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Copying a Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49 Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Exiting the sensor settings and starting operation . . . . . . . . 5-2
Cut-off process of the matching rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6 External triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

D F
Default value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150 Field network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Deleting a tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50 Finishing by completing all steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Deleting the Learned Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Finishing the Settings Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Description for symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Finishing without completing the step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Detection Window Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 Fixed Reference Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62, 4-73
Detection window settings screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 Flow of Additional Learning Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Device name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 Flow of Learning Settings Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Device Settings tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Flow of the internal process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Diameter Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100 Flow of the Settings Navigator: Learning Mode
Diameter tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98 (IV2-G30F only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Digital Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Flow of the Settings Navigator: Standard Mode . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 Focus Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Disconnecting from the [Menu] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 For the processing time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Disconnecting Functions that can use external media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
in the [Sensor Connection Settings] screen . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Dismounting the dome attachment for the IV2 series . . . . . 2-6 H
Displaying and outputting the status result . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4 Hanging on a hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

A
Displaying and outputting the status result at the time of Hi-Sp.Adj tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5 Histogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Displaying from the run screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18, 6-7 Holding the Image of the Sensor on which NG Occurred
Displaying from the RUN screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 (NG Hold Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Displaying from the [Sensor Setup Menu] screen . . . 5-19, 6-7
Displaying the external media screen from the [Sensor
I
Setup Menu] screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Displaying the [Learned Hist.] screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 If detection becomes unstable due to the effect of
Displaying the Operation Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 unwanted edges other than the target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Displaying the [Program Details] screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 If good focus cannot be achieved by the Auto Focus
Displaying the [Running Image Hist.] screen . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Displaying the SD card screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 If it becomes unstable due to unwanted edge pixels
Displaying the Sensor Setup Menu Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 being extracted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Displaying the USB Memory screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 If the area search becomes unstable due to unwanted
Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 colors being extracted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Display Methods for Detection Windows (Learning Mode) 5-11 If the brightness cannot be properly adjusted due to
Display Methods of Tools (Standard Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 uneven brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 If the brightness cannot be properly adjusted in Auto
Dome attachment for IV2 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9, 11-9 Brightness Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Dot Matrix Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140 If the color you wish to judge cannot be extracted . . . . . . 6-24

IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel) A-33

 Index

If the detection becomes unstable due to the effect of

L
unwanted circles other than the target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
If the detection becomes unstable due to the effect of LAN cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
unwanted edges other than the target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 LAN cable (RJ-45 - RJ-45) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
If the detection becomes unstable due to the effect of Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
unwanted outlines other than the target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 Learning Multiple Images for Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
If the displayed confirmation result is “NG” . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25 Learning OK/NG Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35, 4-36
If the edge of a target cannot be detected . . . . . . . . 6-23, 6-25 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
If the matching rate difference LINK/ACT (link/activity) indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
between an “OK” and “NG” image is small . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 List display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
If the outline cannot be detected Loading and confirming saved images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
when the target goes out of position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 Logic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
If the outline of the reference target cannot be detected . . 6-22 L type Ethernet cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
If the outline of the target cannot be detected . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 L type Ethernet cable (M12 4pin - RJ-45) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
If the position adjustment becomes unstable due to the
effect of the unwanted outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 M
If the target circle cannot be detected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26 Main screen for Image Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
If the target edge pixels cannot be extracted . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25 Main screen for Master Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
If the target tilts and the outline cannot be detected . . . . . 6-23 Main Screen for the Learning Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
If the target tilts and the position adjustment becomes Main screen for the Output Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149
unstable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 Main screen for the Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Image Detail Screen of the Learning Image History . . . . . . 6-9 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-31
Image Types of the Settings Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Make the target large in the field of view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Imaging Area (Standard Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29, 4-60, 4-67, 4-76, 4-92, 4-100,
Importing a program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 4-108, 4-116, 4-133, 4-146
Importing the individual status output of each detection Matching rate at the time of protrusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
window/tool/logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Matching Rate of the Outline Tool and Position
Importing the Status Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Adjustment Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Importing the total status OK/total status NG output . . . . . 10-6 Method for the additional learning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Initialization of the Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Monitoring screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Initialize/Update tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13, 7-27 Mounting examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Initializing a program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Mounting on the Panel Surface of the Control Board . . . . . 2-9
Initializing the Network Settings (IP Reset Switch) . . . . . . A-30 Mounting the attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Initializing the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Mounting the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Input circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Mounting the dome attachment for IV2 series . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Input Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Mounting the polarizing filter attachment for the IV2 series
Input Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 (OP-87899),
Inputting characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 polarizing filter attachment for IV2-G300CA (OP-87900),
Inserting/Removing the SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 or polarizing filter attachment for IV2-G600MA (OP-87901) 2-6
Inserting/Removing the USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Mounting the Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Inserting the SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Mounting the Sensor Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Inserting the USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Mounting the sensor head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, 2-3
Installing the sensor at an angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

A
Mounting the spread lens attachment for IV2-G150MA
Internal trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 (OP-87902) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
I/O cable for IV2 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9, 11-10 Mounting to a wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
I/O Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Mounting with the wall mounting adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
I/O Settings tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
IV2-CP50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
N
IV2 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
IV2 Series Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Name and Function of Each Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Name and function of each part of the sensor amplifier . . 1-13
J Name and function of each part of the sensor head . . . . . 1-12
Names and Functions of the Operation Screen . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Judgment Notation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36 Network Settings (Sensor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Judgment processing flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 No-voltage input (When NPN output is selected) . . . . . . . 2-15

O
OCR Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
OCR Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
Operating in the shortest cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Operation flow when the power is turned on . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

A-34 IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel)

 Index

Operation for Initial Startup of the Control Panel

R
(Direct Connection (1 unit)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Operation for Initial Startup of the Control Panel Reading Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
(Direct Connection (2 units or more)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Reducing the affect of illumination variation . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Operation for Initial Startup of the Control Panel Reducing the image blur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
(Network Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Reducing the shininess of a glossy or metal surface . . . . 6-19
Operation for initial startup of the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Register From a File Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Operation of the Image Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Register From a Running Image History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Operation of the sensor amplifier indicator light . . . . . . . . 1-14 Registering the Master Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Operation of the sensor head indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Register Live Image as Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Operations that can be performed with the program Registration of Image from the Image History . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Registration of Image Saved in a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Operation when changing the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Registration of Taken Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Operation when Displaying Enlarged Images . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Remedy when connection via a network is unavailable . . A-20
Operation when the Power is Turned on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Remedy when data transfer to the SD card is unavailable A-16
Operation When the Registered Number Reaches the Remedy when data transfer via FTP is unavailable . . . . . A-29
Upper Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Remedy when direct connection (1 unit) is unavailable . . A-17
Operation with Full Screen Display of Image . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Remedy when direct connection (2 units or more) is
Optimizing the Size of the Detection Window . . . . . . . . . . 6-20 unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 Remedy when the Monitor cannot be Connected
Optional parts for the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 with the Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
Option of control panel for IV2 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Removing an SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Other methods of confirming a network connection . . . . . A-25 Removing the USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Outline tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51 Required environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Output circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Response time for the error clear input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Output Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Response time for the external master registration input 10-15
Output Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 Response time for the switch program input . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Overview of External Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Rotate image 180° . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Overview of Screen and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Rotation Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34, 4-56, 4-88
Overview of the FTP data transfer function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Run screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Overview of the List of NG Sensor Occurrences function . 5-13
Overview of the NG Hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 S
Overview of the Operation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Saving images from the learning image history individually 8-6
Overview of the program functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Saving images from the running image history individually . 8-6
Overview of the SD card data transfer function . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Saving Judgment Results and Judged Images
Overview of the SNTP time synchronization function . . . . . 9-9 to an FTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Overview of the Web monitor function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 Saving the program individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Saving the Sensor Settings and Images
P to a USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Panel Date/Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34 Saving the sensor settings or the image history . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Panel hole dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96, 4-104, 4-121
Panel Information button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27 SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9, 8-2

A
Panel/monitor power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 SD Card Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Panel/monitor power cable (M8 4pin - strand wire) . . . . . . 1-10 SD card format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Panel Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32 Search Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34, 4-56, 4-89
Pitch Extraction Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120 Searching for a sensor to be connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Pitch tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114 Search Range Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32, 4-53, 4-86
Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Polarizing filter attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Selecting the detection mode/tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Position Adjustment tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84 Selecting the detection window/tool window . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Preparation flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Selecting the Display Method of the Detection Window/
Preparation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Tool Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Preparing the program functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Selecting the File/Folder in the USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Preparing the SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Sensor advanced settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Procedure for Detection Window Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 Sensor Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8, 1-13, 11-2, 11-8
Procedure for OK/NG target learning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 Sensor Connection Settings tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Procedure to Add the Position Adjustment Window . . . . . 4-31 Sensor Date Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Processing during an operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 Sensor Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8, 1-12, 11-2, 11-5
Processing time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Sensor head/amplifier cable for IV2 series . . . . . . . . 1-9, 11-9
Program switch error when the power is turned on . . . . . 10-14 Sensor Information button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Protection sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Sensor wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel) A-35

 Index

Setting according to the image target difference to be Shortening the processing time of the Color Area/Area/
judged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20 Edge Pixels/Color Average/Brightness Average/Width/
Setting Advanced Control Panel Information . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26 Diameter/Edge/Pitch/Color Prohibition/Brightness
Setting by dividing into multiple detection windows . . . . . . 6-21 Prohibition tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Setting by inputting a value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Shortening the processing time of the OCR tool . . . . . . . . 6-31
Setting by the [-] / [+] button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Shortening the processing time of the Outline tool . . . . . . 6-30
Setting by the slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Shortening the processing time
Setting items for Edge tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106 of the position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Setting items for Learning OK/NG Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 Simple display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Setting items for the Color Area/Area tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63 Slot cover open/close detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Setting Items for the Color/Brightness Average tool . . . . . 4-74 Specification of Sensor I/O Circuit and Current . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Setting items for the Color Prohibition/Brightness Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Prohibition Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141 Specifying sensor to be connected by IP address . . . . . . . 3-12
Setting items for the detection window settings . . . . . . . . . 4-26 Specify Master Color/Master Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Setting items for the Diameter tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98 Spread lens attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Setting items for the EdgePixels tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58 Spread lens attachment for IV2-G150MA (OP-87902) . . . 11-9
Setting items for the Hi-Sp.Adj tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123 Stabilizing by correcting for misaligned target position . . . 6-22
Setting items for the OCR tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130 Stabilizing Learning Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Setting items for the Outline tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51 Stabilizing the Color Area/Area/Color Average/
Setting items for the Pitch tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114 Brightness Average/Color Prohibition/Brightness
Setting items for the Position Adjustment tool . . . . . . . . . . 4-84 Prohibition Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Setting items for the Width tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90 Stabilizing the Diameter tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Setting [List of NG Sensor Occurrences] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Stabilizing the EdgePixels tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Setting of the Position Adjustment Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85 Stabilizing the High-Speed Position Adjustment . . . . . . . . 6-23
Setting range of the Output Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149 Stabilizing the Judgment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Settings after initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30 Stabilizing the judgment process
Settings for disabling outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33, 4-53, 4-86 by taking a clear image of the target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Settings for the Trigger Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Stabilizing the OCR tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Settings Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Stabilizing the Outline tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Settings Navigator screen and operation flow . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Stabilizing the position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Settings the position adjustment window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21 Stabilizing the Width/Edge/Pitch tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Setting the Color Area/Area tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65 Starting an Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Setting the Color/Brightness Average Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75 Starting the Settings Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Setting the Color Prohibition/Brightness Prohibition Tool 4-143 Status Gauge Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Setting the connection destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 STATUS indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23
Setting the Diameter tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99 Status Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Setting the EdgePixels tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59 Stylus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Setting the Edge tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107 Stylus (OP-88352) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Setting the Extended Functions of the Sensor . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Supplying power to the sensor amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Setting the Hi-Sp.Adj tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125 Switching and Terminating the Sensor to be Connected . 3-14
Setting the Image Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Switching the Sensor to be Connected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Setting the network address of the control panel . . . . . . . . 3-8 Sync Destination (SNTP server) Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Setting the NG Hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Sync settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

A Setting the OCR tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132

Setting the Outline tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Setting the Output Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Setting the Pitch tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115

Setting the sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33, 4-54, 4-87
Setting the status conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
Setting the transfer conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16, 9-3
Setting the transfer destination folder and file names 8-17, 9-5
Setting the Trigger Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9, 4-11
Setting the Width tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
Setting to the Factory Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Setting up the FTP data transfer function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Setting Up the SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Setting up the SD card data transfer function . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Shade Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
Shortening the imaging processing time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Shortening the Processing Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Shortening the processing time of each tool . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30

A-36 IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel)

 Index

T W
Testing data transfer via FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Wall mounting adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Time zone Settings (Time offset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Wall mounting adapter (OP-88349) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Tool Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57, 4-62, 4-73, 4-83, 4-97, 4-105, Web Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
4-113, 4-122, 4-140, 4-148 What should be done in the following case . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Tool settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 When connecting to the sensor via network connection . . 7-30
Total Status Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152 When directly connecting with a sensor (1 unit) . . . . . . . . 7-28
Touch Panel Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35 When directly connecting with multiple sensors
Touch panel protection sheet (OP-88351) . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 (2 units or more) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Touch Screen Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34 When NPN output is selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Transferring Judgment Results or Judged Images When PNP output is selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
to an SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 When reading dot characters from an IJP (ink jet printer)
Transferring the settings backed up is not stable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
n the USB memory to the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 When screws are secured from the sensor head . . . . . . . . 2-3
Transverse mounting bracket for IV2 series . . . . . . 1-9, 11-10 When screws are secured from the wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Trigger Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 When the text or date on the object cannot be read . . . . . 6-26
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7 When the window position after position correction is
Turning on the power and starting operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 misaligned and not stable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Types of tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 When unwanted text or date are read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
When using the adjustable bracket for IV2 series
U (OP-87910) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
When using the transverse mounting bracket for IV2
Unmounting from the wall mounting adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
series (OP-87909) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Upper Limit Settings . . . 4-61, 4-70, 4-93, 4-101, 4-110, 4-117
When using the vertical mounting bracket for IV2 series
USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
(OP-87908) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
USB memory (1GB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
White Balance (for color type only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
USB memory folder composition and file naming rules . . . . 8-9
Width Extraction Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
Using the Auto Brightness Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Width tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Using the control board mounting adapter (OP-88350) . . 11-12
With polarizing filter attachment for IV2 series
Using the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
(OP-87899)/
Using the digital zoom function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
polarizing filter attachment for IV2-G300CA
Using the dome attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
(OP-87900)/
Using the Dome Attachment (IV2‑GD05/IV2‑GD10) for
polarizing filter attachment for IV2-G600MA
IV2 series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
(OP‑87901) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Using the PC software “IV2-Navigator” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Using the polarizing filter attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Using the polarizing filter attachment (OP‑87899/OP-
87900/OP-87901) or spread lens attachment (OP-87902) . 2-6
Using the program functions (changing over) . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
When [Program Switching Method] is set to [External
Input] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
When [Program Switching Method] is set to [Panel/PC/

A
Networks] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Using the spread lens attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Using the wall mounting adapter (OP-88349) . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Utility tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

V
Vertical mounting bracket for IV2 series . . . . . . . . . 1-9, 11-10
Voltage input (When PNP output is selected) . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel) A-37

 Copyright notice

Copyright notice

/*
* Copyright (C) 2017 Texas Instruments Incorporated - http://www.ti.com/
*
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
*
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the
* distribution.
*
* Neither the name of Texas Instruments Incorporated nor the names of
* its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived
* from this software without specific prior written permission.
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
* "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
* LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
* A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
* OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
* LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
* DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
* THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
* (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
* OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
*/

libjpeg
Copyright © 1991-2012, Thomas G. Lane.
This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
This software includes work that is distributed under the Apache License 2.0 and that was modified by KEYENCE.

A-38 IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel)

 STLport

STLport

License Agreement
Boris Fomitchev grants Licensee a non-exclusive, non-transferable, royalty-free license to use STLport and its
documentation without fee.
By downloading, using, or copying STLport or any portion thereof, Licensee agrees to abide by the intellectual property
laws and all other applicable laws of the United States of America, and to all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement.
Licensee shall maintain the following copyright and permission notices on STLport sources and its documentation
unchanged :
Copyright 1999,2000 Boris Fomitchev
This material is provided "as is", with absolutely no warranty expressed or implied. Any use is at your own risk.
Permission to use or copy this software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided the above notices are
retained on all copies. Permission to modify the code and to distribute modified code is granted, provided the above
notices are retained, and a notice that the code was modified is inclauded with the above copyright notice.
The Licensee may distribute binaries compiled with STLport (whether original or modified) without any royalties or
restrictions.
The Licensee may distribute original or modified STLport sources, provided that:
yyThe conditions indicated in the above permission notice are met;
yyThe following copyright notices are retained when present, and conditions provided in accompanying permission
notices are met :
Copyright 1994 Hewlett-Packard Company
Copyright 1996,97 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems, Inc.
Copyright 1997 Moscow Center for SPARC Technology.

Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee,
provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
supporting documentation. Hewlett-Packard Company makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose.
It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.

Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee,
provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear
in supporting documentation. Silicon Graphics makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is
provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.

Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee,
provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
supporting documentation. Moscow Center for SPARC Technology makes no representations about the suitability of this software for
any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.

IV2 Series User’s Manual (Control Panel) A-39

Revision history

Revision history Edition number Revision details

July, 2019 1st edition

September, 2019 Revised 1st edition Edition for version R1.1

March, 2021 Revised 2nd edition Edition for version R1.3

 WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS

(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year
from the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models or samples were used
merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to represent that the Products would
necessarily conform to said models or samples. Any Products found to be defective must be shipped to KEYENCE
with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered to KEYENCE for inspection and examination. Upon examination by
KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole option, will refund the purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any
Products found to be defective. This warranty does not apply to any defects resulting from any action of Buyer,
including but not limited to improper installation, improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification,
misapplication and mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness, moisture, vibration or
outdoors air. Components which wear are not warranted.
(2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products. They are only suggestions, and it
is Buyer’s responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyer’s intended use. KEYENCE will not be
responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products.
(3) The Products and any samples (“Products/Samples”) supplied to Buyer are not to be used internally in humans, for
human transportation, as safety devices or fail-safe systems, unless their written specifications state otherwise. Should
any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in any way, KEYENCE assumes no responsibility, and
additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and hold KEYENCE harmless from any liability or damage whatsoever
arising out of any misuse of the Products/Samples.
(4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS, ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
KEYENCE AND ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF
INFORMATION, LOSS OR INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS, THE COST OF
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS, SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY MATTER ARISING
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS, EVEN IF KEYENCE OR
ONE OF ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS ADVISED OF A POSSIBLE THIRD PARTY’S CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OR
ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST BUYER. In some jurisdictions, some of the foregoing warranty disclaimers or damage
limitations may not apply.

BUYER’S TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS:

If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a third party, Buyer must provide such
third party with a copy of this document, all specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets and written information provided
to Buyer pertaining to the Products/Samples.

E 1101-3
Copyright (c) 2020 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved. 244061GB 2031-2 867GB Printed in Japan